JP2020062561A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 1 includes a start pocket 1153 capable of receiving a game ball driven onto a game area 1100. When a jackpot is acquired by a lottery corresponding to ball entry into the start pocket 1153, a game is permitted so as to play a jackpot game. However, in the Pachinko machine 1, when the lottery corresponding to the ball entry into the start pocket 1153 is held, the game is permitted so as to play a jackpot game with a probability of nearly 100% regardless of whether the jackpot is acquired.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 98

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as “pachinko machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a hit game is performed in which a player can win many prizes when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  For example, in the game machine described in Patent Document 1, when a game ball enters the starting opening, a winning lottery is performed with a predetermined winning probability as a chance to execute a winning game. At this time, the decorative pattern is variably displayed on a predetermined display device for a predetermined change time. Then, when a predetermined variation time has elapsed, when the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing that the winning is won, a winning game in which many prizes can be won by the player is performed. . It should be noted that after the winning game is played, it can be controlled to an advantageous gaming state in which the probability of winning is high.

JP, 2008-022870, A

  According to the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when a winning is obtained by a winning lottery corresponding to the entry of the gaming ball into the starting opening, a winning game is performed in which many prizes can be won by the player. However, even if you are in an advantageous game state where the probability of winning is high, if you can not win for a long time, you may feel disbelief in the winning lottery, which reduces the enjoyment of the game. I'm worried.

  The present invention has been made in view of these circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

Means 1: launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A movable receiving port, which is allowed to receive a game medium when a predetermined movable member operates,
When a game medium is received in the movable reception port, a winning process executing means capable of executing a winning process that enables a game to occur with a big hit game with a probability of approximately 100%,
Advantageous game continuation control means for controlling such that an advantageous game state can occur with a predetermined occurrence probability after a big hit game occurs through the award processing by the award processing execution means,
A confirmation process holding means for holding the confirmation process by the confirmation process execution means for a predetermined upper limit number of times until the execution condition is satisfied, and retaining the same.
Every time the winning process held by the winning process holding means is exhausted, there is a special game situation in which a big hit game can occur with a probability of approximately 100% regardless of the game state. When the winning process is digested while the game is in the advantageous game state, the winning process by the winning process execution means is newly suspended for the time required to finish the game according to the corresponding winning process. An add-on game control means capable of executing control to provide an add-on game that can be added as a state,
A normally open entrance that is always allowed to receive the game medium,
When a game medium is received in the normally open reception port, a low probability process executing means capable of executing a low probability process in which a big hit game occurs only with a relatively low probability,
Low-precision processing holding means for holding the low-precision processing by the low-precision processing executing means for a predetermined upper limit number of times until the execution condition is satisfied and holding the low-precision processing.
The additional game control means,
If the advantageous game state occurs under the game situation in which the winning process is not put on hold and the low certainty process is put on hold, a game according to the winning process is played. Having a means capable of executing a control to provide a super-addition game in which the winning process by the winning process executing means is newly added as a pending state in a time longer than the time required for digestion A gaming machine characterized by.

  According to the above configuration, there is a special game situation in which a big hit game can be generated with a probability of approximately 100% regardless of the game state each time the winning process in the suspended state is exhausted. Since the game will be created, the sense of trust in the game will be greatly enhanced, and the decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

  Moreover, according to the above-mentioned configuration, as the number of winning confirmation processes that are put on hold is reduced and the situation becomes unfavorable for the player, the winning process is newly put on hold when the above winning addition game is provided. Since the number that can be added as is increased in consideration of the above-mentioned predetermined upper limit holding number, it is possible to increase the reversibility from a disadvantageous situation even though the game content of the on-ride game itself is the same. Become.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, if the favorable gaming state occurs in the gaming situation where the winning process is not put on hold and the low certainty process is put on hold, the winning process is performed. It has been decided to provide a super-addition game in which a game can be played so that it can be easily added as a new hold state. That is, in this case, for example, at the first occurrence of the advantageous game state (during transition control from the normal game state to the advantageous game state), the first game privilege using the suspended game (low probability process) in the normal game state is given. Will be able to.

  Regarding the time required for digesting the game according to the winning process, the winning process does not necessarily have to be set to a long time such that the expected value of the number added as a new pending state exceeds 1. May be set as a short time so that it is difficult to add as a new hold state. In other words, when the winning process is digested in the advantageous game state, it is sufficient that the chance of adding a new winning process as a suspended state by the amount of time required for digesting the game according to the winning process occurs even though it is small.

It is a perspective view showing the state where the main body frame was opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment, and the door frame was opened with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the back of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame which constitute a pachinko machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which constitute the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. FIG. 6 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of an upper shaft support fitting of a main body frame and an upper support fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the view of (A) seen from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for explaining the relation between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a rear view of an upper support metal fitting part for explaining an operation of a lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right back of a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at a door frame base substrate cover and a wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from the back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing of a left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emission aspect of the left side decoration unit with a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and looked at the upper decoration unit from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and saw the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the plate unit in a door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the site | part of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the operation unit as disassembled and seen from the lower right front side. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state where the press operation part in the operation unit was pressed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as disassembled and seen from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device as disassembled and seen from the rear. (A) It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit in the door frame and which was seen from the front, and (B) is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the foul cover unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view shown in the state where the front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit. It is a rear view of a ball feeding unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the front after disassembling, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear with the rear case removed. (A) is a plan view of the tamperproof member in the ball feeding unit, (B) is a front view of the tamperproof member, (C) is a perspective view of the tamperproof member as seen from the front, and (D). FIG. 7 is an explanatory view showing the action of the fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which cut | disconnects and shows a door frame in the up-down direction substantially center. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a body frame. It is a left side view of a body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen from the back. It is a rear view showing a relation among a payout passage, a payout motor, and a payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the falling path of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening-and-closing unit in a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen after. It is a perspective view explaining an operation of a standing wall portion of a power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. (A) is a front view of the emission power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fastening mechanism in a back cover, and was seen from the back side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main frame as seen from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame which are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and looked at the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment. It is a front view which expands and shows the principal part of a game board. It is the perspective view which saw the winning a prize unit in the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the winning a prize unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the winning a prize unit for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the winning a prize unit for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit of a winning a prize unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the attacker unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the attacker unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the variable starting mouth unit of the winning a prize mouth unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the variable starting port unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the variable starting port unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the variable starting port unit and was seen after. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the starting opening door member of the variable starting opening unit retracted from the upper side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the starting opening door member of the variable starting opening unit advanced from the upper side. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the accessory unit of a winning opening unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the accessory unit from the back. (A) is a front view of an accessory unit, (b) is an AA sectional view in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the accessory winning hole unit of the accessory unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the accessory winning opening unit and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the V winning opening unit of the accessory unit, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which looked at after disassembling the V winning opening unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the receiving part of the rotary body of a V winning opening unit faces the receiving side from a front side, (b) shows the state which the receiving part of a rotating body faces the V winning opening side. It is explanatory drawing shown from the front side. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game ball on the right side of the game board. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state which the starting opening door member retracted in the variable starting opening unit from the front side, (b) is the game ball in the state where the starting opening door member advanced. It is explanatory drawing which shows a flow from the front side. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state which the starting opening door member retracted in the variable starting opening unit from the left front, (b) is the game ball in the state where the starting opening door member advanced. It is an explanatory view showing the flow from the left front, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game ball from the left front when the starting opening door member is retracting. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the variable starting opening unit concerning a modification from a front side, (b) shows the flow of the game ball in the state which the starting opening door member retracted in the variable starting opening unit concerning a modification. It is explanatory drawing shown from left front, and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the state which the starting opening door member advanced in the variable starting opening unit concerning a modification from left front. (A), (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the movement when two game balls are supplied in succession with respect to the variable starting opening unit concerning a modification. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game sphere at the time of being able to receive the prize winning hole in a prize unit, (b) is a V winning hole unit WHEREIN: The receiving part of a rotary body is a V winning hole It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball when facing the side from the front side. It is the figure which looked at the accessory winning opening and closing member from above. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a door frame base board, a peripheral side relay terminal board, an abnormal sound signal interception board, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of an abnormal sound signal interruption board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power failure. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of control processing of a special design. It is a flow chart showing a starting mouth winning process. It is the flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing of the special design. It is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process of the special symbol. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during change of a special symbol. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the small hitting game start processing of the special design. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the small hitting game processing of the special design. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the big hit game start processing of the special design. It is the flowchart which shows one example of the big hit game processing of the special design. It is a figure showing a distribution table of various random numbers provided for a special symbol lottery. It is a time chart which shows an example about the relationship between the open state of the winning a prize winning opening and the operating state of the rotating body (sorting device) when a small hit game (a disadvantageous small hit, an advantageous small hit) is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about an example of the normal control processing performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about an example of the gate part passage process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about an example of the normal design normal processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the processing procedure about an example of processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of 16ms steady-state processing performed every 16ms in sub main processing. It is a time chart which shows an example about the flow of the game when a game is advanced based on the playability of the pachinko machine 1.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. 1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, and an outer frame 2 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable and the front side is open. A box-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, into which a game ball T as a game medium is driven, and the front surfaces of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 are played. It is provided with a door frame 5 rotatably and axially supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the person side. On the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 is visible from the player side, and a game ball T arranged below the game window 101 are stored. It is provided with a dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5. ..

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example has an outer frame 2, a main body frame 3, and a door frame 5 each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and each of the left and right Of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably supported at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are supported by the outer frame 2 and the right ends of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 move to the front side to be in an open state.

  In this pachinko machine 1, in a front view, a game area 1100 into which a game ball T is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and the pachinko machine 1 projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and two lower plates 302 are arranged on the upper and lower sides. Further, a handle device 500 for a player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player handles the handle device 500 while the game balls T are stored in the upper plate 301. When is operated to rotate, the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the player can see the inside of the game area 1100, the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. It is not possible to insert a hand or the like into the game ball T, the obstacle nail G (see FIG. 98), the various winning holes, the accessory, etc. in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the lateral direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13 are provided, and the connecting members 14 form the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (rectangular shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and are substantially vertically centered at the left and right ends, and are vertically arranged. An engaging cutout portion 15 is provided that penetrates through and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In addition, a mounting step portion 10a that is recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support metal fitting 20 described later is mounted on the mounting step portion 10a. It is like this.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material having a constant cross-sectional shape (for example, an aluminum alloy), the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward at the rear end portion. The projection 16 having a cavity that penetrates in the up-down direction (extrusion direction) is provided to enhance the strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 108). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall, a worker's The pachinko machine 1 becomes a finger rest so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held, and the design of the appearance can be improved. Note that, for convenience, in some drawings, a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. The plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other. And a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that can be inserted and engaged in the engaging cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been done.

  In this connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is the engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state in which the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 while being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate It is adapted to be fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. By screwing into the vertical piece 18, the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protrusion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like this. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 and has a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the inner side surfaces of the lower ends of the side frames 12 and 13. The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the four connecting members 14 connect the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 to each other. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of this example is fixed to the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame board 10, and is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame board 12 so as to face the upper support fitting 20. And a reinforcing metal member 22 arranged so as to support the lower surface of the lower metal support member 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and fixed to the front surface of the metal reinforcing member 22. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 in an openable and closable manner.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a supporting projecting piece 20b projecting from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front side of the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a supporting projection. A support hook hole 20c formed by cutting out from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a left side frame that hangs downward from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-like hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14) and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the supporting hook hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support metal fitting 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

  In the upper support fitting 20, the strength of the supporting projection piece 20b is enhanced by the hanging wall 20e that hangs from the outer edge of the supporting projection piece 20b, and the details of the supporting projection piece 20b will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support protrusion 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side (the right side) on the opposite side where the hanging wall 20e is not formed to the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a placed and fixed on the reinforcing fitting 22 and a vertical fixing piece fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12 rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a. 21b, a plate-shaped supporting protrusion 21c protruding from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the front of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin-like protrusion protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the supporting protrusion 21c. And a support protrusion 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the body frame 3 can be easily pivotally supported so that it can be freely opened and closed.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (Fig. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are used as hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when closing the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are disengaged by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Further, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal member 22. The guide plate 26 is for guiding the main body frame 3 smoothly when closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably attached and fixed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the supporting projecting piece 20b is supported by the rivet 28. It is rotatably supported by the shaft. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a protruding forward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from a position pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation portion 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. And an arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operating portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as it moves away from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (B) and FIG. 15, in this lock member 27, in the state of being supported by the supporting projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip abutting portion of the elastic piece 27c is the hanging wall. The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner side surface of the support hook hole 20c so as to close the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Is not closed, and a space into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the front space part of the support hook hole 20c. .

  In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the stopper portion 27a of the stopper portion 27a is formed. The state where the tip side faces the stop hanging portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f, and it is in a state of abutting. In the normal axial support state, the axial support pin 633 and the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a located in the distal end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c that is formed by bending, respectively. The centers are offset from each other in an oblique direction and face each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633, which supports the heavy body frame 3, is in contact with the tip portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is provided. Since almost no load is applied to the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a from the above, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the stopper 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d at the tip thereof, when the operating portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27, the lock member 27 smoothly rotates. Has become. Further, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the axial support pin 633 acts on the arcuate tip surface 27d by acting force F in the direction in which it is removed along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the acting force F is A component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip surface 27d (the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d), and one side of the shaft support pin 633 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, and the direction of the component force F1 is directed to the center of the rivet 28 (rotation center of the lock member 27), the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is separated. A moment for rotating the tip end portion from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise direction in the drawing) does not act, and the shaft support pin 633 causes the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c to move. Keep it sandwiched between the inner surface and one side To. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and the elastic piece integrally formed of synthetic resin is used. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation of the piece 27c due to creep, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied to rotate the tip of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 in the direction (clockwise direction in the drawing) away from the support projection piece 20b, one side of the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is rotated. Is abutted against the stop hanging portion 20f and does not rotate in the direction of being further disengaged, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the supporting projection piece 20b.

  Even if the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate in shape, the tip end portion of the lock member 27 is directed to the outside of the supporting projection piece 20b at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 27 is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times, and the lock member 27 is locked. The present applicant has pointed out that even if the member 27 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. I'm confirming.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, a lower support metal fitting is provided in a main body frame pivotal support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame pivotal support fitting 644 (see FIG. 63) of the main body frame 3. It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. On such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16 (A), the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is brought into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 to be pushed in. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other, as shown in FIG. 16 (C). Therefore, the lock member 27 is biased by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out from the support hook hole 20c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16 (E), a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b and the operating portion 27b of the lock member 27 is rotated counterclockwise. By the rotation, the lock member 27 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the main body frame 3 is lifted to release the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded material of aluminum alloy), when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game arcade, it is necessary to fix the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined angle to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such work is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to easily nail the nails, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily applied to existing island equipment. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extruded material, it is possible to form the wall thickness while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right widths of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the insides of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be wide when viewed from the front, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. The game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large at the same time that the can be attached to the main body frame 3.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 that form the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is connected to the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since the inner frame is fastened in close contact with the inner member and the connecting member 14 is fastened with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 engaged with each other, the outer frame 2 can be assembled with high strength and is sturdy. It is designed so that it can have a rectangular shape. Further, when the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14 and then the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, Adjacent ball lending machine) can be attached closely.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a game frame 101 having a game window 101 in which the outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and the inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. It is provided with a left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery and an upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

  Further, the door frame 5 is a plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, an operation unit 400 attached to the center of the upper part of the dish unit 300, and a door penetrating through the dish unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving the game ball T, and the door frame base unit 100 which is arranged on the rear side of the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. The foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear surface, the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and the game window 101 closed on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. And a glass unit 590 attached thereto.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a game window 101 formed in a vertically long rectangular outer shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a vertically elongated substantially elliptical inner periphery. A frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged on the left and right outer sides of the lower end of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a speaker for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110. A bracket 132 and a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500, which is attached to a lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like outside the right side speaker 130 when viewed from the front. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can also hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or detached. It has become.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 covers the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower portion of the game window 101 with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction (open side) in rear view. ) Disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191. The handle device relay substrate 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100 and the rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192 are covered. The door frame is arranged on the opposite side of the handlebar relay substrate cover 193 and the firing cover 191 and the handle device relay substrate 192 with the center in the left-right direction sandwiched (on the right side from the center in the left-right direction (shaft support side) in rear view). A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body 110, a door frame base substrate cover 195 that covers the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a pivotally rotatably supported rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. A wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of a wiring cord 196 (see FIG. 28) that connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the rigidity of the whole is improved by fixing the reinforcing unit 150, which is a metal sheet metal assembled with rivets, to the rear side of the rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it is strong enough to support the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is also a peripheral control board provided in the game board 4 described later. The amplifier circuit is connected to the peripheral control board 4010 and amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and outputs the amplified acoustic signal to each speaker 130. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative units 430, 432 provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b provided on the operation unit 400, The wiring cord 196 connecting the 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300 and the like with the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4010 and the like is the right side (the axis) of the door frame base board 194 in a rear view. After being bundled together in the position of the (support side), the details will be described later, but it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends rearward, and the main side relay terminal board 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  The door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, and penetrates in the front-rear direction so that the inner shape is vertically long. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right inner edges are continuous, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. ing. In addition, in the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, a rectangular notch 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Are formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and the widths of the left and right side sides are such that an upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151, a shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body 110 in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area 1100 can be easily formed as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. It is like this.

  In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130, and the ball feeding unit 580 are mounted and fixed. For the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26), the ball feeding unit 580 that passes through the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 at the predetermined position in the front-rear direction and is stored in the upper tray 301 of the dish unit 300. And a handle for mounting the handle bracket 140 that is obliquely inclined so that the right (open side) end of the front surface that is disposed in the lower right corner in front view and bulges forward is retracted. The mounting portion 114, a wiring passage opening 115 that penetrates the handle mounting portion 114 in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position, and allows wiring from the handle device 500 to pass therethrough. Cylinder lock 1010 upper by being formed shorter extended cylindrical shape toward forward below the dollar mounting portion 114 is provided with an insertion possible Joana 116.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body 110 in rear view. From the board mounting portion 118 which is arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side) for mounting the door frame base board 194, and from the arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting portion 111 on the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101. The security cover mounting portion 119 for projecting rearward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180, and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side along the inner circumference of the game window 101 to the front side on the rear side. The glass unit supporting step 110a that can contact the outer peripheral edge of the front surface of the game window 101 and the glass unit locking member 190 that can be rotated rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101. Further comprises a, and two of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a door frame projecting piece 110c projecting rearward from a lower side thereof by a predetermined amount, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is an engaging groove 603 of the body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire will be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even in this case, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the pachinko machine 1 has an enhanced security function. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d that projects rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and fits into the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300 and the like on the front surface thereof. In addition, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has mounting portions 110g for mounting the speaker brackets 132 for mounting the side speakers 130 and mounting holes 110h (see FIG. 18 and the like) for mounting the side speaker covers 338 at appropriate positions, respectively. Has been formed.

  Further, in the door frame base main body 110, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting portion 118, the lower dish ball supply port 310g and the foul cover unit 540 of the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, are provided. A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Further, the door frame base body 110 has a shallow dish-shaped crime prevention recess 120 formed on the front side thereof above the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 and recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A crime prevention member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the crime prevention recess 120 from the front side. The security member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which a front side is opened by bending a metal plate. As a result, in order to perform a fraudulent act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, it is possible to prevent a hole from being made from a joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 with a thin drill or the like. The crime prevention member 121 can prevent it and prevent fraudulent acts.

  Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 have an intersection point of their central axes in a front view from a center of the game area 1100 by a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1). 0.5 m) is obliquely fixed so that a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can receive sound most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 is mainly configured to output a sound in the mid-high range, and is arranged at a position separated from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction as much as possible, and the left and right sides are arranged. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output sounds with a high sense of stereo.

  The outer periphery of each of the side speakers 130 is sandwiched between the substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and the speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 arranged on the rear side, so that the door frame is closed. It is adapted to be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side opened, and the rear side of the rear side has a vertical direction. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly lower than the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the lateral direction and has an I-shaped cross section, as shown in FIGS. , Made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three upper and lower in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, an end portion on a side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled is vertically aligned with a step 195a on a rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. Although not shown in detail, the wiring holding member 197 is rotatably supported around the extended shaft, and the wiring holding member 197 is rotated by the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the step portion 195a.

  This wiring holding member 197 has a wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface thereof, and is bundled in a predetermined pair in the holding holes 197a which are paired up and down. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It is pushed forward by the portion and rotated in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Accordingly, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. Then, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is in a state of being folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 smoothly rotates so that the free end side moves in the direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is developed so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported moves the door frame base substrate cover 195 so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is rotatably supported on the rear surface and part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be laterally folded and unfolded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, and the like due to being pinched or pinched.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is made of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when force is applied via the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to make it difficult to shake in the vertical direction, and it is possible to surely fold the wiring cord 196 in the lateral direction to prevent a problem from occurring.

  Furthermore, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 creates a bridge between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring 196 Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. When the wiring 196 hangs down, the wiring 196 is caught by another member and is disconnected. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a problem that the door frame 5 cannot be closed or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, etc. as the main body side electric device and the door side. Each decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432 as an electric device, speaker 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360 Handle device 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 is rotated even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Since the force can be released by the wire, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from being pulled and broken, or the connector from coming off. it can. Further, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent in accordance with the rotation of the wiring holding member 197, a conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2009-213675) is used. The wiring 196 does not slide as in the case of), and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197a penetrating through the wiring holding member 197 arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The held binding band 198 can be prevented from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and the wiring 196 together with the binding band 198 can be reliably prevented from dropping from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side that pivotally supports the door frame 5, as described above, the wiring holding member 197 causes the wiring 196 to move the wiring 196. Since it is possible to favorably prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by being guided, the main body frame 3 in which the strength and rigidity of the side edge of the door frame 5 which is pivotally supported is increased. The door frame 5 can be used as the pachinko machine 1 having a high crime prevention property against fraud.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the projecting ridges projecting at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 extends, the wiring holding member 197 is wired by the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. It is possible to surround the three sides of 196, and it is possible to easily hold the wiring 196 along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with the protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 can be prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

  Further, the length from the base end to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the body frame 3 in the wiring 196 extends. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member. Since the pantograph-shaped link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring for opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be smoothed, the opening and closing work can be facilitated, and an unnecessary force is exerted on the wiring 196, etc. to cause a problem such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wiring 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the tip side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted when the door frame 5 is closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the body frame 3, The wiring holding member 197 is provided with a stepped portion 195a, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since the wiring holding member 197 is housed in the portion 195a, the wiring holding member 197 can be almost prevented from protruding from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and The wiring 196 can be compactly assembled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being caught by another member and prevent a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is in the closed state, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), it is possible to easily rotate the wiring holding member 197 by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5. It is possible to surely achieve the effect described above. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. Can be made larger to hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100, and the pachinko machine 1 having the large game board 4 capable of strongly attracting the interest of the player. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 that extends outward in the right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) protrusions that project into the tubular portion 141 and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110. Although illustration is omitted, the shaft of the tubular portion 141 is substantially aligned with the wiring passage port 115 when attached to the handle attaching portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match each other. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted into and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as not to rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 that is inclined, so that the shaft of the tubular portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes forward when viewed from the front. The shaft of the handle device 500, which is supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state, is also inclined in the same manner.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body, as shown mainly in FIGS. 25 and 26. The shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 attached along the rear surface of the shaft supporting side of 110, the open side reinforcing metal plate 153 mounted along the rear surface of the opening side peripheral part of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110 It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 that is attached along the back surface of the lower side of the game window 101, and they are fastened to each other with screws or rivets to form a rectangular shape.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in an upper surface and a lower surface thereof on upper and lower ends of a shaft supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155, 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal support 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side. It can be opened and closed freely.

  Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially equal to the lateral width dimension of the door frame base body 110. A lower bent protrusion 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent protrusion 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) in front view of the upper long side edge. , A vertical bending protrusion 161 that is bent rearward and extends in the vertical direction at the center of the upper long side edge. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bent protrusion 159, the upper bent protrusion 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bending projection piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the rear surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is locked by the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a cutout 162 that substantially corresponds to the cutout 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 has open side outward bending protrusions 163 bent rearward on both sides of a long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154. The opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 is provided so that the opening-side inner bending protrusion 164 extends rearward longer than the opening-side outer bending protrusion 163 as shown in the figure. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000, which will be described later, is provided at the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft-supporting-side protruding piece 166 that extends rearward at the outer end of its long side and is open to the outside on the shaft-supporting side (FIG. 108). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending protrusions 167 that are bent rearward on both sides of the long sides thereof.

  The shaft-supporting-side reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only to the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft supporting portion 156 and the lower shaft supporting portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, so that If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing metal plate 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, which is illegal. Although it may be easier to perform the action, the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example is provided with the shaft-supporting-side U-shaped protruding piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft-supporting-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The shaft-support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is hard to bend. In addition, the U-shaped projection piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 is configured such that the front end piece 952b of the side crime prevention plate 950 of the body frame 3 described later is inserted into the C-shape (FIG. (See 108), it is possible to prevent the insertion of a tool, prevent only the shaft-supporting side reinforcing metal plate 152 from bending, and improve the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function of covering the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent illegal tools from entering the game board 4. As shown in the drawing, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. Of the contact concave portion 181 which is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153 and whose upper side portion is formed in an arc shape. And a crime prevention rear protrusion 182 protruding rearward along the upper end. Further, at the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, there are provided crime prevention rear end projections 183 projecting rearward along the end shape. Note that the rear-end crime prevention end projection 183 on the right side (the pivotal support side) in the rear view is extended to the rear side longer than the rear-end crime prevention end projection 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, a crime prevention front protrusion 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the crime prevention front protrusion 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 protruding forward is provided at the lower end of the.

  In the security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in front view is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) is mounted on the plate. By mounting it on the security cover mounting portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably mounted on the back side of the door frame 5. Although the detailed illustration is omitted in the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, the crime prevention front projection 184 is adapted to be fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 contacts the vertical bending protrusion 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the crime-preventing rear projecting piece 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail fixed to the game board 4, and the open side half thereof is a front configuration. The member 1110 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118 of the inner rail. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool is attempted to enter the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be blocked by the crime prevention post-projection piece 182 inserted under the inner rail.

  The crime prevention cover 180 can cover the lower part of the front surface of the guide passage for the hit ball formed by the outer rail and the inner rail with the back surface of the crime prevention cover 180 closed. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the ball hitting the glass plate 594 that flies or reverses the passage portion.

  Thus, in this example, the security cover 180 covers the lower rear outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are connected from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if an attempt is made to carry out a fraudulent act on the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the intrusion of the tool, and the fraudulent act. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be made more safe against such problems.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 of the door frame base unit 100 are provided with a fitting portion 190a that is rotatably fitted to a locking member attachment portion 110b that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a retaining screw at the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  Although not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward on the rear side, and this ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a fingerhold when operating.

  The firing cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 and the door frame base substrate cover 195 are respectively fixed to predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110. When the firing cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feeding unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The front surface of the hitting ball launching device 650 attached to the body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. As shown, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the inside is the game window 101. Along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, the outer side is linearly formed along with the arc shape. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 forming an outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and having a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210. A right side upper decorative substrate 214, which is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from approximately the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and on which a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) are mounted, and a side inner on the lower side Rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 and lower right side decorative substrate 216 which are arranged below the substantially center in the vertical direction of the lens 212 and on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted. The right ring that is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the decorative board 214 on the right side. An upper decorative board cover 218 and a right side lower decorative board cover 220 that covers the rear side of the right lower lower decorative board 216 and is attached to the side lens 210 and the side decorative frame 202 so as to sandwich the right lower lower decorative board 216 are provided. ing.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged on the front side of the side lens 210 and the side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210, and is arranged at a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is omitted. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 radially extending around the center, a side upper inner lens 206 arranged between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 An inner lens bracket 208 for attaching to the 212 and an upper right speaker 222 attached to the side upper inner lens 206 are provided.

  In this right side decoration unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

  Although not shown in detail, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surface of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the side upper inner lens 206, 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Further, the front surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right-side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right-side decorative unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b. In addition, the decoration boards 214, 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are respectively connected to the peripheral control substrate 4010, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control substrate 4010. , 216b can be made to emit light as appropriate so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

  As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of the present example has a right end and an upper end formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, and the left end thereof is the game window 101. Is formed in a curved shape along the right outer periphery. The side lens 210 includes a circumferential lens portion 210a formed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a plurality of circumferential lens portions 210a divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extending substantially concentrically with the game window 101. And a radiation lens section 210b composed of a prism surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radiation lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend on the radiation centering on the lower center of the game window 101 in front view, and from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed so as to be recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

  In addition, the side lens 210 includes a side diffusion lens portion 210c that extends in the front-rear direction and is arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface. The side diffusing lens portion 210c can diffuse light from the upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right side decorative substrate 216 to the right and up and down of the pachinko machine 1 widely. Although not shown in detail, a plurality of through holes are formed in a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, so that the sound from the upper right speaker can be satisfactorily transmitted to the player side. It can be transmitted.

  The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the figure, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, the portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Although not shown in detail, the side inner lens 212 is formed with a plurality of small-diameter lenses in a mountain portion protruding forward in a wrinkle-shaped portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The side inner lens 212 is capable of irregularly refracting and irregularly reflecting light by means of a wrinkle-shaped portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses, and in cooperation with the side lens 210 arranged on the front side, the right side decoration unit 200 has a glittering appearance. At the same time, the perspective can be made to look strange and mysterious.

  The right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200 have a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on their surfaces and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The LEDs 214a and 216a having a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) are used, and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively irradiated. A narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used. The LEDs 214c on the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are red and green LEDs in this example.

  Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sounds in the mid-high range, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the side upper inner lens 206. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion that extends obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front, and on the back side of the upper end of the horn portion. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front.

  The upper right speaker 222 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper portion of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below by the horn portion of the side upper inner lens 206, and it may cause noise to other pachinko machines. It's becoming difficult. As with the side inner lens 212, the side upper inner lens 206 also has a wrinkle-shaped front surface, and a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in the ridges protruding forward in the wrinkle-shaped portion. Therefore, light can be irregularly refracted and irregularly reflected by the wrinkled portion and the plurality of small-diameter lenses.

  The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is adapted to be inserted and arranged in front of the radiation lens portion 210b which is recessed rearward of the side lens 210, and imitates a rugged rocky area by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210. Further, the side flash lens 204 can perform a radial light emission effect by the light emission of the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. As illustrated, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in front view, and the right side is the game window 101. The left side and the upper side are linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and are asymmetric with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has an elliptical shape arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200, and between the large window frames 242a. Frame-shaped side lower decorative frame 242 having a small window frame 242b, two large window frames 244a continuous to the upper side of the lower side decorative frame 242 and extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and arranged in a row, and a large And a frame-shaped upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b arranged between the window frames 244a.

  The left side decoration unit 240 includes the side flash lens 246, which is fitted into the small window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. In the side lens 250, a transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a supported from the rear lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 and fitted into the large window frames 242a, 244a from the rear side. Inner decoration member 251 provided with a plurality of slits 251a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens section 250a, and a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decoration member 251. A plurality of bands arranged in the center of the lower left and right center of the game window 101 A side inner lens 252 having a diffusing portion 252a formed by the lens, and a.

  In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface of the left side upper decoration. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 which is disposed below the substantially center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface thereof; A left side upper decoration substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decoration substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decoration substrate 256. Left side lower decorative board cover attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256 It is provided with a 60, a.

  Further, the left side decoration unit 240 includes a left upper speaker 262 arranged in front of the side inner lens 252 and in an upper right portion in front view, and a transparent member attached to the upper right portion of the front surface of the side inner lens 252 for supporting the upper left speaker 262. A diffusion portion formed by the upper speaker bracket 264 and a plurality of belt-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 at the upper right of the front view and extending radially around the lower left and right center. And an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, the side lower decoration frame 242, the side upper decoration frame 244, the left side upper decoration board cover 258, and the left side lower decoration board cover 260 are formed of a non-translucent member. The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (in this example, silver). Further, the side flash lens 246 is made of a translucent and milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are made of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

  In this example, both sides of each of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (small windows in the radial axial direction centering on the lower left and right center of the game window 101). Opening frames 242c, 244c are formed on both sides of the frames 242b, 244b with the side lower decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 penetrating in a notched state, and the small window frames 242b, 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear side of the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c in the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. .

  On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a, 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the transparent peripheral lens portion is closed. The inner decoration member 251 arranged on the rear side through 250a is visible from the player side. The diffusing portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, and light is irregularly refracted by the diffusing portion 252a to pass through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and then to the rear of the side inner lens 252. The side is not clearly visible. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. Etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side.

  Further, the front surfaces of the left-side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left-side decorative unit 240 is efficiently illuminated and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b. In addition, the decoration boards 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control board 4010, respectively, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control board 4010. Is appropriately emitted to allow the left side decoration unit 240 to emit light.

  The side lower decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is configured to extend vertically along the left outer periphery of the game window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the rear side open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a substantially elliptical small portion arranged between the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c which is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. Has been formed.

  The side lower decorative frame 242 is configured such that the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the lower side decorative frame 242 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, which correspond to each other.

  Further, the side upper decoration frame 244 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a substantially triangular shape in a front view, which is continuous from the upper end of the side lower decoration frame 242 and extends from the upper left side outer circumference to the upper outer circumference of the game window 101. It is formed to have a U-shaped cross section with an open side. The side decoration frame 244 extends along the game window 101 and penetrates in the front-rear direction with two large window frames 244a, and a small oval frame that is disposed between the large window frames 244a and penetrates in the front-rear direction. 244b, and an opening frame 244c that is arranged on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside the pachinko machine 1) and penetrates in the front-rear direction and is cut out to the side surface. ing.

  In the side decoration frame 244, the corresponding peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. 246 is adapted to be fitted from the rear side. That is, the side decoration frame 244 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, which correspond to each other. The upper side decoration frame 244 forms a continuous design with the lower side decoration frame 242 when assembled as the left side decoration unit 240.

  In this example, the lower side decoration frame 242 and the upper side decoration frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. 250 and the side flash lens 246 are highlighted.

  In addition, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size in which the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 are combined, and has a size extending from the center to the left on the left side and the upper side of the game window 101. There is. The side lens 250 has a shape in which the peripheral lens portion 250a fitted into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 from the rear side and the rear lens portion 250a is recessed rearward. And a radiation lens section 250b on which the side flash lens 246 is arranged on the front side. In the side lens 250, the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by one curved surface that is smoothly curved, and the radiation lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. The side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

  Further, the inner decoration member 251 of the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of each peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the drawing, the inner decoration member 251 has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and also in the width direction so as to be concentric with the center of the game window 101 as the center. There are multiple. Further, the inner decoration member 251 has a front surface formed with a plurality of slits 251 a in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. .

  Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251, has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffusion part 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decoration member 251 is inserted into each inner decoration member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion part 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of belt-shaped lenses radially extending around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface, and the inner direction in which the belt-shaped lenses extend in the front side. The decorative member 251 is configured to intersect (substantially orthogonal) with the extending direction of the slit 251a.

  In the side inner lens 252, the diffusing portion 252a can be seen from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251, but the light is diffused and refracted by the plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffusing portion 252a. The rear side cannot be clearly seen through the portion 252a. As shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion parts 252a, and light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

  The left-side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left-side decorative unit 240 are provided with a plurality of high-intensity color LEDs mounted on the surface thereof, and are large in size of the lower-side decorative frame 242 and the upper-side decorative frame 244. LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (circumferential lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) and are used. LEDs 254b arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c of the lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 (the radiating lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246), 256b has a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 6 °). °) it is used.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sounds in the mid-high range similarly to the side speaker 130, and is adapted to be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that projects obliquely forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. Then, the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper backside of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268, and the upper left speaker 262 is not visible from the player side in a front view. It has become. Further, the protection plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent the upper left speaker 262 from being mischievous and the cone of the upper left speaker 262 from being broken and an unauthorized tool being inserted into the pachinko machine 1. Has become. The upper left speaker 262 of the present example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the player below, and it is difficult for the other pachinko machines to make noise.

  Next, a characteristic light emitting effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 includes the side lens 250 having the curved transparent peripheral lens portion 250a that forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240, and the surface disposed on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a plated layer of metallic luster, and arranged in the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slits 251a. A left inner decoration substrate 254 and a left inner decoration substrate 256 on which a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion part 252a formed of a plurality of belt-shaped lenses and a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a arranged behind the side inner lens 252 are mounted. And (see FIG. 35 and the like). Thus, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are caused to emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion section 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated to the player side, so that the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be illuminated and decorated.

  By the way, the light emitted forward (on the side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and is emitted to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected by the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a and illuminates the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decoration member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected to the inner decoration member 251 side on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a is the surface of the inner decoration member 251. The light is reflected to the peripheral lens portion 250a side (on the front side), and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decoration member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and is emitted to the player side.

  At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, since the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decoration member 251, and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear surface side is converged, and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) is diffused, and the peripheral lens portion 250a has direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 and the peripheral light. The indirect light reflected by the front surfaces of the lens portion 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the respective shifted positions. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251 is diffused in a stripe shape and intersects with the extending direction of the slit 251a by the diffusion portion 252a formed by a plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252. It is diffused in the (substantially orthogonal) direction. Therefore, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights of different shades that extend in a direction longer than the width of the slit 251a and intersect the direction in which the slit 251a extends. As a result, it is possible to make a fantastic luminous decoration with a perspective (see FIG. 36).

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5 and is located between the upper end edges of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 on the center side. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decoration unit 280 has an annular center frame 281a that penetrates in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extension frame 281b that extends from the upper portion of the center frame 281a in a slender shape to the left and right, and tapers toward the tip. A front decoration member 281 provided with a frame-shaped lower extension frame 281c that extends from the lower portion of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes narrower toward the tip, and an upper extension frame 281b and a lower portion that are arranged on the rear side of the front decoration member 281. A transparent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a and a cylindrical shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282 while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a surface disposed behind the upper central lens 284. A plate-shaped diffusing lens 285 in which a plurality of fine prisms are formed, an annular lens supporting member 286 that holds the outer periphery of the diffusing lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the lens supporting member 286. And a light-shielding member 287 having a cylindrical portion 287a having a diameter substantially the same as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286, and arranged at a position corresponding to the inner side of the cylindrical portion 287a of the light-shielding member 287 arranged on the rear side of the light-shielding member 287. A plurality of LEDs 288a, and a plurality of LEDs 288b arranged at positions corresponding to the outside of the cylindrical portion 287a, and an upper central decorative board 288 mounted on the front surface.

  In addition, the upper decoration unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decoration member 281, the upper lens 282, the light blocking member 287, and the upper central decoration substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of units arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289. Of the upper side decorative substrate 290, a substrate cover 291 that covers the rear surface of the upper side decorative substrate 290 and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 289, and is attached to the lower rear portion of the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward. The mounting bracket 292, the upper lower cover 293 attached to the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and the lower side of the upper lower cover 293 have a large light-transmitting property and have a predetermined size. And an upper lower decorative cover 294 shaped in a shape.

  Further, the upper decoration unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decoration member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a having a rear end opened at the center in the left-right direction. A cover 295, a plate-like lid member 296 that closes the cutout portion 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decoration member 297 that is attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 when viewed from the front and shaped into a predetermined shape are provided. .

  In the upper decoration unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decoration member 281, so that the front decoration member 281 glitters by the light from the outside. The upper lens 282 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a central ring lens portion 282b facing the inside of the central frame 281a of the front decoration member 281 on the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and an upper extension of the front decoration member 281. The frame 281b and the extension frame lens portion 282c that faces the inside of the lower extension frame 281c. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of radially extending belt-shaped lenses are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b, and the extension frame lens portion 282c has a front surface centered on the axial center of the through hole 282a. A plurality of concentric circularly extending prisms are formed. As a result, light can be irregularly refracted by the plurality of prisms and the band-shaped lens of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

  The upper center lens 284 of the upper decoration unit 280 is made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper central lens 284 is formed in a spindle shape with a smooth front surface, whereas a plurality of concentric lenses is formed on the rear surface, and light can be irregularly refracted, so that the rear surface is clear. Is not visible to.

  Further, the upper central decoration substrate 288 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, respectively. The outer periphery of the upper central lens 284 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Further, the upper side decoration board 290 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface as full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281. Are arranged at positions corresponding to the respective frames. The upper side decoration substrate 290 can appropriately light the LEDs 290a to lighten and decorate the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decoration member 281.

[1-2E. Plate unit]
Subsequently, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. The dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is provided with the upper dish 301 and the lower dish 302 for storing the game balls T paid out from the prize ball device 740 described later, and is also stored in the upper dish 301. The game ball T can be supplied to a hitting ball launching device 650, which will be described later, via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the plate unit 300 of this example includes a plate unit base 310, which is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extends in the left-right direction, and a plate unit base 310. When the upper plate main body 312 and the upper plate main body 312 are covered with the plate-shaped upper plate main body 312 which is fixed to approximately the center of the front surface and which is open at the upper and rear sides and bulges toward the front on the left side (shaft support side), the front end is the front. The upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward, the upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the upper plate front portion An upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 disposed between the decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and a right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 are continuous with the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314. A dish upper right decorative member 319 on the cover, and a.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is attached to the lower side of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the left-right center to the lower surface on the right side, and a plate-like substrate mounting base 320 having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface, and is mounted below the substrate mounting base 320. And a top plate decorative substrate 322 having a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on its upper surface. By appropriately causing the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 to emit light, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 below the upper plate body 312, and the upper and the rear are opened, and the center in the left-right direction swells to the front in the front view and the front end extends to the center in the left-right direction. The dish-shaped lower tray body 324 is formed so as to become lower as it goes, and the center in the left-right direction fixed to the upper portion of the lower tray body 324 is bulged forward in the same manner as the lower tray body 324 and the front end is in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later at a portion that covers the lower edge front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right when viewed from the front. A lower dish cover 328 having a lock hole 328a facing it, and a right side of the lower dish cover 328 at the lower end of the lower plate cover 328 are decorated on the right side, and the upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower dish cover 328 is provided. A lower tray right side cover 330 provided with a lower opening 330b of the handle 500 is inserted from the front opening on the lower side of the upper opening 330a, and a.

  In addition, the plate unit 300 includes an obliquely extending lower plate upper left side cover 332 that covers the left side front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the left side front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and is disposed at the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332. Lower plate left lower side cover 334 having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, a protective cover 336 made of a metal plate which is configured to close the opening 334a of the lower plate lower left side cover 334 from the rear side, and which can transmit sound, A frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered by the upper plate front decorative member 316.

  Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left cover 332 are designed. A side speaker cover 338 having an opening 338a formed in a continuous shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an opening of the side speaker cover 338. A cover body 339 having a plurality of disc-shaped holes gently curved so as to close the 338a from the rear side and bulge to the front side.

  In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, the cover body 339 is not easily deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be used. As long as it can be protected. Further, the side speaker cover 338 has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. The cover body 339 is colored black.

  Further, in the dish unit 300, an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 for pulling out the game balls T stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the game balls T stored in the lower plate 302, which is attached to the lower surface of the plate, and the plate unit base 310, which is attached to the upper left side in a front view, is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6, not shown).

  The plate unit 300 of the present example constitutes the upper plate 301 capable of storing the game balls T by a part of the plate unit base 310, the upper plate body 312, the upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing the game balls T by a part of the plate unit base 310, the lower plate body 324, the lower plate top plate 326, the lower plate cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper edge extending in the left-right direction. It is equipped. A ball rental unit mounting portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and mounting the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner in a front view) and has an oblong rectangular shape which penetrates in the front-rear direction and an upper dish ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the up-down direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction below the opening 310c (generally in the height direction of the plate unit base 310) near the right end of the decorative portion 310a, and an upper plate. A pair of lower tray support portions 310e are provided immediately below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper dish ball supply port 310c, project forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to the intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support portion 310e arranged immediately below.

  Further, the dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e, and is fitted to the lower plate body 324 and the rear ends of the lower plate top plates 326 to form a horizontally elongated rectangular ring in a front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower tray ball supply port 310g which is arranged in the lower part to the right of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower tray support groove 310f and which penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It is provided with a notch portion 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which the game ball T can pass.

  The upper dish ball supply port 310c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the cutouts 101a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is adapted to communicate with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction when viewed from the front and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined lower in the front end direction in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper dish body 312. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball T.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper bowl supply port 310c is closed by the gaming balls T stored in the upper bowl 301, the gaming balls T paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540. However, since it is impossible to linearly exit from the upper plate ball supply port 310c into the upper plate 301 in the front, the paid game ball T comes into contact with the game ball T that closes the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Its rolling direction changes, and it is guided so as to roll in the guide recess 310j to the right when viewed from the front, and from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball T stored in the upper plate 301. Will be released. As a result, the game balls T can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game balls T close the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player manually holds the game balls T. It is possible to continue supplying (discharging) the paid out game balls T into the upper plate 301 without collecting, and the player feels annoyed when the game balls T are stored in the upper plate 301. It is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself to the driving operation of the game ball T or the game by the driven game ball T to prevent the interest in the game from being lowered, and at the same time, the game ball in the upper plate 301. It is possible to increase the storage amount of T.

  The upper bowl discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 has an opening 344a of the upper bowl removal base 344 of the upper bowl removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the intermediary. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward from the rear side penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, it is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h is provided in the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344.

  In this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with a widened portion 310k that widens to the left when viewed from the front. The front end of 310 g is widened in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball clogging from occurring early in the lower dish ball supply port 310g due to the game balls T in the lower dish 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and more The game ball T can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed such that the left side (the pivot side) from the center in the front view bulges forward, and the bottom surface is generally lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. There is. In the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312, the rear end of the shaft support side is near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310, and the rear end of the open side is the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls T, which are formed near the intermediate position in the up-down direction, respectively, are supplied to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) from the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It is supposed to be done.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 313 capable of contacting the game ball T from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 313 is electrically grounded (earthed) so that the static electricity charged in the game ball T can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, which will be described later, is installed and through which the upper plate ball removing button 341 is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape at the front end, which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate body 312. And an operation unit attachment portion 314c for attaching an operation unit 400 described later, which is formed in a step shape further lower than the decoration attachment portion 314b at a position in front of the upper plate body 312 at the center in the left-right direction. There is.

  The upper plate front portion decoration member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape that extends in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate front part decoration member 316 is formed in a smooth shape on the left side from the position to the right of the center in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces that are curved like a spindle, It is formed in a rugged shape. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate front decorative member 316 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by a plurality of curved surfaces, and is capable of irregularly refracting light. The rear side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decoration member 318 is arranged on the rear side of the left side smoothly formed portion of the upper plate front decoration member 316, and has a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 can be clearly seen from the player side through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 in the assembled state, while the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 can be clearly seen. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player's side, and the feeling of distance is not fixed.

  The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper plate upper right decoration member 319 has a surface formed by a plurality of curved surfaces that are curved in a spindle shape like the right side portion of the upper plate front decoration member 316. It is formed integrally with the right side portion, and the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper dish ball removing button 341 of the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 described later. Further, the upper plate upper right decoration member 319 has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface) thereof, which allows light to be diffused and refracted so that the player cannot clearly see the lower side. There is. In addition, the upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decorative member 319. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be appropriately emitted.

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that is fan-shaped in the front view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction, and the upper surface of the bottom plate 324a is formed to have the lowest center, and the center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front and side ends of the bottom plate 324a excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate body 324 is formed in a curved shape such that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest at the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a linear shape, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear portion of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plates 324c are inserted and supported in the lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is made of black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower dish side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a silver-colored plating layer on the surface thereof, which has a metallic feeling (a matte state such as sandblasted rather than a mirror surface). The lower plate side cover 330 has a plate-shaped portion that extends rearward from the lower end and forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. The lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3, and On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 is exposed from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

  Further, the lower plate upper left cover 332 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. Further, the lower plate left lower cover 334 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and extends rearward from the lower end to a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. Is provided with a plate-shaped portion. The opening portion 334a of the lower left bottom cover 334 is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of the speaker 821 provided on the main body frame 3 described later so that the sound from the speaker 821 can be transmitted to the player side. It has become. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower plate left lower cover 334 is made of punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed in a metal plate, and prevents an unauthorized tool from being inserted inside.

  In the plate unit 300 of this example, a bottom plate side cover 330 and a bottom plate left lower cover 334 close the bottom surface except the center in the left-right direction. The bottom surface between them is closed by a lower dish ball removing mechanism 340 described later.

  The upper bowl ball removal mechanism 340 in the tray unit 300 is provided with an upper bowl ball removal button 341 which is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper tray upper panel 314 so as to be able to move forward and backward, and an operation of the upper bowl ball removal button 341. And the operation piece 342 that is moved up and down by a greater amount than the up and down movement of the upper dish ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front surface side of the dish unit base 310, and the operation piece 342 is operably (rotatably) supported and also the dish unit base 310. Of the mounting base 346 mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 346 and the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346 that slides in the vertical direction and comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 described later. An upper plate ball removing slider 343 which is provided on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 and includes an upper plate ball removing slider 34. The an upper pan ball vent base 344 attached to the rear side of the vertical direction slidably supported to be countersunk unit base 310, and a.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 includes an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 and the upper bowl ball removing base 344.

  The upper bowl ball removing base 344 of the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper bowl ball discharging port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and, at the same time, communicates with the upper bowl ball discharging port 310d and opens toward the front 344a (Fig. 43), and the ball guiding flow channel 344b that guides the game ball T that communicates with the opening 344a on the back surface side of the upper bowl ball removing base 344 and that has passed through the opening 344a and then guides it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. (See FIG. 44), and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding flow path 344b, extending toward the right side (shaft support side) end in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. It is provided with a ball removing channel 344c that allows the playing game ball T to flow down.

  In the upper dish ball removing base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the sphere guiding flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a has a sphere of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is adapted to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feeding opening 113, and the game balls T stored in the upper tray 301 are transferred to the ball feeding unit. 580 can be supplied.

  In addition, the ball removal channel 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 communicates with the ball removal port 581b of the ball delivery unit 580 through the ball delivery opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guide channel 344b. In addition, the lower end extending to the pivotal support side communicates with the cutout portion 310i of the lower tray ball supply trough 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game ball T discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580. Can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removing channel 344c is closed by an upper plate ball removing channel cover 345.

  In this upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340, when the upper bowl ball removing button 341 is pressed downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also formed. Move down. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. By moving, the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 go from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removing base 344 and the ball guiding path 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball discharge port 581b to the ball discharge channel 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344, and from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged to.

  Note that the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the abutting piece 343a of the upper dish ball pulling slider 343, whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring, and therefore the ball pulling member 583. Even if the game ball T is vigorously supplied onto the partition part 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring urging the upper dish ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like. Can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball T can be prevented from bouncing back at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 is disposed between the lower dish side cover 330 and the lower dish left lower cover 334 below the lower dish body 324, and forms a lower plate central portion of the dish unit 300. The opening base 351 and the plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 and capable of opening / closing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 are rotated. And a lower plate ball removing slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removing base 351 slidably in the front-rear direction, and a lower plate ball removing button 354 attached to the front end of the lower plate ball removing slider 353. There is.

  This lower dish ball removal base 351 is provided with a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball removing hole 324b, and a shutter ball removing hole which is disposed in front of the closing portion 352a and which can substantially match the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and which penetrates in the up-down direction. 352b, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring 356 between the lower dish ball removing base 351 and the lower dish ball removing base 351 to close the lower dish ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a. ..

  Although not shown in detail, the opening / closing shutter 352 includes an abutment pin capable of abutting the lower dish ball removing slider 353, and the abutment pin abuts the lower dish ball removing slider 353. The closing plate 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b are rotated by the lower plate ball removing slider 353 so as to move rearward, or the lower plate ball removing slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring 356. Is able to.

  In addition, in the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 is substantially aligned with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. A holding mechanism 355 is further provided for holding the lower dish ball removing slider 353 in a predetermined position in order to hold it in the moving position.

  This lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removing button 354 has moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Therefore, the lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game balls T can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pushed rearward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide rearward, and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slides rearward. The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removing hole 352b move rearward against the biasing force of the coil spring 356.

  Then, as the open / close shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball removing hole 352b comes to overlap the lower plate ball removing hole 324b and the base ball removing hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower plate ball removing hole. Matching with 324b, the game ball T stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged below the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball removal hole 324b. It should be noted that when the lower dish ball removing slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removing hole 352b and the lower dish ball removing hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball removing slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355 to hold the slide. When the slide of the lower dish ball removing slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removing button 354 remains rearwardly retracted and the shutter ball removing hole 352b is opened. The game balls T held in the extraction hole 3324b are held, and the game balls T stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not continuously pressed.

  On the other hand, in the case of closing the lower dish ball removing hole 324b, when the lower dish ball removing button 354 in the retracted and opened state is further pushed rearward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower plate ball removing slide 353 to release the lower plate. The ball-sliding slide 353 is slidable, and the opening / closing shutter 352 is biased by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball-hole 324b. It rotates in the direction of moving to the direction (front) of the ball hole 324b. Then, as the open / close shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removing slide 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 is moved downward. Returning to the closed position that substantially coincides with the front surface of the dish cover 328 or the like, the game ball T can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  It should be noted that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the mechanism will be omitted.

  The ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a ball rental button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a loan remaining display portion 363 between the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362. This ball rental unit 360 is a dish unit in which a predetermined number of game balls T are pressed when a ball lending button 361 is pushed after inserting a cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to lend (pay out) to the upper tray 301 of 300, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the cash and the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the balance of the loan will be returned. ing. In addition, the remaining balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

  The ball lending unit 360 is adapted to be attached from the rear side to the ball lending unit attachment portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 which projects rearward from the rear surface and which mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  More specifically, the ball rental unit 360 includes a transparent front cover 365 that covers the front side of the loan remaining display portion 363, and a loan remaining display portion 363 arranged behind the front cover 365 and the ball rental button 361. And a ball rental unit substrate 366 (see FIG. 45) to which a switch that is operated by operating the return button 362 is attached, and a rear side of the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball rental unit substrate 366. And a rear cover 367 attached thereto. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 364.

  The ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball rental unit 360 is mounted has a circular button opening 310m facing the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362, and is formed between the button openings 310m. The transparent front cover 365 is provided with a rectangular display opening 310n closed by the cover 365 and projections 310o formed on the outer circumferences of the two button openings 310m and protruding forward, respectively. The lending balance display portion 363 arranged on the rear side is visible from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the protrusion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

  As shown in the figure, the ball rental unit 360 of this example has a ball rental unit attachment portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 arranged above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and has a front surface. It is arranged to face. Further, in the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball rental button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the dish unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362.

  In addition, the ball-renting unit 360 includes a protrusion 310o that protrudes forward (on the player's side) from the outer circumference of the ball-renting button 361 and the return button 362. Since the hand touches the protrusion 310o before touching the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent the 361, the return button 362, and the like from being erroneously operated.

  The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be used as a pachinko machine 1 having two storage plates and having a feeling similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine. The machine can be used as a pachinko machine, and even a new pachinko machine 1 (new model of pachinko machine) can reduce the anxiety and the like given to the player so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine for playing. Has become.

[1-2F. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 46 to 50. The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 according to the present embodiment is arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and the pressure that can be pressed by the player. The operation unit 405 is provided, and the operation of the player can be accepted or the dial operation unit 401 can be moved in accordance with the game state, and the player can only drive the game ball T into the game. Instead, it is possible to participate in the production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular driven unit connected to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that fixes the drive gear 412 to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation portion holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that supports the pressing operation portion 405 slidably in the vertical direction, and a pressing operation portion 405 disposed in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. It has a spring 418 that urges upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and the button support cylinder 416b can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and allows the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 to pass therethrough. And a lower cover 424 that is attached below the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covers the lower surfaces of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  The operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and has an opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c in the dish unit 300, and a plating which is arranged on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and is formed in a predetermined shape and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. An inner cover 427 provided with layers and a transparent surface cover 428 that covers the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

  Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass, and the dial operation portion 401 on the upper surface. , A pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the dial decoration board 430 having a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted thereon at the position corresponding to the ring and fixed to the lower side of the operation section holding member 416, and detecting the rotation of the dial operation section 401. 432b, a press detection sensor 432c that detects an operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface immediately below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decoration board 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation section holding member 416 by the board holding claws 416g of the operation section holding member 416.

  The dial operation part 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a light-transmissive material, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction, and an outer side from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and an outer cylinder portion 401c shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder. It mainly includes a collar portion 401d that extends annularly outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the collar portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operating portion 401 includes a coupling locking portion (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a, and the coupling locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, so that the dial operating portion 401 is locked. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protrusion 401f that protrudes toward the center from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401a at a position lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner tubular portion 401a. The protrusion 401f can come into contact with the step 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, which will be described in detail later. By abutting against the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) from further retracting into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 have their contact surfaces lowered toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. The inclined surface is formed so as to have a large contact area when they abut each other. Thus, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  The pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an upper end closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407 is provided. The button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating vertically is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and the light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is like this.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b extending downward from the lower portion of the outer periphery and protruding outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the locking claws 406b of the operation portion holding member 416 are provided. By locking with the locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button holding cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 is provided with an abutting portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) is prevented from rotating inside the button support cylinder 416b. In addition, a predetermined amount of a gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap causes the button body 406 to move at a predetermined angle. It can be rotated within a range.

  In addition, the button body 406 is provided with a pressure detection piece 406c extending downward from a position different from the lower portion of the outer periphery of the locking claw 406b and detected by the pressure detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432. The pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter below the substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than that on the upper side, and a step portion 407a is provided between the upper side and the lower side. Are formed. In the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405), the lower side of the step portion 407a is smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the upper side of the step portion 407a is the dial operation portion. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. Thereby, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner tubular portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operating portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation portion 405 are formed of a material having a light-transmitting ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 has a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, and has a circular ring-shaped sliding surface that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. The moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. You can do it.

  Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connection locking claws 410b that extend upward from the facing positions of the upper ends and project inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation part 401 are integrally rotatably connected by being locked with the connection locking part 401e of the inner cylinder part 401a.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detecting pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detecting pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detecting sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details of the rotation detecting pieces 410c will be described later. With the slit 410d formed between them, the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

  The drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, as shown in the figure, and is fixed so as to rotate integrally with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, the rotation speed, and the rotation angle. The dial drive motor 414 rotates the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial drive motor 414 can cause the drive gear 412 (rotating shaft) to rotate in the forward and reverse directions in small increments, whereby the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated. Further, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, it is possible to click the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to add a feeling.

  Further, the operation portion holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f (lock projection 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking the locking claw 406b of the button body 406). 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c for sending light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the bottom center of the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation portion 405). And the rotation detecting sensor 4 mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. 2a and 432b can pass through, an opening 416e which is pressed from above by a pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration substrate 432 through the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b in the up-down direction, and downward from the bottom. And a pair of substrate holding claws 416g for locking and holding the extension button decoration substrate 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is arranged in the button support cylinder 416b and forms a predetermined gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and locks the button. It further includes a plurality of contact portions that can contact the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button main body 406 from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the operation portion holding member 416 has a screw hole for fixing to the base member 420, a positioning boss for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, and the like at appropriate positions. Is equipped with.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be rotatably supported. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. .. A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated conical bottom surface of the button body 406. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy so that the operation unit 400 is unlikely to be damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates a lower recess 420b, which is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 can be fitted, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower recess 420b, and vertically penetrates the operation portion holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c which is arranged on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b with the opening 420a interposed therebetween and which is recessed downward at least for accommodating the driven gear 410 are provided. I have it. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f that opens downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e.

  In addition, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged above the upper concave portion 420c and a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g, which are different from the outside of the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for protruding the dial decoration board 430 to be mounted. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses for mounting the respective members, mounting holes, etc. at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

  The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after the operation portion holding member 416 is fitted and inserted into the lower concave portion 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. The operation portion holding member 416 can be supported by screwing the above into the operation portion holding member 416 through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the base member 420 has the upper end of the gear rail 416a slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, slightly above the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation member holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof that fits with a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424, which will be described later. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions with respect to each other. The board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 projects to a position above the driven gear 410 housed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 is configured to come into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 in the surface by mounting the dial drive motor 414 on the motor mounting portion 420d, and the heat from the dial drive motor 414 is attached to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be radiated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and has an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass, on its top plate. ing. The top cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation portion 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed so as to extend and has engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof. By engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portions 424b of the lower cover 424, The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 has a claw-shaped locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side of the pachinko machine 1) in the minor axis direction (front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1) and has its lower end protruding outward. I have it. The locking piece 422c can be locked with the upper plate front decoration member 316 of the plate unit 300. By locking the locking piece 422c with the upper plate front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from slipping upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  In the upper cover 422, the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 422a from below with the operation portion holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decorative substrate 430, the dial member 401, and the like attached to the base member 420. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass therethrough, it is possible to prevent the dial operation part 401 from coming off upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper side, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially matching the outer periphery of the upper cover 422, and the leg portion of the base member 420 is located at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the bottom portion. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that are engageable with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown in the figure, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that vertically penetrates through the center and allows the upper cover 422 to pass through, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a to attach the operation unit of the dish unit 300. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided.

  The operation unit 400 of this example is adapted to be attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, it is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached so that the lower surface thereof is slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover body 426 is elastically deformed when the is pressed or hit, so that the impact can be mitigated.

  In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attaching portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then, The structure is such that the inner cover 427 and the front cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover body 426.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation portion 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432 have a circumferential interval corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 that is 2.5 times the circumferential length of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. Thereby, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detecting piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of the present example can rotate the dial operation portion 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414, which will be described in detail later. . Further, the operation unit 400 causes the dial operation unit 401 to rotate in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using the stepping motor, or when the player rotationally operates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from turning intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward and reverse directions.

  Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 as shown in FIG. Since the 407 (pressing operation part 405) cannot be further retracted into the inner cylinder part 401e, the load applied to the pressing operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protruding part 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is hard to break.

  Further, in the operation unit 400 of the present example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small increments in a state where the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other. By repeating turning and reversing, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game or effect. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if a player or the like strongly hits the operation units 401 and 405, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely set for the player. In addition to being operable, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and it is possible to entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405 and prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation part 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation part 401, and if the pressing operation part 405 is strongly hit, the dial operation part 401 will be inevitably hit, and thus the operation part. The force of striking 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and it is possible to prevent the impact of hitting from being concentrated and prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Since it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 capable of withstanding a smash, it is possible to allow the player to freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405, entertain the effect using the operation units 401 and 405, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Door can be.

  In addition, the base member 420 of the operation unit 400 is housed in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300, and when the operation portions 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit with a shock or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 abuts the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 becomes the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the dish unit 300) causes an impact. Since the load can be received, it is possible to disperse impacts and the like from the operation units 401 and 405 and avoid concentration of the impacts and the like, and to improve impact resistance and load resistance by the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300. Can be increased.

  Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e protruding downward at a position away from the position supporting the operation portions 401 and 405, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even if the base member 420 is abutted against the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c and impacted by the operation portions 401 and 405, the leg portion 420e is not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 of the base member 420 are not provided. The part supporting the member is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, since the operation portion holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side holds the dial operation portion 401 so that a part of the dial operation portion 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view, the dial operation portion 401 is held. When the operation section 401 is struck from the upper side, even if the operation section holding member 416 holding the dial operation section 401 comes off the base member 420 and moves downward, the dial operation section 401 contacts the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and can favorably prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

  Further, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 arranged at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operation unit 401 is arbitrarily rotated (rotationally driven including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and the effect produced by the operation units 401 and 405 can be paid attention to, and the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit is operated. It is possible to make the effect using 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and less likely to get tired, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the dial operating unit 401 is rotated by the dial driving motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the driving gear 412, and the position of the rotary shaft of the dial driving motor 414 is aptly set to the dial operating unit 401 (driven gear). Since the position can be made eccentric with respect to the position of the rotating shaft of (410), even if the dial operating unit 401 or the pressing operating unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted via the rotating shaft of the dial operating unit 401. It is possible to avoid directly contacting the dial drive motor 414 and prevent the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) from being damaged.

  Further, the diameter of the opening 420a of the base member 420 is made smaller than that of the dial operating portion 401, and the dial rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416 supports the dial operating portion 401 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (the operation portion holding member 416) moves downward due to the impact or load from 401, the dial operation portion 401 can abut the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation portion 401 can It can be surely prevented from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operation portion 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation portion 401 and the operation portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operation portion 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and the load from.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 that rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial drive motor 414 frequently rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 or the dial drive motor 414. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player in spite of the fact that the amount of heat generation is increased due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated / dissipated through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating, and to prevent the dial drive means 414 from operating. It will be possible to withstand high loads It can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the pressing of the pressing operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the operation of the player based on the detection signal, and it is more convenient for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide an experience with which the player can experience, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game by entertaining the player. Further, since the dial decoration board 430 and the button decoration board 432 for illuminating the operation sections 401 and 405 are provided, the operation sections 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated, so that the operation sections 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the interest of the player can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation section 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step section 407a of the pressing operation section 405 and the protruding section 401f of the dial operation section 401 are in contact with each other, so that the player operates the pressing operation section 405. When is pressed, the dial drive motor 414 vibrates the dial operation portion 401 by repeating forward / reverse rotation within a predetermined angle range, thereby vibrating the dial operation portion 401 through the step portion 407a in contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation for the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought not to move arbitrarily, can greatly surprise the player, which is good. It is possible to make people think that something is happening, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and prevent the interest from decreasing. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400 is allowed to participate. In addition to facilitating the operation, the player can positively operate the operation unit 400, entertaining the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance and impact resistance of the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, so that the game is prevented from being interrupted due to the damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being deteriorated due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation portion 405 is rotatably supported only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axis center extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation portion 405, the dial drive is performed. Even if the motor 414 drives the dial operation unit 401 to rotate, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from attempting to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401. Therefore, it is possible for the player to perform a dial operation in the operation unit 400. The roles of the section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 can be surely recognized, and it is possible to easily entertain the player using the operation unit 400 and guide the upper surface of the pressing operation section 405. It is possible for the player to easily read the letters “PUSH” displayed without turning or tilting greatly, and the pressing operation is performed on the player. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  Further, the dial operation portion 401 is provided with a protruding portion 401f protruding from the inner periphery of the inner cylindrical portion 401a toward the axial center side, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the stepped portion 407a formed by the above is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible at the upper end of the operation unit 400. In addition, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the operation unit 400 can be provided through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and it becomes difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate due to the foreign matter and for the pressing operation unit 405 to be pressed. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed, the contact portion in the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation portion 401 is pressed. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position biased to the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation portion 405), the dial operation portion 401 is surely brought into contact. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are in contact with each other in an annular shape, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

  Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation portion 405 and the dial operation portion 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower in the direction of the rotation axis center of the dial operation portion 401, there is a case where it is not inclined. By comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. Further, the load from the pressing operation portion 405 can be radially distributed outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, preventing the load from concentrating and increasing the resistance of the operation unit 400. The loadability and shock resistance can be surely enhanced, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of defects during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, not only the dial operation portion 401 is simply rotated, but also the dial operation portion 401 can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, forward / reverse rotation. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) having the above-described operational effects can be surely embodied because it can be easily vibrated by repetition.

  Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing the game balls T, the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 in order to store a large number of the game balls T are probable. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently deal with a strong hit to the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to make the effect using the operation unit 400 easy to entertain.

[1-2G. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As shown in the drawing, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is mounted on the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A handle base 502 that is fixed and cylindrical and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis in a round shape; A front end cover 506 that is disposed and fixed to the handle base 502 and cooperates with the handle base 502 to rotatably support the rear handle body 504.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a rear end and a front end are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle main body 504, and the handle body is rotatably supported. A shaft member 510 that is integrally rotatable with 504 and that has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery; a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510; and a detection shaft portion 512a that is integrally rotatable with the transmission gear 511. The rotational position detection sensor 512 is sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

  Further, in the handle device 500, one end side is attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is rotated in a clockwise direction in a front view through the transmission gear 511. The biasing auxiliary spring 514, the touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, the touch sensor 516 are attached to different positions on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the firing stop switch 518 and the inner base 508. A single-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported and operates the firing stop switch 518, and one end side is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end side is attached to the handle body 504, and the handle body 504 is in the initial rotation position (counterclockwise in front view). Urging to return to the rotation end in the direction of A handle return spring 522 that includes a.

  As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example is configured to have a rear end portion that is open at the front side and bulges rearward and has a rear end portion that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer circumference of the cylinder. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140, one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by inserting the handle base 502 into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, the handle body 504 is formed with an arcuate slit 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis thereof, and the front end cover 506 is formed with three mounting bosses 506a protruding rearward. The mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 504a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 comes into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506, so that the rotation range of the handle body 504 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the handle main body 504 is formed with a locking projection 504b protruding rearward, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking projection 504b. By being locked, one end of the handle body 504 is biased by the handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 so as to rotate counterclockwise in a front view.

  The handle device 500 of this example is configured to be attached to the handle attaching portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 has a mounting surface that is inclined so as to face the outer side (open side) in a plan view seen from above, so that the handle mounting portion 114 is mounted via the handle bracket 140. The device 500 also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip end inclines toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). It is designed to be attached and fixed to No. 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, can easily perform the turning operation without feeling uncomfortable in the turning operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle main body 504 (handle device 500) is rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is transmitted via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball firing device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the turning position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle body 504 and the front end cover 508 are plated with a conductive material, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player contacts the handle body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle main body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with a strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball T is driven. Is able to. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball T by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball T can be driven. Instead, it is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original game and reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  When the player presses the one-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the one-shot button 520, and the firing power supply board 831 stops the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654. It is like this. Thus, the firing of the game ball T can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520 is released, before the one-shot button 520 is operated. The game ball T can be fired with the driving strength of.

  The handle device 500 of this example electrically detects the rotation operation of the handle main body 504 by the rotational position detection sensor 512, and then detects the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512, and then uses the firing power supply substrate 831. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided as in the conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism so that the frame 5 is linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and the link is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and thus the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. At the same time, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of troubles in the joint unit, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest due to the trouble of hitting the game ball T. Thereby making it possible.

[1-2H. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 and 53. The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and is shot by a game ball T paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later or a hitting ball launching device 650. The game ball T (foul ball) that has not reached the inside of the game area 1100 despite being played is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example is provided with a cover base 542 having a flow path for a plurality of game balls T inside which is open on the front side, and a front cover 544 closing a front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (B), the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first ball entrance 542a which is disposed in the upper right corner in rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a cover base which communicates with the first ball entrance. A first ball passage 542b that spreads to the right in front view as it goes toward the front end of 542, and a second ball entrance 542c that is arranged outside the first ball entrance 542a (right side in rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a. A second ball inlet 542c that communicates with the second ball passage 542d and extends downward and is inclined so as to decrease toward the lower right corner in a front view is provided. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball exit 774 and the full ball exit 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. The second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 is such that the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is approximately three times the height of the outer diameter of the game ball T, as shown in the figure. And, a storage space 546 capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls T is formed.

  In addition, the cover base 542 is arranged at a substantially central upper portion in the left-right direction and is open upward, and the game ball T can be guided to an upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d, which communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e. And a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a and the second ball outlet 544b that is arranged at the lower right corner in front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the cutout portion 101a of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h of the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  In the foul cover unit 540 of this example, the game ball T supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a passes through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball. The upper plate 301 can be supplied from the outlet 544a through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball T supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball. The outlet 544b can supply the lower plate 302 to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply trough 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g.

  Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, when the game ball T shot by the hitting ball launching device 650 does not reach the inside of the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball T received at the foul ball entrance 542e through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower tray 302 of the dish unit 300 ( Supply).

  In addition, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms the upstream side (left side in front view) side surface of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d and is swingably covered by the game balls T stored in the accommodation space 546. A swinging member 548 pivotally supported by 542, a full tank detecting sensor 550 that detects swinging of the swinging member 548, and a swinging member 548 is biased by the full tank detecting sensor 550 in a non-detecting state. And a spring 552. As shown in FIG. 53, the swing member 548 has a lower end rotatably supported with respect to the cover base 542 and an upper end rotatable leftward in a front view, and is substantially vertical. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on a side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 as viewed from the rear. , Is provided, and static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to the flow of the game ball T can be removed.

  In this example, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball unit 700 is supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. , If the game ball T is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 even when the upper plate 301 is full, the game ball T stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and then the normal ball outlet in the full tank branch unit 770. When the normal passage 773 upstream of 774 is also filled up, the game ball T will flow down to the full tank passage 775 side through the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79), and the full tank branch From the full tank outlet 776 of the unit 770 to the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via 44b.

  Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game balls T, the game balls T cannot be output from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the inside of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The delayed game balls T will be stored. Further, as the game ball T is paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a large amount of the game ball T is stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game ball T acts on the swinging member 548 and the biasing force of the spring 552 is exerted. Against this, the upper end of the swinging member 548 moves to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout of the game ball T from the prize ball unit 700 is stopped in the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 126), and The player is notified to urge the player to discharge the game ball T in the dish unit 300 to the outside.

  When the game ball T in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 is detected. Is not detected, and the payout of the game ball T from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[1-2I. Ball feeding unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 to 57. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls T supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The T can be drawn into the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-back direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 that has an opening 581a that penetrates to the front and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a, and that has a rear opening that closes the rear end of the front cover 581 and opens the front. The rear cover 582 and the rear cover 582, which are box-shaped and have a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying the game ball T that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launcher 650, A partition part that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front covers 581 and partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. The ball removing member 583 having 83a and the game balls T on the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent to the hitting ball supply port 582a of the rear cover one by one in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feeding member 584 that is rotatably supported around an extended axis and a ball feeding solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, the ball removing member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right side. It is arranged.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball removing port 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 partitions the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing opening 581b below the entrance 581a, and the upper surface of the partition 583a is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 584, and bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up-down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end thereof extends around the axis extending in the front-rear direction. A rotatable rod portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c projecting forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. And a weight portion 583d that protrudes to the opposite side from the partition portion 583a. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through an arcuate slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 54), and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base body 110. It is configured to come into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300 via 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 includes a blocking portion 584a which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583, and the blocking portion 584a. A ball holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the axis of rotation is provided, and a rod-shaped rod portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball T. The ball feeding member 584 is rotated around the axis of rotation by moving the rod portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It is adapted to rotate with respect to the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is at the supply position, the game ball T held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied to the ball hitting launcher 650 from the ball hitting supply port 582a and enters the partition 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the game ball T to the ball holding section 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) side is blocked by the blocking section 584a and remains on the partition section 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the side of the rod portion 584c closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball T on the partition part 583a is held in the ball holding part 584b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 580 is moved back and forth by the movement of the ball feeding operation rod 586 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the movement of the tip of the ball feeding actuation rod 586 which is vertically swung. A ball feed crank 587 that rotates about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the up-down direction. The ball feed crank 587 includes an engaging portion 587a extending in the left-right direction that is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 56) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center.

  The ball feeding unit 580 of this example uses a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587 to transmit the movement of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 which is rocked by the driving of a ball feeding solenoid 585 which moves forward and backward. The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feeding actuating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In the state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 is rotated to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball T, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released from driving (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 is received. The received game ball T is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launcher 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing power supply board 831 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

  In addition, the ball-sucking member 583 rotatably supported in the ball-sending unit 580 of the present example is adapted to receive a moment to rotate in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the weight portion 583c. The actuating rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the abutment piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300, so that the rotation thereof is restricted. At normal times, the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b so that the game ball T does not enter the ball outlet 581b side. Then, when the player presses down the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a to contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing mechanism 340, whereby the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front and enters the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball T that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball removing channel 344c of the upper plate ball removing base 344 of the plate unit 300. The lower plate 302 is discharged (supplied).

  Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removing slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game ball T is vigorously supplied onto the partition 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring for urging the upper dish ball removing slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removing member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball It is possible to prevent T from bouncing back at the partition portion 583a.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 580 of this example is provided with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 56B and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in a rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, a fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feeding unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 582a of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed in a rectangular shape having a laterally long overall outer diameter in a rear view, and is located on the opposite side from the substantially vertical center at the tip that is the left side in the rear view. The upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c, which are vertically divided with the dividing line 588a extending a predetermined length toward the base end side (right side) of the boundary, and the tips of the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c are V formed between the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b in a direction perpendicular (rearward) to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 588 so as to move away from each other. It is provided with a V-shaped cut portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cut portion 588d.

  As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 is bent at the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the tip end (the left end side in rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b is moved backward, so that the cut portion 588d is formed. It is formed in a V shape in a plan view, and the wire Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is inserted inside the V shape. In the cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the lower side of the upper piece 588b and the upper side of the lower piece 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in a plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. Is formed.

  Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I by the inclined portion 588e can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d. It is like this. In the ball feeding unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as shown in the drawing, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 is provided. The portion corresponding to the portion where the mark is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time, is formed so as to communicate with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

  According to this fraud prevention member 588, the illegal game ball I to which the wire Iw is attached is supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the hitting ball launching device 650, and the fraudulent game ball I is played by the hitting ball launching device 650 in the game area of the game board 4. When struck into the inside of 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the batted ball launching device 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in a front view, and passes between the outer rail and the inner rail. Attempt to enter the game area 1100. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I will be pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw is different from the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I in the game ball T. It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance in the passage. Therefore, the wire rod Iw extending from the dish unit 300 to the side of the ball launching device 650 through the ball supply port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 is such that the game ball I moves to the upper left direction in the front view (upper right direction in the rear view). In order to move on the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear view and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner of the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear view. Then, the wire Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending to the right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 arranged at that position. After being guided to the inside of 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the improper momentum of the game ball I.

  As a result, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (left direction in front view) at the cutting portion 588d of the illegality preventing member 588 by the force of the illegal game ball I. The cutting portion 588d acts on the wire Iw by friction or shearing force (see FIG. 57D). At this time, the illegal game ball I with the wire Iw is dampened by the momentum due to friction or the like acting on the wire Iw, so that it does not enter the game area 1100 and is between the outer rail 1111a and the launch rail 660. Will be discharged through.

  Therefore, since the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal gaming ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, an illegal act is performed in the gaming area 605 with the illegal gaming ball I attached with the wire rod Iw. You can prevent it from being exposed. Even if an illegal game ball I enters the game area 1100, as described above, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the illegality preventing member 588, so that the illegal act cannot be performed. Even if the wire rod Iw could not be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to damp the momentum of the illegal game ball I and the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent the intrusion into the inside, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

  As described above, according to this example, the game balls T are stored in the upper plate 301 and the game balls T are supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5 is played. When a person operates, the game ball T is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 by driving the ball sending solenoid 585 of the ball sending unit 580, and the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 by the hitting ball launching device 650, whereby the door frame 5 The game is played in the game area 1100 that is visible through the game window 101, and the player can be entertained, and at the same time, the feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or Since the ball feeding unit 580 including the ball feeding solenoid 585) and the discharging mechanism (ball removing member 583) is arranged, the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 58 are arranged. Not only this, the ball feeding member 584 and the hitting ball launching device 650 are in a state of being as close as possible, and when the game ball T in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, the ball sending member 584 side The number of remaining game balls T can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 having the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, it is possible to increase the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 and hit the game ball T. It is possible to prevent the game ball T in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early by the insertion operation, and to prevent the inside of the upper plate 301 from being filled up with the game ball T early, and the game in the upper plate 301 can be suppressed. Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed with respect to the ball T and suppress a decrease in interest, and the size of the plate unit 300 can be reduced while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, It is possible to make the game area 1100 relatively large (wide) so that the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 can be simply attached by comparing the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, and the labor for assembling can be simplified. With the game ball T, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be easily replaced. Even if a problem occurs, the problem can be easily resolved by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, as compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side, the upper bowl ball It is not necessary to configure a transmission mechanism (upper plate ball removing mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the removing button 341 to the ball removing member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the body frame 3 side, the transmission mechanism ( It is possible to avoid the risk that the transmission mechanism is quickly consumed and malfunctions or is damaged due to the interruption of the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340), and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, or the like. And durability can be improved.

  Further, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, only by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward, the game ball T can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, or the upper plate. The discharge of the game ball T from 301 can be stopped, and the player can easily operate the ball removing operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removing button 341.

  Further, the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. Since the partition part 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, it is possible to reduce the horizontal movement range of the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 and the partition part 583a as much as possible, and the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 and the ball feeding mechanism are provided. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described operational effects can be provided.

  Further, the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is urged upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 makes the entrance 581a and the hitting ball supply port 582a communicate with each other when the upper bowl ball removing slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball T vigorously contacts the partition portion 583a from the upper plate 301, the impact can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removing part The durability of the member 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact on the partition 583a can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper bowl ball removing slider 343, even if the game ball T collides with the partition 583a, it can be made difficult to repel and the game ball T It is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged due to the splashing of the blade and causing a problem.

  Further, since the partition 583a is rotated, compared to the case where the partition 583a is slid, the partition 583a can be moved when the load of the game ball T is applied to the partition 583a. The friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper bowl ball removing button 341 can be lightened to improve the operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a in the planar projection can be reduced. The same effect can be achieved.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, when the partition portion 583a or the upper bowl ball removing mechanism 340 fails, the partition portion 583a Is rotated by its own weight so that the entrance and outlet are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the sending mechanism (inserting device) side even though the discharging operation section is not operated. Since it is not discharged to the player side, it is possible to let the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is in trouble, and to move to the pachinko machine 1 with no trouble, which is interesting. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  Furthermore, since the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is rotated through the bent rotating rod portion 583b, when the game ball T collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the impact is bent. The impact can be prevented from being linearly transmitted to the rotary shaft by dispersing the shock by the portion 583b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotary rod portion 583b. Can be increased.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when discharging the game ball T in the upper plate 301, the game ball T in the ball feeding unit 580. It is possible to minimize the movement in the left-right direction, improve the passage of the game ball T in the ball feeding unit 580, and discharge the game ball T well. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge route of the game ball T in the ball feeding unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feeding unit 580 can serve as a discharging mechanism. Even with the ball removing member 583, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 from unnecessarily increasing in size.

  Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is attached to the attachment recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cutting portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the hitting ball launching device 650. As a result, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (impulsive) state immediately after being launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. With respect to the wire rod Iw being pulled fast (strongly), the wire rod Iw can be reliably cut off, and the illegal momentum of the game ball I is attenuated to prevent it from entering the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent an illegal act from being performed by the illegal game ball I.

  Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 having the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b which is recessed from the rear surface of the rear cover 582 toward the front, the fraud prevention member 588 is formed to form the V-shaped cutting portion 588d. The upper piece portion 588b bent rearward may not be projected rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece portion 588b of the fraud prevention member 588 may injure an operator during assembly or the like. It is possible to prevent it.

  In addition, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I, the upper piece 588b on the upper side is bent backward with the dividing line 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material sandwiched therebetween. Thus, the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, so that the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

[1-2J. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The glass unit 590 has an annular vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 that is formed of synthetic resin and has an opening that is approximately the same size as the game window 101, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. And a transparent glass plate 594. The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes two stopper pieces 592a which are arranged on the upper portions of the left and right sides and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate-like engagement piece which extends in the left-right direction along the lower end and extends downward. And a stop piece 592b.

  In this glass unit 590, the locking piece 592b at the lower end is locked so as to engage with the vertical bending protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit supporting step portion 110a of the door frame base body 110, and the stopper 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190, so that the door frame It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[1-2K. Modeling decoration on door frame]
Next, the modeling decoration of the door frame 5, that is, the geometrical decoration will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 58. As shown in the figure, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an upper ellipse 301 and a lower dish 302 for storing the game balls T arranged vertically below the vertically elongated elliptical gaming window 101. Along with the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view, the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 are driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101. A handle device 500 is arranged. The door frame 5 has the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 arranged so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the game window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the game window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is arranged.

  The exterior of the door frame 5 is greatly different on both sides of the game window 101, and the right side has an appearance like a natural rock rugged by the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, which are visible from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240, have a metallic sharp and artificial appearance. ing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the door frame 5 differs in the amount of forward projection between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. It projects more than 240 forward. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved plane shape.

  As a result, in the door frame 5 of this example, when viewed from the front right, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 appear to be similar to each other (see FIG. 19), while the left front When viewed from above, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, so that different impressions can be given depending on the standing position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It is like this. In other words, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the pachinko machine 1 relative to the pachinko machine 1 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look like a different type of pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in appealing to the player and can attract the player's interest strongly.

  Also, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is left-right asymmetric, for example, when the pachinko machines 1 are installed in multiple rows in the left-right direction in an island facility of a game hall, etc., the overall appearance of the island facility feels solid and solid. By arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of different configurations alternately, it is possible to give a rhythmic impression and to give the player an exciting appearance (atmosphere). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the appealing power to the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

  Further, the door frame 5 causes the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided in each of the units 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby causing the game window 101. It is designed to be able to be light-emitted and decorated in any color so as to surround the. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 provided on the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246 are included. , 254b, 256 are turned on or off to change the mode of light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Subsequently, the light emission decoration on the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment is a ring-shaped outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed so as to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and by making each LED emit light as appropriate, the game window 101 The outer circumference of the can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer circumference except the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centering around the lower part of the left and right center of the game window 101. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

  In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is included. The peripheral lens portion 250a is formed by a single smooth curved surface. Further, in the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are arranged behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

  In addition, the door frame 5 is behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side upper decoration board 214, the right side lower decoration board 216, and the left side upper decoration board 254. , And a lower left side decorative board 256 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256. ing.

  The right side upper decoration substrate 214, the right side lower decoration substrate 216, the left side upper decoration substrate 254, and the left side lower decoration substrate 256, which are arranged on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, have circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a, respectively. It has LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the emission lens sections 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246). . In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the emission lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high brightness. It is used as an LED. Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 are a green LED and a red LED.

  In this example, the surfaces of the right-side upper decorative substrate 214, the right-side lower decorative substrate 216, the left-side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left-side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White coating, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b and the like are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and unattractive to look, and by reflecting the light emitted from the LEDs 210a and 210b to the player side by the substrate. The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated brighter.

  As described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the end portions of the upper portions of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, which are directed toward the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 arranged in the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper central lens 284, and an outer side outside the central ring lens portion 282b. And four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to the. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side in front view is covered with an upper lower decorative cover 294.

  The upper decoration unit 280 includes an upper central lens 284 and an upper central decorative substrate 288 arranged behind the central ring lens portion 282b of the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending laterally from the upper central decorative substrate 288. And an upper side decorative substrate 290 arranged on the rear side of the extended frame lens portion 282c and the upper central decorative substrate 288. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper center decoration substrate 288, and the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b are mounted. It is possible to separately decorate and light. In addition, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portions 282c are mounted on the front surface of the upper side decoration substrate 290, and each extension frame lens portion 282c can be illuminated and decorated. . The LEDs 288a, 288b, 290a of the upper central decoration substrate 288 and the upper side decoration substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and the outer appearance is continuous with the outer appearance of the right side decoration unit 200. In this plate unit 300, an upper plate decorative board 322 is arranged on the rear side of the upper plate front decorative member 316. The upper plate upper right decoration member 319, which decorates the right side portion and the outer periphery on the front side of the upper plate ball removing button 341, can be decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full-color LED.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a light-transmitting annular dial operation portion 401 and a light-transmissive columnar pressing operation portion arranged inside the dial operation portion 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are arranged below the dial operation section 401 and the push operation section 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 430b (four in this example) arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration board 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration board 432 is a full-color LED. In addition, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

  By the way, in the door frame 5 of the present example, the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, which cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101, correspond to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a have a first annular group 102 near the game window 101 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (Within the range of the cross hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60), and by making the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 emit light as appropriate, substantially concentric circles surrounding the game window 101. A plurality of (two in this example) light emitting decorations can be decorated. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the hatched area close to the game window 101 is illuminated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are made to emit light. When all the lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated in a ring shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. , A radial group 104 (in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction. Within the shaded area). By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radially illuminated and decorated, and the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 form an annular shape. The luminous decoration can be divided so as to be divided in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decorative unit 200 is set as the notification group 105. A variety of information can be notified to a person or an employee of a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the center ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 are the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. Is defined as an upper central group 106 for illuminating and decorating the upper central part. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper center group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and the criteria for the ring-shaped light-emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to make luminous decorations that become dots. Further, the LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 are an upper center side group 107 that causes both the left and right sides of the upper center group 106 to be illuminated and decorated. By appropriately emitting the LED 290a of the upper center side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Furthermore, in the door frame 5, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 arranged below the game window 101, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate 301 is illuminated. It is a dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the center of the upper side of the dish unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 are the operation units 400. The operation unit group 109 is used for light emission decoration. By appropriately causing the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109 to emit light, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be determined. The player can be informed.

  The light-emitting decoration on the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in further detail. 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which they belong, corresponding to the control system. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 have 102a-102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and the peripheral lenses 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104a to 104h for each of the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiation lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems, that is, the central portion 106a, the right portion 106b, and the left portion 106c. The seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems of 108a to 108d in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include left and right 109a and front and rear 109b as a set of LEDs 430b in which four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are diagonally arranged with the pressing operation unit 405 sandwiched therebetween. No. 2 system, and one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 is divided into one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems for full-color light emission. In the light emission control, there are 84 systems, which is triple the number. The LEDs 288a and 430b are white LEDs with high brightness, and the four systems 107a, 109a, and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected, and in actual light emission control, there are twice as many as eight systems.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b are white LEDs of normal brightness and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b formed by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each of the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, it is possible to produce a luminescent effect with a rich expression.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, the first annular group 102 is sequentially emitted to the second annular group 103 (sequentially emitted in the same color or similar colors) so that the game window 101 is spread outward. Luminous effect, or conversely, luminous effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequentially emitting the same color or similar colors), Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light at the same time, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

  Further, by cooperating with an LED (detailed illustration is omitted) provided in the game board 4, the LED of the game board 4, the LED of the first annular group 102 near the game window 101, and the first annular group 102. With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged further outside, it is possible to perform a more expressive light emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly and entertain the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, by appropriately emitting light to each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, the upper portion of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. It is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light moves toward the central lens 284, or light moves from the upper central lens 284 along the outer periphery of the game window 101. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited to this. , If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to favorably perform a light emission effect in which light circulates around the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Furthermore, by making only the radial groups 104 emit light, a light emission effect of radially emitting light around the game window 101 is performed, and at the same time as the radial groups 104, the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted. By doing so, it is possible to perform a light emission effect of causing the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or by causing the radial group 104 to emit light (lighting / blinking) while the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are emitting light. It is possible to give a luminous effect by adding an accent to the luminous decoration. In addition, by making each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 individually emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiation lens portions 210b and 250b) are rotated.

  Further, by making the upper central group 106 and the upper central side group 105 emit light, the player has a chance or a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state, a probability variation game state, a time shortening game state, a probability variation short time gaming state). , Etc.) can be performed.

  Furthermore, by appropriately emitting light from each system 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, the upper plate 301 is made to emit light, and by making the light emitted in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation are performed. It is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the unit 405. In addition, by appropriately lighting the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and guides the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is produced. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full-color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108 ,. For each 109 or each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, it is possible to perform a light-emission effect with different gradations of light-emission color, brightness, etc. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is axially supported on the left side in a front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported like a door so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and has a rectangular game board holding port 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base 600. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640, which are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the front view of 600, are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 650 mounted on the lower front surface of the game board 4 for driving the game ball T into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a game ball T on the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The prize sphere unit 700 for paying out, and the game sphere T from the prize sphere unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is attached to the front of the body frame base 600 and is opened with respect to the body frame 3. A sphere that blocks the flow And a mouth closing unit 790,.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards and power supply boards 851 for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electric parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is a unit of the above, the back cover 900 that covers the rear side opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side crime prevention plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks and unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and has an outer shape in a front view in a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially forward and backward. It is formed so as to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). As a result, when the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the locking device 1000, and the like are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, when the main body frame base 600 is turned down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 becomes substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed on the main body frame base 600. Is able to improve.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 is a game board holding port capable of fitting and holding the outer circumference of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 from the upper part to the lower part. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms a front end outer periphery of the main body frame base 600 excluding the left side in a front view, a front frame of the front end frame portion 602, which is recessed rearward from the front surface, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Of the door frame projecting piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the door, the upper bent projecting piece 167 projecting rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside projecting rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bending protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding opening 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602, and a lower rear wall portion which spreads laterally in a plate shape. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 that projects rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. By this peripheral wall portion 605, the free ends (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 are connected to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like this.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the game board mounting portion 606 on which the game board 4 is mounted and the game board mounting portion 606. Positioning projections 607 protruding upward from the substantially center in the left-right direction and engaging with out-ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1112 of the game board 4, and a predetermined position of the inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the right side in front view, the game board of the game board 4 being formed. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are arranged. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 fits into the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving leftward and rightward. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the front side right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. There is. The front left side of the game board 4 will be described later in detail, but the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is a metal fitting attachment for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. The unit 610 is provided (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 has its front side reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending vertically and horizontally, so that the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 can be mounted with sufficient strength. You can do it. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and the door frame 5 formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with the positioning protrusion 110d that projects rearward from the door frame base body 110 in the above, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 that is formed at the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in front view. And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

  As described above, in the main body frame base 600 of this example, the lower rear wall portion 604 is formed at a position recessed further rearward than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. The hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the launching solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state where the hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. A foul space 626 spreading downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball T is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and is discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction so as to penetrate in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604, and a plurality of main-frame bases 600 are formed on the upper side of the opening 614 and both left and right sides in the front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is adapted to be closed from the front side by a relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like), and through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, the lower rear wall portion 604. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having an impact wall on the front side.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that expands in a fan shape around an axis centered on the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. An operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front). This game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported on the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in a front view. Then, the fixing piece 690a projects upward from the game board placing portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placing portion 606. Can be prevented from moving to the front side. Further, in the game board fixing tool 690, the operation piece 690b abuts on the stopper 617, and by abutting on the stopper 617, the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is regulated. Has become.

  Further, in the main body frame base 600, a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has three U-shaped front end frame portions 602 that extend vertically inward in the front (front side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in the front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock engaging hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is lined up in the left-right direction are provided below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and in the substantially vertical center. Locking protrusions 1004 provided at the upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, respectively. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in front view. Then, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Further, the main body frame base 600, when viewed from the rear, gently and obliquely descends from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall part 604, and then at the substantially center in the left-right direction. It is provided with a main body frame base ball removal passage 622 in which the game ball T is allowed to flow down from an intermediate position in the up-down direction to a position slightly above. This main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is designed to be closed on the rear side by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and details will be described later, but the game ball T flowing down the ball removal passage 741d in the prize ball device 740. Are flowing down.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is arranged at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the rear side, and a plurality of back cover shaft support portions 623 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction to pivotally support the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 diagonally upper left in front view of the opening 614 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 of the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame base 600 at the front end left end upper and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 using predetermined screws, respectively. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner with respect to the outer frame 2.

  First, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the upper metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extending portion 632, the shaft supporting pin 633 protruding so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side in front view of the shaft supporting pin 633. And a door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63) penetrating in the up-down direction and the front extension 632 hangs downward from the left end of the front extension 632 when viewed from the front, and the door frame 5 pivots to the open side. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 109) that regulates the end. In this upper shaft support member 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5, and the body frame 3 is axially supported with respect to the outer frame 2. And a body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front. A plate-shaped front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that vertically penetrates near the front end of the front extending portion 642b, and the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the front extending portion 642b. And a stopper 642d that is provided upright from the left end of the front view of the front side 642a and restricts the pivotal end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, the mounting portion 642a, the front extending portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame support metal fitting 644 in the lower support metal fitting 640 is attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 644a that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. Also in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extending portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 of this example is such that the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support metal fitting 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is like this.

  The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal support 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600 to form a shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal support 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal support 640. Are located on the same axis, and the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support metal fitting 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the main frame 3 into the support hook hole 20c of the upper support member 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached. The metal fitting 642c and the metal fitting 642c are positioned on the same axis, and the lower frame fitting 640 has a door frame shaft support hole 642c in which the door frame frame support hole 642c is inserted. The lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support fitting 642, and then the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support fitting 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 in an openable and closable manner. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the shaft pin 155 is slidable. Once it is slid downward, the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball T supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the strength according to the rotating operation of the handle device 500. Is.

  In the hitting ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, a launching base 652 made of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a rotation drive shaft 654a protruding forward from the lower back face of the launching base 652. Of the launch solenoid 654, a hammer 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, a hammer tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and a movement trajectory of the hammer tip 658. A hammer 656 at the tip of a hammer 656 is provided between a launch rail 660 that extends diagonally to the upper left in a front view and is attached to the front surface of the launch base 652 with a predetermined position above as the base end, and the launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660. At the same time that 658 is allowed to pass through, a gap is formed so that the game ball T cannot pass through, and the game ball T is held at the base end of the launch rail 660. The stopper 662 and the ball stopper 662 hold the gaming ball T held at the base end of the launch rail 660 from the hitting position where it can hit the ball 656 (hammer tip 658) rotating toward the launch rail 660. And a stopper 664 for restricting.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocally rotates at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the batting mallet 656 of the batting ball launching device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending in a gentle arc from the fixed portion 656a with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A rod portion 656b, which is oriented toward the normal direction and has a tip 658 fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c, which extends to the opposite side of the rod portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween and is in contact with the stopper 664, are provided. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 abuts on the stopper 664, the hammer tip 658 at the tip is rotated to the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position (the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is becoming regulated.

  Further, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launching device 650 has a loose arc shape in which the lower side is recessed so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111a of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98), and in the front-back direction. On the other hand, the center is formed in a V-shape, and the game ball T hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. .. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 includes a stopper cover 666 which covers the front surface of a stopper 664 capable of restricting a turning end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation at a position apart from the hitting position of the hitting mallet 656. And a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, so that it is possible to absorb the impact when the hitting mallet 656 abuts, and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutting. Is able to.

  As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, etc., when the ball hitting launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launching rail 660 is substantially centered in the left-right direction, The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding opening 601) is positioned below the outside of the game board 4 held by the game board holding opening 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward in the left-right direction with a predetermined width is formed between the rail 1111a and the lower end of the rail 1111a. Then, the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example launches the game ball T by jumping over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view with respect to the launch rail 660, so that the game ball T is placed in the game area 1100 of the game board 4. It is possible to drive. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located at the bottom of the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 is provided. The game ball T, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  Further, in the hitting ball launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching power supply substrate 831 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotating operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It can be driven so as to be synchronized with the driving of. Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 that supplies the game ball T to the hitting ball launching device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball T and from that state, the ball feeding solenoid 585. When the driving of the ball feeding member 584 is released (OFF), the game ball T received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. By driving (ON) 654, the game ball T can be smoothly supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball T can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hammer 656. You can do it.

[1-3D. Prize Ball Unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores the game balls T supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then pays out a predetermined amount. Based on the instruction, the pachinko machine 1 is dispensed to the upper plate 301. This prize ball unit 700 is a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank which is attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receives and stores the game balls T supplied from the island facility side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and aligned with the game balls T stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sent to the downstream side, and a game ball T aligned by the tank rail unit 730. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on a predetermined payout instruction and the game ball T paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is filled with the game ball T. When it becomes, it is mainly equipped with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the paid game ball T to the lower plate 302 side.

  In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes a rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding metal for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage cover 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a when viewed from the rear side. Back cover fastening holes 780b are formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75, etc.).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal board 784 and an external terminal board cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in a front view so as to substantially correspond to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in a front view. It is formed integrally with a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall 710a by a predetermined width and is arranged in substantially the same plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  In addition, the prize ball base 710 includes a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate arranged beside the tank mounting portion 711 (right side in rear view). An external terminal plate attachment portion 712 for attaching the cover 786, a plurality of attachment locking portions 713 for attaching the tank rail unit 730 to the rear side of the upper edge of the rear wall portion 710b, and a rear side of the vertical edge of the rear wall portion 710b. And a prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740, and a prize ball passage 715 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 for guiding the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 downward. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the wall portion 710b.

  Further, the prize ball base 710 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and escape holes 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to escape. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although detailed description is omitted, the award ball base 710 is provided with an attachment hole, an attachment boss, or the like for attaching the award ball tank 720, the award ball device 740, or the like, or the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper side, and has a substantially rectangular bottom wall portion in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape only in the right rear portion (rear portion on the open side) in a plan view. A discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the right rear part projecting rearward of the bottom wall part 721 of the right rear portion 722 and opening downward, and a plate shape from the left side (the shaft support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. Formed in the vicinity of the base end of the shaft portion 725 and the front end of the outer peripheral wall 722. 720 in prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In this prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls T can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Further, in the prize ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the discharge port 723, and the game ball T on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It is like this.

  Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, one end of the ball leveling member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725, and a weight is held therein. . This ball leveling member 727 is adapted to hang down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and is capable of leveling and aligning the game balls T flowing down in the tank rail unit 730. Further, the eaves portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, and it is possible to prevent the game ball T from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the tank rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined such that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) in plan view is lowered toward the right side, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723 in a plan view. As a result, the flow of the game balls T can be made smooth, and the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball T can be smoothly discharged.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with a predetermined depth that is open at the top and has a width (depth) that allows the game balls T to be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is slanted so that the part is low. This tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (shaft support) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at approximately the center in the front-rear direction, and a lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 74) that protrude downward and are locked from the upper side to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 are provided.

  The tank rail 731 is arranged such that the right end (open side) end in front view is located directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball T discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720. After being received, it can be rolled to the left and passed from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 that covers the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stopper that can be moved back and forth in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball T in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. It is provided with a piece 735 and a ground plate 736 arranged in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the game ball T in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game ball T partitioned into two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 is provided with a mounting portion 734a on which the ball stopper 735 is mounted, and two slits 734b which vertically pass through the protrusion 735a of the ball stopper 735.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball pressing plate 734. The game balls T discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. In addition, the ball pressing plate 734 is for forcibly setting the game ball T, which has not been stepped by the ball leveling member 727, to a step, and the gap between the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a. It is attached to the tank rail 731 so that

  As shown in the figure, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and the alignment gear 732 is pivotally supported so that the pitch of the teeth of the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball T flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the outlet 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls T arranged in two rows are alternately arranged one by one. It is adapted to be sent to the prize ball device 740.

  It should be noted that the bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with a narrow groove that penetrates vertically, so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls with the game ball T inside the tank rail 731 falls downward from the narrow groove. It has become. Although not shown in detail, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is designed to be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. By contacting the game ball T with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, it is possible to remove the charged static electricity.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the ball stopper 735 rotatably mounted on the mounting portion 734 a of the ball retainer plate 734 is rotated, and the projecting piece 735 a of the ball stopper 735 is passed through the slit 734 a to the inside of the tank rail 730. By inserting into the tank rail 731, the two rows of flow paths can be closed by the projecting piece 735a, and the supply of the game ball T to the prize ball device 740 side can be stopped. ing.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of transparent synthetic resin, and the state of the game ball T or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 pays out the game ball T discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. belongs to. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 that is attached to the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 is a supply which opens to the upper end on the rear surface side and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball T. A passage 741a, a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined width, and a distribution space 741b communicating with the left end (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b in rear view A prize ball passage 741c opening to the left side surface in the view, and a ball removal passage 741d that communicates with the lower end (right side of the rear side) of the distribution space 741b in rear view and extends downward and opens to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed to be open rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example includes a back lid 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and having a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support disposed below the back lid 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a projects rearward of the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated with each other. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is axially supported by the unit base 741, and a second gear 746 that meshes. A third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and a payout delivery unit that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is arranged in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotator 748 are integrally rotatably fixed to the opposite side with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749, and.

  In addition, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of the game ball T in the supply passage 741a, and the game ball T that is attached to the unit base 741 and flows down in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the number of rotation angles, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection plate 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 for holding the rotation angle sensor 752 on the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753 to be attached, a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 to relay the connection between the payout motor 744, the ball break switch 750, the counting sensor 751, the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. , Are provided.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a substrate cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (a rotation detection plate 749. ), And a sensor cover 753 from the rear side, and a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with a back cover 742 sandwiched between them, and a supply passage that can contact the game ball T flowing down in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. The metal fitting 757, the screw 758 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 while sandwiching the motor support plate 743, and the screw 758 for grounding the payout motor 744, and the back cover 742 are detachably supported to the unit base 741. And a detachable button 759 for removing.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the open rear end of the ball removal passage 741d. Are to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end in the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, and relaxes the momentum of the game ball T discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730. You can do it. Further, the unit base 741 has a side surface on one side (left side in rear view) lower than a position in the supply passage 741a that bulges rearward, and is partially cut out at the outside of the cut portion of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the out-of-ball switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a penetrating part in the front-back direction below the prize ball passage 741a. And a motor insertion hole 741g which is formed and through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball cut switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operating piece of the ball cut switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and is present in the supply passage 741a. The presence or absence of the game ball T in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the ball break switch 741e by pressing the operating piece by the game ball T. In a state where the game ball T in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball cut switch 741e (ball cut state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is possible that the player is out of ball. The hall will be informed.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotor 748), a switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and a distribution space 741b. And a button support hole 741j for supporting a detachable button 759 for detachably supporting the back cover 742, which is disposed at an upper portion of the unit base 741. I have it. This unit base 741 is configured such that the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 is attached to the grounding metal fitting mounting portion 741i so that the rear surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball T in the supply passage 741a. , The front surface of the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 comes into contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped grounding metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball T flowing down in the supply passage 741a via the supply passage grounding metal fitting 757 is removed. You can do it.

  The back lid 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole, and has an upper end bulged rearward. A button insertion hole 742a through which the attachment / detachment button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the rear surface of the center in the up-down direction, and a relay board mounting portion. The sensor substrate mounting portion 742c is provided below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor substrate 753, and the through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is configured to come into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 is prevented. It is designed to facilitate heat dissipation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball T at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and payout rotation. By rotating the body 748, the game balls T supplied from the supply passage 741a are housed in the recesses 748a one by one, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 which rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to between the concave portions 748a of the payout rotating body 748, and the detection slits 749a are detected by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, a payout motor is generated by inputting a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6 or the like to the payout control board 4110, or by operating the ball removal switch 860b. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls T can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotating shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotating shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshing with the first gear 745 is rotated, and further the second gear 746 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with is designed to rotate. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the front side of the third gear 747, and a rotation detecting board 749 is fixed to the rear side of the third gear 747 so as to be integrally rotatable. It is designed to rotate.

  In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 78, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout motor 744 rotates the payout rotating body 748 in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear, the game ball T in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side. The game balls T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the rotating body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then passed to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. . On the other hand, when the payout motor 744 rotates the payout rotating body 748 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, the game ball T in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the side of the ball removing passage 741d. The game ball T paid out to the ball removal passage 741d side by 748 is a ball removal passage 778 of a full tank distribution unit 770, which will be described later, a main body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d. The board unit 800 can be discharged to the outside of the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power board box holder 840.

  The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled in the main body frame 3, the prize from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. The full tank distribution unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game ball T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, the game balls T can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 when the game balls T are full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300.

  The full-tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the upper part of the center in the front-rear direction by a locking part 770a that is locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710, and is fixed to the rear end upper part on the back surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710. And a fixed portion 770b. The full-tank branch unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the attachment locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the attachment locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and thus the prize ball base By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape so that the whole becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and the upper end of the rear end is opened upward at approximately the center in the left-right direction. A prize ball socket 771 for receiving the game ball T flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball socket 771 and expanded in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). ), And the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball T toward the front side from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772, and discharges the game ball T flowing down the normal passage 773 to the front. A full-ball passage 775 that guides the game ball T toward the front side from the normal ball exit 774 that is open to the front end right end of the front end and the position that is farther to the right in the rear view than immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 ( Figure 9 and the reference), and includes full game balls T flowing down the tank passage 775 and full ball outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774 is discharged to the front, the.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball removal receiving port 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part in front view and receives the game ball T flowing down the ball removal passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, The ball removal passage 778 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball T received in the ball removal receiving port 777 to the front side, and the game ball T flowing down the ball removal passage 778 is discharged to the front and is a normal ball at the left end in front view. The outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are provided with a ball outlet 779 that opens at a position rearward.

  In the full tank branching unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5. The ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are connected to face each other, and the game ball T discharged from the normal ball exit 774 passes through the first ball entrance 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and the dish unit 300. The game ball T supplied to the upper plate 301 of the dish tank 300 and discharged from the full tank ball outlet 776 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. There is. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the body frame base ball passage 622 in the body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear, and the game ball T discharged from the ball outlet 779 is the body frame base. It is adapted to be delivered to the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 of 600.

  In this full tank branching unit 770, the game ball T paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In a normal state, the game ball T that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down in the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball T flowing down into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and then the first ball outlet 544a of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the upper plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball T is paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) while the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is filled with the game ball T, the first of the foul cover units 540 is released. The game ball T, which cannot be discharged from the ball outlet 544a to the upper tray 301 side, stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually passes through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770 to the upstream normal passage 773. The inside becomes full. In this state, the game ball T that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and moves laterally. The game ball T entered into the full tank passage 775, and from the full tank outlet 776 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b. Is supplied to the lower plate 302.

  The full-tank branching unit 770 of this example is entirely made of transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign matter such as dust or dust that has entered the full tank branching unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging without disassembling the full tank branching unit 7700. .

  In this way, in the full tank branching unit 770 of this example, when the game ball T becomes full in the upper plate 301, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 is played until the full game tank T is released. , Since it can be automatically supplied to the lower plate 302, the upper plate is filled up like a conventional pachinko machine and the game ball T is supplied to the hitting ball launching device by operating the ball removal button of the upper plate. It can be avoided that the driving of the game ball T is interrupted because it is not performed, and the annoyance during the game can be eliminated and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example, when the upper plate 301 is full, passes directly below the prize ball device 740, that is, the passage of the game ball T paid out at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Since the game balls T that have been branched and are accumulated in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper plate 301, the game balls T in the upper plate 301 and the game balls T in the normal passage 773. Becomes a game ball T that can be directly hit by the ball-striking launcher 650, and the storage amount of the game balls T in the upper plate 301 is substantially the amount of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773 combined. Become. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls T as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. be able to. Therefore, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be made relatively large (wide), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be provided and the game is played. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player can be provided, and the wide game area 1100 can entertain the player.

  Further, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray and the inlet (first Even when only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c) are provided, the game ball T can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made compatible with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path (full tank branching unit 770) of the game ball T in the main body frame 3. At the same time, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 including the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage trays.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be dealt with without changing the main body frame 3, so the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 The cost can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, the game ball T sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame provided with only one storage tray. Even if it is exchanged for 5, the game ball T paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage dish via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing due to lack of the game balls T for driving, and to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. Has become.

  Also, unless the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls T paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so the frequency of transferring the game balls T stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is set. It is possible to reduce the number of players, and the player can concentrate on the driving operation of the game ball T and the like, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side, and even if the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first ball Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 having two storing plates, It becomes possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls T by making the storage tray deep, without the player having to worry about the storage amount frequently. Along with being able to play games, it is possible to adapt to the door frame 5 provided with a different number of storage trays without changing the body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 of the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with the game balls T. Even if the game ball T cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 774 as a tan, the amount of the game ball T stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball outlet 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is possible. It is possible to increase the total amount of the game balls T stored in the upper plate 301 as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, the storage tray becomes full with the game balls T and the game balls T cannot be output from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full tank outlet 776. Also, since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many not only the normal passage 773 but also the full tank passage 775. The game balls T can be stored, and the substantial storage amount of the game balls T stored in the storage dish can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the amount of game balls T stored in each door frame 5 can be changed without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of maximizing the number and sufficiently corresponding to different door frames 5.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 are set to have a width that allows the game balls T to flow down in a plurality of rows, and the amount of staying of the game balls T in the full tank branching unit 770 (the storage amount ) Can be increased, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is different, the substantial storage amount of the game balls T in the full tank branching unit 770 is reduced. The pachinko machine 1 can be avoided and can be adapted to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path of the game ball T in the main body frame 3.

  Moreover, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the inside of the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, the game ball T is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770, which causes a problem. When it occurs, it is possible to easily find the location of the ball clogging from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to eliminate the defect early and increase the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view, and is attached to the main body frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to interrupt the flow of the game ball T.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed in the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 near the upper left end in front view so as not to project from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 792 held by the shutter base 791 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction; an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction; And an opening / closing spring 794 that biases the

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 slidably in the vertical direction so as to project above the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between the pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank arranged on the front surface of the left end in front view to support the opening / closing crank 793 rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b when viewed from the front, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed near the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front.

  Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a flat plate-shaped shutter main body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter main body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ) And a drive hole 792b having a horizontally long rectangular shape that is disposed between the pair of sliding protrusions and faces the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a right outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in front view. From the right side to the right, and the tip extends to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and the drive rod 793b is slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792 by protruding rearward from the tip of the drive rod 793b. Drive pin 793c, a contact portion 793d that extends downward from the lower outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and has a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end of the open / close spring 794 formed on the intermediate upper surface of the drive rod 793b). ) And a spring locking portion 793e for locking

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are made of transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised, it is arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774, the full ball outlet 776, and the like of the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the opening / closing crank 793 rotates about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, whereby the drive pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in an up-and-down direction in an arc shape, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening / closing shutter 792 is adapted to slide in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 contacts the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, The contact portion 793d is configured to be rotated clockwise in a front view against the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated clockwise in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the opening / closing shutter 792 is lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Rotates in the counterclockwise direction in front view by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 moves up to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Is able to.

  In this way, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically causes the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball T remaining in the full tank branching unit 770, the game ball T spills from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. Can be prevented.

[1-3F. Board unit]
Next, the board unit 800 in the body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. The board unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. The emission power board box 830 attached to the rear surface of the right end of the front view of 810, the power board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the emission power board box 830 from the rear side, and the power board box holder 840 A power supply board box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end formed to be substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front view of 860, and a main side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral side relay terminal board 882 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810. I have it.

  The board unit base 810 in the board unit 800 of the present example has a shape extending in the left-right direction as shown in the drawing, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered one step downward and is gradually inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shield wall portion 811 that protrudes forward from the front surface, an opening 812 that is disposed above the center of the shield wall portion 811 at the center in the left-right direction and that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shield wall portion 811. And a board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting section 813 in front view. A plurality of vertically elongated slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the tubular duct portion 814 that penetrates and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  In this board unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball-removing passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from dropping down from the base ball removal passage 622 and to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. In addition, the board base unit 810, through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction, the game ball T that has flowed down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810. You can send it.

  In the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main-side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 are forward from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. To face. Further, the board unit base 810 can favorably transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side through the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. With this, it is possible to form a housing recess for housing the firing power supply board box 830.

  The speaker box 820 of the board unit 800 literally includes a speaker 821 mounted facing the front side. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, has a horizontally elongated rectangular opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with a space on the rear side of the speaker 821 via a predetermined labyrinth-like passage to invert the phase of the sound on the rear side of the speaker 821 to the front side. The speaker box is a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting deep bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted forward. ing.

  The firing power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape having an open rear, and includes a firing power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 is designed to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the launching power supply board 831 therein, and heat from the electronic components and the like is passed through slits 830a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  The launch power supply board box 830 is detachable from above in a housing recess formed by a box housing 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box housing 844 of a power board box holder 840, which will be described later, and which is opened upward. It is supposed to be accommodated. Accordingly, in the state where the body frame 3 is assembled, when a problem occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the body frame 3 for replacement or repair. It is possible (see FIG. 63).

  Further, the emission power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the emission power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging electric power from the DC / DC converter 831a. And a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 to drive it. This emission power supply board box 830 has slits 830a as heat dissipation holes formed on its upper and lower surfaces in order to radiate heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the emission power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, a side surface of the firing power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed serves as a heat dissipation hole. The slit 830a is formed. In addition, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space of the launch power supply board box 830 into two spaces, a space for housing the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is an upper inner wall. Is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the inner wall with the lower surface. Accordingly, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 to close the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830, the inner space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces, that is, a housing space 830c for housing the DC / DC converter 831a and a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a, are formed, the partition wall 830b serves as a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0. , A storage space 830d for storing the DC / DC converter 831a and a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed by being released to the outside via the 830a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is a heat dissipation hole formed in each of the upper surface and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830d with the outside air. It is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated by being radiated to the outside through the slit 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launcher 650 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the emission power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the emission power supply board 831 can be easily handled due to its miniaturization, and the emission power supply board 831 can be replaced easily, which contributes to the reduction of the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the launch power supply board box 830 can be replaced with the launch power supply board 831 still attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830.

  Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches its end of life and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game must be interrupted, the work of exchanging the firing power supply substrate 831 is easy. By doing so, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be very easily eliminated, and the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire can be resolved at an early stage to restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life by being repeatedly charged and discharged, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time the drive solenoid 654 is driven and fired. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the island facility such as a game hall, but it does not repeatedly charge and discharge at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. As compared with the emission power board 831, its life is extremely long. In other words, the emission power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to the charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches its end of life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are provided not on the power supply board 851 but on the firing power supply board 831 which is a separate body from the power supply board 851. It is possible to concentrate the electronic components on the power supply board 851 due to the long-term change of As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component, which has a long service life and is aged, from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short service life.

  Further, since the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached / detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 holding the game board 4, the capacity for changing the hitting characteristics. Even if an illegal attempt is made to change to a different electrolytic capacitor SC0, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach and attach the launch power board 831, which makes it difficult to replace the launch power board 831. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to perform fraud, and to prevent fraud in which the firing power supply board 831 is intentionally changed by optimizing the firing power supply board 831 to be changed, and making it difficult to perform fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can prevent a player who is irritated from developing into fraud such as fraud.

  Further, since the emission power supply board 831 is detachable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the emission power supply board 831 is tampered with, the emission power supply board 831 is immediately replaced to prevent illicitness. It can be resolved, the period of interruption of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Further, a launch power supply board 831 provided with an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4, and due to a model change or the like. When the game board 4 is replaced, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) can also be easily replaced, so that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like which can realize the driving characteristics matching the concept of the new model to be replaced, etc. By replacing the launch power supply board 831 with the DC / DC converter 831a, the hitting characteristics of the hitting ball launching device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be made to match the new game board 4. it can. Therefore, the driving characteristics of the game ball T can be easily adjusted to the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model game board 4 can be fully enjoyed and the interest of the player is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the launching power supply board 831 can be attached and detached from the front side, when replacing the launching power supply board 831, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 with respect to the island equipment such as a game hall, and the time and effort required for the replacement can be reduced. It can be simplified and can be replaced in a short time, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed. Further, since the firing power supply board 831 (the firing power supply board box 830) is detachable and can be replaced, the cost for changing the driving characteristic is reduced as compared with the case where the entire payout control board 4110 is replaced. Therefore, the burden on the hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is exchanged so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are, so that the firing power supply board 831 can be used for a long period of time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like deteriorates, as described above, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. Therefore, a defect occurs due to the deterioration, and the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced to eliminate the trouble. It is possible to shorten the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to quickly eliminate the feeling of irritation and disappointment due to the interruption of the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding opening 601 of the main body frame 3, and the firing power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding opening 601 in order to be detached. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing a fraudulent act is entered through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the fraudulent tool reaches the firing power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from being fraudulently acted on, and the pachinko machine 1 having high defense power against fraudulent acts can be prevented.

  Further, the launching power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position for supporting the launching power supply board box 830 is rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3, so that the launch power supply is possible. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily ensured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply board box 830 and has the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, since the firing power supply board 831 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the firing power supply board 831 can be easily attached and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, the power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 easily deteriorates, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the problem can be resolved early to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely exhibit the above-described effects.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 has the game balls T discharged downward from the out-ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4 on the left front side rather than the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. A discharge ball receiving portion 841 to receive, a discharge passage 842 for guiding and discharging the game ball T received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841, and a side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) Of the power supply board box 850, which is opened forward and upward on the front surface of the power supply board box 830 and is capable of accommodating the rear side of the power supply board box 830. And a rear box accommodation portion 844 capable of accommodating the front end.

  The power supply substrate box holder 840 is configured such that the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 is located at a position desired for the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 is formed by flowing down the main body frame base ball-out passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and passing through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810. After the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842, the game ball T flowing down to the game ball T, which will be described in detail later, is discharged from the out ball discharge part 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving part 841. It can be discharged to the lower side.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810. The recess can be formed.

  Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 is configured to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the power supply board 851, and heat generated from the electronic components and the like can be externally transmitted through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 86, the power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

  In addition, the power supply board box 850 is a standing wall protruding rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminals 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power supply switch 852 on the power supply board 851 face the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c projecting rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 that is disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. A wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  In the power supply board box 850, as shown in FIG. 87, the standing wall portion 850b is slightly rearward of the rear end of the connector terminal 855 with the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 connected to the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854. Is formed so as to project to. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 with the wiring cord 854 wrapping around from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is adapted to be connected.

  By the way, when connecting the connector terminal where the wiring cord is extended to the connection terminal attached to the substrate and then pulling the wiring cord toward the substrate side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. There is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal because the terminal is pressed against the terminal side. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force such that the terminal 855 is pressed against the power supply terminal 853 side from acting, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

  Also, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side, so that the wiring cord 854 from the standing wall portion 850b. The wire cord 854 can be easily turned off by the wire guide portion 850d immediately after the wire cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, so that a series of work can be continuously performed. It can be performed, and the work process relating to the assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the size in the front-rear direction when assembled to each other is substantially the same as the size in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing the opening of the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851, and the connector 855 is projected by the standing wall portion 850b rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in a direction such that the connection with the 853 is released, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from being unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851. It is easy to remove the board, and maintenance such as replacement of the substrate can be easily performed.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, the bending degree of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from breaking due to the unreasonable force and causing a problem.

  Further, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 which the power supply terminal 853 faces, and the standing wall portion 850b is probably located adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended straight to the rear side as much as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and it is impossible. It is possible to prevent the application of various forces, and it is possible to prevent problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembling work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . Further, since the power supply board 850 is covered with the power supply board 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, or the like, which may cause a defect, from adhering to the power supply board 851, and the power supply board 851 is mounted on the power supply board 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) can be made difficult to touch or replace, and defense power against fraud can be enhanced. Has become.

  Further, the direction in which the connector terminals 855 are connected to the power supply terminals 853 on the power supply board 851 is a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminals are connected to the power supply terminals 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting 855 can be made to easily act on the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the breakage of the power source and the occurrence of a power failure, or the power terminal 853 is disengaged from the power substrate 851, so that the pachinko machine 1 is less likely to cause a defect.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means including the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 can be fixed. Even if a force acts on the connector terminal 855 in a direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 from being released. It is possible to reliably maintain the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 and prevent problems such as poor contact and poor current flow.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is provided with the protrusions 850c protruding rearward at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded in the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the protrusions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that prevents the above and surely achieves the above-described effects.

  Further, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 causes the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b to be moved to the standing wall portion 850b side, it is difficult for the wiring cord 854 to be removed from the standing wall portion 850b. In addition to ensuring the above-described effects, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. It is possible to carry out a series of operations continuously, and it is possible to simplify the work process relating to assembly and suppress an increase in cost.

  The payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 is a horizontally long, thin box-shaped box base 861 whose rear is opened, and a thin box-shaped cover which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and whose front is opened. 862, and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 126) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered with the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separating / cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 so as to project outward from the left end in rear view, and the separating / cutting portions 863 are provided at one place. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. Therefore, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862 from each other, the separation cutting section 863 cannot be separated without cutting, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, a trace thereof remains. . Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened and closed. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In the payout control board box 860, the error release switch 860a, the ball removal switch 860b, the inspection output terminal 860c, etc., which are attached to the payout control board 4110, face the rear through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are exposed rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the rear surface on the upper left side in rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in rear view. A board base 871 having the board base 871, a peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted on the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and a board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal plate cover 873 that is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b that extends vertically in a rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. CR unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency display for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal board 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 to the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each made of a transparent synthetic resin, and are connected to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and CR unit connection terminal from the outside to the inside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a problem such as a ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency display installed on the island facility side, the CR unit 6 or the like is displayed. A displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 of the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 includes a fixing piece (not shown) which is formed on an inner upper portion of the board mounting portion 871a and fixes an upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and a peripheral panel relay formed on a lower inner portion of the board mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  Further, the board base 871 has a board cover mounting portion 871b formed in a thin box shape that is open to the rear side, and the inner circumference thereof is sized so that the outer circumference of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall thereof is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 extends in the rearward direction from the bottom wall of the board cover attachment portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction. It is provided with two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f arranged on the left outside of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b in rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The protrusions 871e of the board base 871 are set in a state in which the amount of protrusion to the rear is slightly less than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in the figure, the protrusions 871e are provided on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as much as possible. It is placed so that it is close to

  Further, the board base 871 is disposed on the right rear surface of the board cover mounting portion 871b as viewed from the rear side in the vertical direction so as to be separated from each other, and a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the board box cover 875 and the left end as viewed from the rear side. And a locking portion 871h in the shape of a rectangular tube that is disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extends in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and is insertable into the board cover attachment portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner circumference of the opening portion 873b. The inner wall portion 873d extending forward from the 873a (on the side of the substrate base 871) and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are held so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 has a plurality of openings 873f arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and a vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f arranged in the center and is open on the left side in rear view, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (rightward) from the right end in rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. Pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and an elastic claw-shaped engagement member that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the rear and can be engaged with the engagement hole 871f of the substrate base 871. And a pawl piece 873i. Although not shown, inner wall portions 873d extending forward are also formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening portion 873f provided with the protection portion 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with its front side opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can prevent the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from the opened front side. At the same time, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the forward movement of the CR unit connection terminal board 874, and thus the CR unit connection terminal board 874 can be detachably held. Has become. Further, in the connection terminal plate cover 873, the fixing piece 873h is inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw piece 873i is locked in the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) thereof. In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360 and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a rectangular two-piece connector. There is.

  The board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the left and right ends of the through hole 875b to the front side. And a locking piece 875d which is locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The substrate box cover 875 pivotally supports the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be opened and closed. There is. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length such that an impact wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (a side pivotally supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and an impact wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective collision walls 875c are in a state of substantially contacting the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like this.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is the D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside even on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a rectangular two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear, as shown in the drawing.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of the present example is, in the assembled state, in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871. Of the projection 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the shaft portion 875a of the substrate box cover 875. Since the side wall 875c and the side wall 875c are respectively present, a multi-layered barrier wall is constructed and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an illegal tool having excellent flexibility is made to enter between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal is not bent. It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from a direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

  Further, in this terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 comes into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit connected as the CR unit connection terminal 874a is attached. Even if the D-sub connector in which a gap is formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer circumference of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered and fraudulent acts can be prevented. It is like this.

  In addition, the terminal board box 870 includes a pair of shaft portions 875a on a board box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the board base 871 on the side of the shaft portion 875a of the through hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Since an impact wall 875c having a length that spans between them is provided and the impact wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like can be inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to perform fraudulent activity and reducing the deterrent force. It can be expensive.

  Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, in a state in which the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b formed as a two-piece connector, it is illegal to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the protection portion 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

  As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is attached to the rear surface of the body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the body frame 3 are separated from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through the space between the pachinko machine 1 and the tip of the illegal tool enters the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal board 874. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts on the CR unit connection terminal board 874.

  Further, in a state where the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board in the direction along the front surface (the back surface of the board) of the CR unit connection terminal board 874. The ridge 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871 and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d and the board of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the impact wall 875c of the box cover 875 is present respectively, a multi-layered defense wall is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. By analogy, an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility is attempted to enter between (boundary) between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871. Also, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent unauthorized tools from entering from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. The pachinko machine 1 can surely prevent fraudulent acts on the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, it is possible to cover the outer periphery of the exposed lead portion by the inner wall portion 873d, and it is possible to reliably prevent fraud.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported by the rear surface of the board base 871 to cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be openable and closable, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided. The board box cover 875 having a plate-shaped collision wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the through hole 875b on the pivotally supported side to the rear surface of the board base 871 is further provided. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected by the collision wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the board cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal board 874) from reaching the side and prevent fraudulent acts. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the board box cover 875 and then the connection terminal board cover 873, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to increase the deterrence against misconduct. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the collision wall 875c, even if an attempt is made to insert a driver or the like between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 Can be prevented from being distorted and a gap can be prevented from being formed, and fraudulent acts can be made difficult and deterrence can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, even if an attempt is made to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, an illegal act will be performed. Since the protective portion 873g and the board box cover 875 cover the rear side of the corresponding opening portion 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body, outside the terminal board box 870. The needle-shaped electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the terminals of the connected wiring cords, and high crime prevention capability. Can be one.

  Further, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e that holds the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, which can be kept protected by Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an unauthorized tool inserted into the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 housed inside, or has the CR unit connection terminal board 874 itself been replaced with an unauthorized tool? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether or not the electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like are replaced with unauthorized ones. , Because it is possible to detect fraudulent acts and it becomes easier to find fraudulent acts, so do not hesitate to perform fraudulent acts against those who perform fraudulent acts. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the rear surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 5 is turned to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal board 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 is turned to the operator side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are the peripheral control board 4010 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, etc., and the door frame. 5 is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in 5, the respective decorative boards, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a board formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals are directed from the front surface of the main body frame base 600 to the front side.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side are exposed to the front through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

  Further, the main relay terminal board 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a lending remaining display portion 363, a rotation position detection sensor of the handle device 500 of the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is provided in each of the decoration units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decoration boards 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control board 4010 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. This back cover 900 has a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side 904. A plurality of axial support pins 906 that are arranged in the vertical direction and project downward and are axially supported by the back cover axial support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball that is formed on the upper and lower left sides of the main body portion 902 in front view, respectively. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and the back cover 900 near the lower engaging piece 908. 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the fastening mechanism 920 of the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating to the left side in the front-rear direction in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 of the main body 902 of the back cover 900. 921, a vertically elongated rectangular locking hole 922 that is disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in a rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and locking that is elastically locked from the rear side to the locking hole 922. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a slot 923b of the guide member 923, which is inserted from the rear side of the main body 902. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921, and a guide member 923 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924. It includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. The guide member 923 of the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is adapted to be locked in the locking opening 922 of the main body 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disc-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and the fastening member 924 is extended along the long hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out from the long hole 923b. In this fastening mechanism 920, when the locking piece 923 a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking opening 922 of the main body 902, the fastening member 924 protruding to the front side through the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body 902.

  In the back cover 900 of this example, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the main body frame base 600, the rear side opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned with each other.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side in the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even if the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male screw part 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 projects rearward from the main body 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 of the main body 902 of the back cover 900, so that the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900. The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, from this state, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. When the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example does not remove the fastening member 924 even if the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is oblique with respect to the main body 902. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male screw portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, the fastening and the fastening can be easily performed only by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. The back cover 900 can be released, and the labor required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified and the maintainability can be improved.

  In addition, the back cover 900 has a connection cutout 910 that is cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower end on the right side of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that penetrates the connection cutout 910 in a rectangular shape above the connection cutout 910 in the front view. The main body 902 is provided with a rectangular notch for confirmation 914 and a confirmation notch 914 at the lower left corner of the main body 902.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is in a state of being closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the RAM clear switch 1103a and the test terminal 1103b of the main control board box 1103 in the game board 4 through the connection cutout portion 910. Is facing the rear side. In addition, the back cover 900 has a board management seal 1103c (see FIG. 5) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1103 through the checking opening 912 so as to face the rear side, The sealing portion 1103d of the main control board box 1103 is exposed through the cutout portion 914. Thereby, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1103 and the main control board 4100 without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating the main body 902 and the side portion 904 in an elongated shape. It can be discharged to the outside of the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through holes 918 are provided at a position slightly leftward from the center when viewed from the front and are wide and extend long in the vertical direction and are arranged in rows at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. These through holes 918 are the rear side of the effect display device 1115 on the game board 4 in a state where the back cover 900 is closed to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is housed and held in the main body frame 3. It is located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control board 4010 and the like provided therein, so that heat from the peripheral control board 4010 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. By the way, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball T so that the game ball T does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Accordingly, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. Since the game board 4 is held by the main body frame 3, the rear cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance and the like on the rear side of the game board 4, Even if the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is still guided by the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 by being held by the back cover 900 via the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off the opened back cover 900, and therefore it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 that has been fastened at a predetermined position at the time of maintenance or the like. Since it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, maintenance can be facilitated.

  Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be directly positioned in the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a can be securely held in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened to. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, since the holding member 925 that cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 with respect to the guide member 923 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion of the holding member 925 and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off from the long hole 923b of the guide member 923, and at the same time, the holding member 925. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by a gap between the guide member 923 and the slot 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess for accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to the back cover of the main body frame 3. When the fastening member 924 is fastened to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 can be brought into close contact with each other. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that another member abuts the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of a defect. In addition to being able to do so, it can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion so as to be screwed and coupled with the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening can be performed only by pulling as compared with the engagement by the locking claw. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent activity can be obtained.

  Further, since the guide member 923 is flexible and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921). It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 at a position straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the body frame 3 and to move the male screw portion 924 straightly with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. Therefore, the male screw part 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In addition, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 of the locking hole 922 of the back cover 900 with the locking hole. Since it is elastically locked to the 922, the tip end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably attached is a shaft extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. The locking piece 923a can be moved to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the front end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. Is further provided with a plurality of engaging pieces 908, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is performed. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be minimized by using the fastening member 924 as only one place, and the work such as assembling and maintenance can be performed. You can improve your sex. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the rear side of the game board 4) in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening members 924.

  Further, by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. Therefore, only by rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b through the insertion hole 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3, even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is opened. The cover 900 can be left in a state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, there is no need to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the labor for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Lock device]
Subsequently, the locking device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. The locking device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached along the outer side surface of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3 on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 from approximately the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 68. In addition, the door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front end frame portion 602 on the right side (open side) of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600, the lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and the peripheral wall of the main body frame base 600. A plurality of lock attachment portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front, and are attached.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, a lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base body 1001 as a lock base body having a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base body 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are U-shaped so that the sliding cannot be performed illegally. Tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the bottom of the base 1001.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 in the locking device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped base body 1001 is extremely thin in its lateral width dimension as compared with a conventional locking device in which a base body formed in an L-shaped cross section is integrated. As a result, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased, which further increases the game area. 1100 wide game boards 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is mounted such that the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the locking device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame 3, the U-shaped base 1001 is U-shaped. The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 become the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is in a completely covered state and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to fraudulently act on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate above and below the open side (rear side) and the closed side (front side). A hook through opening 1002, an upper portion of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, a screw stopper portion 1003 protruding outward toward the middle, and a screw stopper portion. An upper end and an intermediate portion on the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projecting portion 1003 is provided, and the lower ends of the both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side protrude forward. The locking projection 1004 is provided.

  The screw fastening portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is the hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other when the screw locking portion 621 is moved upward after being inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the lock device 1000.

  The lock device 1000 is mounted by screws not only in the upper and middle screw stoppers 1003, but also in the vicinity of the screw stopper 1003 formed on a lock mounting piece 1008 described below and the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is also fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower portion of the lock device 1000 can also be attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions in the upper, lower and middle of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are provided with the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole for the door. Since the structure is such that the lock device 1000 is inserted into the main body frame base 621 for positioning and locking, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw. It can be firmly fixed to the (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the locking device 1000 on the front side and the rear side. It can be fixed to. Particularly, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking protrusion 1004 forming the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) is provided on the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 forming the rear side fixing structure is provided so as to project from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front side locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as to prevent rattling, as compared with the case where the locking device 1000 is formed on the close side surface 1001b.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking it with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper ends of the rivet oblong holes 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower ends of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050, respectively. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved upward and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 is provided with a tamper-proof notch 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower part thereof and a side surface 1001b which is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side and protrudes laterally from the front end. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed in the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. Although the details of the fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001 will be described later, the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 moves forward and backward. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is provided on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The lock insertion hole 1009, which is provided so as to project from the front end portion to the side, and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010, are attached at the upper and lower two positions so as to be mounted with the screw 1012. A mounting hole 1014 bored in the bottom of the lock device 1000 and a screw fastening portion 1003 bored to attach the lower part of the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the body frame 3 are formed.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 into which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking a spring 1035 for urging the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward; Is equipped with.

  The cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engaging cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and has one end side serving as a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement projection 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  In this cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted from a rear side into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in a lock attachment piece 1008, and then attachment holes 1013 formed in two upper and lower portions of a lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base body 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through.

  The tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illicitly rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire or a wire, thereby tampering with the body frame sliding rod 1050. This is to prevent lowering. As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023, together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, which are arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001, passes through the swing shaft hole 1025. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first tampering prevention member 1023 opens vertically in a plate-shaped surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base body 1001 so that the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The projecting piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 penetrates through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The ascending engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is obliquely inclined to the outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 diagonally above and diagonally so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates. The inclined portion 1024 is provided, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97B (the clockwise direction in FIG. 97B).

  Further, the first tampering prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base body 1001 side from the outer periphery of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 obliquely rearward and downward, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a restriction protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that penetrate through the restriction protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and that are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inserted into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when the body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked. Thus, it is possible to prevent the body frame sliding rod 1050 from unintentionally sliding. Further, the restriction protrusion 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, whereby the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed in the pin hole 1029 is Guide the first tampering prevention member 1023 along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001 by engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base body 1001. You can do it. Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 rotatably by the connection pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of a plate material having an inverted “te” shape, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second tampering prevention member 1032 may be rotatably connected to the first tampering prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first tampering prevention member 1023. You can do it. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked by the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 urges the spring upward. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 contacts the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the locking device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base body 1001 and is formed by a vertically long metal plate member. The door sliding rod 1040 includes door frame hook portions 1041 that project toward the front at three locations in the upper, lower, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the body frame base 600, the door frame 5 projects forward from a door hook hole 620 formed in the body frame base 600 (see FIGS. 63 and 68, etc.). It can be engaged with a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the drawing, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover can be lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet elongated hole 1042 and for the door frame. The lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040 is provided with a guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The rivet elongate hole 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040 is adapted to be inserted with the rivet 1006 inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the rivet 1006 is attached to the door frame sliding rod. It is formed vertically long so as not to interfere with the raising operation of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 that penetrates the upper end of the rivet elongated hole 1042 is in contact with the rivet elongated hole 1042. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is configured such that the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, it is possible to guide the mutual sliding operation of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 has a spring hook portion 1046 formed at the upper end portion to lock one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 causes the sliding of the door frame. The rod 1040 is biased downward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 is biased upward, respectively. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes an abutting elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle of the vertical direction, and is pressed from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001 and can prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like this.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an elongated play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 has a tip end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The section constitutes a movable space. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the ascending engagement hole 1045 is configured such that the pivot movement of the engagement cam 1016 causes the door frame sliding rod 1040 to ascend. For engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief cutout portion 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction larger than the tampering prevention cutout portion 1007 in the lower rear portion of the vertical side. The escape notch 1049 interferes with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 surely engages with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The relevant part is cut out so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a metal plate upper hook member 1051, a metal plate lower hook member 1052, a connecting wire rod 1052 for connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, Is equipped with. That is, the body frame sliding rod 1050 is not composed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the conventional case, but is made of a metal including the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at an upper end portion, and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating left and right in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left-right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided at the upper portion on the inner side of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw portion is formed upward.

  The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the rivet elongated hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The guide protrusion 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protrusion moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051. The mutual movement with the 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is bent and inserted. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. It has no play and can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 has a hook portion 1065 protruding rearward from the lower end portion and a rivet for penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052. The elongated hole 1061, the downward engaging hole 1062 arranged below the elongated hole for rivet 1061, the play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engaging hole 1062, and the play hole 1063 below the play hole 1063. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement hole formed at the lower portion of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portions 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed on the lower portion on the inner side of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw portion is formed upward. Further, the rivet elongated hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet elongated hole 1061 is riveted. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061. This allows the lower hook member 1052 to move downward.

  Further, when the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 descends the body frame sliding rod 1050 by the rotating operation. Is for engaging. In addition, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is inserted into the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 so that the second engagement protrusion 1018 does not interfere with the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 is rotated. The tip of the can form a movable space. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052. Mutual movement with the moving rod 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 is configured to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without any play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in this state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped with each other. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook penetrating opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001 while sliding the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding member. After inserting the moving rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005.

  When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the long holes for rivet 1055, 1061, 1042. When inserting the rivet 1006 at the lowermost end, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tampering prevention member 1023 and attach the first tampering prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base body 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is fixed to the pin hole. It is necessary to fix the guide pin 1028 to the 1029 with a screw (not shown) and then insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

  Further, in a state where the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base body 1001 by the rivets 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is closed. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in mutually opposite directions, and further, the spring 1035 is hung over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent second fraud. The member 1032 is brought into contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion vertical opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024, and the second engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is also inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first tampering prevention member 1023.

  In this way, in order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking projection 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning with the lock attaching portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the corresponding hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 forming the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fastening portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the locking structure at the front portion contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the lock device 1000 is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as to prevent rattling.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, the closing plates 24, 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are engaged with each other, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 are The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In that state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96 (B). The tip of the first engaging projection 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to push the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and to connect with this. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down to descend. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the body frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the body frame 3 to the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a state of being raised by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as the state shown in FIG. 96A), but the hook portion 1054. , 1065 has an upper side inclined downwardly toward the outer side, and therefore, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is closed by the closing plates 24, 25. Since it abuts against the lower end portion, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 upward claw portions and the closing plates 24 and 25 are again locked with each other. The rod 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a not-shown key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), The tip of the second engaging projection piece 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes up the door frame sliding rod 1040 upward against the biasing force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 is pulled by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a state of being lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the inclined portion of the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame becomes the hook cover 165. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is lifted upward by abutting the upper end of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The moving rod 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the entire length of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the U-shaped base body 1001 has a substantially vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to reliably lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire between them. You are unable to perform any act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 for the door frame 3 according to the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. By rotating, the locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. In addition, the locking device 1000 of this example does not engage in an illegal act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. You can't. The first of the structures for preventing such fraud is a locking mechanism composed of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact each other. It is in the state of doing. In this state, the urging force of the spring 1035 causes the first tampering prevention member 1023 to rotate counterclockwise, the stopper piece 1027 enters the tampering prevention cutout 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is tampered with. It is in a state of being engaged with an engaging notch portion 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the body frame sliding rod 1050 to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to illegally pull down (unlock) downward, and it is impossible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. Starting to rotate in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state to also rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. As a result, the entire main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, so that the hooked portions 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 of the outer frame 2 are released from each other, and the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

  When closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the positional relationship shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is reached. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not interfere with the closing of the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050 from being fraudulently performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised so that the body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be tampered with.

  Even with the lock mechanism that is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the body frame 3 (body frame base 600), The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the above are completely accommodated in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065. Since it is in the state, even if an attempt is made to pull down the main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base body 1001. Since this prevents illicit tools from entering the enclosed space, the structure is such that illicit acts cannot be performed easily.

  As described above, the locking device 1000 of the present embodiment has a lateral width dimension that is extremely thin as compared with a conventional locking device in which the L-shaped base body is integrated into the U-shaped base body 1001. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 to the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position lower than the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be firmly attached.

  Further, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 having a U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, which are arranged in the above, are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is impossible to easily carry out an illegal act such as inserting a piano wire or the like and pulling down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided therein.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three positions on the open side (front part) of the U-shaped base body 1001 at the upper, middle, and lower sides are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. Since it is structured such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three positions on the upper, middle and lower sides of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base body 1001 are fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with screws, it is extremely simple. With such a structure, the locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, a screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 and a portion near the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 have a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base body 1001 with a screw. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 that attaches the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. A structure may be adopted in which lock mounting holes that are screwed through the piece 1008 are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625. It can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

  Further, in the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base body 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped base body (lock base body), and a door frame slide rod 1040 and a main body frame slide rod are placed in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base body (lock base body) and a first side wall 540. The structure may be such that 1050 is housed, and the same operational effects as those of the locking device 1000 described above can be obtained.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (forward and backward) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The rear wall of the prize ball base that aligns the prize ball tank 720 storing the game ball T supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed with the game ball T discharged from the prize ball tank 720. A transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the portion 710b, and a game ball T discharged from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction. After the prize ball base 710. The prize ball device 740, a part of which is attached to the rear side of the wall portion 710b, is transparent, and the side part 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, and the rear surface is the tank rail unit 730 or the prize ball device 74. Since it has a transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially flush with the rear surface, the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900 and the like. The rear side and the rear side surface can be visually recognized, and the rear side of the game board 4 can be easily inspected (visual inspection) without opening the back cover 900 covering the rear side of the game board 4. It may be the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., so that the game board holding port of the main body frame base 600 can be seen. Even when tools such as a driver and pliers, cleaning waste, dust and dirt are left between the game board 4 and the back cover 900 when the game board 4 is detached from the front side of the 601 side, remove them. It can be easily found from the above, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of some trouble due to the residue.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, an unauthorized device or tool for performing an illegal act is attached to the rear surface or the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is found, it can be easily found, fraudulent acts can be prevented, and a fraudulent device attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside. The pachinko machine 1 can be hesitant to attach an unauthorized device or the like, and has a high deterrent against illegal acts.

  Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to maintain the game board 4 in a good state and prevent a problem from occurring.

  Further, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described operational effects are reliably exhibited. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is set to about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is laid down can be made as low as possible to have a flat shape. The attachment work for attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 can be facilitated.

  Furthermore, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be a substantially flat surface, and by eliminating rearward projections, it can be caught or abutted on other members in the installed island equipment. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, a buffer material having a simple shape can be used when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, and the stacking efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 and the like. It is possible to make the rear side of No. 4 and the like easier to see, and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and control can be prevented from becoming instable due to heat, which makes the game control unstable and deforms members such as synthetic resin. be able to. Further, the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are set to a size such that the game ball T cannot pass through. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball T spills to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the slit 916 is formed. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from entering the pachinko machine 1 through the like, and to prevent a problem from occurring due to the game ball T entering.

[2. Game board configuration]
The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 125. As shown in FIG. 98, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is attached to the frame-shaped front component member 1111 that partitions the outer peripheral side of the game area 1100 and the rear side of the front component member 1111. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped game panel 1112 that defines the rear end side of the game area 1100.

  The front component 1111 is formed in a quadrangular outer peripheral shape, and the inner peripheral shape is formed in a substantially semi-circular shape on the left side and a substantially U shape on the right side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The front constituent member 1111 forms a first inner wall portion (outer rail) 1111a that is smoothly connected to the entire semicircular portion on the inner peripheral surface and a portion extending to the left and right above the U-shaped portion. In the U-shaped portion, the remaining vertically extending portion and the lower horizontally extending portion form an L-shaped second inner wall portion 1111b. Further, the front component member 1111 is a guide wall extending in an arc shape along the first inner wall portion 1111a from the lower end of the second inner wall portion 1111b (the left end of the portion extending left and right in front view) to the vicinity of the upper left corner in front view. An (inner rail) 1111c and a check piece 1111d rotatably attached to the upper end of the guide wall 1111c are provided.

  The game panel 1112 has an out port 1112a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the lower end of the inner periphery of the front component member 1111 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The out port 1112a is formed at a position where the lower end of the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component member 1111 and the lower end of the guide wall 1111c are connected. In addition, the game panel 1112 is formed with an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction substantially at the center of the game area 1100.

  Further, the game board 4 has a board holder 1102 (see FIG. 6) attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1112, a main control board box 1103 attached to the board holder 1102, and a main control board box 1103. A main control board 4100 (see FIG. 126) that is stored inside and controls the game contents, and a function that displays a game state and the like based on a control signal from the main control board 4100 and is attached to the front component member 1111. And a display 1114.

  Further, the game board 4 is mounted on the rear side of the game panel 1112 so as to be visible from the front side through the opening of the game panel 1112, and on the rear side of the display panel 1115 for main control. A peripheral control board 4010 for controlling the effect display device 1115 and the like based on a control signal from the board 4100. Further, the game board 4 includes a front unit 1120 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1112 in the front view game area 1100, and a back unit 3000 (see FIG. 6) attached to the rear side of the game panel 1112. , Are provided.

  The table unit 1120 is attached to the center of the game area 1100 in a front view and divides the game area 1100 into right and left, and a winning opening attached to the lower side of the center accessory 1130. And a unit 1150.

[2-1. Center goods]
The center accessory 1130 is formed in a frame shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the game panel 1112 in a state of being inserted from the front side into the opening of the game panel 1112. This center accessory 1130 emits the warp entrance 1131 into which the game ball T can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side in front view, and the game ball T that has entered the warp entrance 1131 and opens at the lower part in the center in the left-right direction in front view. And a warp outlet 1132.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the left flow path on the left side of the center accessory 1130 in front view, the game ball T that has been driven into the left flow path (passed left) passes. A gate member 1134 that is enabled and a gate sensor 1135 that detects passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134 are provided. Then, as will be described later, in this left flow path, a downflow path is provided in which the game ball T that has passed through the gate member 1134 can be further received in the first starting port 1152.

  Further, on the right side of the center accessory 1130 as viewed from the front, the right flow path 1133 through which the game ball T can flow down, and the game ball T that has been driven into the right flow path 1133 (right hit) are allowed to pass. A gate member 1134 that is present and a gate sensor 1135 that detects passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134 are provided.

  The right flow channel 1133 is an opening that opens upward below the stop portion 1111e where the first inner wall portion 1111a and the second inner wall portion 1111b at the upper right corner in the front view intersect with each other in the front component member 1111. A port 1133a, an entrance passage 1133b for guiding the game ball T downward from the entrance 1133a, and a gate space 1133c of a predetermined size in which a gate member 1134 is arranged in the center, which is connected to the lower end of the entrance passage 1133b, A guide path 1133d that guides the game ball T downward from a lower end of the gate space 1133c along a part of the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component member 1111 and a lower end of the guide path 1133d that opens the game ball T downward. And a discharge port 1133e for discharging to.

  The right channel 1133 has an entrance 1133a opening larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, and an entrance path 1133b following the entrance 1133a has a width slightly wider than the outer diameter of the game ball T on the lower end side. It is formed so that it becomes narrower as it goes downward. The gate space 1133c greatly expands vertically and horizontally under the entry path 1133b, and is formed in a size that allows the game ball T to flow down on both the left and right sides of the gate member 1134 arranged at the substantially center. In the gate space 1133c, the gate member 1134 is arranged at a position slightly rightward of the front view from directly below the approach passage 1133b. The bottom surface of the gate space 1133c is inclined so as to be lower toward the right side in a front view, and the upper end of the guide path 1133d is opened at the lowest right end portion.

  The guide path 1133d extends in an arc shape along a vertically extending portion of the second inner wall portion 1111b of the front component member 1111. As shown in FIG. 98 and the like, a plurality of protrusions are provided on the inner wall of the guide path 1133d, and the abutment speed of the game ball T can be suppressed by abutting the game ball T on these protrusions. This guideway 1133d extends downward to a height of about half the height of the game area 1100. The discharge port 1133e at the lower end of the guide path 1133d opens slightly to the left when viewed from the front.

[2-2. Schematic configuration of the winning unit]
The winning opening unit 1150 is arranged below the discharge opening 1133e of the right channel 1133 in the center accessory 1130, and is a general winning entrance 1151 that can always receive the game ball T, and a warp exit 1132 of the center accessory 1130. A first starting opening 1152 arranged on the lower side and capable of always receiving the game ball T, and a second starting opening arranged on the right side of the first starting opening 1152 when viewed from the front and always opening into the game area 1100. 1153, a big winning opening 1154 which is arranged below the first starting opening 1152 and which can receive the game ball T by opening and closing according to the game state, and arranged on the right side of the second starting opening 1153 in front view. It is arranged in the inside area of the prize winning opening 1155, in which the game ball T can be received by opening and closing according to the game state, and the prize winning opening 1155. And V winning hole 1156 game balls T accepted there is a receivable 55, a.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 103, the winning opening unit 1150 is provided with a first starting opening 1152 and is mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1112. A transparent front passage forming member 1161 which is provided with a general winning opening 1151 and forms a passage of the game ball T, and a transparent front surface attached to the front side of the front passage forming member 1161. A decorative plate 1162, an attacker unit 1200 arranged in the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction and provided with a special winning opening 1154, and attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160, and the front of the attacker unit 1200. The variable starter which is arranged diagonally to the upper right and is provided with the second starting port 1153 and is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160. The mouth unit 1210 and the accessory unit 1220 which is arranged on the right side of the variable starting mouth unit 1210 when viewed from the front, is provided with the accessory winning hole 1155 and the V winning opening 1156, and is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160. And are equipped with.

  Further, the winning opening unit 1150 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 and guides the game ball T received in the first starting opening 1152 downward. The first starting opening guide member 1163 and the first starting opening. The ball detection sensor 1164 attached to the guide member 1163 for detecting the game ball T received in the first starting opening 1152, and the LED mounted on the front surface of the ball detecting sensor 1164 arranged behind the first starting opening 1152. The first starting opening decoration board 1165, the board stay 1166 that supports the first starting opening decoration board 1165 and is attached to the first starting opening guide member 1163, and the base at a position below the attacker unit 1200. The board 1160 is provided with a special winning opening decoration substrate 1167 mounted on the rear side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface.

  The winning opening unit 1150 is disposed on the rear side of the base plate 1160, above the second starting opening 1153, and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the second starting opening decoration board 1168 and the second starting opening. A starter reflector 1169 that covers the front side of the decorative substrate 1168 and is attached to the variable starter unit 1210, and a second starter 1153 that is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 at a position below the variable starter unit 1210. The guide member 1170 for the second starting port that guides the game ball T received in the downward direction, and the game ball T that is attached to the guide member 1170 for the second starting port and is received by the second starting port 1153 is detected. A ball detection sensor (not shown) and an attacker solenoid 1204 and an attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker unit 1200 mounted on the rear side of the second starting port guide member 1170. A first relay board 1172 that relays the connection between the starter solenoid 1215 of the variable starter unit 1210 and the main control board 4100, and a rear side of the second starter guide member 1170 that covers the rear side of the first relay board 1172. And a substrate cover 1173 attached thereto.

  Further, the winning prize unit 1150 is attached to the rear side of the accessory unit 1220 and covers the rear side of the accessory unit 1220, and the accessory unit cover 1174 is provided above the accessory winning port 1155. A prize winning opening decoration substrate 1175 arranged on the upper part of the front surface and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a prize winning prize attached to the accessory unit cover 1174 that covers the front side of the prize winning opening decoration substrate 1175. The mouth reflector 1176, the vibration sensor 1177 attached to the center of the front surface of the accessory unit cover 1174, the accessory winning solenoid 1225 and the V winning solenoid 1232 of the accessory unit 1220, and the connection to the main control board 4100 are relayed. Two relay boards 1178 and attached to the rear side of the accessory unit cover 1174 A general winning opening guide member 1179 that guides the game ball T received in 1151 downward, and a general winning prize that detects the game ball T that is attached to the general winning opening guide member 1179 and is received in the general winning opening 1151. Mouth sensor 1180 (see FIG. 126).

  The base plate 1160 of the winning opening unit 1150 has a receiving portion 1160a that projects forward in the upper part of the left portion in front view, is open at the top and the rear, and forms the first starting opening 1152, and the receiving portion 1160a. An attacker opening 1160b that penetrates the front and rear on the lower side and extends to the left and right, and a later-described special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 of the attacker unit 1200 is inserted from the rear side, and an upper part of the central portion in the left-right direction in front view. A second starting port opening 1160c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and the second starting port 1153 faces the rear side, and a second starting-port opening 1160c that penetrates the second starting port opening 1160c in the left-right direction in the front-rear direction and extends in a slit shape, which will be described later. The front side of the starting opening door member 1214 of the starting opening unit 1210 is a door slit 1160d through which the front side can pass, and the starting opening reflector 116 is located above the door slit 1160d. Comprises of a second start hole upper shelf emitting decorative unit 1160e emitted decorated on the left and right on the front side and a position by arrayed has been and second start hole LED decorative substrate 1168, the.

  Further, the base plate 1160 penetrates back and forth on the right side when viewed from the front of the second starting mouth upper shelf light emitting decoration portion 1160e to form a character prize winning hole 1155 of the character prize unit 1220A of the character unit 1220 described later. The upper part of the upper housing 1222 and the lower housing 1223 are inserted so that the front parts thereof project from the rear side to the front, and the accessory winning hole reflector 1176 is provided above the accessory winning hole opening 1160f. The accessory winning opening light emitting decoration portion 1160g, which is arranged in a row on the left and right at the front side and is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs of the accessory winning opening decoration substrate 1175, and penetrates back and forth under the accessory winning opening opening 1160f. The ball guide member 1238, which will be described later, of the V winning opening unit 1220B of the accessory unit 1220 is inserted so as to project from the rear side to the front side. The V winning opening 1160h and the gaming ball T received in the general winning opening 1151 of the front flow path forming member 1161 in the form of a gutter that extends rearward in the upper part of the right part in front view and is open upward. A gutter part 1160i that guides it to the rear and transfers it to the general winning opening guide member 1179 is provided.

  As shown in FIGS. 99 and 102, the front flow path forming member 1161 projects from the front surface of the flat base plate 1160 into the front game area 1100, and the flat front plate portion 1161a is the front surface. It is shaped like a shallow box with the rear side open. The front flow path forming member 1161 is open to the upper right and the rear in the front view, and the receiving portion 1161b that guides the game ball T received from the upper side to the rear to form the general winning opening 1151 and the receiving portion 1161b. From the receiving part 1161b to the extension line of the left side of the receiving part 1161b, which is separated from the receiving part 1161b by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, and is a shelf-like receiving part lower shelf part. 1161c, the receiving part lower right standing wall part 1161d extending downward from the left end of the receiving part lower shelf part 1161c to the upper part of the prize winning opening 1155, and the receiving part 1161b is separated from the receiving part 1161b to the left side in front by a distance larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T. Position lower than the receiving part lower shelf 1161c and above the character prize opening 1155 (from the character prize opening / closing member 1221 of the character prize opening unit 1220A described later to the outer diameter of the game ball T). The receiving part left standing wall portion 1161e extending vertically to a position slightly higher than the position) and the right side of the left end of the winning part winning hole 1155 along the upper side of the winning part winning opening 1155 from the lower end of the receiving part left standing wall part 1161e. It is provided with an accessory winning opening upper ceiling wall portion 1161f extending leftward to the upper side.

  In addition, the front flow path forming member 1161 is lowered to the left from the position in contact with the left end of the accessory winning hole 1155 (effect winning opening opening / closing member 1221) which is lower left than the left end of the accessory winning opening upper ceiling wall portion 1161f. A short leftward winning part entrance portion 1161g, and a second starting opening area right upright wall portion 1161h extending vertically from the right end of the left end shelf portion 1161g of accessory winning part vertically below the second starting opening 1153. A second starting opening area lower shelf 1161i extending leftward from the lower end of the second starting opening area right upright wall portion 1161h to the left end of the front flow path forming member 1161 so that the left side is lowered.

  Further, the front flow path forming member 1161 is separated from the second starting opening region right standing wall portion 1161h to the left by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, and from the upper surface of the accessory winning hole left shelf portion 1161g. A distance larger than the outer diameter of T and extending leftward to a position above the left center of the second starting opening region lower shelf 1161i in the left-right direction so that the left side becomes lower from the position away from the lower side. The second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j arranged at a position immediately above the second starting opening 1153 and the right end of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j hang downward so as to cover the right side of the second starting opening 1153. The second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k, the guiding piece 1161l protruding leftward as it goes forward from the second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k, and the outer diameter of the game ball T from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j. Than And a, a second start hole area left vertical wall 1161m extending vertically to a position downward from the upper position than the second start hole upper shelf portion 1161j are separated into slightly larger left.

  The winning opening unit 1150 of the present embodiment includes a ball detection sensor 1164 attached to the first starting opening guide member 1163 and a ball detection sensor 1208 described below attached to the attacker unit 1200. The first starting opening sensor 1190 for detecting the game ball T received in 1152 is formed. Further, a sphere detection sensor (not shown) attached to the second starting port guide member 1170 and a sphere detection sensor 1213 (to be described later) attached to the variable starting port unit 1210 are received by the second starting port 1153. A second starting port sensor 1191 for detecting the game ball T is formed.

  Further, as will be described later in detail, the winning hole unit 1150 is provided in a winning hole sensor 1206 for detecting the game ball T received in the winning hole 1154 of the attacker unit 1200, and a winning prize hole 1155 of the winning unit 1220. It is provided with a prize winning hole sensor 1224 for detecting the accepted game ball T, and a specific sensor 1239 for detecting the game ball T accepted by the V winning hole 1156 of the prize unit 1220.

[2-2A. Attacker unit]
As shown mainly in FIGS. 104 to 106, the attacker unit 1200 of the winning prize unit 1150 has a large winning prize opening 1154 which is open toward the front and extends in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a large winning prize opening 1154. An under-attacker base 1201 that forms a lower portion, an over-attacker base 1202 that is attached to the upper side of the under-attacker base 1201 and that is attached to the base plate 1160 and that forms the upper part of the special winning opening 1154, an under-attacker base 1201 and an over-attacker It is attached between a special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 which is rotatably supported by a base 1202 about an axis extending in the left-right direction and which opens and closes the special winning opening 1154, and an attacker lower base 1201 and an attacker upper base 1202. Atta that has a plunger 1204a that moves forwards and backwards according to the gaming state Cassolen 1204, a link member 1205 for opening and closing the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 by transmitting the advance / retreat of the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204, and a game ball attached to the under-attacker base 1201 and received in the special winning opening 1154. A special winning opening sensor 1206 for detecting T, a guide member 1207 attached below the attacker lower base 1201 for guiding the game ball T detected by the big winning opening sensor 1206 to the rear, and an upper attacker base 1202. It is provided with a ball detection sensor 1208 attached to the upper portion and detecting the game ball T received in the first starting port 1152.

  The special winning opening 1154 formed in the attacker unit 1200 is a horizontally long rectangular shape that is 4 to 6 times as long as the diameter of the game ball T in the front view and is slightly longer in the vertical direction than the diameter of the game ball T. The opening is opened by a plate-shaped special winning opening opening / closing member 1203. In the special winning opening 1154, the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 is rotatable around the lower side as a rotation axis, and when the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 is in a substantially vertical state, the game ball T cannot be received, When the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 is in a substantially horizontal state, the gaming ball T can be received, which is a so-called variable winning opening.

  The under-attacker base 1201 of the attacker unit 1200 is disposed to the left from the center in the left-right direction and has a horizontally elongated box-shaped lower accommodation section 1201a that is open at the front and upper sides, and vertically penetrates the bottom wall of the lower accommodation section 1201a. A through hole 1201b through which the ball T can pass, a sensor support hole 1201c formed below the through hole 1201b and into which a special winning opening sensor 1206 is inserted from the rear side, and a lower front side of both left and right ends of the lower housing portion 1201a. A pair of bearing lower parts 1201d arranged, a solenoid supporting part 1201e formed on the right rear side of the lower housing part 1201a, and a U-shape formed on the front side of the solenoid supporting part 1201e and on the right side of the lower housing part 1201a. The game ball T is formed on the rear side of the lower portion 1201a of the housing portion at the center in the left-right direction with the pivotal support portion 1201f. And a, a passage hole 1201g that over can penetrate vertically.

  The lower part 1201a of the accommodating part of the under-attacker base 1201 forms the lower half of the special winning opening 1154, and the bottom wall is inclined so as to be lower toward the through hole 1201b. The pair of lower bearing portions 1201d cooperates with a lower bearing portion 1202b of the upper attacker base 1202 described later to rotatably support the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203. The pivot member 1201f can pivotally support the link member 1205 by inserting the rotating shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 from the upper side. The passing ball 1201g is received by the first starting port 1152 and the game ball T passing through the through hole 1202e of the attacker upper base 1202 passes through.

  The upper attacker base 1202 of the attacker unit 1200 is disposed to the left from the center in the left-right direction, and is disposed on the storage box upper 1202a in the shape of a horizontally long box whose front and lower sides are open, and on the lower front surfaces on both left and right sides of the storage section 1202a. A pair of bearings 1202b, a shaft hole 1202c penetrating in the front and back on the right side of the housing 1202a, into which the pivot shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 is inserted, and a rear upper portion of the housing 1202a. It is provided with a sensor support portion 1202d into which the ball detection sensor 1208 is inserted from the upper side, and a through hole 1202e through which the game ball T passes vertically through the right portion in the sensor support portion 1202d. ..

  The upper accommodation portion 1202a of the upper attacker base 1202 cooperates with the lower accommodation portion 1201a of the lower attacker base 1201 to form a special winning opening 1154. The pair of upper bearing portions 1202b cooperates with the lower bearing portion 1201d of the attacker lower base 1201 to rotatably support the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203. The shaft hole 1202c is for rotatably supporting a rotating shaft 1205a, which will be described later, of the link member 1205. The game ball T, which is received by the first starting port 1152 and detected by the ball detection sensor 1208, passes through the through hole 1202e.

  The special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 of the attacker unit 1200 is a flat plate-shaped door portion 1203a extending to the left and right, a pair of shaft pins 1203b extending outward from the lower left and right ends of the door portion 1203a, and the door portion 1203a. And an action pin 1203c protruding rightward from a position obliquely below and rearward of the shaft pin 1203b on the right end side.

  The door portion 1203a of the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 is formed in a size capable of closing the special winning opening 1154 formed by the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202. The pair of shaft pins 1203b are rotatably supported by a pair of lower bearing portions 1201d and a pair of upper bearing portions 1202b of the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202, respectively. The action pin 1203c is inserted between a pair of operation pins 1205c of the link member 1205, which will be described later.

  The attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker unit 1200 is supported between the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202 while being inserted into the solenoid support portion 1201e of the attacker lower base 1201 so that the plunger 1204a moves forward and backward from the right end side. . The tip of the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 is disk-shaped. This attacker solenoid 1204 is provided with a coil spring (not shown), and when it is not energized, the plunger 1204a projects due to the biasing force of the coil spring.

  The link member 1205 of the attacker unit 1200 includes a rotating shaft 1205a extending in the front-rear direction, an engaging portion 1205b protruding rearward from a position eccentric to the axis of the rotating shaft 1205a, and a rotating shaft 1205a. A pair of operating pins 1205c protruding forward from a position eccentric with respect to the shaft center. The rotation shaft 1205a of the link member 1205 is rotatably supported by the shaft support 1201f of the attacker lower base 1201 and the shaft hole 1202c of the attacker upper base 1202. The engaging portion 1205b is formed with a notch into which the disc-shaped tip of the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 is inserted. The action pin 1203c of the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 is inserted between the pair of operation pins 1205c.

  In this link member 1205, the engagement portion 1205b mainly moves in the left-right direction in a state where the relationship between the engagement portion 1205b and the pair of operating pins 1205c is attached to the attacker lower base 1201 and the attacker upper base 1202, The pair of actuating pins 1205c are arranged so as to move mainly in the vertical direction. When the plunger 1204a of the attacker solenoid 1204 moves from the protruding state to the retracted direction (left direction in front view), the link member 1205 rotates clockwise in front view.

  The guide member 1207 of the attacker unit 1200 is formed in a box shape having an open upper portion and a rear portion, and is attached to a lower side of the through hole 1201b in the lower attacker base 1201.

  In the attacker unit 1200 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the plunger 1204a projects rightward by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, the upper operation pin 1205c of the pair of operation pins 1205c is in contact with the operation pin 105c of the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 from above, and the flat door portion 1203a is upright. The special winning opening 1154 is closed. That is, the game ball T cannot be received in the special winning opening 1154.

  In the attacker unit 1200, when the attacker solenoid 1204 is energized by a big hit game or the like, the plunger 1204a moves to the left and is immersive except the disk-shaped tip. By the leftward movement of the plunger 1204a, the engaging portion 1205b of the link member 1205 engaged with the disk-shaped tip of the plunger 1204a revolves so as to move leftward, and the link member 1205 rotates. It rotates clockwise around the moving shaft 1205a in a front view.

  By rotating the link member 1205 clockwise, the pair of operating pins 1205c revolves so as to move upward, and the upper operating pin 1205c separates upward from the operating pin 1203c of the special winning opening / closing member 1203. , The lower operation pin 1205c contacts the action pin 1203c from the lower side, and further moves the action pin 1203c upward. Then, the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 rotates about the shaft pin 1203b so that the upper end moves forward, and the flat plate-shaped door portion 1203a becomes substantially horizontal. As a result, the special winning opening 1154 is opened, and the game ball T into the special winning opening 1154 is ready to be received.

[2-2B1. Variable starter unit]
The variable starting opening unit 1210 of the winning opening unit 1150 is provided with a second starting opening 1153 that is open to the front in the front right part of the front view, mainly as shown in FIGS. The second starting port 1153 is formed in a size such that only one game ball T can pass through. The variable starting port unit 1210 includes a shallow box-shaped lower case 1211 whose front and upper parts are opened, and a box-shaped upper case 1212 which is attached to the upper side of the lower case 1211 and whose front part and lower part are opened. A ball detection sensor 1213 attached to the lower case 1211 for detecting the game ball T received in the second starting port 1153, a starting port door member 1214 slidably supported by the lower case 1211 back and forth, and a lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 is supported between the starting opening solenoid 1215 provided with the plunger 1215a which advances and retreats according to the game state, and the plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215 is transmitted and the starting opening door member 1214 is moved forward and backward. The sliding position of the link member 1216 to be slid onto the starting opening door member 1214. Includes a slide detection sensor 1217 that knowledge, the.

  The lower case 1211 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 is formed in a state of being inclined so as to become lower from the front side toward the rear side at the position of the right part of the upper surface, and a ball guiding portion 1211a capable of guiding the game ball T, A through hole 1211b which vertically penetrates at the rear end side of the ball guiding portion 1211a and through which the game ball T can pass, and a ball detecting sensor 1213 which is opened at the lower side of the ball guiding portion 1211a and is supported forwardly. Sensor support hole 1211c, a pair of slide grooves 1211d formed in the center of the left-right direction and facing each other and extending in the front-rear direction, and a cylindrical support pin 1211e protruding upward from the left portion of the upper surface. , Are provided.

  The upper case 1212 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 has a passage upper portion 1212a which is open at the front and lower portions at the front front right position and in which the upper wall inclines so as to become lower toward the rear. In the case 1212, a second starting opening decoration is formed between a front end opening forming portion 1212b forming a lower surface on the front end side on the left side in front view of the passage upper portion 1212a and a base plate 1160 formed above the front end opening forming portion 1212b. A board rear pressing part 1212c for sandwiching the board 1168 and the starting opening reflector 1169, and a solenoid coating part 1212d formed on the rear side of the board rear pressing part 1212c and the front end opening forming part 1212b and covering the starting opening solenoid 1215 from above. Is equipped with.

  The passage upper part 1212a of the upper case 1212 forms the second starting port 1153 at a position above the ball guiding portion 1211a and the passage hole 1211b in the lower case 1211. The upper part of the passage 1212a is formed in a U-shape with the opening facing downward and the right side extending downward longer than the left side in a front view. Further, the passage upper portion 1212a can guide the game ball T backward by cooperating with the ball guiding portion 1211a.

  The front end opening forming portion 1212b of the upper case 1212 has a front end formed at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front end of the passage upper portion 1212a. Further, the front end opening forming portion 1212b extends in a plate shape from the front end to the vicinity of the center of the upper case 1212 in the front-rear direction. The front end opening forming portion 1212b has a shape in a front view that is ⅓ of the height of the left side of the passage upper portion 1212a at a small angle (about 5 degrees) to the left from the vicinity of the lower end of the left side of the passage upper portion 1212a to the left. After extending diagonally to the height of the aisle, it further extends to the left to the same height as the aisle upper part 1212a at a large angle (about 45 degrees) with respect to the horizontal, and from there to a further short horizontal leftward, and then to the aisle upper part. 1212a is formed in a shape extending downward to an intermediate height between the lower end of the left side and the lower end of the right side of 1212a.

  In other words, the front end opening forming portion 1212b has a front shape extending upward from the vicinity of the left end at the lower end of the upper case 1212 to the same height as the passage upper portion 1212a, and horizontally extending from the upper end to the right to the lower right. To the horizontal to extend from the lower end of the left side of the upper part 1212a of the passage to a height of about 1/3 of the height of the left side of the upper part 1212a, and from there to the lower right side near the lower end of the left side of the upper part 1212a of the passage. It extends long diagonally. The first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, and the like of the starting opening door member 1214 are disposed below the front end opening forming member 112b and the passage upper portion 1212a.

  The starting opening door member 1214 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 includes a flat plate-shaped first guide portion 1214a that extends obliquely toward the lower right when viewed from the front (an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal), and a first guide portion. The second guide portion 1214b and the second guide portion 1214b having a flat plate shape that extends obliquely from the right end of 1214a to the lower right in front view at a smaller angle (about 5 degrees) with respect to the horizontal than the first guide portion 1214a. A flat plate-shaped third guide portion 1214c, which is provided on the right side of the right end and lower than the right end of the second guide portion 1214b, and is inclined downward toward the rear, and the front end of the third guide portion 1214c. From the right end of the second guide portion 1214b to the same height as the right end of the second guide portion 1214b, and the plate-shaped standing wall portion 12 extending upward from the right end of the third guide portion 1214c above the front wall portion 1214d. Includes a 4e, the.

  The starting opening door member 1214 includes a hanging portion 1214f extending downward from the rear end of the second guide portion 1214b, a flat plate-shaped slider portion 1214g extending rearward from the lower end of the hanging portion 1214f, and a slider. A cylindrical connecting pin 1214h protruding from the upper surface of the portion 1214g and a detection portion 1214i formed at the rear end of the slider portion 1214g are provided.

  The first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, the front wall portion 1214d, and the standing wall portion 1214e of the starting opening door member 1214 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The width of the first guide portion 1214a and the like in the front-rear direction is formed to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball T. Further, the left and right lengths of the starting opening door member 1214 (the length from the left end of the first guide portion 1214a to the right end of the standing wall portion 1214e) are formed to be about four times the outer diameter of the game ball T. Has been done. Further, the left and right lengths of the first guide portion 1214a in plan view are formed to be about ⅔ times the outer diameter of the game ball T. The first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b are arranged below the front end opening forming portion 1212b of the upper case 1212. The third guide portion 1214c, the front wall portion 1214d, and the standing wall portion 1214e are arranged between the ball guiding portion 1211a of the lower case 1211 and the passage upper portion 1212a of the upper case 1212.

  Left and right ends of the slider portion 1214g of the starting opening door member 1214 are respectively inserted into the pair of slide grooves 1211d of the lower case 1211. As a result, the starting opening door member 1214 is supported by the pair of slide grooves 1211d of the lower case 1211 so as to be slidable forward and backward. The connecting pin 1214h is slidably inserted into a connecting hole 1216e, which will be described later, of the link member 1216 to be connected to the link member 1216, and the forward / backward movement of the plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215 is transmitted. The detection unit 1214i can be detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

  The starting opening solenoid 1215 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 is supported in the solenoid coating 1212d of the upper case 1212 between the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 so that the plunger 1215a moves forward and backward from the left end side. The plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215 has a disk-shaped tip with a large diameter. Further, the starting opening solenoid 1215 is provided with a coil spring (not shown), and when not energized, the plunger 1215a is projected (extended) by the biasing force of the coil spring.

  The link member 1216 of the variable starting port unit 1210 includes a cylindrical main body 1216a that is rotatably fitted to the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 from the upper side, and a first piece 1216b that extends outward from the main body 1216a. And an engaging portion 1216c protruding upward from the tip of the first piece 1216b and engageable with the tip of the plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215, and a direction in which the first piece 1216b extends from the main body 1216a. And a second piece 1216d that extends at a right angle longer than the first piece 1216b, and a second piece 1216d extends vertically through the tip of the second piece 1216d and extends in the same direction as the second piece 1216d extends. A connecting pin 1214h of the cage opening door member 1214, and an elongated hole-like connecting hole 1216e into which the connecting pin 1214h is slidably inserted from below. There.

  The first piece 1216b of the link member 1216 extends from the upper end of the main body 1216a in a direction perpendicular to the central axis of the main body 1216a. The second piece 1216d extends in a clockwise direction from the lower side of the first piece 1216b in the body portion 1216a in a clockwise direction with respect to the first piece 1216b in a plan view. The second piece 1216d is formed to have a length such that the tip end thereof is located near the center of the lower case 1211 in the left-right direction in a state where the main body 1216a is fitted into the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211.

  As shown in FIG. 112 and the like, the variable starting port unit 1210 includes a slider part 1214g of the starting port door member 1214 at a position lower than the first guide part 1214a, the second guide part 1214b, and the third guide part 1214c. In addition, the starting opening solenoid 1215 is disposed in the lateral direction on the rear side of the first guiding portion 1214a and the second guiding portion 1214b above the slider portion 1214g, and the starting opening solenoid 1215 is On the lower side, the link member 1216 transmits the forward / backward movement of the plunger 1215a to the starting opening door member 1214. Thereby, the distance (size) in the front-rear direction of the variable starting port unit 1210 can be made as small as possible. Therefore, the space on the rear side of the variable starting port unit 1210 can be relatively widened.

  In the variable starting port unit 1210 of the present embodiment, in a normal state (when the starting port solenoid 1215 is not energized), the plunger 1215a of the starting port solenoid 1215 is projected leftward by the biasing force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, as shown in FIG. 112, the engaging portion 1216c at the tip of the first piece 1216b of the link member 1216 is located on the left side of the center of the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 and the first piece 1216b. A connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d extending at right angles to the clockwise direction is located rearward of the center of the support pin 1211e. The front end of the starting opening door member 1214 including the connecting pin 1214h inserted into the connecting hole 1216e of the link member 1216 is substantially aligned with the front surface of the base plate 1160. That is, the starting opening door member 1214 is in a state of retracting (retracting) from within the game area 1100 (a state of an unacceptable position). In this normal state, the detection unit 1214i of the starting opening door member 1214 is detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

  In the variable starting opening unit 1210, when the starting opening solenoid 1215 is energized in accordance with the normal determination result that is drawn by the game ball T passing through the gate member 1134 of the center accessory 1130, the plunger 1215a is retracted to the right. (See FIG. 113). When the plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215 moves to the right and is retracted, the entire link member 1216 is planarly viewed around the support pin 1211e of the lower case 1211 by the engaging portion 1216c engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a. Rotate in the clockwise direction.

  By rotating the link member 1216 in the clockwise direction, the connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d is rotated so as to move relatively forward, and is inserted into the connecting hole 1216e. The connecting pin 1214h of the starting opening door member 1214 is pushed forward by the inner surface of the connecting hole 1216e, and the starting opening door member 1214 slides forward as a whole. As a result, the front end of the starting port door member 1214 projects forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160, and the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, the third guide portion 1214c, and the front wall portion 1214d of the starting port door member 1214. , And the standing wall portion 1214e are in a state of appearing in the game area 1100 (a state of a receivable position). In a state in which the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward to appear in the game area 1100, the detection unit 1214i of the starting opening door member 1214 is not detected by the slide detection sensor 1217.

  When the game ball T flows down on the first guide portion 1214a with the starting opening door member 1214 appearing in the game area 1100, the first guide portion 1214a tilts to the right and rolls to the right, and the second guide portion 1214b. Sent up. Then, the game ball T sent to the second guide portion 1214b is further rolled to the right by the inclination of the second guide portion 1214b, to the third guide portion 1214c arranged on the right side of the second guide portion 1214b. Is sent.

  Since the third guide portion 1214c is inclined so that the rear end is low, the game ball T sent to the third guide portion 1214c changes its rolling direction to the rear in the third guide portion 1214c. It is sent from the rear end of the third guide portion 1214c to the space between the ball guiding portion 1211a of the rear lower case 1211 and the upper passage 1212a of the upper case 1212. That is, the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153. At this time, in the starting opening door member 1214, since the right end of the third guide portion 1214c is provided with the standing wall portion 1214e that is about half the height of the outer diameter of the game ball T, the second guide portion 1214b The game ball T that has rolled from the left direction to the third guide portion 1214c contacts the standing wall portion 1214e and is prevented from rolling to the right of the third guide portion 1214c. Further, the guide piece 1161l of the front flow path forming member 1161 can also roll the gaming ball T that has rolled from the left direction to the third guide portion 1214c, to the rear.

  The game ball T discharged rearward from the third guide portion 1214c flows down onto the ball guide portion 1211a of the lower case 1211 arranged below the third guide portion 1214c, and is guided by the ball guide portion 1211a. The ball guide portion 1211a enters the passage hole 1211b opened at the rear end, is detected by the ball detection sensor 1213, and is sent to the second starting port guide member 1170.

  Since the second starting port 1153 having such a configuration is always open toward the front in the game area 1100 regardless of the game situation, is it apparently possible to receive the game ball T? looks like. However, since the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is arranged on the upper side of the second starting opening 1153, even if the game ball T flows down from the upper side, it is arranged on the lower side of the second starting opening 1153. Unless it is jumped up to the height of the second starting port 1153 when falling to the second starting port region lower shelf 1161i, it is not received by the second starting port 1153. That is, the second starting port 1153 according to this embodiment is arranged in the game area 1100 in an area where the game ball T is extremely difficult to flow down.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the starting opening door member 1214 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 projects forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160 for the second starting opening 1153. By doing so, the game ball T can be accepted.

  That is, in a normal state (the starting opening solenoid 1215 is not energized), as shown in FIG. 122-2 (a), the front end of the starting opening door member 1214 is projected forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160. Instead, it is in a state of being sunk. Then, in such a state of being sunk, even if the game ball T flows down between the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m, this gaming ball T is started. The upper surface of the mouth door member 1214 (such as the first guide portion 1214a) cannot be rolled, and it will flow down onto the second starting opening region lower shelf portion 1161i arranged on the lower side as it is.

  On the other hand, when the game ball T passes through the gate member 1134 and a normal hit is obtained in the normal determination in which the game ball T is drawn, the start end solenoid 1215 is energized and the front end of the start door member 1214 is a base plate. It projects forward from the front surface of 1160.

  That is, in a state in which the front end of the starting port door member 1214 projects forward from the front surface of the base plate 1160 (a state in which the second starting port 1153 can be received), the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting port region left. When the game ball T flows down between the standing wall portion 1161m, the game ball T comes into contact with the upper surface (bottom surface) of the first guide portion 1214a (starting opening door member 1214). In this respect, since the bottom surface of the first guide portion 1214a is inclined so that the left end side is higher, the inclination allows the game ball T to be guided to the right side where the second starting port 1153 is provided. .

  Then, the game ball T guided to the right by the first guide portion 1214a further rolls on the right second guide portion 1214b. Since the bottom surface of the second guide portion 1214b has a smaller inclination angle from the horizontal than the first guide portion 1214a, the rolling speed of the game ball T increases slowly, but thus the second guide portion 1214b moves to the right. The rolled game ball T will be further rolled to the third guide portion 1214c on the right side thereof.

  On the other hand, the bottom surface of the third guide portion 1214c is lowered toward the rear side where the opening serving as the second starting opening 1153 is provided. Further, in front of the third guide portion 1214c, a front wall portion 1214d for restricting the game ball T on the third guide portion 1214c from spilling from the front is formed, and at the right of the third guide portion 1214c. On one side, a standing wall portion 1214e is formed that abuts on and regulates the game ball T from the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b so as not to flow down to the right as it is.

  Therefore, when the game ball T from the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b is supplied to the third guide portion 1214c, the game ball T comes into contact with the front wall portion 1214d and the standing wall portion 1214e. While the movement is restricted, the bottom surface of the third guide portion 1214c is inclined so that the third guide portion 1214c can be received in the opening portion as the second starting port 1153.

  With such a configuration, when the starting opening solenoid 1215 is energized, the starting opening door member 1214 moves forward, passes through the second starting opening 1160c and the door slit 1160d of the base plate 1160, and passes through the first guide portion. 1214a, the 2nd guide part 1214b, the 3rd guide part 1214c, the front wall part 1214d, and the standing wall part 1214e project ahead rather than the front surface of the base plate 1160. In this state, when the game ball T is discharged to the left from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, it comes into contact with the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m and then the first guide of the starting opening door member 1214. The first guide portion 1214a is in contact with the portion 1214a and the downward direction is directed to the right due to the inclination of the first guide portion 1214a. Then, the game ball T rolls from the first guide portion 1214a to the third guide portion 1214c through the second guide portion 1214b, the inclination of the third guide portion 1214c and the guide piece 1161l of the front flow passage forming member 1161. As a result, the rolling direction is directed rearward and is received by the second starting port 1153 opening rearward.

  When the game ball T is received by the second starting opening 1153 and detected by the second starting opening sensor 1191, the main control board 4100 sends a payout command to the payout control board 4110 by the detection signal, and pays out. The control board 4110 controls the prize ball device 740 to make the number of game balls T (for example, one) according to the received payout command be paid out to the dish unit 300.

  On the other hand, when the power supply to the starting opening solenoid 1215 is completed, the plunger 1215a that has been depressed due to the urging force of the coil spring provided in the starting opening solenoid 1215 projects, and the starting opening door member 1214 retracts via the link member 1216. To do. Then, when the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted in this manner, the protruding amount of the first guide portion 1214a and the second guiding portion 1214b protruding from the front surface of the base plate 1160 gradually decreases (starting opening door). The gap between the front end of the member 1214 and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a (see FIG. 102) of the front flow path forming member 1161 gradually increases). That is, in this case, when there is a game ball T rolling on the bottom surface of the first guide portion 1214a or the second guide portion 1214b in the starting opening door member 1214, the gap between the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a and At the stage where the diameter of the game ball T is increased to the diameter or more, the game ball T will spill out from the gap. However, at this time, when there is a game ball T that has reached the bottom surface of the third guide portion 1214c before the gap expands to the diameter of the game ball T or more, the game ball T has a front wall portion 1214d or a standing wall. Upon receiving the guidance from the portion 1214e, the third guiding portion 1214c and the third guiding portion 1214c are both received in the opening serving as the second starting port 1153.

  As described above, the second starting port 1153 according to the present embodiment is provided as a remote island type winning port provided at a position apart from the downflow route in which the game ball T can flow down in the game area 1100. There is. In addition, it is possible to appear and disappear by reciprocating in the depth direction with respect to the game area 1100, and the retracted position (see FIG. 122-1 (a)) and the appearance position (see FIG. 122-1 (b)). When it is in the appearance position of and, the game ball T on the downflow route is provided as a bridging passage that connects the downflow route and the second starting port 1153 (isolated island winning port), and is different from the depth direction. A starting opening door member 1214 (tongue-bolt movable member) provided so as to roll to the second starting opening 1153 (remote island type winning opening) located in the direction (right direction) is provided.

  Therefore, as the starting opening door member 1214, it is possible to secure a sufficient length as the rolling distance of the game ball T until it is received by the second starting opening 1153 (isolated island type winning opening). It is possible to strictly distinguish between the movement that allows the bridging of the sphere T and the movement that does not allow the bridging of the balls to be used properly. Due to this, unlike the conventional case where the structure that spills the game ball on the upper surface of the moving movable piece by inertia is adopted, it is more likely that a prize will rarely occur even though it is an unacceptable operation. It can be avoided without fail.

  That is, only a bridging time shorter than the prize-winning threshold time required for the gaming ball T on the downflow route to reach the third guiding portion 1214c after starting rolling in the first guiding portion 1214a. If the control for energizing the starting port solenoid 1215 is performed so that the starting port door member 1214 does not project, the second starting port 1153 will not operate even if the starting port door member 1214 is operated. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from being accepted (unallowable operation, disadvantageous game mode). That is, in this case, even if the game ball T rolls on the first guide portion 1214a or the second guide portion 1214b (starting door member 1214) due to the movement of the starting opening door member 1214 to the appearance position, even if the gaming ball T rolls. Is the front end of the first guide portion 1214a or the second guide portion 1214b (starting opening door member 1214) and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a in the front flow path forming member 1161 that retracts before reaching the third guide portion 1214c. Will be spilled through the gap between (see FIG. 122-2 (c)).

  On the other hand, the bridging time longer than the prize-winning threshold time required for the gaming ball T on the downflow route to reach the third guiding portion 1214c after starting rolling in the first guiding portion 1214a. If the control relating to the energization of the starting opening solenoid 1215 is performed so that the starting opening door member 1214 is projected over the entire range, the second starting opening 1153 is displayed when the starting opening door member 1214 is operated. It is possible to allow the game ball T to be accepted (allowable operation, advantageous game mode). That is, in this case, the game ball T rolling the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b (starting door member 1214), the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b (starting door member 1214) It becomes possible to reach the third guide portion 1214c earlier than when the vehicle retreats. Then, the game ball that has arrived at the third guide portion 1214c in this way is received in the opening portion as the second starting port 1153 due to the inclination of the bottom surface of the third guide portion 1214c. At this time, even if the retreat of the third guide portion 1214c (starting opening door member 1214) is started, the inertial force acting on the game ball T due to the contact with the front wall portion 1214d is received. It can be received in the second starting port 1153 without spilling from the third guide portion 1214c.

  Only by controlling the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214, more reliable winning of the game ball T into the second starting opening 1153 when the starting opening door member 1214 is operated, and the starting opening door member. More reliable non-winning of the game ball T to the second starting opening 1153 when 1212 is operated can be selectively used according to the situation of the game. As a result, it is possible to realize a bold game design on the assumption that no prize is won when the starting opening door member 1214 is located at the appearance position for only a short bridging time.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122-1 of the front wall surface of the base plate 1160 (game board 4), the first guide is provided when the starting door member 1214 moves backward. The part in which the part 1214a and the second guide part 1214b are housed is formed as a small hole that allows them to be housed. That is, in this case, the amount of protrusion of the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the like is gradually reduced by retracting the starting opening door member 1214, and thus the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b. The game ball T rolling on the upper surface is naturally attracted to the front wall surface side of the base plate 1160 (game board 4), and the game ball T thus attracted is of the base plate 1160 (game board 4). Since it rolls to the right while being pressed against the front wall surface side (or while being pressed more strongly than when stationary at the appearance position), contact with the front wall surface of the base plate 1160 (game board 4) The braking force can be applied to the speed of rolling to the right by a frictional force equal to or higher than a predetermined value (or a frictional force stronger than that at the time of standing still at the appearance position).

  In this way, at the stage where the backward movement of the starting opening door member 1214 is started and the winning in the second starting opening 1153 is changed to an unfavorable situation, the front wall surface of the base plate 1160 (game board 4) Since the system that automatically brakes the speed toward the second starting port 1153 by the frictional force according to the contact is constructed, the starting port door member 1214 moves backward (from the appearance position to the retracted position). After the (displacement) is started, it becomes possible to suppress the number of game balls that reach the second starting opening 1153, whereby the non-winning prize when performing an operation that does not allow the game balls T to be bridged Certainty will increase.

  Since the starting opening door member 1214 according to this embodiment has a structure that moves forward and backward, when viewed from the player (front) side, whether the starting opening door member 1214 is moving forward or backward. It's hard to tell what is happening. Therefore, by actually flowing down the game ball T between the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m, the starting opening door depends on whether or not it abuts the starting opening door member 1214. It is necessary to recognize whether the member 1214 moves back and forth, and to the player, hit the right side so that the game ball T flows down between the second starting mouth upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting mouth area left standing wall portion 1161m. The movement of the game ball T can be made to be noticed, and the player's enjoyment of the movement of the game ball T can be prevented from deteriorating the interest.

  Further, since the starting opening door member 1214 is separated from the lower surface of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j by a distance slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T, the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j is left. The game ball T that is rolled toward one side, abuts on the second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, and then abuts on the first guiding portion 1214a and is guided to the right. The movement makes a sudden U-turn, and can strongly attract the player's interest (see FIGS. 122-1 (b) and 122-2 (b)).

  Further, in the second starting port 1153 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121 to 122-2 and the like, the game ball T is open forward with a size that allows only one game ball T to be received. Immediately above the second starting port 1153, the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j of the front flow path forming member 1161 is arranged. The second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j is approximately three times as long as the outer diameter of the game ball T and extends left and right so that the left end portion becomes lower, and the higher right end portion side is the second starting opening. It is located directly above 1153. That is, the left end side of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j extends to the left of the second starting opening 1153. Further, the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j is such that the difference in height between the right end portion side and the left end portion side is about 1/3 of the outer diameter of the game ball T.

  A second starting opening region left standing wall portion 1161m extending vertically with a space slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball T is arranged on the left outer side from the left end portion of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j. The second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m is positioned such that the upper end thereof is located above the left end of the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j by a distance of about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball T, and the lower end is the second starting opening. It extends vertically so as to be located above the left end of the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 below the outer end of the upper surface of the upper shelf portion 1161j by a distance substantially the same as the outer diameter of the game ball T.

  The starting opening door member 1214 is on the right side of the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m, and is spaced apart from the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j so that only one game ball T can flow down, and the second starting opening. It is arranged below the upper shelf 1161j. The length from the left end of the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 to the right end of the third guide portion 1214c (standing wall portion 1214e) is about four times the outer diameter of the game ball T.

[2-2B2. Modification of variable starter unit]
The variable starting port unit 1210 shown in FIGS. 122-1 and 122-2 may be replaced by the variable starting port unit 2210 shown in FIGS. 123-1 and 123-2.

  The variable starting port unit 2210 according to this modification basically has the same structure as the variable starting port unit 1210, and an operation that allows the game ball to be received in the second starting port 1153, It is provided as a structure that makes it possible to strictly distinguish between the operation that does not allow the game ball to be accepted into the second starting opening 1153 and to use it properly.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 123-1, the variable starting opening unit 2210 according to this modification is also a remote island type provided at a position apart from the downflow path in which the game ball T can flow down in the game area 1100. It is possible to appear and disappear by reciprocating in the depth direction with respect to the winning opening (second starting opening 1153) and the game area 1100, and when it is at the appearance position of the collapsed position and the appearance position, the flow down The second starting opening, which serves as a bridging passage that connects the path and the second starting opening 1153 (isolated island-type winning opening), and places the game ball T on the downflow path in a direction (right direction) different from the depth direction 1153 (remote island type winning opening) and a starting opening door member 1214 (tonbolo type movable member) provided so as to be rolled.

  In addition, in the variable starting opening unit 2210 according to this modification, the second starting opening 1153 is provided as a receiving opening that is opened in a size that allows only one gaming ball T to be received. Also, the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214 is inclined downward to the second starting opening 1153 side, and is formed with a depth that allows the game balls T to roll only one by one, etc. 122-1 and the variable starting port unit 1210 shown in FIG. 122-2.

  However, as shown in FIG. 123-1 (a), in the variable starting port unit 2210 according to this modification, first, the second starting port sensor 1191 which detects the acceptance of the game ball T into the second starting port 1153. Are arranged side by side with the downstream end of the starting door member 1214. Then, on this, a proximity disconnecting member 2215 that functions to block, connect, and open the ball path between the starting opening door member 1214 and the second starting opening sensor 1191 is provided.

  Here, the second starting opening sensor 1191 according to this modification is exposed to the player side from the front wall surface of the game board 4 as compared with the case of the example shown in FIGS. 122-1 and 122-2. The game ball T that has crossed the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214 can be immediately detected (detected as acceptance of the game ball T into the second starting opening 1153) at that time. It is made possible. The game ball T thus detected is supplied to the passage in the depth direction leading to the back side of the game board 4 and discharged from the game area 1100 (FIG. 123-1 (c)).

  Although not shown, the proximity disconnecting member 2215 according to this modification is provided as a member that interlocks with the movement of the starting opening door member 1214 by a predetermined link member, and is similar to the starting opening door member 1214. The game area 1100 is provided so that it can appear and disappear by reciprocating in the depth direction between a position where the game area 1100 is depressed and an appearance position. However, the proximity disconnecting member 2215 according to the present embodiment is located at the appearance position on the contrary when the starting opening door member 1214 is in the retracted position, so that the starting opening door member 1214 and the second starting opening are provided. It functions to block the ball path between the sensors 1191 (Fig. 123-1 (b)). Further, when the starting opening door member 1214 is in the appearance position, it is located in the retracted position, which is opposite to this, thereby connecting / opening the ball path between the starting opening door member 1214 and the second starting opening sensor 1191. It functions as follows (FIG. 123-1 (c)).

  Note that, as will be described later, the proximity disconnecting member 2215 according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 123-2 (a), when the game ball T is detected by the second starting opening sensor 1191, the game ball is detected. It is provided so as to be able to block the ball path leading to the detection position by the second starting port sensor 1191 at the upstream side proximity position where the length of the radius (radius = r in the figure) is not far from T. ing.

  The variable starting port unit 2210 according to such a modified example is also a game until it is received by the second starting port 1153 (isolated island type winning port) as the starting port door member 1214, similarly to the case of the variable starting port unit 1210 described above. Since it is possible to secure a sufficient length as the rolling distance of the ball T, it is possible to strictly distinguish between the operation that allows the bridging of the gaming ball T and the operation that does not. Due to this, unlike the conventional case where the structure that spills the game ball on the upper surface of the moving movable piece by inertia is adopted, it is more likely that a prize will rarely occur even though it is an unacceptable operation. It can be avoided without fail.

  That is, the winning allowance threshold time (more preferably, the gaming ball T on the downflow route) required for the gaming ball T on the downflow route to start rolling on the starting opening door member 1214 and cross it over. Is less than a bridging time shorter than (starting from rolling at the starting opening door member 1214 and passing over the starting opening door member 1214 to being detected by the second starting opening sensor 1191). If the control for energizing the starting opening solenoid 1215 is performed so as not to project, the game ball T is not accepted in the second starting opening 1153 despite operating the starting opening door member 1214. It is possible to do so (unacceptable operation, disadvantageous game mode). That is, in this case, the game ball T rolling on the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214 is the front end of the starting opening door member 1214 that retracts before reaching the location detected by the second starting opening sensor 1191. It will be spilled from the gap between the front flow path forming member 1161 and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a (see FIG. 123-1 (b)).

  Further, at this time, according to the variable starting port unit 2210 according to this modified example, even if the game ball T in a state immediately before crossing the starting port door member 1214 is present, the movement of the starting port door member 1214 ( (Movement from the appearance position to the retracted position), the proximity disconnecting member 2215 between the starting opening door member 1214 and the second starting opening sensor 1191 operates from the collapsed position to the emerging position. Since the ball path is cut off, it is possible to preferably avoid such a game ball T reaching the detection position by the second starting opening sensor 1191 as it is due to inertia.

  That is, in this case, the game ball T that rolls due to inertia is counteracted by the contact with the proximity disconnecting member 2215 that moves to the appearance position, and the momentum is canceled, and the front end of the starting opening door member 1214 and the front flow passage forming member 1161. Will spill from the gap between the front plate portion 1161a and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a. It should be noted that this is a situation where the starting opening door member 1214 starts to move from the appearance position to the retracted position while the game ball T is in a state immediately before crossing the starting opening door member 1214. If it occurs, the same thing can be said regardless of the length of time set as the bridging time.

  On the other hand, the winning allowance threshold time (more preferably, the game on the downflow route) required for the game ball T on the downflow route to start rolling on the starting opening door member 1214 and cross it over. The starting port door member 1214 has a bridging time longer than the time required for the ball T to start rolling at the starting port door member 1214 and cross the ball T until it is detected by the second starting port sensor 1191). If the control related to the energization of the starting opening solenoid 1215 is performed so that the projecting opening is projected, the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153 when the starting opening door member 1214 is operated. (Allowable operation, advantageous game mode). That is, in this case, the game ball T rolling on the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214 can reach the detection position by the second starting opening sensor 1191 earlier than the starting opening door member 1214 retracts. become. As described above, the game ball that reaches the detection position in this way is detected as a winning ball to the second starting port 1153 by the second starting port sensor 1191 and then extends to the back side of the game board 4 in the depth direction. It is supplied to the passage and discharged from the game area 1100 (FIG. 123-1 (c)).

  As described above, when the variable starting port unit 2210 according to the modified example operates the starting port door member 1214 only by controlling the operation time of the starting port door member 1214 as in the case of the variable starting port unit 1210 described above. More reliable winning of the game ball T to the second starting opening 1153 and more reliable non-winning of the gaming ball T to the second starting opening 1153 when the starting opening door member 1214 is operated. You will be able to use it properly depending on the situation. As a result, it is possible to realize a bold game design on the assumption that no prize is won when the starting opening door member 1214 is located at the appearance position for only a short bridging time.

  Also, similarly, when the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted, the game ball T on the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214 is pressed against the front wall surface side of the base plate 1160 (game board 4) ( Or, it rolls to the right while being pressed harder than when stationary at the appearance position.

  In this regard, in the variable starting port unit 2210 according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 123-2 (a), when the gaming ball T is detected by the second starting port sensor 1191, the gaming ball is detected. At the upstream proximity position where the length of the radius (radius = r in the figure) is not far from T, the proximity so that the ball path leading to the detection position by the second starting opening sensor 1191 can be blocked. The disconnecting member 2215 is provided as described above.

  According to such a configuration, even though the remaining number of acceptable game balls to the second starting opening 1153 is "1", it is shown in FIG. 123-2 (a), (b). As described above, even in the case where two gaming balls are continuously supplied to the detection position (second starting port 1153) by the second starting port sensor 1191, as described below, 1 Only the passage of the detection point of the second game ball is allowed, and the second game ball can be preferably refused to be received in the second starting opening 1153.

  That is, while the remaining allowable number required for receiving the game ball into the second starting port 1153 is set as "1" by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 126) described later, the second starting port sensor It is assumed that a situation occurs in which two gaming balls T1 and T2 are continuously supplied to the detection location (second starting opening 1153) by 1191.

  Then, the main control board 4100 firstly, based on the fact that the first game ball T1 is detected by the second starting port sensor 1191, the remaining allowable number for receiving the game balls into the second starting port 1153. Is updated to "0". Next, in order to avoid further winning in the second starting opening 1153, the remaining allowable number is updated to "0" regardless of whether the operating time (bridge time) of the starting opening door member 1214 remains. At this point, the control for maintaining the starting opening door member 1214 at the appearance position (energization of the starting opening solenoid 1215) is stopped, and the control for displacing the starting opening member 1214 to the retracted position is performed.

  That is, in this case, in the situation shown in FIG. 123-2 (a), the starting opening door member 1214 starts to be displaced from the appearance position to the retracted position. However, at this time, in the variable starting port unit 2210 according to this modification, the proximity disconnecting member 2215 starts to be displaced from the retracted position to the appearance position, as described above.

  In this regard, in the proximity disconnecting member 2215 according to this modification, the length of the radius (radius = r in the drawing) of the first game ball T1 detected by the second starting opening sensor 1191 is not far from the game ball T1. The displacement to the appearance position is started at the upstream side proximity position. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 123-2 (a), when the second game ball T2 exists at the appearance position to be displaced in a form of being continuous with the first game ball T1, The second game ball T2, together with the shape (sphere) of the game ball T itself, is pushed back (guided) to the side where the starting opening door member 1214 is provided by contact with the proximity disconnecting member 2215. ). As a result, the spillage comes from the gap between the front end of the starting opening door member 1214 and the rear surface of the front plate portion 1161a of the front flow path forming member 1161 (see FIG. 123-2 (b)).

  In such a configuration, two game balls T1 and T2 are connected to the second starting port 1153 while the remaining allowable number for receiving the game ball to the second starting port 1153 is set as "1". In the situation where the first starting ball T1 is detected by the second starting port sensor 1191, the proximity disconnecting member 2215 is interrupted between the playing balls T1 and T2. Will be able to operate.

  Therefore, when operating the starting opening door member 1214 for a bridging time longer than the prize winning threshold time, up to a predetermined number that is predetermined as a number that allows the game balls to be received in the second starting opening 1153. While allowing the game balls to be accepted, it becomes possible to more appropriately refuse the game balls that exceed the specified number of times (over prize).

  It should be noted that the specified number may be set to any number, but for example, when set to one, the starting opening door member 1214 operates for a bridging time longer than the prize winning threshold time. Each time, only one game ball is received in the second starting port 1153, so that the game property is realized. In other words, in this case, it is possible to create a gaming property in which the operation of the starting opening door member 1214 is required many times in order to hold the lottery on the second starting opening 1153 side. In this respect, if the period in which the starting door member 1214 is easily operated (the state in which the so-called time saving function is activated) is continued is managed by time (variation time of the special symbol, etc.), the above-mentioned over-winning is achieved. The expected value of the number of holding lots on the second starting port 1153 side is managed only by the expected value of the number of operations of the starting port door member 1214 (the number of operations of a long bridging time) that occurs within that time without considering Will be able to.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 123-1 (b), a smooth slope 2215a is arranged on the side where the starting opening door member 1214 is provided, and a game is provided at the tip portion of the proximity disconnecting member 2215 according to this modification. It has a substantially triangular prism shape with an acute angled portion on the person side. According to such a shape, when the proximity disconnecting member 2215 is displaced from the retracted position to the appearance position, even if the game ball T already exists at the appearance position to be displaced, In addition to being able to suppress the occurrence of ball biting with the game ball T, the game ball T is pushed back more smoothly to the side where the starting opening door member 1214 is provided by the slope 2215a ( To induce).

  In this modified example, when a situation occurs in which two game balls T1 and T2 are continuously supplied to the detection position (second start port 1153) by the second start port sensor 1191, the second game. It is operable so that the proximity disconnecting member 2215 is engaged with the sphere. However, for the proximity disconnection member 2215, the first game ball T1 of the two game balls T1 and T2 continuously supplied to the detection position (second start port 1153) by the second start port sensor 1191. It suffices that only one operates so that it is detected by the second starting opening sensor 1191. For example, it operates so as to be involved with both the first game ball and the second game ball, or one. This may be realized by operating so as to be related to the game ball of the eye.

  Further, the proximity disconnecting member 2215 does not necessarily have to be associated with the two game balls T1 and T2 by the operation, but may be associated with the two game balls T1 and T2 by magnetic force or the like.

  Further, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 123-2 (a), when the game ball T is detected by the second starting opening sensor 1191, the game ball T is separated from the game ball T by the radius (in the figure, , The radius disconnection member 2215 is arranged at the upstream proximity position where the length of radius = r) is not separated. However, for example, if the proximity disconnecting member 2215 is configured by a magnet or the like, when the above-mentioned game ball T1 is detected by the second starting port sensor 1191, the game ball T1 has its diameter, or Even if the proximity disconnecting member 2215 is arranged at the upstream proximity position where the length of the diameter is not separated, the game ball to the second starting port 1153 of the above-mentioned second game ball T2. It is possible to refuse to accept.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, such a configuration that the acceptance of the game balls into such an entrance (detection of the game balls by the acceptance sensor) can be allowed only in a specified number (second starting opening sensor 1191, The close disconnecting member 2215) is used for the second starting port 1153. However, this configuration does not necessarily have to be used for the second starting port 1153, and may be used for other receiving ports so that the receiving number is allowed only to the specified number.

[2-2C. Regarding special flow-down passage leading to accessory winning hole 1155 formed by base plate 1160 and front flow passage forming member 1161]
As described above, the front flow path forming member 1161 protrudes from the front surface of the flat base plate 1160 into the front game area 1100 as shown in FIGS. 99 and 102, and the flat front plate portion 1161a. By being provided as a shallow box-like shape whose front side is open, a special downflow passage of the game ball T leading to the prize winning hole 1155 is formed between the base plate 1160 and the rear plate 1160.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 99, the special downward passage has two passages X and Y formed so as to sandwich the general winning opening 1151, and the game ball T hit to the right has these passages X. , Y, a specific rolling area that can be received in the prize winning opening 1155 (here, the area is directly above the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 when closed). ) Is formed to reach.

  However, in the passage X on the left side of the general winning opening 1151, a structure in which the game ball T flowing down the passage X is guided slightly to the right by the thick portion of the receiving portion left standing wall portion 1161e. Is formed with. In addition, the passage Y on the right side of the general winning opening 1151 also temporarily guides the game ball T flowing down the passage Y to the left side by the receiving portion lower shelf portion 1161c, but the receiving portion 1161b. It is formed with a structure that stops the movement in the left direction by abutting on a portion formed to extend vertically downward.

  According to such a configuration, the game ball T hit to the right is in a closed state after being in a state in which it does not have at least a leftward speed (or a state in which it has only a slight leftward speed). It becomes possible to supply to the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a).

  In this respect, the accessory winning hole opening / closing member 1221 according to this embodiment is provided as a flat plate-shaped door portion 1221a that is inclined so that the left side and the back side are respectively lowered, as described later. On the other hand, in the special downflow passage, the game ball T passing through either of the passages X and Y has no leftward speed (or has only a slight leftward speed). It is provided so as to be supplied to the right side portion (the most upstream portion of the specific rolling area) of the winning a prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a).

  According to such a configuration, irrespective of the flow-down speed of the game ball T, the strength at the time of launching, etc., any game ball T that reaches the right side of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) is left. From the state in which the speed in the direction (initial speed) is almost "0", the rolling to the left direction (more accurately, the left back direction) starts slowly by its own weight. Therefore, the game ball T stays on the upper surface of the winning a prize opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) for a long time, and in addition, the winning a prize opening / closing member 1221 is removed as much as the variation in the initial speed is eliminated. The speed of the game ball T on the upper surface of the (door portion 1221a) can be made less likely to vary.

  Then, in the special downflow passage according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100, the leftward rolling on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) due to its own weight. The game ball T that starts slowly has a structure (base plate side regulating portion 1160k, front side regulating portion 1161k) that regulates the rolling speed so that the rolling speed does not exceed a predetermined velocity value due to the inclination of the upper surface. I have it.

  That is, in the special flow-down passage according to this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (the length in the rolling direction of the game ball in the specific rolling region) ) Is L (for example, 6 cm), and the firing interval time when the game balls T are continuously driven into the game area 1100 by the ball launching device 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500 is T (0.6 seconds). ), Rolling in the passage so that the average speed (preferably the maximum speed) of the game ball T on the upper surface of the winning a prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is less than "L / 2T". It is provided as a structure that interacts with the game ball T.

  According to such a configuration, as long as the player continues to hit to the right, at least two (2, 3) or more (2, 3) are provided on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. You will be able to make the game ball exist.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 99, FIG. 100, and FIG. 125, the special downflow passage has the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) left. Front side flow path for the game ball T that is formed as three protrusions that are formed as three protrusions that engage with the game ball T that rolls in the direction from the base plate 1160 side and reduce the speed thereof. The front side regulating portion 1161k formed as two protrusions that are engaged with each other from the forming member 1161 side and reduce the speed thereof.

  Here, the base plate side restriction portion 1160k (three protrusions on the base plate 1160 side) and the front surface side restriction portion 1161k (two protrusions on the front surface flow path forming member 1161 side) are as shown in FIG. Further, they are provided so as to face each other in a staggered relationship with the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) interposed therebetween. As described above, the upper surface of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is inclined so that the left side and the back side are lower.

  According to such a configuration, for example, the game ball T1 that slowly started rolling in the left-back direction on the upper surface of the winning a prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is first on the base plate 1160 side. By coming into contact with the protrusion on the right side of the three protrusions (the base plate side regulating portion 1160k), the speed in the left direction is reduced and the velocity is guided toward the front side. That is, the inward inclination of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is so gentle that the game ball T can be guided to the front side by the base plate side regulating portion 1160k.

  In this way, the game ball T1 guided to the front side by the base plate side regulating portion 1160k is combined with the leftward inclination of the character prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) itself, and the character prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion). On the upper surface of 1221a), rolling in the front left direction is slowly started. Then, as a result, by contacting the protrusion on the right side of the two protrusions on the front flow path forming member 1161 side (the front side regulation portion 1161k), the speed in the left direction is reduced again and the depth is increased. You will be guided to the side.

  That is, according to the base plate side regulating portion 1160k (three protrusions on the base plate 1160 side) and the front face side regulating portion 1161k (two protrusions on the front flow path forming member 1161 side) according to this embodiment. , The game ball T1 on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) rolls in a zigzag direction to the left while decelerating on the base plate 1160 side and the front flow passage forming member 1161 side each time. It becomes possible to manage so that the maximum speed of the game ball T1 on the upper surface of the winning a prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) does not exceed "L / 2T". .

  Thereby, while the game ball T1 is still rolling on the upper surface of the winning a prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a), the game is launched rightward (0.6 seconds later). The ball T2 (further, a game ball that has been fired next (after 1.2 seconds)) reaches the right side of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a). Therefore, as long as the player continues to hit to the right, at least two (2, 3) game balls may be present on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) in the closed state. become able to.

  In addition, since it becomes possible to play so that at least two or more game balls T are habitually present in the specific rolling area in this way, a plurality of games are played each time the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 is opened. An excellent winning performance such that the ball T can win is realized, and thus, it is possible to give a sense of speed to the winning situation at the accessory winning port 1155.

  Further, as will be described later, the accessory winning hole opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) according to the present embodiment has a plurality of game balls T on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) substantially at the same time. It slides in a direction (backward direction) perpendicular to the traveling direction (leftward direction) of the game balls T so as to spill into the accessory winning hole 1155. As a result, every time the character prize opening / closing member 1221 is opened, the gaming balls T on the upper surface of the character prize opening / closing member 1221 are irrespective of the number of them, the inner area of the character prize opening 1155. Since it becomes possible to enter all of them in a lump sum, it is possible to not only give a sense of speed to the winning situation to the character prize winning port 1155, but also to obtain (payout) a large amount of prizes at one time. You can expect it.

  Although illustration is omitted, in the special flow-down passage according to this embodiment, a thick portion is formed in a portion which is a confluence point of the passages X and Y on the front flow passage forming member 1161 side. The game ball T flowing down one of the passages X and Y by the thick portion is guided to the inner side, and the speed of the game ball T itself is decelerated, so that the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion). The movement of the game ball T on the upper surface of 1221a) is further stabilized. Thereby, in addition to the variation in the average speed of the game ball T on the upper surface of the winning a prize opening and closing member 1221 (door 1221a) is less likely to occur, the right side of the winning a prize opening and closing member 1221 (door 1221a) The game ball T1 that has reached the portion can be more reliably brought into contact with the protrusion on the right side (the base plate side regulating portion 1160k) of the three protrusions on the base plate 1160 side.

  According to such a special flow-down passage, when the winning a prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is in the closed state, the game balls T sequentially arrived by the firing by the hitting ball launching device 650 are the winning a prize opening / closing member. It is possible to increase the number of game balls T that are held on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the 1221 (door portion 1221a) and are in a prize waiting state to the prize winning opening 1155 with the passage of time. Like

  In the special flow-down passage according to this embodiment, the game ball T that first reaches the specific rolling area is the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). ) Is rolled to the left, it is provided so that the two game balls are in a relationship in which they have reached a specific rolling area. Therefore, the number of game balls T in the prize waiting state for the prize winning slot 1155 can be increased to a maximum of 3 with the lapse of time.

  By the way, in the game ball T (the game ball T on the upper surface of the character prize opening / closing member 1221) which is in the state of waiting for winning in the character prize opening 1155, the character prize opening / closing member 1221 is opened. When winning, the winning prize opening / closing member 1221 is spilled from the upper surface of the winning prize opening / closing member 1221 to win the winning prize opening 1155.

  With such a configuration, as long as the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 operates to the open state, even if the operating time is extremely short, It is possible to enter the inside of the accessory winning port 1155. Moreover, since the game ball T that has already been fired (the game ball T that is in the prize-waiting state) will automatically enter the internal area of the character prize port 1155, the character prize hole It becomes possible to more accurately control the entry timing of the game ball T into the internal area of 1155. In other words, it is possible to accurately control the time of winning, as well as to eliminate the possibility of non-winning of the prize winning opening 1155 by opening control while there are game balls waiting for winning. Like

[2-2D. Schematic configuration of the accessory unit]
The accessory unit 1220 of the winning opening unit 1150 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 120. This accessory unit 1220 is provided with an accessory winning hole 1155 through which the game ball T can be accepted in accordance with a special lottery result obtained by receiving the game ball T in the first starting opening 1152 and the second starting opening 1153. The prize winning opening unit 1220A and the game ball T received in the prize winning opening 1155 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A are provided so as to be able to flow down in the internal area, and the game balls T can be accepted by sorting. V winning opening unit 1220B provided with a V winning opening 1156.

[2-2D1. Accessory winning unit]
The character prize opening unit 1220A of the character unit 1220 supports the character prize opening / closing member 1221 for opening / closing the character prize opening 1155 and the character prize opening / closing member 1221 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction and winning the character prize. The upper housing 1222 which divides the left and right ends of the mouth 1155, the lower housing 1223 which is attached to the lower side of the upper housing 1222 and receives the game ball T received in the winning a prize hole 1155, and the lower housing 1223 are attached. It is provided with a winning prize winning hole sensor 1224 for detecting the game ball T received in the winning prize winning opening 1155, and a plunger 1225a supported between the upper housing 1222 and the lower housing 1223 and advancing and retracting according to the gaming state. Character prize solenoid 1225 and plunger 1225 of character prize solenoid 1225 A link member 1226 for transmitting the advancing / retreating of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 and sliding the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221; and an opening / closing detection sensor 1227 for detecting opening / closing of the winning prize winning opening 1155 by detecting the movement of the link member 1226. There is.

  The character prize opening / closing member 1221 of the character prize opening unit 1220A has a flat plate-shaped door portion 1221a that extends in the left-right direction with a constant width in the front-rear direction and is inclined so that the left side in front view becomes lower, and the door portion. An extension piece 1221b that extends rearward from the rear end of the center of the left and right direction of 1221a, and a connection hole 1221c that vertically penetrates near the front end of the extension piece 1221b and that extends leftward and rightward are provided. .

  The upper housing 1222 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A is a box-shaped upper housing main body 1222a on which the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 is placed on the upper surface and the lower side is open, and the front end from the left and right ends at the front end of the upper housing main body 1222a. And a pair of flat plate-shaped partition members 1222b protruding vertically and forward and backward, and left and right ends of the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 formed at the left and right ends of the upper front portion of the upper housing body 1222a. A pair of groove-shaped first support portions 1222c that slidably support the upper housing body 1222a between the pair of first support portions 1222c, and an opening 1222d that extends back and forth. An extension piece formed on the rear portion of the upper surface of the upper housing body 1222a in the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 A groove-shaped pair of second support portion 1222e of the left and right ends of 221b slidably supported, and a. In the upper housing 1222, the upper surface of the upper housing body 1222a and the upper surfaces of the pair of first support portions 122b are aligned.

  The lower housing 1223 of the accessory winning opening unit 1220A has a box-like shape with an open upper side, extends leftward and rightward in the same length as the distance between the pair of partition pieces 1222b in front of the upper housing body 1222a of the upper housing 1222, and has a bottom surface. A ball receiving portion 1223a which becomes lower toward the left and lower toward the rear near the left end, a cutout portion 1223b formed in the rear portion of the left end of the ball receiving portion 1223a through which the game ball T can pass, and a cutout portion 1223b. A sensor support portion 1223c, which is formed in a rear side and a lower side and has an opened upper side, into which the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 is fitted, and a bottom wall of the sensor support portion 1223c vertically penetrates the accessory. The outlet 1223d through which the game ball detected by the winning hole sensor 1224 can pass, and the right side rear side of the ball receiving portion 1223a are formed. A solenoid housing portion 1223e in which the prize winning solenoid 1225 is housed in an open box shape, and a link member 1226 formed on the left side of the solenoid housing portion 1223e (the center rear side of the ball receiving portion 1223a in the left-right direction). And a link accommodating portion 1223f that rotatably accommodates.

  The winning prize winning solenoid 1225 of the winning prize unit 1220A is housed and supported in the solenoid housing portion 1223e of the lower housing 1223 so that the plunger 1225a moves forward and backward from the front end side. The plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 has a large-diameter disk-shaped tip. The accessory winning solenoid 1225 is provided with a coil spring (not shown), and when not energized, the plunger 1225a is projected (extended) by the biasing force of the coil spring.

  The link member 1226 of the accessory winning opening unit 1220A is rotatably supported by the bottom of the link housing portion 1223f of the lower housing 1223 and extends left and right, and the upper housing 1222 extends from the rotation shaft portion 1226a. The strip-shaped rod portion 1226b that extends to a position above the upper surface of the upper housing body 1222a through the opening portion 1222d and a columnar shape that extends left and right at the upper end of the rod portion 1226b. A connecting portion 1226c inserted into the connecting hole 1221c of the opening / closing member 1221 from below, and a tip of the plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225 that protrudes to the right at a lower position from the vertical center of the rod portion 1226b. Between the engaging portion 1226d and the rotating shaft portion 1226a in the rod portion 1226b. And a, a detection piece 1226e detected by and close detection sensor 1227 extends to put al rearward.

  In the accessory winning opening unit 1220A of the present embodiment, in a normal state (when not energized), the plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225 is projected forward by the biasing force of the coil spring, and the tip of the plunger 1225a. By the engaging portion 126e of the link member 1226 that is engaged with the rod member 1226, the rod portion 1226b of the link member 1226 rises substantially vertically from the rotating shaft portion 1226a. In this state, the accessory winning hole opening / closing member 1221 having the connecting hole 1221c into which the connecting portion 1226c at the upper end of the rod portion 1226b of the link member 1226 is inserted is pressed forward by the connecting portion 1226c via the connecting hole 1221c. As a result, the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 is slid forward.

  As a result, the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 projects further forward than the front end of the upper housing body 1222a in the upper housing 1222, and the front end of the door portion 1221a is substantially the same as the front end of the partition 1222b of the upper housing 1222. It is in the position. Further, the left and right ends of the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 are in contact with the upper surfaces of the pair of partition pieces 1222b of the upper housing 1222 which are separated from each other in the left and right directions. Therefore, the accessory winning opening 1155 opening upward is in a state of being closed by the door portion 1221a of the winning opening opening / closing member 1221, and the game ball T cannot be received (FIG. 124 (b). ), Etc.)). In this state, the game ball T that has flowed down onto the door portion 1221a rolls to the left according to the door portion 1221a that is inclined so that the left side becomes lower, and is discharged from the left end of the door portion 1221a to the left side. It When the accessory winning port 1155 is closed by the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221, the detection piece 1226e of the link member 1226 is detected by the opening / closing detection sensor 1227.

  When the character prize winning unit 1220A is energized to the character prize solenoid 1225 according to the special lottery result selected by the game ball T being received in the first starting opening 1152 and the second starting opening 1153, the plunger 1225a is activated. Move to the back so that immerses you. When the plunger 1225a of the prize winning solenoid 1225 moves rearward, the engaging portion 126c of the link member 1226 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1225a is pulled so as to move rearward. As a result, the link member 1226 rotates about the rotation shaft portion 1226a in the direction in which the upper end of the rod portion 1226b moves rearward. Then, since the connecting portion 1226c at the upper end of the rod portion 1226b moves rearward, the accessory winning hole opening / closing member 1221 slides rearward through the connecting hole 1221c into which the connecting portion 1226c is inserted. .

  At this time, the engaging portion 1226d of the link member 1226 engaging with the tip of the plunger 1225a of the accessory winning solenoid 1225 has the length (height) of the rod portion 1226b extending from the rotating shaft portion 1226a. Since the rotation shaft portion 1226a is arranged rather than the center, the connecting portion 1226c at the upper end of the rod portion 1226b moves largely rearward with respect to the rearward movement amount of the plunger 1225a. Therefore, the front end of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) moves to the vicinity of the front end of the upper housing body 1222a in the upper housing 1222 (near the rear ends of the pair of partition pieces 1222b), and the winning prize opening 1155 is formed. The game ball T is opened upward and is ready to receive the game ball T (see FIG. 124 (a)). When the accessory winning port 1155 is opened by the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221, the detection piece 1226e of the link member 1226 is not detected by the opening / closing detection sensor 1227.

  When the game ball T is received by the character prize opening 1155 while the character prize opening / closing member 1221 is retracted and the character prize opening 1155 is opened and ready to be received, the game ball T is moved upward. It flows between the pair of partition pieces 1222b of the housing 1222 and flows down onto the ball receiving portion 1223a of the lower housing 1223, and rolls leftward on the ball receiving portion 1223a due to the inclination of the bottom surface of the ball receiving portion 1223a. Then, the ball is received from the cutout portion 1223b on the rear side of the left end of the ball receiving portion 1223a to the rear side, detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 supported on the lower side behind the cutout portion 1223b, and then the lower housing. It is discharged from a discharge port 1223d of 1223 to a ball entrance 1238d of a ball guide member 1238 of the V winning hole unit 1220B below, which will be described later.

  However, as will be described later, in the accessory winning hole unit 1220A according to the present embodiment, when the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is changed from the closed state to the open state, the prize winning opening 1155 is won. The game ball T that has entered the internal area is detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 than the total ball entry time required for all the game balls T in the waiting state to enter the internal area of the accessory winning hole 1155. Is formed with an internal passage that takes a longer time to reach the desired position. In this way, the detection location where the game ball T that has entered the internal area is provided for the determination of the closing of the winning a prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (the door portion 1221a) (the upper limit determination for the number of game balls T that can be won). Before all the game balls T that are in the prize-waiting state are entered, the plurality of game balls T that are in the prize-waiting state in the character prize winning slot 1155 become habitual. It becomes possible to actively generate overflow winnings for the upper limit value of the game ball T that can be won, in combination with the above-mentioned configuration that is dynamically created, and dynamic winning performances and award winning performances that exceed the set value. Will be able to be realized.

[2-2D2. V winning mouth unit]
The V winning opening unit 1220B of the accessory unit 1220 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 1160 below the accessory winning unit 1220A and has a V winning opening 1156 and a unit front base 1230 and a unit front base 1230. The unit rear base 1231 attached to the rear side, the V winning solenoid 1232 having the plunger 1232a that is sandwiched between the unit front base 1230 and the unit rear base 1231 and moves back and forth according to the game state, and the unit rear base 1231 A drive gear member 1233 that is rotatably supported on the rear side by a unit front base 1230 and that is rotated by advancing and retracting a plunger 1232a of a V winning solenoid 1232, a driven gear member 1234 that meshes with the drive gear member 1233, and a driven gear member 1234. If the rear end is attached to the center of Front while being rotatably supported by and unit before the base 1230 is provided with a shaft member 1235 which projects forward from the unit before the base 1230.

  In addition, the V winning opening unit 1220B is provided on the front surface of the unit front base 1230 and is attached to the front end of the shaft member 1235, and has a receiving portion 1236a that can receive only one game ball T on the peripheral surface. A cylindrical rotating body 1236, a disk-shaped rotating body front plate 1237 attached to the front surface of the rotating body 1236, and a front body of the unit front base 1230 so as to cover the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 are attached to a winning role. A ball guiding member 1238 for guiding the game ball T discharged from the discharge port 1223d of the mouth unit 1220A to the upper outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 and guiding the game ball T from the rotating body 1236 to the V winning opening 1156, is provided. .

  Furthermore, the V winning opening unit 1220B is attached to the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and a pair of specific sensors 1239 for detecting the game ball T received in the V winning opening 1156 and the rear side of the unit front base 1230. The V loss sensor 1240 that is attached and detects the gaming ball T that is not received by the V winning hole 1156 after being received by the accessory winning hole 1155, and the rotating body 1236 that is mounted on the rear side of the unit rear base 1231 A rotation detection sensor 1241 for detecting the rotation position of the.

  The unit front base 1230 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is a flat surface that extends vertically and horizontally, and has a front surface 1230a in which the V winning opening 1156 penetrates forward and backward on the right side in front view with respect to the center, and near the center of the front surface 1230a. And a bearing hole 1230b for penetrating in the front-rear direction to rotatably support the shaft member 1235, and a loss hole 1230c penetrating in the front-rear direction above the bearing hole 1230b and through which the game ball T can pass. .

  Further, the unit front base 1230 is formed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 1230a and guides the game ball T received at the V winning opening 1156i downward to open the rear side of the first discharge path 1230d and the front surface portion 1230a. A second discharge path 1230e that is formed on the rear surface and that guides the game ball T that has passed through the hole 1230c downward and is open on the rear side, and is formed on the rear surface of the front surface portion 1230a and above the first discharge path 1230d. And a solenoid housing portion 1230f in which a V prize solenoid 1232 is housed. A pair of specific sensors 1239 is attached in the first discharge path 1230d. Further, a V-miss sensor 1240 is attached in the second discharge path 1230e. The open rear sides of the first discharge passage 1230d, the second discharge passage 1230e, and the solenoid housing portion 1230f are closed by the unit rear base 1231.

  The V winning solenoid 1232 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is housed in the solenoid housing portion 1230f of the unit front base 1230 so that the plunger 1232a moves forward and backward from the lower end side. The plunger 1232a of the V winning solenoid 1232 has a disk-shaped tip with a large diameter. Further, the V winning solenoid 1232 includes a coil spring (not shown) that urges the plunger 1232a in a protruding direction, and the coil spring causes the plunger 1232a to protrude downward when not energized.

  The drive gear member 1233 of the V winning opening unit 1220B has a shaft portion 1233a extending in the front-rear direction and rotatably supported on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and a flat plate-like member extending in the direction perpendicular to the shaft portion 1233a. The extension piece 1233b, the drive gear 1233c formed at the tip of the extension piece 1233b and extending in an arc shape with respect to the center of the shaft portion 1233a, and the front portion of the extension piece 1233b protruding forward from the V winning prize. An engaging portion 1233d that engages with the tip of the plunger 1232a of the solenoid 1232 is provided.

  The driven gear member 1234 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is attached to the rear end of the shaft member 1235, extends in an arc shape with respect to the center of the shaft member 1235, and is driven by a driven gear 1234a that meshes with the drive gear of the drive gear member 1233. A detection piece 1234b extending from the rear surface of the driven gear 1234a in a direction perpendicular to the axis. The pitch diameter of the driven gear 1234a extending in the arc shape in the driven gear member 1234 is formed to be about 1/3 of the pitch diameter of the driving gear 1233c extending in the arc shape in the driving gear member 1233. There is.

  The rotating body 1236 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is formed in a state in which a receiving portion 1236a capable of accommodating only one game ball T is opened to the front and the outer circumference. The receiving portion 1236a of the rotator 1236 has two sides (two sides that are spaced apart in the circumferential direction) extending from the outer peripheral surface toward the bottom side in a front view extending in a direction in which the two sides move away from each other toward the outer periphery. Specifically, when the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is opened upward, the left side of the front view with respect to the center line passing through the center of the rotating body 1236 and the center of the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a. The sides extend in parallel, while the right side extends away from the bottom side toward the outer circumference side (see FIG. 120 (a)). The radius of this rotating body 1236 is formed to be about 1.6 times the outer diameter of the game ball T.

  In addition, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is formed so that the outer diameter to the bottom side is substantially equal to the outer diameter of the game ball T (see FIG. 124 (a)). Further, in the receiving portion 1236a, the rear wall is notched from the outer peripheral surface toward the bottom side, and is formed lower than the two sides that are separated in the circumferential direction. In addition, the receiving portion 1236a includes an inclined portion 1236b on the front surface side (inside) of the rear wall, which is inclined obliquely so as to face rearward as it goes upward (away from the rotation axis), By contacting the game ball T flowing down from above to the inclined portion 1236b, the game ball T is guided to the front to be easily received in the receiving portion 1236a, and at the time of receiving the game ball T, the receiving portion 1236a. It is possible to reduce the impact that acts on the bottom of the. The open front end side of the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is closed by the rotating body front plate 1237. Accordingly, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 can move the game ball T in and out only from the outer side in the radial direction of the rotating body 1236.

  The ball guide member 1238 of the V winning opening unit 1220B is formed by a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 1238a that covers the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 and an upper portion of the peripheral wall portion 1238a that is cut out so that the game ball T can pass through. 1238b and a right side opening 1238c through which a game ball can pass, which are formed by cutting out a right side in front view of the peripheral wall portion 1238a (a position at an angle of 90 degrees clockwise in a front view with respect to the upper opening 1238b). , A ball inlet 1238d that is located above the peripheral wall portion 1238a and directly below the outlet 1223d of the lower housing 1223 of the accessory winning port unit 1220A and that is open upward, and from the ball inlet 1238d toward the upper outlet 1238b. The lower guide portion 1238e, which is bent and bent like a crank and allows the game ball T to flow down, and the right opening 123 Front view lower right V game ball T has become lower toward the winning opening 1156 is provided with a right guiding section 1238f possible falling c. From

  The ball guide member 1238 is opened at the rear end side of the upper guide portion 1238e and the right guide portion 1238f, and is attached to the unit front base 1230, so that the rear end side opened by the front surface portion 1230a is closed.

  In the V winning opening unit 1220B of the present embodiment, the shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233 is rotatably supported in the unit front base 1230 at a position slightly higher than the upper and lower center near the right end in front view. On the other hand, the shaft member 1235 to which the driven gear member 1234 and the rotating body 1236 are attached is rotatably attached to the unit front base 1230 at a position slightly left from the center in front view. Then, between the shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233 and the shaft member 1235, the drive gear 1233c of the drive gear member 1233 and the driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 mesh with each other, and the V winning solenoid 1232 is arranged. Has been done.

  In the V winning opening unit 1220B, the V winning opening 1156 is opened forward at a position below the center of the rotating body 1236 and directly below the shaft portion 1233a of the drive gear member 1233.

  Energization / non-energization of the V winning solenoid 1232 is performed at a constant cycle under the control of the main control board 4100. When the V winning solenoid 1232 is not energized, the plunger 1232a projects downward due to the urging force of a coil spring (not shown). In this state, the engaging portion 1233d of the drive gear member 1233 is pushed downward by the downwardly projecting plunger 1232a, and the drive gear member 1233 is rotated about the shaft portion 1233a in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front. Near the end of the gear 1233c in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, it meshes with the vicinity of the end of the driven gear 1234a in the counterclockwise direction of the driven gear member 1234 (see FIG. 120 (b)). At this time, the detection piece 1234b of the driven gear member 1234 is in a state of extending upward with respect to the center of the shaft member 1235, and is in a state of being detected by the rotation detection sensor 1241.

  Then, by the shaft member 1235 whose rear end side is mounted to the driven gear member 1234, the rotating body 1236 mounted to the front end side of the shaft member 1235 turns the open side of the receiving portion 1236a to the right side in front view. It is in the release position. In this state, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 coincides with the right opening 1238c of the ball guiding member 1238, and the receiving portion 1236a and the right guiding portion 1238f are in a state of being communicated with each other. Further, the upper opening 1238b of the ball guiding member 1238 is closed by the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1236.

  As a result, when the game ball is received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the game ball is guided from the receiving portion 1236a through the right opening 1238c and the right guiding portion 1238f to the V winning opening 1156 and received. The game ball T received in the V winning opening 1156 is guided downward by the first discharge path 1230d on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and is detected by the pair of specific sensors 1239, and the lower end of the first discharge path 1230d. Is discharged downward from.

  On the other hand, the game ball T that has been received by the prize winning hole 1155 of the prize winning hole unit 120B and has reached the upper opening 1238b through the ball entrance 1238d and the upper guiding portion 1238e of the ball guiding member 1238 is the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236. The surface and the peripheral wall portion 1238a prevent the receiving portion 1236a from receiving, and the outer peripheral surface of the rotating body 1236 that is inclined so as to narrow the rear end side opens to the rear side of the lower portion of the upper guiding portion 1238e. It enters into the loss hole 1230c of the front surface 1230a of the front unit base 1230, is guided downward by the second discharge path 1230e on the rear side of the unit front base 1230, and is detected by the V loss sensor 1240 and is detected by the second discharge path 1230e. Is discharged downward from the lower end of.

  When the V winning solenoid 1232 is energized, the plunger 1232a rises against the urging force of the coil spring so as to be retracted. As the plunger 1232a rises, the driving gear member 1233 rotates clockwise around the shaft portion 1233a in a front view by the engaging portion 1233d of the driving gear member 1233 engaged with the tip (lower end) of the plunger 1232a. Move. When the drive gear member 1233 rotates clockwise, the driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234 meshing with the drive gear 1233c causes the entire driven gear member 1234 to rotate 90 degrees counterclockwise about the shaft member 1235. Rotate. As a result, the rotary body 1236 attached to the front end side of the shaft member 1235 also rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise in front view through the shaft member 1235 attached to the driven gear member 1234 on the rear end side. Become.

  Then, by rotating the rotating body 1236 counterclockwise by 90 degrees, the receiving portion 1236a is directed upward, and the opening side of the receiving portion 1236a coincides with the upper opening 1238b of the ball guiding member 1238. It becomes a state. This causes the receiving portion 1236a to be in communication with the upper guiding portion 1238e via the upper opening 1238b (see FIG. 120 (a)).

  With the receiving portion 1236a of the rotator 1236 facing upward, when the game ball is discharged from the accessory winning opening unit 1220A side and enters the ball entrance 1238d of the ball guiding member 1238, the upper part is passed through the upper guiding portion 1238e. It is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 from the mouth 1238b. When the game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 and the game ball enters the ball entrance 138b, the entered game ball T passes through the upper guiding portion 1238e and receives the rotating body 1236. After coming into contact with the game ball T received by the portion 1236a from above, the game ball T enters into the opening hole 1230c which is open to the rear side, and is discharged downward through the second discharge portion 130e of the unit front base 1230. It

  At this time, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is supported by the rear wall of the receiving portion 1236a, and even if the game ball T abuts from above, it may come off from the receiving portion 1236a. Absent. Further, the center of the upper opening 1238b (the center of the front guiding portion 1238e in the front-rear direction) is formed slightly rearward with respect to the center of the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. As a result, another game ball T coming from behind comes into contact with a position slightly rearward of the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a, so that another game ball T coming from above is contacted. It is possible to guide the game ball T to the rear with the loss hole 1230c, and it is possible to reliably discharge another game ball T that came later from the loss hole 1230c downward through the second discharge path 1230e.

  According to such a configuration, when a plurality of game balls are supplied to the rotating body 1236 in the operating state shown in FIG. 124 (a), first, of the game balls, the game supplied first. The sphere comes to be held by the receiving portion 1236a. Then, with respect to each game ball supplied thereafter, it comes to enter the loss hole 1230c while being guided by the contact with the game ball held by the receiving portion 1236a (V loss sensor 1240). Detected by). On the other hand, the game ball held by the receiving portion 1236a, when the rotating body 1236 operates from the operating state shown in FIG. 124 (a) to the operating state shown in FIG. 124 (b), The holding is released and the V winning opening 1156 is entered (detected by the specific sensor 1239).

  On the other hand, when a plurality of game balls are supplied to the rotating body 1236 in the operating state shown in FIG. 124 (b), all of these game balls are guided by contact with the rotating body 1236. It comes to enter into the loss hole 1230c (detected by the V loss sensor 1240).

[Detailed configuration of game board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 125.

  As shown in FIG. 98, in the game area 1100, a large number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at a predetermined position on the way. A center accessory 1130 is arranged at a substantially central position of the game area 1100, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the game concept are characterized by the design of the center accessory 1130.

  Further, behind the center accessory 1130, there is provided an effect display device 1115 for displaying an effect with a large area in front view so as to attract the player's attention. As the effect display device 1115, an appropriate display device capable of displaying image information in which decorative pattern image information, background image information, character image information, and the like are combined is used. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is used as the effect display device 1115.

  Here, a gate member 1134, a first starting opening 1152, and a special winning opening 1154 are provided in the flow path from the left side area of the center role object 1130 to the lower side area in the game area 1100. On the other hand, in the flow-down path from the right side area to the lower side area of the center accessory 1130 in the game area 1100, the gate member 1134, the general winning opening 1151, the accessory winning opening 1155, the second starting opening 1153, and the large winning opening. 1154 is provided.

  In this way, the first starting port 1152 is provided so that only the game ball T flowing down the left side area of the center role object 1130 can be won, and the big winning port 1154 is the left side of the center role object 1130. It is provided so that the game ball T flowing down either the area or the right area can be won.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player operates the handle device 500, the game balls T stored in the dish unit 300 are played one by one (at intervals of 0.6 seconds) on the game board 4. The upper portion of the region 1100 can be driven. The game ball T hit in the game area 1100 flows down so as to pass through either the left or right of the center accessory 1130. As a result, when one of the winning openings is won, the number of game balls T corresponding to the accepted winning opening is paid out to the dish unit 300, but no winning opening is won. In the case, it is discharged from the out port 1112a opened at the lower end of the game area 1100. The game ball T discharged from the outlet 1112a, the general winning opening 1151, the first starting opening 1152, the second starting opening 1153, the big winning opening 1154, and the winning a prize opening 1155 is not returned to the player.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the game ball T enters the warp entrance 1131 that is open to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the center role object 1130, it is opened to the lower center of the center role object 1130 in the left-right direction. It is discharged again into the game area 1100 from the warp exit 1132. Immediately below the warp exit 1132, the first starting opening 1152 of the winning opening unit 1150 is always open upward, and the game ball T emitted from the warp exit 1132 has a very high probability of being the first starting opening. It is accepted by 1152.

  Here, the first starting opening 1152 is substantially centered in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 and below the effect display device 1115, a game ball can be always accepted. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 1152, the first starting opening sensor 1190 (FIG. 126) detects the entry (winning) of the game ball. At this time, when it is determined by the main control board 4100 (FIG. 126) that a predetermined special starting condition is satisfied, it is updated (generated) periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. Based on the random number for one special symbol, the first special symbol lottery (first special determination) is performed for the hit (small hit, big hit) that triggers the opening of the prize winning slot 1155 or the big winning slot 1154, The first special symbol dynamically displayed on the one special symbol display 1185 (FIG. 126) is variably displayed for a predetermined time. The first special symbol display device 1185 is provided as a part of the function display device 1114, for example.

  As a result, when the small hit is obtained, after the variation display is finished, the accessory winning solenoid 1225 of the attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126) described later is formed in a pattern according to the kind of the small hit. Energize to open the prize winning opening 1155 (small hit game). On the other hand, when the big hit is obtained, after this variable display is finished, the attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126) described later is energized in a pattern according to the kind of the big hit, The special winning opening 1154 is opened (big hit game). Then, after the big hit game is played, it is possible to control the shift to a later-described time saving game state in which the easiness of accepting the game ball to the second starting port 1153 is improved.

  Note that, as will be described later, when the first starting opening sensor 1190 detects a game ball entering (winning), the main control board 4100 also transmits a payout command to the payout control board 4110 (FIG. 126). To do. That is, in this case, the payout control board 4110 causes the number of game balls T (for example, three) according to the received payout command to be paid out to the dish unit 300.

  On the other hand, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 flows rightward from the upper part of the center accessory 1130 (right hitting), it enters the right flow path 1133 from the entrance 1133a of the center accessory 1130. Then, it is discharged into the game area 1100 from the discharge port 1133e arranged at the substantially vertical center of the game area 1100. A general winning opening 1151 of the winning opening unit 1150 is constantly opened upward below the discharge opening 1133e.

  Then, when the game ball T is received in the general winning opening 1151, it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 1180, and the detection signal is sent to the main control board 4100. In the main control board 4100, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 by a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 1180, and in the payout control board 4110, a number (for example, 10) corresponding to the received payout command. The game ball T is paid out to the dish unit 300.

  The game ball T that has flowed down on the right side of the center winning object 1130 and has not been received in the general winning opening 1151 passes through either the left or right of the receiving portion 1161b in the front flow path forming member 1161 forming the general winning opening 1151. It flows down to the upper surface of the door portion 1221a of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 that closes the accessory winning opening 1155 of the accessory unit 1220. Then, the game ball T that has flowed down to the upper surface of the door portion 1221a rolls to the left on the upper surface of the door portion 1221a below the character winning portion upper ceiling wall portion 1161f, and the character portion winning opening from the left end of the door portion 1221a. It rolls to the upper surface of the left shelf portion 1161g and is discharged from the left end of the accessory winning opening left shelf portion 1161g to the lower left.

  Then, the game ball T discharged from the accessory winning opening left shelf 1161g flows down to the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and rolls to the left on the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j. It is discharged from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j to the lower left. The game ball T emitted from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j abuts the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m on the left side thereof, and moves downward along the right side of the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m. Run down to. The game ball T flowing down along the right side of the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m flows down onto the second starting opening area lower shelf portion 1161i, and the upper surface of the second starting opening area lower shelf portion 1161i is leftward. After rolling to, the second starting opening region lower shelf portion 1161i is discharged from the left end to the lower left portion so as to pass through the front surface of the special winning opening 1154.

  On the other hand, when the game ball is received (passed) to the gate member 1134 in the right channel 1133 or the gate member 1134 on the left side of the center accessory 1130, a gate sensor 1135 described later (see FIG. 126). ), It is detected that there was the same acceptance. At this time, when it is determined by the main control board 4100 (FIG. 126) that a predetermined normal starting condition is satisfied, it is updated (generated) regularly (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical range. Based on the random number for the symbol, the determination process (ordinary determination) for the normal hit which is the operation trigger of the starting opening door member 1214 as the movable piece is performed, and it is dynamically displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189 (FIG. 126). The normal pattern to be displayed is variably displayed for a predetermined time. Then, when the normal win is won, the drive control of the below-described normal accessory drive mechanism 3114 (see FIG. 126) including the starting opening solenoid 1215 and the like is performed after this variable display is completed. As a result, the operation of the starting opening door member 1214 to the appearance position (in the case of the modified example, the operation of the proximity disconnecting member 2215 to the submerged position) is performed.

  However, as described above, the variable starting opening unit 1210 (or the variable starting opening unit 2210) according to the present embodiment, even if the operation by the starting opening door member 1214 is performed, the game ball T to the second starting opening 1153. It is provided with a structure that does not necessarily permit the acceptance of (island type prize hole, tombolo type movable member).

  That is, in the second starting opening 1153 according to this embodiment, even if the operation by the starting opening door member 1214 is performed in accordance with the winning of the normal win, the operation is a bridging time shorter than the prize winning threshold time. If it is only performed, the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214 can not be crossed over the game ball and is spilled, so that the second starting opening 1153 cannot be received. Therefore, the second starting port 1153 according to the present embodiment crosses the upper surface of the starting port door member 1214 only when the operation by the starting port door member 1214 is projected for a time longer than the prize winning threshold time. It is possible to make the game ball T accepted.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state, when the normal judgment is a normal hit, basically, the prize winning threshold time is set as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214. It is decided to choose a shorter bridging time than. In this manner, by eliminating the possibility that the game ball T that is received in the second starting opening 1153 will be crossed over the starting opening door member 1214 in the normal game state, the second starting opening 1153 side The lottery can be set to extremely advantageous game conditions.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the normal judgment is won in the time saving game state, the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214 is a bridge longer than the prize winning threshold time. Be sure to choose a time. Therefore, in the time saving game state, the player hits the game ball in the right side area of the center role object 1130 in the game area 1100 (right hitting), so that the second side on the side where the game condition is extremely advantageous is set. It becomes possible to enjoy a game (second special symbol lottery) corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball into the starting opening 1153. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal game state, the probability that the game ball is received in the first starting port 1152 when left-handed is set to the second starting port 1153 when right-handed. While the probability of accepting the game ball is set to be lower, in the time saving game state, the probability of accepting the game ball to the first starting opening 1152 when hitting the left is higher than the probability of accepting the game ball when hitting the right. The probability that the game ball is received in the second starting port 1153 is set to be higher.

  In addition, when the game ball is received in the second starting port 1153, a second starting port sensor 1191 (see FIG. 126) described later detects the entry (winning) of the game ball. Then, at this time, if a predetermined special starting condition is satisfied, based on a random number for the second special symbol that is updated (generated) periodically (for example, every 4 ms) within a predetermined numerical value range, a prize for a prize is won. The second special symbol lottery (second special judgment) for the hit (small hit, big hit) that will be the opening opportunity of the mouth 1155 and the special winning opening 1154, is performed dynamically on the second special symbol display device 1186 (Fig. 126). The displayed second special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time. The second special symbol display device 1186 is provided as a part of the function display device 1114, for example.

  As a result, when the small hit is obtained, after the variation display is finished, the accessory winning solenoid 1225 of the attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126) described later is formed in a pattern according to the kind of the small hit. Energize to open the prize winning opening 1155 (small hit game). On the other hand, when the big hit is obtained, after this variable display is finished, the attacker solenoid 1204 of the attacker drive mechanism 2121 (see FIG. 126) described later is energized in a pattern according to the kind of the big hit, The special winning opening 1154 is opened (big hit game).

  Here, in the small hit game, the V winning solenoid 1232 is de-energized in a state where any of the game balls that have entered the internal area of the winning a prize port 1155 is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. When the rotating body 1236 rotates clockwise, the game ball that has been received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is guided to the V winning opening 1156. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, the big hit game is started when the specific sensor 1239 detects that the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 as well as when the big hit is won. Therefore, control for opening and closing the special winning opening 1154 is performed in a predetermined pattern.

  In the big hit game, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the special winning opening 1154 is opened, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls have been won in the big winning opening 1154. When the opening / closing control pattern for controlling the special winning opening 1154 to the closed state based on is a one-round round game, this round game is executed to be repeated for the number of rounds according to the type of "big hit". It will be.

  When a game ball is received at the special winning opening 1154 or the accessory winning opening 1155 while these games are being played, the main control board 4100 displays the result of detection by the special winning opening sensor 1206 or the accessory winning opening sensor 1224. Based on this, a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110. Thereby, in the payout control board 4110, the number (for example, 10) of game balls according to the received payout command is paid out to the dish unit 300.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the display by the function display 1114, based on the command from the main control board 4100, the peripheral control board 4010 displays various effect images on the effect display device 1115. It is displayed so that the player can be entertained.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, a lottery (second special symbol lottery) on the second starting opening 1153 side can be played so that a big hit game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. It is supposed to function as a confirmation process.

  More specifically, first, the probability of winning a small hit in the second special symbol lottery is set to a probability value of approximately 100%. In addition, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, as a type thereof, there is a game ball on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the character winning opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a). As long as you play (continue the right-handed game) so that the existing state (waiting for winning) is maintained, you can always start the big hit game with a probability of about 100%. I am trying to do it.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the random number for the second special symbol provided for such a winning process (second special symbol lottery) is stored up to a predetermined number (up to four). It is possible to (hold).

  According to these configurations, when the prize is given to the second starting port 1153 due to the long bridging time and the lottery (probability process) is put on hold, approximately 100% is held each time the hold is exhausted. With the probability that a big hit game can occur, it becomes possible to play. The variable starting opening units 1210 and 2210 according to this embodiment receive all of the game balls that have not been collected in the general winning opening 1151 or the accessory winning opening 1155 among the right-handed playing balls. It is installed in. Then, when the winning to the second starting opening 1153 is allowed due to the long bridging time, at least one or more game balls are provided to the second starting opening 1153 in the open state.

  In this respect, in the time saving game state, as described above, when the normal judgment is won, the bridging time longer than the prize winning threshold time is always selected as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, if the random number for the second special symbol (probability processing) can be held once as a hold state up to a predetermined number, the number of hold times is the number of times when a big hit game is performed (holding is digested Each time), a special gaming property such that a big hit game can be continuously generated regardless of whether it is controlled to a normal game state or a time saving game state is provided.

  According to such a special game property, each time the time saving game state occurs according to the result of any of the winning process (the second special symbol lottery) that is in the hold state, the big hit game occurs with a probability of approximately 100%. As a result, the probability process (second special symbol lottery) that makes the game possible is added so that it can be added as a newly held state. That is, in this case, the number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) in the hold state decreases, and as the situation becomes disadvantageous to the player, the number that can be newly added in the hold state increases. However, it is possible to increase the reversibility from a disadvantageous situation, even though the content of the game itself is the same.

  However, if such special game characteristics are simply realized, each time a time-saving game state occurs, there is a probability that a big hit game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. There is a possibility that the number of reserves of (second special symbol lottery) may be replenished again up to the upper limit value (4). In other words, in this case, the number of reserves thus replenished allows the big hit game to be continuously generated regardless of whether it is controlled to the normal game state or the time saving game state. May be continuously executed more than expected, and there is a concern that the load on the hall side will become excessive.

  In this respect, it is conceivable to keep the probability of occurrence of a time saving game state (continuation probability) low, but even with such a surface continuation probability, it is set to a value below 50%, for example. If it is made too low, the apparent performance will be disadvantageous to the player side, and there is a concern that the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 may be adversely affected.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when there is a hold in both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery, the second special symbol lottery is first digested regardless of the holding order. To control. And on this, through the setting of various game conditions such as the probability that a normal hit is obtained in the normal judgment when in the time saving game state, the variation time of the ordinary symbol, and the variation time of the second special symbol, the time saving game In the state, the expected value of the number of game balls accepted in the second starting opening 1153 is generally "1" between the time when the winning process (the second special symbol lottery) is completed and the big hit game is started. By doing so, even if the probability of continuation of the time saving game state is set as a probability value of 50% or more (here, 50%), the ending condition can be appropriately satisfied.

  That is, in this case, now, assuming that the winning process (second special symbol lottery) has been put on hold for four times, on average of two of these four winning processes (second special symbol lottery). After the big hit game is played, a time saving game state occurs. In this respect, the expected value of the number of game balls accepted in the second starting opening 1153 from the time when the winning process (second special symbol lottery) in the time saving game state is completed to the time when the big hit game is started. Since it is almost "1", expectation of the number of winning process (second special symbol lottery) that is newly put on hold while the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is exhausted for four times. The value will be “2”.

  According to such a configuration, the number of winning process (second special symbol lottery) newly added as a pending state is made smaller than the number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) in the pending state being exhausted. Therefore, even when the above-mentioned special game property is realized, the ending condition of the time saving game state can be appropriately satisfied. On the other hand, the expectation of the number of game balls accepted in the second starting opening 1153 from the time when the winning process (second special symbol lottery) in the time saving game state is completed until the big hit game is started. About this value, since this is generally set to "1", each time a time saving game state occurs, the number of consecutive big hit games (the number of holdings of the winning process (second special symbol lottery)) is added The expectations of are made possible.

  Further, in order to realize such a special game property, if the variable starting port unit 2210 according to the above-mentioned modification is used, even if the starting port door member 1214 operates for a long bridging time, the number of acceptances thereof. Since it can be held at a specified number (for example, one), in the time saving game state, the winning process (the second special symbol lottery) in the pending state is exhausted until the big hit game is started. It is possible to set an expected value of the number of game balls accepted in the starting opening 1153 at an appropriate value. For example, if the winning process (second special symbol lottery) that is on hold in the time saving game state is digested and the time longer than the time from when the big hit game is started is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, It is also possible that the winning process (second special symbol lottery) can be put on hold for a predetermined number (for example, one) determined in advance.

  On the other hand, in the special game described above, each time the time saving game state occurs depending on the result of one of the winning process (the second special symbol lottery) that is in the hold state, the winning process (the second special symbol) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the number of newly added (lottery) items as a new pending state is intentionally varied. That is, in this case, a long fluctuating time in which two or more game balls can be accepted in the second starting port 1153 between the time when the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is exhausted and the big hit game is started. (Advantageous fluctuation time when the expected value of acceptance is 2 or more), or between the time when the winning process (the second special symbol lottery) is exhausted even though the game is in a shorter working time until the big hit game is started. In the above-mentioned second starting port 1153, a short fluctuation time in which one game ball cannot be accepted (a disadvantageous fluctuation time in which the expected value of acceptance is less than 0.5), etc. It can be set through such a setting mode (variable pattern setting process described later).

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the game is in the time saving game state, the long bridging time allows the winning to the second starting opening 1153, and the lottery (probability process) is put on hold. In this case, as described above, it is possible to play the big hit game with a probability of approximately 100% each time the holding is exhausted. That is, in this case, even if the variation time of the symbol corresponding to the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is shortened, a period during which the small hit game corresponding to the advantageous small hit is performed, or after the small hit game is finished. During the period until the big hit game is started (the period until the so-called time saving function is stopped) or the like, the game ball can be received in the second starting port 1153. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the jackpot game is started after the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is digested by simply shortening the variation time of the symbol according to the winning process (second special symbol lottery). In the meantime, it is difficult to prevent one game ball from being accepted in the second starting port 1153.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, as shown in FIG. 98, with respect to the second starting port 1153, the game balls that have not entered the internal area of the accessory winning port 1155 are supplied. This is to be arranged as described above. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting port 1153 while the accessory winning port 1155 is opened.

  Then, on this, the time required for the gaming balls that have not entered the inside area of the accessory winning port 1155 to be supplied to the second starting port 1153 is from the position where the starting port door member 1214 is sunk. A flow-down path between the accessory winning opening 1155 and the second starting opening 1153 is provided so as to be longer than the time maintained as the operating state (long bridging time) (an accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 ( Downflow path including the upper surface of the door portion 1221a)). That is, in this case, even after the opening of the accessory winning port 1155 is completed (after the time saving function is stopped), even if the starting port door member 1214 is still maintained as the operating state from the retracted position, While the operating state is maintained, the game ball is not supplied to the second starting port 1153.

  According to these configurations, in spite of being in the time saving game state, the period from the start of the symbol variation according to the winning process (the second special symbol lottery) to the end of the small hit game (the big hit game It is difficult for the player to enter the second starting opening 1153 for the entire period (until the start). Therefore, it is possible to intentionally give a large variation to the number of game balls accepted in the second starting opening 1153 every time the game is controlled in the time saving game state, while realizing the above-mentioned special game property. .

  However, in this case, even if the time saving game state occurs, it is not always possible to add a new winning process as a holding state. Therefore, in the situation where such a special game property is provided, in the case where the winning process (the second special symbol lottery) that can obtain the result of being able to generate the time-saving game state is relatively reserved, Even if there is the slowest winning process in the digestion order (second special symbol lottery), if you can not generate a time saving game state as a result of that process, you can continuously generate a big hit game. It becomes possible to have a risk that the special game play that can be done will be ended.

  In addition, in order to suitably realize such variations, it is desirable to use the variable starting port unit 2210 according to the above-described modification. That is, in this case, since a predetermined number of game balls are received in the second starting port 1153, the variation time is set so that two game balls can be received in the second starting port 1153. Nevertheless, it is possible to prevent three or four game balls from entering (unintended variation).

  On the other hand, in the situation where such a special game property is provided, only one winning process (second special symbol lottery) that can obtain a result that can generate a time saving game state is put on hold. Even if this is the thing that is digested as the winning process (second special symbol lottery) that is the slowest in the digestion order, the jackpot game as many as the number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) that are on hold Even after the game is continuously digested, a gaming state (privilege game) in which a big hit game can be continuously generated can be continued.

  That is, the winning process in the pending state (second special symbol lottery) is the winning process (second special symbol lottery), which is the latest in the digestion order, and the winning process in the pending state (second special symbol lottery) ) Does not exist. Therefore, in the short time gaming state that occurs as a result of the last winning process in the digestion order (second special symbol lottery) being digested, if there is the first special symbol lottery that is on hold, this will be digested, If there is no first special symbol lottery in the hold state, no game will be progressed.

  However, the probability that a big hit game will occur as a result of the first special symbol lottery is set at a low probability of about 1/400 regardless of the game state, so the first special symbol lottery was in a pending state. Even so, it can be said that a big hit game is unlikely to occur as a result of this being digested.

  That is, in this case, in the situation where special game play is provided, the time-short gaming state that occurs as a result of the completion of the slowest winning process (second special symbol lottery) in the digestion order is usually, Regardless of whether or not one special symbol lottery is on hold, at least one new winning process (second special symbol lottery) is put on hold. Then, when the big hit game occurs by the winning process (the second special symbol lottery) that is newly put on hold, the time saving game state is ended.

  In view of such a fact, if the time saving game state occurs as a result of the winning process (second special symbol lottery) having the latest digestion order being digested, the winning process in the pending state (second special symbol lottery) It is clear that even after the big hit game is continuously digested by the number of, the special game property that can continuously generate the big hit game will be continuously provided.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when such a time saving game state occurs, the first special symbol lottery is in a hold state, and the big hit game occurs as a result of the first special symbol lottery. Even in such a case, the control is performed so that the special game nature can be continuously provided. That is, as the variation time of the symbol according to the first special symbol lottery (variation time at the time of a big hit, or at the time of an advantage small hit), the time at which the winning process (second special symbol lottery) can be newly put on hold ( For example, the second start port 1153 is set to a time at which the expected value of the number of game balls accepted is about “2”).

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a big hit game occurs as a result of the first special symbol lottery, after the big hit game is played, it is always controlled to a time saving game state. There is. Therefore, even if the winning process (second special symbol lottery) cannot be newly put on hold until the big hit game occurs as a result of the first special symbol lottery, the big jackpot game is continued. The special amusement that can be generated intentionally is continued.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the time saving game state is continued for a period until the special symbol lottery is exhausted 100 times.

  On the other hand, the winning process (second special symbol lottery) that allows the player to play a big hit game with a probability of about 100% (second special symbol lottery) is also useful in a game state in which the time saving function does not operate.

  That is, as described above, as shown in FIG. 98, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the normal game state, the game is entered by entering the game ball into the first starting opening 1152 by left-handing. In the left flow path, the gate member 1134 is arranged as a passage opening in the path along which the game balls flow down to the first starting opening 1152.

  In this respect, when the game ball passes through the gate member 1134, the judgment process (normal judgment) for the normal hit which is the operation trigger of the starting opening door member 1214 is performed, but in the normal game state, Even if a normal hit is obtained as a result of the determination process, basically, a bridging time shorter than the prize winning threshold time is selected as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214. This is as described above.

  On the other hand, on the other hand, even if a normal hit is obtained in the normal gaming state, with a small probability (for example, the combined probability of the probability that the normal hit is obtained is about 1/4000), the starting door As the operation time of the member 1214, a bridging time longer than the prize winning threshold time is selected. And in this case, if right-handedness is performed, there is a probability of winning at the second starting opening 1153 with a probability of approximately 100%, and the winning process (second special symbol lottery) will be put on hold. From this, when the winning process (the second special symbol lottery) that has been held is digested, the big hit game will be generated with a probability of about 100%.

  According to such a configuration, in the normal gaming state, in the case where a specific result (big hit, advantageous small hit) is obtained by the lottery according to the winning of the first starting opening 1152, the gate member 1134 Even if a specific result (ordinary hit with a long bridging time selected) is obtained in the judgment processing (ordinary judgment) according to the passage of, a big hit game can occur with a probability of about 100%. You will be able to play. That is, in this case, the ordinary determination can have a function equivalent to the lottery according to the winning of the first starting opening 1152.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, since the gate member 1134 is arranged as a passage opening in the path along which the game balls flow down to the first starting opening 1152, one The game ball is allowed to flow down so as to satisfy both the starting conditions of both the lottery corresponding to the winning of the first starting opening 1152 and the ordinary determination having the same function as the lottery. That is, in this case, the lottery can be executed without consuming two game balls for satisfying the execution condition of the two lottery having the same function. And in this case, even if it does not depend on one lottery, it is possible to generate a jackpot game as long as a specific result is obtained in the other lottery, which is different in type but has the same function as this Therefore, from the player's side, it is difficult to feel distrust even when it is difficult to obtain a specific result by one of the lottery, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 98, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the period when the big hit game is occurring (big hit game state), a game is entered into the special winning opening 1154 by right-handing. The game is advanced by entering the ball, but in the right flow path, the gate member 1134 is also provided as a passage opening in the path along which the game ball flows down to the special winning opening 1154. It has a structure.

  In this respect, when the game ball passes through the gate member 1134, the judgment process (ordinary judgment) for the normal hit which triggers the operation of the starting opening door member 1214 is performed as described above. The determination (ordinary control processing (step S15)) is influenced by the value of the processing flag updated in the special control processing (step S14), as is clear from the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 131) described later. It has a control structure that is executed without receiving it.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of obtaining a specific result (big hit, advantageous small hit) in the lottery according to the winning of the first starting opening 1152, in the special control process (step S14). Even when the processing (steps S230, S240) related to the execution of the big hit game is performed, the big hit is the judgment processing (ordinary judgment) having the same function as the lottery according to the winning of the first starting opening 1152. It becomes possible to continue this even during the period when the game is occurring. That is, in this case, the above determination process (ordinary determination) functions as a lottery as to whether or not a new big hit game different from this can be put in a special standby state during the period when the big hit game is being played. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the big hit game is being played.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the probability that the winning in the second starting opening 1153 is allowed in the normal gaming state (combination of the probability that a normal win is obtained and the probability of selecting a long bridging time) The probability) is set to an extremely low probability value such as about 1/4000. However, in the above-mentioned left flow path, the probability that the game ball will pass through the gate member 1134 will be about 3 to 4 times the probability that the game ball will be accepted into the first starting port 1152. Or, even as the variation time of the normal symbol, the determination process (ordinary determination) can be digested separately for each passing game ball (for example, from the expected value of the time set as the variation time of the first special symbol) 1/3 to 1/4 or less) has been realized.

  Therefore, the probability that a specific result will be obtained in the lottery according to the winning of the first starting opening 1152 (approximately 1/400) and the determination processing (ordinary determination) corresponding to the passage to the gate member 1134 When the probability that the result is obtained (generally 1/4000) is compared with such a starting probability (probability of acceptance into the gate member 1134 or the first starting port 1152), there is a 10-fold probability between the two. There is no difference, and it can be said that there is virtually no difference in probability between 2 and 4 times.

  In this respect, in the above-mentioned right flow path, the probability that the game ball passes through the gate member 1134 is set to be higher, and as a result, a big hit game occurs than in the normal game state. When it is during the period, a specific result can be easily obtained by the above-mentioned determination processing (normal determination).

  However, if the probability that the game ball passes through the gate member 1134 in the right flow path is set too high, a big hit game can occur when the game ball flows down to the right flow path in the normal game state. The expected value (expected value at which a specific result is obtained through the gate member 1134 of the right flow path) is an expected value (a left flow path) at which a big hit game can be generated when the game ball is flowed down to the left flow path. (Combined value of the expected value for which a specific result is obtained through the gate member 1134 and the expected value for which a specific result is obtained through the first starting port 1152), and there is a concern that the load on the hall side becomes excessive. .

  Therefore, with regard to the probability that the game ball passes through the gate member 1134 in the above-mentioned right flow path, the expected value at which a big hit game can be generated when the game ball is flowed down in the right flow path is the left flow path. It is set with a probability value higher than the probability that a game ball will pass through the gate member 1134 in the above-mentioned left flow path within a range that does not exceed the expected value in which a big hit game can be generated when the ball flows down. I am trying to do it.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the new big hit game cannot be put into a special standby state during the period when the big hit game is generated, the big hit game However, if it occurs as a result of the game in the normal gaming state, and the transition control to the time saving gaming state is performed (when it is the first transition to the state where the special gaming property is provided. In this case), a relatively large number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) are supposed to be realized in a game state that can be easily put in a suspended state.

  In other words, during the period when the big hit game occurs, another new big hit game cannot be put into the special standby state, and the first transition to the state where such special game property is provided was made. In the case, since there is no winning process (second special symbol lottery) in the hold state, if there is the first special symbol lottery in the hold state, this will be exhausted and the first in the hold state. If there is no special symbol lottery, no game will be progressed.

  Also, the probability that a big hit game will occur as a result of the first special symbol lottery is set at a low probability of about 1/400 regardless of the game state, so the first special symbol lottery was in a pending state. Even so, it can be said that a big hit game is unlikely to occur as a result of this being digested.

  Therefore, if the first special symbol lottery exists as a suspended state, normally (unless the jackpot game occurs as a result of the first special symbol lottery), the first special symbol lottery in the suspended state Time required to digest the corresponding game (variation time of the symbol, etc.) and the digestion of the game according to the winning process (second special symbol lottery) that was newly put on hold while the game was being digested It becomes possible to put the winning process (second special symbol lottery) on hold over two times with the required time, and thereby hold a relatively large number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) on hold. It becomes possible to realize the playability that is easy to play (double addition game).

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time saving game state, the time required for the symbol variation on the first special symbol lottery side is longer than the time required for the symbol variation on the second special symbol lottery side. It is set so that it can be easily selected, and even by this, at the time of the first transition to a state where special game characteristics are provided, a relatively large number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) are easily held and the game characteristics are retained. Is being realized (super addition game).

  According to these configurations, for example, at the time of the first transition to a state in which special game characteristics are provided (at the time of transition control from the normal gaming state to the time saving gaming state), the game held in the normal gaming state ( First special symbol lottery), and the first game benefit using two of the game (probability process) that has been put on hold in the time saving game state will be given. In this way, by using the game (first special symbol lottery) held in the normal game state as a material for increasing the benefit of the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game in the normal game state. Will be able to.

  In addition, when the first special symbol lottery does not exist as a suspended state at the time when the first transition to the state where special game play is provided, first, the first special symbol lottery is left-handed. In order to realize these game characteristics, it is desirable to play so that the winning process (the second special symbol lottery) is put in the holding state by right-handing after the holding state.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the game state is shifted to the state where the special game property is provided, thereafter, the jackpot game is continuously executed a plurality of times regardless of the game state. In addition to what is possible, the game playability is realized in which the number of jackpot games in the special standby state can be increased each time the game is continuously executed. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the expected value of the prize that the player can obtain through the big hit game per time is set to about 1000 (a big winning hole in one round game). The number of prizes that can be won in 1154, etc.) has been made, and by doing so, the continuity of the big hit game, which is important in achieving such game play, is increased so that no load is generated on the hole side. .

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, as a type thereof, the upper surface (specification of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is specified. There is an advantageous small hit that can start the big hit game as long as you play (continue the right-handed game) so that the state where the game ball exists in the rolling area The selection is made as described above.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the principle by which the big hit game can be started when an advantageous small hit is obtained will be described.
That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, as long as the player continues to hit the right side, the upper surface of the character winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state (specific A structure that allows at least one or more game balls (a few here) to continue to exist in the rolling area is adopted. On the other hand, when at least one or more game balls are present on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the character prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state, the character prize opening / closing When the member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is operated in the open state, the game balls are spilled from the upper surface of the character winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) to the inside area of the character winning opening 1155. It is designed to enter.

  According to such a configuration, as long as the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 is moved to the open state, even if the operation time is extremely short, the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (the door portion). It becomes possible to enter the game ball existing on the upper surface of 1221a) into the inside area of the winning a prize slot 1155. Moreover, since the game balls that have already been fired (game balls that are in a prize-waiting state) will automatically enter the internal area of the prize winning hole 1155, the prize winning hole 1155 It is possible to control the entry timing of the game ball into the internal area more accurately.

  In this respect, in the internal area of the prize winning port 1155, as will be described later, operation is performed such that a certain distribution operation (see FIG. 142 (e)) appears from a specific timing (here, the timing of stopping the symbol). Thus, a rotating body (sorting device) 1236 capable of guiding the game ball that has entered the internal area to either the V winning opening 1156 or the losing hole 1230c is provided. That is, with respect to such a distribution operation of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, the V winning opening can be controlled more accurately while the entry timing of the game ball into the internal area of the accessory winning opening 1155 can be controlled more accurately. The accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) is closed so that the waiting state of winning the game ball is released aiming at the timing of being guided to 1156 (the timing when the game medium is guided to the specific area). It is supposed to operate from the state to the open state.

  When a disadvantageous small hit is obtained, it is possible to more accurately control the entry timing of the game ball into the internal area of the accessory winning port 1155 for the sorting operation of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236. Among the above, the accessory winning opening opening / closing member so that the winning waiting state of the game ball is released aiming at the timing not to be guided to the V winning opening 1156 (missing timing at which the game medium is not guided to the specific area) 1221 (door portion 1221a) is operated from the closed state to the open state.

  According to such a configuration, even if the result of the second special symbol lottery is an advantageous small hit, the game is performed on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the winning prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). A rotating body (shake) that performs a certain sort operation (see FIG. 142 (e)) as long as the game (continue the right-handed game) is maintained so that the state where the ball exists (waiting state for winning) Minute device) 1236 guides the player to the V winning opening 1156 at an accurate timing, so that the game ball enters the inside area of the winning a prize opening 1155, so that there is a probability of about 100% to the V winning opening 1156. It becomes possible to start a big hit game according to acceptance (big hit control). As a result, not only when a big hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, even when an advantageous small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, a big hit game is started with a probability of about 100%. Since it is possible to do so, by setting the probability that the advantageous small hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery as approximately 100%, the second special symbol lottery is a big hit game with a probability of approximately 100%. As a result, it can be made to function as a winning process that enables a game.

  Moreover, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, basically, in order to be able to more accurately control the timing when the game ball enters the internal area of the prize winning port 1155, , Only the game balls that are already in a prize-waiting state on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the winning a prize opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) can enter the internal area of the winning a prize opening 1155. Only for a short time (a short time for refusing to win the game balls that are not in the prize-waiting state), the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) is operated from the closed state to the open state. In addition, such a time (time to operate the character prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) from the closed state to the open state) is at least shorter than the interval between game ball firings (0.6 seconds). Therefore, it is required to make it difficult for a new game ball to be supplied while it is in the open state.

  As a result, variations in the winning timing of the game balls when the accessory winning port 1155 is opened are less likely to occur, so that a certain sorting operation (see FIG. 142 (e)) appears in the rotating body (sorting device) 1236. By determining in advance which of the V winning opening 1156 and the loss hole 1230c, the game ball can be made to enter the internal area.

  As will be described later, the probability that a big hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery according to this embodiment is extremely low (1/400), and the probability that a small hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery is also set. The probability is as low as the same (7/1200). However, in the second special symbol lottery, for the big hit, although the winning probability is very low (1/400) similar to the first special symbol lottery, about the small hit (advantageous small hit), about It can be obtained at 100% (for example, 399/400, or 398/400 when the loss is set to 1/400). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when both the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are reserved, the second special symbol lottery is first digested regardless of the reservation order.

  According to such a configuration, in the time saving game state, of the first special symbol lottery and the winning process (second special symbol lottery), the game centered on the winning process (second special symbol lottery) (further say If, for example, the winning process (second special symbol lottery side only) will be progressed, and as a result of such progress, an advantageous small hit is usually immediately obtained as a result of the winning process (second special symbol lottery). Will be done. Then, by opening the accessory winning hole 1155 at the timing when the game ball that has already been fired and is in the waiting state for winning a prize is guided to the V winning hole 1156 (by performing a small hit game), A big hit game corresponding to this can be generated.

  In addition, when an advantageous small hit is obtained, the small hit game in which the accessory winning hole 1155 is opened at the timing when the game ball that has already been fired and is in the prize waiting state is guided to the V winning hole 1156. Since it is possible to generate a big hit game corresponding to this, by generating such a small hit game and a big hit game corresponding to this, one bonus game that can win a large number of prizes Alternatively, it may be provided to the player.

  However, each time a small hit (advantageous small hit) is obtained in the winning process (second special symbol lottery), if a high V winning probability that the game ball is accepted in the V winning opening 1156 is simply realized, The V prize hole 1156 is provided, such as "providing a gaming property based on the machine lottery such as whether or not a game ball is accepted in the V prize hole 1156 with a predetermined machine lottery probability in the internal area of the winning prize hole 1155". It is possible that the basic playability of the machine lottery at that time will be destroyed. In general, it is desirable to set such a machine lottery probability with a low probability of about 1/10 or less.

  Therefore, in consideration of such a situation, when the accessory winning port 1155 is opened according to the small hit (advantageous small hit) obtained as a result of the winning process (second special symbol lottery), the winning prize hole 1155 is obtained. It is conceivable that more than 10 game balls are made to enter the inner area of the above so that only one of the game balls is received in the V winning opening 1156. However, the small hits (advantageous small hits) obtained as a result of the winning process (second special symbol lottery) are different from the big hits aimed at achieving a large number of prizes, as open time during the small hit game. The upper limit of the time that can be set is 1.8 seconds, and the upper limit of the number that can be set as the number of game balls detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 during the small hit game is 10. It is supposed to be regulated.

  Here, considering that the firing interval at which the game balls can be continuously fired when the player operates the handle device 500 is 0.6 seconds, the game balls that can be won during the small hitting game are It can be understood that the number is usually only three by the calculation formula of "1.8 seconds / 0.6 seconds". Further, even if a large number of game balls can be won during the small hit game, when the number of game balls detected by the prize hole sensor 1224 reaches 10, the prize hole 1155 is closed. Therefore, it is necessary to ensure that more than 10 game balls can stably enter the internal area of the prize winning hole 1155 during the small hit game, and by necessity, to the V winning hole 1156. Despite the guidance, it can be said that it is difficult to set the machine lottery probability to a probability value of approximately 1/10 or less.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, first,
(A) L (for example, 6 cm) is the length in the left-right direction (the length in the rolling direction of the game ball in the specific rolling region) on the upper surface of the winning a prize opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a). When the time of the firing interval when the game balls T are continuously driven into the game area 1100 by the hitting ball launching device 650 in response to the operation of the handle device 500 is T (0.6 seconds), the character prize opening / closing A structure such as a structure that engages with the game ball rolling in the passage so that the average speed (preferably the maximum speed) of the game ball T on the upper surface of the member 1221 (door 1221a) is less than "L / 2T". By having (a), as long as the player continues to hit the right side, at least two (2,3) or more (2,3) are provided on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. Make a game ball exist So that it is possible.

Furthermore, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
(B) All the game balls that are waiting for winning the prize winning opening 1155 when the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) changes from the closed state to the open state. Structure such as an internal passage in which the time required for a game ball that has entered the internal area to reach the position detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 is longer than the total ball entry time required to enter the internal area By having (b), the game ball that has entered the internal area is provided for the determination of the closing of the winning a prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (the upper limit value determination for the number of gaming balls T that can be won). All the game balls in the prize-waiting state can be entered and ended before reaching the detection position (the prize winning opening sensor 1224).

  According to such configurations (a) and (b), it becomes possible to positively generate an overflow prize for the upper limit value (up to 10 in the small hit game) of the game balls that can be won. .

Moreover, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
(C) With respect to the traveling direction (left direction) of the game balls such that the plurality of game balls on the upper surface of the character prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) spill into the character prize hole 1155 almost at the same time. Character prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) provided so as to slide in a vertical direction (backward direction).
With such a configuration (C), each time the character prize opening / closing member 1221 is opened, the game balls on the upper surface of the character prize opening / closing member 1221 are irrespective of the number thereof. Since it is possible to collectively enter all of the inside of the winning hole 1155, it is possible to reduce the time required for winning the winnings hole 1155 to the utmost.

Then, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
(D) At least two or more game balls are used as the predetermined closing interval time when the opening control of the bonus winning opening 1155 is divided into a plurality of short opening times with a predetermined closing interval time. The time required to reach the right side portion of the article prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (twice the firing interval or more (for example, 1.2 seconds or more)) is adopted, and the short opening time is also used. As a time required for the game ball in the prize-waiting state to spill into the prize winning opening 1155 by the sliding operation of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) (shorter than the firing interval, for example, 0.12 seconds) is adopted to control the short opening operation shorter than the firing interval (the expected value to win is less than 1 in the calculation). Every time a releasing operation appears, at least two or more game balls that are in a prize-waiting state while the predetermined closing interval time has elapsed can all be collectively entered into the internal area of the accessory winning port 1155. I am trying.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to dramatically increase the number of winning game balls per unit time when the game is in the open state. Due to such excellent winning performance, the regulation for the above-mentioned small hit game is restricted. Even when the game ball is always guided to the V winning opening 1156, the machine lottery probability can be set at a low probability value of about 1/10 or less.

  For example, when the total time allowed as the opening time during the small hitting game is 1.8 seconds and 0.12 seconds is adopted as the above short opening time, the prize winning opening 1155 is divided into 15 times. It can be opened for a short time. In this case, theoretically, in consideration of the fact that each time the short opening appears, all of the two or three game balls that are in the prize-waiting state enter the internal area of the prize winning slot 1155 all at once. Then, when the prize winning opening 1155 is opened shortly in 15 times, at least 30 game balls will be won in the prize winning opening 1155.

  However, according to the regulation for the small hit game described above, the tenth game ball is detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 before the opening control is completely exhausted. The small hit game is ended based on the detection. In view of this, in the above configuration, every time a short opening appears, all of the two or three game balls that are in the prize-waiting state enter the inside area of the accessory winning port 1155 all at once. For example, it is hard to think that only 10 game balls will be won by the end of the small hit game, and it is considered that overflow wins occur and 11 or 12 game balls are often won. Therefore, during the small hitting game in which such control is executed, an average of more than 10 game balls come into the internal area of the winning a prize hole 1155, whereby the V winning hole 1156. Even in the case where any game ball is always guided to, it is possible to set the machine lottery probability at a low probability value of approximately 1/10 or less.

[Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the drawing, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and these two groups share various controls. The group of main boards 4000 is configured to include a main control board 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game) and a payout control board 4110 that controls a payout of game balls and the like. A group of peripheral control boards 4010 is a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and an effect display device 1115 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 126, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor that incorporates a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids. A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”) built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and for preventing fraud. The functions of are also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first starting opening sensor 1190 for detecting the game ball received in the first starting opening 1152 and a second starting opening sensor for detecting the game ball received in the second starting opening 1153. 1191 and the detection signal from the general winning a prize sensor 1180 which detects the game ball received in the general winning a prize 1151 are respectively inputted through the main control I / O port 4100b, the gate sensor 1135, the special winning a prize sensor 1206. The detection signals from the prize winning sensor 1224 and the specific sensor 1239 are input through the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the main control MPU 4100a has a starting opening solenoid 1215 via the panel relay board 3040. A drive signal is output to the accessory drive mechanism 3114, an attacker drive mechanism 2121 having an accessory win solenoid 1225 or an attacker solenoid 1204, a V prize solenoid 1232, a main control I / O port 4100b, a panel relay board 3040, and a function display. First special symbol display 1185, second special symbol display 1186, first special symbol memory display 1184, second special symbol memory display 1187, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol memory display through the substrate 1114 1188, game status indicator 1183, round And it outputs a drive signal to 示器 1182.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various kinds of information related to games (game information) and various kinds of commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The main control board 4100 and the peripheral control section 4140 are electrically connected to each other by a harness (not shown)). When the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU 4100a shapes these various commands and sends them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is described). With this capacitor, the main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and outputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification when those voltages become lower than the power failure notification voltage. The power failure notice signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 126, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of gaming balls, etc. performs a payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout, a firing control by a firing solenoid 654, and a ball feeding by a ball feeding solenoid 585. A firing control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing the error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720. , A tank rail 731, and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting a ball removal operation.

[Payout controller]
As shown in FIG. 126, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various kinds of control related to payout in the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor in which a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like are incorporated. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and the external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter, referred to as “external WDT 4111c”) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. And a payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are input. , Are provided. The payout control MPU 4111a has a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), and for preventing fraud. Functions are also built in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 4100 and various kinds of commands about the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or the main control board. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the 4100 is input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the out-of-ball switch 750 is input. The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 may be input via the prize ball relay board 754.

  A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the unit base 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first transmitted via the sensor substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first the payout control input circuit. 4111e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full in the stored game balls is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 with an error LED indicator. A signal for displaying on the 4130 is output to the error LED indicator 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko game 1 is issued via the payout control I / O port 4111b. Then, the data is transmitted to the main control board 4100 in a serial manner, or the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED indicator 4130 is a segment indicator, and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotor 748 is provided at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740. When It notifies that the payout ball 748 is difficult to rotate due to meshing with the ball near the entrance, and when the number "3" is displayed, it means that "count switch error" (specifically, , That the count sensor 751 is defective based on the detection signal from the count sensor 751), and when the number “5” is displayed, it means that “retry error” (specifically, payout). The number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number "6" is displayed, it means "full" (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored game balls), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means "CR unconnected" (dispensing). control "Electrical connection has been cut off in any area from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number" 9 "is displayed, it means" in stock "(specifically, The number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  A ball lending request signal for a game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and a return request signal for a prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent to the ball lending unit board 366, the main side relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via the. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is issued to the payout control I / O. It is received by the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented gaming balls, and at the same time, outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining number display 365c to the CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the board 874, the main-side relay terminal board 880, and the ball rental unit board 366, and this signal is input to the remaining number display 365c.

[Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, the firing control unit 4120 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 585 receives a detection signal from various detection switches related to firing. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal, and this launch A firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillating circuit 4120b so that 100 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 1100 and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball sending reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the firing reference pulse is generated and output to the ball sending solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

  A touch sensor 516 for detecting whether the palm or finger touches the handle body 504, and a detection signal from a firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether to forcibly stop the launch of the game ball according to the intention of the player. Is first input to the firing control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and then the main relay terminal plate 880, and then to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal board 874 are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit 4120a as a CR connection signal and to the firing timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the handle main body 504 is first the handle device relay board 192, and then the main-side relay terminal board 880. Is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via.

  The launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d, based on the signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512, a drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle body 504, and a launch reference pulse. Is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e is triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse to supply a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192. By the output, the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current The game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the side of the hitting ball launching device 650 by stopping the output of. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the firing solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. Controlled.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control section 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and an effect display device 1115 based on control data from the peripheral control section 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing of the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 126, the peripheral control unit 4140 that performs the effect control in the peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG. The sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the lamp drive board serial I / O port to the lamp drive board 3041 or the game board. The motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the game board decoration drive board serial I / O port for outputting drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in FIG. To transmit to the drive board 3045 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 Door-side drive composed of door-side drive data and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 5 Light emission data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive board to the door panel base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the device 3252 from the liquid crystal control unit serial I / O port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, a control signal for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d ( Sound command) is output to the sound source IC 4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various effect units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been done. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressing detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are the door frame base board. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. is doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. The lower speaker 821 is controlled so that music and sound effects suitable for various performances are played, and the door frame 5 is connected via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music and sound effects suitable for various performances flow from the provided speakers 130, 222, 262 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "WDT with built-in peripheral control") built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 also has an external watchdog timer (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external"). WDT ”) is also provided, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control by using the peripheral control internal WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by the serial input / output port. ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the peripheral data MPU 4140a outputs to the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, initial data, door frame side lighting blink command, game board side lighting blink command, movable body drive command. , A plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command are used, and in this embodiment, a bit rate of 250 kbps is set.

  The lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 transmit a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting blink command via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 to the door frame. 5 output to the LED of each of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc., or a lighting signal or flashing signal based on the received game board side lighting flashing command. The decorative boards 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546 and the like provided on the game board 4 output to the LEDs. In addition, the panel relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 receives a drive signal based on the received drive command for the movable body, and a dial drive motor provided in the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882. It outputs to 414, each drive motor 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508 etc. which were provided in the game board 4, each solenoid, etc.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is normally operating, or receives a signal from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or the operation unit 400 included in the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 is provided. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It may be input via a lamp drive board 3041 or a motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of 3010.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the peripheral side relay terminal board. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 from the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via 882, or the lamp driving board 3041 and the motor driving board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects flow. In the present example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the game window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. To send an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal including a lower speaker 391 described later, or a 4.1ch surround signal) to the lower speaker 821 for bass. Thus, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

[Abnormal noise prevention measures]
The door frame 5 is equipped with various acoustic equipment, LEDs, sensors, and other equipment that requires power, and a door frame base substrate 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5 (FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes the side speaker 130, the upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of the left and right side decoration units, and the lower speaker 821 (FIG. 67) in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is connected with the bass speaker) (FIG. 89) and is also connected with the peripheral control board 4010 provided in the game board 4, and amplifies the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and outputs it to each speaker. It has an amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit).

  Further, on the door frame base substrate 194, wirings for connecting various sound equipments, LEDs, sensors and the like to the payout control substrate 4110, the peripheral control substrate 4010 and the like are gathered together and extended backward. It is adapted to be connected to the main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the body frame 3 (FIGS. 67 and 89). The rear side of the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with a door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIG. 23).

  In addition, at a position (rear side) where the door frame base substrate cover 195 is arranged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and the game area 1100 despite being shot by the hitting ball launching device 650. A foul cover unit 540 (a molded product of transparent polycarbonate) that guides a game ball (foul ball) that has not arrived to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit is provided in proximity (FIG. 23).

  In the ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, the game balls (metal) pass at a high speed while coming into contact with the wall surface of the passage, so that electrostatic charges are accumulated in the polycarbonate of this portion, which may reach 10 kV or more. There is (at most 3 to 4 kV even when pain is felt due to discharge of accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, unlike metal, even if grounded, the electric charge accumulated in the resin only escapes from the periphery, and most of it remains.

  Then, due to the electrostatic induction due to this electric charge, a digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 that is close to the electric charge may malfunction. In this case, an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time is input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal from the digital amplifier circuit is extremely amplified and exceeds the appropriate amplification width (when an excessive AC voltage occurs). Occur. In that case, for example, a cracked sound such as a crackling sound is generated from the speaker, a sound reproduced by the speaker becomes a large unpleasant sound (an abnormal sound is generated), and the sound becomes unpleasant to the player. It will be felt. In addition, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. Although the digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, it is usually not on the output side.

  Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is hard to hear, the output tends to be set to a large value.

  In the embodiment described below, it is detected whether the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the above-mentioned abnormal audio signal, and when it is the abnormal audio signal, The present invention relates to an invention relating to an abnormal sound signal blocking board (described later) that blocks an abnormal sound signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

  Regarding audio output, as described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, the various commands are output. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c (FIG. 126).

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and a lower part provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the door frame base board 194. The speaker 821 and the side speakers 130 provided on the door frame 5 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 are controlled so that music and sound effects according to various effects are played (see FIGS. 126 and 127).

[Abnormal sound signal blocking board]
Next, the abnormal sound signal blocking board will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. FIG. 127 is a block diagram of the door frame base board 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, and the lower speaker 821. FIG. 128 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884.

  As shown in FIG. 127, the door frame base board 194 arranged on the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 arranged on the main body frame 3 are connected by wiring 196, and the periphery of the door frame base board 194 A + 24V voltage, a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the door frame base substrate 194, are output to the side relay terminal plate 882, and are output to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 through the wiring 196. It is supposed to be transmitted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 127, in the main body frame 3, an abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, and the peripheral side relay terminal 882 is provided. The board 882 and the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 are connected by the speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by the lower speaker harness 819.

  In FIG. 128, from the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 to the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, the ground GND, the + 24V voltage, and the woofer + signal and the woofer which are the sound signals for the lower speaker 821 output from the door frame base board 194. -The signal is relayed and transmitted to the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883.

  Further, the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 outputs a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are sound signals for the lower speaker 821, to the lower speaker 821 and supplies and outputs them to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. Has been done. In this way, the audio signal output from the door frame base board 194 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821 through the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884.

  By the way, it is desirable that the location of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 in the main body frame 3 is less likely to be affected by electrostatic noise. In the present embodiment, the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 is arranged at a place far away from the foul cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. As described above, by disposing the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 at a position where it is unlikely to be affected by static electricity noise, it is possible to stably prevent the abnormal sound signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

[Abnormal sound signal blocking circuit]
The abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884 detects whether the sound signal supplied to the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal sound signal. The audio signal is cut off so as not to be input to the lower speaker 821.

  As shown in FIG. 128, the abnormal sound signal cut-off board 884 outputs from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 which detects that the sound signal is an abnormal sound signal and outputs an abnormal sound detection signal. An abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 that cuts off the supply of the abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821 when receiving the outputted abnormality detection signal.

  The + 24V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the + 24V supply line 886 in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884. The ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the ground line 887 in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884.

  The woofer + signal, which is a sound signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two in the abnormal sound signal cutoff board 884, one of which is input to the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888, and the other is It is input to the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885.

  A woofer signal, which is a sound signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two in the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884, and one is relayed in the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 through the woofer signal line 889. It is only connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal voice signal detection circuit]
The abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 includes a rectifying bridge circuit in which four diodes SD1 to SD4 are connected in a bridge type, a resistor SR1 (47 kΩ) and an electrolytic capacitor SC1 (in the present embodiment, arranged in the subsequent stage of the rectifying bridge circuit. It is mainly composed of an infrared LED having a capacitance of 47 μF), a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and a photocoupler SPC1 (in which an infrared LED and a phototransistor are incorporated).

  The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the woofer + signal of the other of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. . The cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the woofer signal of the other of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

  Further, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to form a rectifying bridge circuit. The cathode terminal of the diode SD2 is connected to the + voltage line 890 that supplies the positive voltage rectified by the rectification bridge circuit to the latter stage, while the anode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the latter stage of the rectification bridge. The 0V line 891 that supplies 0V whose voltage is substantially 0V by cutting the minus part by the circuit is connected.

  Then, in the latter stage of the rectifying bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the − terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is connected to the 0V line 891. It is connected.

  That is, the woofer + signal and the woofer signal rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit (the + voltage waveform in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0 V as the connection point) are electrolyzed through the resistor SR1. By being applied to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak, and during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is designed to discharge. The time constant of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is determined by the resistance value of the resistor SR1 and the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

  One end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 after the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the + voltage line 890. The base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2, and is also connected to the other end of the resistor SR3 whose one end is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, the ripple of the + voltage waveform is removed and smoothed by the capacitor SC2.

  The collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890 at a stage subsequent to the connection point of the capacitor SC2 on the + voltage line 890, and the woofer signal smoothed after the rectification, that is, the + voltage is applied. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. The resistors SR2 and SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

  One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the connection point of the resistors SR2 and SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6. The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. Further, one end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0V line 891.

  That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7 that appears based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

  On the other hand, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the + voltage line 890 at the subsequent stage of the connection point of the + voltage line 890 with the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. The cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0V line 891.

  That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on when the transistor STR2 is turned on.

[Abnormal voice signal interruption circuit]
The abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 mainly includes a phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1, a transistor STR3, and a relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

  In the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, the 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one is connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 and the other is connected to the eighth terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1. Has been done. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. The resistors SR8 and SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

  The base terminal of the transistor STR3 for relay operation is connected to the connection point of the resistors SR8 and SR9, and one end of the capacitor SC3 whose other end is connected to the ground line 887 is connected. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the third terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

  Further, the fourth terminal (the other of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the ground line 887. Further, the 5th terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer + signal line 888, and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 (the other of the B contacts) is the lower speaker harness 819 as an external output of the woofer + signal. Through the external lower speaker 821.

  Furthermore, a varistor SZNR1 for inductive current bypass by self-induction is connected in parallel between the 8th terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1 and the 1st terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1, and the 5th of the relay SRL1 is connected. A varistor SZNR2 for contact protection is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal of the relay SRL1 (the other of the B contacts).

  Since the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC1, electrical noise does not directly enter from the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 to the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895. It is like this.

  Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when a normal audio signal is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When a normal voice signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, in the rectifier bridge circuit of the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885, in the case of a woofer + signal, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are conducted, In FIG. 128, a current flows from top to bottom through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak.

  When a normal audio signal (a waveform of an AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage increase due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and maintains the off state.

  Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, and the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

  In the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 become conductive, and a current flows from the upper side to the lower side in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 128, from 0 V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the mountain. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

  When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage increase due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 does not turn on and maintains the off state.

  Next, during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0 V, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged, and the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 moves to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

  In this way, when a normal audio signal (a waveform of an AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 maintains the off state. Therefore, the transistor STR2 and the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the photocoupler SPC1 also remain in the off state, and the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 does not practically turn on.

<Abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895>
On the other hand, in the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, the photocoupler SPC1 maintains the off state, and the transistor STR3 also maintains the off state. Further, the relay SRL1 is in a non-operating state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in a non-excited state, and the B contact between the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is inoperative (the contact is closed), and the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal are inoperative. It is the A contact (the contact is open). Therefore, the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal audio signal is input for a certain period of time] [Operation when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed DC voltage is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal (for example, a constant voltage of + 24V, + 18V, + 1.5V, etc.) due to a fixed DC voltage is continuously input, the diode SD2 and the diode SD2 and the diode are provided in the rectifying bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885. SD3 becomes conductive, and a charging current flows from the upper side to the lower side in electrolytic capacitor SC1 through resistor SR1 in FIG. 128, and electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

  When an abnormal audio signal due to a fixed constant voltage is input, the increase in the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to the increase in the charge accumulated at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 with the passage of time is not applied. This approaches the constant voltage, and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, a current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistors SR2 and SR4, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR4 (the voltage appearing at the connection point of the resistors SR2 and SR4) , A resistor SR5, a Zener diode SZD1, a resistor SR6, and a resistor SR7, a current flows, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2 in the subsequent stage. This turns on the transistor STR2.

  When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is lowered to the 0V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photo coupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal described in claim 1. The diode SD5 limits the current flowing through the infrared LED.

<Abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895>
When the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 and the resistors SR8 and SR9. Here, turning on the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistors SR8 and SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, and the transistor STR3 is turned on. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise from the capacitor SC3.

  When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the first terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side. The coil inside the relay SRL1 between the second terminal and the No. terminal is energized, and the relay SRL1 operates.

  Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in the excited state, and the B contact between the terminals 5 and 6 of the relay SRL1 is in the operating state (contact is open). The contact between the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal is in the operating state. It becomes the A contact (the state where the contact is closed). Therefore, the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 shift to the cutoff state, and the output of the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off.

  Moreover, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal of the relay SRL1 shift to a conducting state, the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is pulled down to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 connected to the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 becomes the ground. It is pulled down and the transistor STR3 is turned off.

  On the other hand, the first terminal of the relay, which is connected in parallel to the third terminal of the relay SRL1, is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows in the route of the eighth terminal, the first terminal, the third terminal, the fourth terminal, and the ground line 887. The state of conduction of the coil is maintained and the energized state of the coil is maintained. Therefore, the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 of the woofer + signal remains blocked.

  In this way, when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs the abnormal detection signal (photo coupler). Turns on). When the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895 receives the abnormal sound detection signal output from the abnormal sound signal detection circuit 885 (when the photo coupler is turned on), the relay SRL1 operates to supply the abnormal sound signal to the lower speaker 821. Shut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged by the continuous application of the fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

  In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormal voice is input, the energization state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the woofer + signal is kept cut off from the output from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1, Ultimately, safety measures are taken with the highest priority being to prevent speaker damage. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal voice signal can be grasped by a staff member, or when the output stop state of the voice is confirmed, the operating state of the relay SRL1 is canceled by turning on the power of the gaming machine again. It is possible to return to a normal initial state.

[Operation when abnormal audio signal due to excessive AC voltage is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885>
When an abnormal audio signal due to an excessive AC voltage is input, that is, when an excessive AC voltage exceeding the proper amplification width is input due to the audio signal being extremely amplified, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, The diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are turned on, and the charging current flows from the top to the bottom of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. To be done.

  Further, for example, in the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 become conductive, and the charging current flows from the top to the bottom through the resistor SR1 to the electrolytic capacitor SC1 in FIG. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period up to the peak voltage.

  In this case, since the peak voltage of the abnormal audio signal is extremely higher than the peak voltage of the normal audio signal, even if the width of the peak-shaped waveform is the same between the normal waveform and the abnormal waveform, the resistance SR1 A charging current rapidly flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 to rapidly charge the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

  Therefore, the electric charge stored in the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 rapidly increases. Due to this rapid increase in electric charge, the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises and reaches the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

  The operation of the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operations when the abnormal voice signal by the fixed DC voltage described above is input. Yes, it will be briefly described.

  When the transistor STR1 is turned on, the transistor STR2 is turned on, and when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. In the abnormal sound signal cutoff circuit 895, when the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the transistor STR3 is turned on, and when the transistor STR3 is turned on, the relay SRL1 is activated and the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 are cut off. Then, the output of the woofer + signal on the woofer + signal line 888 from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the abnormal sound from being generated due to the abnormal audio signal of the excessive AC voltage that is extremely amplified and exceeds the proper amplification width. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from making an unpleasant sound.

[LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 126, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the rendering of the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in the peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG. 126, a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various commands and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c that controls the display of the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 described above, and a screen displayed on the effect display device 1115. A character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the above, and a character RAM 4150e for transferring and copying various data stored in this character ROM 4150d.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150c based on the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to produce the effect display device 1115 or the first display. The drawing control of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal to be described later from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, and A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens drawn on the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data, which defines the order when various data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e, in time series. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1115 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. In this way, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the top screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays the sprite data on the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1115. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, it outputs a running signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP4150c uses a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1115 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is used for the effect display device 1115 or This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

  An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the character ROM 4150d, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1115 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1115 is affected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1115. For example, when displaying various people on the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the data for drawing each person is called “sprite”. Thereby, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set to a position arranged on the screen or a vertical relationship when the sprites are overlapped with each other (hereinafter, referred to as “order of sprite superposition”), and the effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device are set. 3252.

  The sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, one character can be used for expression, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of six characters arranged horizontally 2 × long 3 can be used for expression. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The effect display device 1115 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 sequentially set from left to right when viewed from the front thereof, a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel, and intersect with the one direction. The sub-scanning is performed by repeatedly performing the main scanning in the direction. When the rendering data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input, the effect display device 1115 moves from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as main scanning. Sequentially output to pixels for one line. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly when the drawing data for the next line is input, the next line is output. Based on the drawing data of the minutes, main output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1115 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Control processing in the main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 140. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing in the main control board. FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is executed by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing of special symbols. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the starting opening winning process. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the variation start processing of the special symbol. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process of a special symbol. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during fluctuation of a special symbol. FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing an example of the small hitting game start process of the special symbol. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of a small hitting game process of a special symbol. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of a big-hit game starting process of a special symbol. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol big hit game process.

[About main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 129, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is normal (is the set value at the time of power failure), and is normal. If there is, a process (recovery process) for returning to the state at the time of power failure is executed according to the backup data stored in the RAM, and if the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared to set the device around the CPU (normal initial state). Settings, interrupt timing settings, etc.).

  When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM as backup data. Further, if the RAM clear switch 624a for instructing the clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on process is on, the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed. Further, in the power-on process, if backup data is not stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

  Further, in the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has started up to the peripheral control unit 4140 in a transmittable state when the normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress of the game such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the game state when the power is shut off. In addition, even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (for example, when the power is turned off) when the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is restored. When the supply is started, the power-on process is executed.

  When this power-on process ends, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process that repeatedly executes each process for game. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, respectively, after converting the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the pachinko machine 1 into a predetermined power supply voltage on the power supply board, Supply to the device. Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure notice signal indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped. Sent. Then, when the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 detects the power failure advance notice signal in step S2, the power failure occurrence process is executed (step S4).

  This power failure occurrence process is performed when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is in the state before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of power failure as backup data in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) to start from. Although the processing contents will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not an interrupt processing but a branch processing executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal detection. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  By the way, when the power failure notice signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, a random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

[About processing when power is cut off]
Next, as shown in FIG. 130, the power failure occurrence process is a process executed when a power failure advance notice signal is detected in the main process. The main control MPU 4100a first makes an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the contents of the RAM before the power failure is retained when the power is restored.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets, in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM, a stipulated value indicating that the processing at the time of power failure occurred (step S4c). After the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In addition, in this process, when the power supply interruption process is started due to the power supply voltage becoming unstable due to a power failure for a very short time (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power failure”), Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, the above process may not be able to return from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset unless the watchdog timer is updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is regularly updated while the processing is normally performed, but the processing is started when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even if the power-off occurrence process is started due to the momentary power failure and the infinite loop is entered, the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on, after the predetermined period has elapsed.

[About timer interrupt processing]
Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during execution of the main process, and as shown in FIG. The control MPU 4100a executes the process of saving the registers (step S10), and then executes the processes of steps S11 to S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signals of the above-mentioned switches (gate switch, starting opening sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number updating process 2 may be updated in the random number updating process 1. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout of gaming balls is set to the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  Further, in the special control process of step S14, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed on the special symbol display devices 1185 and 1186 based on the progress state of the game, or the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker drive mechanism 2121). By controlling the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 and the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203) for opening / closing the prize winning opening 1155 or the special winning opening 1154, the opening / closing state of the role winning opening 1155 or the big winning opening 1154 is changed. Execute the process.

  In step S15, a normal control process including a lottery process for winning or losing the normal hit which is an operation trigger of the start door member (movable piece) 1214 is executed. In this normal control process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100, after the end of the big hit game state, if a specific condition (ON of the time saving flag) is satisfied, the variable display of the normal symbol only for a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game state. The time required for control is shortened, and the lottery process is executed so that the driving mode of the starting opening door member 1214 is changed and the winning in the second starting opening 1153 is allowed (so-called time saving game. Status). In this embodiment, if a normal determination is made irrespective of whether or not the player is in the time saving game state, he or she is elected with a probability of 1/20 per ordinary win, but when not in the time saving game state. When the normal hit is obtained (when the normal hit is obtained in the normal game state), the game ball T rolls on the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214 as the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214. Basically, only a bridging time shorter than the above-mentioned prize winning threshold time required to be activated and accepted by the second starting opening 1153 is selected, on the other hand, when a normal win is obtained in the time saving game state, As the operation time of the start door member 1214, a bridging time longer than the prize winning threshold time is always selected. Therefore, the player basically hits the game ball into the right side area of the center role object 1130 in the game area 1100 (right hitting) only in the time saving game state, and thereby the starting opening door member 1214. Each time when is operated, it becomes possible to make a lottery with a high probability of hitting a big hit game by entering a game ball T into the second starting opening 1153 (big hit, advantageous small hit). (Second special symbol lottery).

  In the output data setting process of the subsequent step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating a game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), a drive signal is output to a special figure starting memory display (not shown). Processing, and so on. In the command transmission process of step S17, the process of transmitting the effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started to the peripheral control unit 4140 is also performed. When the processes of steps S11 to S17 are executed, the register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process ends.

  However, as will be described later, in this embodiment, whether or not the game ball is guided to the V winning opening 1156 in the small hit game is decided by the type of the symbol when the small hit is won. It is possible to determine whether or not a fraudulent act has been performed depending on the type of this symbol. As a result, when it is determined that a fraudulent act has been performed, a signal indicating that fact is output to the outside (for example, a management computer) in the output data setting process of step S16, and based on such a symbol. Unauthorized management can be performed as control progresses.

  Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, the winning determination random number used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state (also called jackpot determination, jackpot lottery), stop symbols of special symbols are determined Random number used in order to reach, random number used for determination (reach determination) as to whether or not to perform high-expectation production such as reach production when it is determined not to be hit in the big hit lottery, special symbol display device 1185 , 1186 fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (variation time, etc.) used to determine the variation random number (variation time random number), determine the opening mode (round number, etc.) Random number for round determination used for playing, starting position door member (movable piece) 1214 that can allow winning in the second starting port 1153 Determining whether or not (usually per determining random number used in the usual determination) is positioned state) she located on the front side position, and the like.

  In addition, the random number of symbols is used to judge the state type (whether to activate the time saving function, etc.) of the hit (small hit, big hit) that is performed when it is judged that the hit (small hit, big hit) has been won. Is also served. However, as will be described later, when a small hit is won, the big hit game does not occur unless the game ball T is received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 in the small hit game corresponding to the small hit (the condition device operates. do not do). That is, in this case, the next symbol variation will be performed without operating the time saving function.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, it is common whether the winning determination random number, the pattern random number, the round determination random number, and the starting opening door member 1214 related to the occurrence of the big hit game state are located at the appearance position. The random number for determining the symbol is updated. That is, the random number used for determining whether or not the big hit game state is generated and whether or not the starting opening door member (movable piece) 1214 is positioned at the appearance position is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability (probability of determining that a big hit gaming state is generated, probability of determining that the starting opening door member (movable piece) 1214 is positioned at the appearance position) for each random number in a predetermined period is constant. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state and the update of the reach random number, the variable random number, etc., which are not related to the ordinary determination are performed.

[Special control processing]
Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process.

  In this special control process, first, a first / second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is performed. In the first / second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won in the first starting opening 1152 or the second starting opening 1153. After the first / second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is performed, a process corresponding to the state of the process flag is selectively selected from among a plurality of processes shown in the figure (steps S120 to S240). Will be done.

  More specifically, when the first / second starting mouth winning process (step S110) is completed, it is first determined whether the process flag is 0 (step S120), and if the process flag is 0 ( If YES in step S120), the fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In this variation start processing (step S130), it is determined which of the game on the first special symbol side and the game on the second special symbol side the processing relating to the game is to be advanced, and the jackpot on the determined side. After the setting for starting the variable display of the special symbol is made based on the result of the lottery, the processing flag is updated to "1". The process related to the game (first special symbol, second special symbol) determined in this way is a timer interrupt process every 4 ms until the updated process flag is returned to "0". It will be held continuously each time.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the process flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the special symbol (identification) displayed on the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 1185 or second special symbol display device 1186) on the side determined in the variation start process (step S130) The variation pattern of the symbol (variation time from the start of variable display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display on either the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186) is determined. After that, the processing flag is updated to “2”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether the processing flag is 2 (step S160). As a result, if the process flag is 2 (YES in step S160), the changing process (step S170) is executed. In this changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by the timer, and based on the time-out, the special symbol display device (the first special symbol display device 1185 or the second special symbol) The variable display of the special symbol on the display device 1186) is stopped. After that, when it is determined in the variation start process (step S130) that the big hit is won, the process selection flag is updated to "5". On the other hand, when it is determined that a specific condition is established although the big hit is lost, the process selection flag is updated to "3" when the small hit is won (the small hit is won). However, when the jackpot is lost and the specific condition is not satisfied (pure loss), the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the fluctuation start process (step S130).

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S160), it is determined whether the processing flag is 3 (step S180). As a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S180), the small hit game start processing (step S190) for creating an interval period before starting the small hit game is executed. When the interval period before starting the small hit game has elapsed, the processing flag is updated to "4" in the small hit game start processing.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S180 (NO in step S180), it is determined whether the processing flag is 4 (step S200). As a result, if the processing flag is 4 (YES in step S200), the small hit game process (step S210) is executed. In this small hit game processing, a small hit game in which the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is opened / closed (sliding operation) is performed in a control mode according to the type of small hit, and the winning prize opening 1155 It is determined whether or not the game balls that have entered the internal area are distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156. As a result, when it is determined in the first small hitting game process that the game balls are distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, the first processing flag is set to "5" in order to start the big hitting game. Will be updated. However, if it is not determined that the game balls have been distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 within a predetermined time, the processing flag is updated to “0”. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the fluctuation start process (step S130).

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S200), it is determined whether the processing flag is 5 (step S220). As a result, if the processing flag is 5 (YES in step S220), the big hit game start processing (step S230) is executed. In this big hit game start processing, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game, is activated or the time saving function is stopped. Then, after the preparation for starting the big hit game is completed, the processing flag is updated to "6".

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 5 in step S220 (NO in step S220), it is determined that the processing flag is 6 and the jackpot game processing (step S240) is executed. In this big hit game process, a big hit game mode (round number, opening time, maximum prize number, etc.) for opening and closing the big prize hole 1154 is set, and the big prize hole opening / closing member 1203 is set based on the set big hit game mode. The opening / closing operation related to is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing flag is updated to "0" after the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the fluctuation start process (step S130).

  As described above, the special control process is performed when any of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S170, step S190, step S210, step S230, and step S240 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag. Is ended.

[Regarding the first and second starting mouth prize processing]
Next, the first / second starting mouth winning process (the process of step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. 133. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing an example of the first / second starting mouth winning process.

  In the first / second starting mouth winning process (step S110), roughly, there is a process for determining whether or not a game ball has entered the first starting port 1152 or the second starting port 1153, and On condition that it is determined that there is a ball entered, the processing related to the update of the pending state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), and the various random numbers that have been acquired are pre-read effects and , A process to be provided for a preceding production such as a front production, and so on.

  Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 1191. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting opening sensor 1191, it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 1153 (YES in step S201). Then, the process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol (second winning / deciding random number, second symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and are provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). (2) It is determined whether or not the value of the hold number counter is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203), the hold history update process (step S204), and the second preceding determination process (step S209a) are sequentially performed. .

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first, as the second start pending storage process (step S203), various data obtained by the game ball winning in the second start opening 1153 (second random number for random determination, second. Two symbol random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM 4100e) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of reservation. Next, as the hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100e. Then, as the second leading determination process (step S209a), before the execution condition of the jackpot lottery held in the hold state is satisfied, the lottery is selected based on various random numbers provided for the jackpot lottery. The result will be determined in advance.

  In the process of step S203, a winning notification command indicating that a game ball has entered the second starting opening 1153 (more accurately, the type of special symbol or the order of holding) is set, The winning notification command thus set may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process (step S17) described above. With such a configuration, through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140, when the hold display on the second starting opening 1153 side is displayed on the effect display device 1115 or the like, this can be promptly updated.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S201, when it is determined that the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 1191 is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. If it is determined that the value is 4, then, as a process of step S205, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 1190. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting opening sensor 1190, it is determined that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 1152 (YES in step S205), and Then, the process of step S206 is performed. In the processing of this step S206, various random numbers for the first special symbol (first winning determination random number, first symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. It is determined whether or not is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the first pending number counter is less than 4, the first startup pending storage process (step S207), the pending history update process (step S208), and the first preceding determination process (step S209b) are sequentially performed. .

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first, as the first start pending storage process (step S207), various data obtained by the game ball entering the first start opening 1152 (first random number for random determination, first One symbol random number, etc.) is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM 4100e) while being associated with the type of special symbol and the order of suspension. Next, as the hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100e. Then, as the first preceding determination process (step S209b), before the execution condition of the jackpot lottery held in the holding state is satisfied, the lottery is selected based on various random numbers provided for the jackpot lottery. The result will be determined in advance.

  Even in the process of step S207, a winning notification command indicating that there is a game ball entering the first starting opening 1152 (more accurately, the type of the special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set, The winning notification command thus set may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the command transmission process (step S17) described above. With such a configuration, the peripheral display unit 4140 can control the effect display device 1115 or the like to promptly update the pending display on the first starting opening 1152 side.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that there is no winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 1152, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, the first / second starting mouth winning process is ended at this point.

  In this embodiment, after the winning process for the second starting port 1153 (steps S201 to S204) is executed, the winning process for the first starting port 1152 (steps S205 to S208) is executed. There is. However, instead of this, a mode in which the winning process for the first starting port 1152 is executed and then the winning process for the second starting port 1153 is executed may be used.

  Here, the second leading determination process (step S209a) and the first leading determination process (S209b) will be described in detail. Hereinafter, the term “advance determination processing” means the second advance determination processing (step S209a) and the first advance determination processing (S209b).

  In the preceding determination process, as described above, the result of the lottery is pre-determined based on various random numbers provided for the jackpot lottery before the execution condition of the jackpot lottery held in the holding state is satisfied. Things will be done.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first uses a random number for win / loss determination (first random number for random determination, second random number for random determination), and the value thereof is a jackpot lottery (first It is determined whether or not it is the same value as the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery and the second jackpot lottery. As a result, if it is the same value as the jackpot determination value and it is shown that the jackpot is won, as a next process, the variation pattern table at the time of the jackpot is selected, and the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number are selected. By comparing (first variation random number, second variation random number) with the peripheral control board 4010, which variation pattern will be determined when determining a variation pattern at the time of a big hit described later. Set the command for advance judgment of the variation pattern to be notified in advance. Then, using the symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), the peripheral control board 4010 is used to determine which type will be determined when determining the type of jackpot described later. Will be set in advance for a type leading determination command.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the random number for win / loss determination (first random number for random determination, second random number for random determination) is different from the above big hit determination value, the next process is a small hit. It is determined whether or not the value is the same as the small hit determination value indicating that the player has won. As a result, if the value is the same as the small hit determination value and it is indicated that the small hit is won, as the next process, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the small hit is selected, and the selected fluctuation pattern table is selected. And the variation random number (first variation random number, second variation random number) by comparing which variation pattern will be determined when determining the variation pattern at the time of a small hit, which will be described later. A variation pattern precedent determination time command to be notified to 4010 in advance is set. Then, using the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number), the peripheral control board determines which type will be determined when determining the type of the small hit, which will be described later. A type leading determination time command to notify 4010 in advance is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the random number for win / loss determination (first random number for win / loss determination, second random number for win / win determination) is different from both the above-mentioned big hit determination value and the above small hit determination value, As a process, selecting a variation pattern table at the time of a later-described loss (including a loss for which the reach effect is not executed) and comparing the selected variation pattern table with a variation random number (first variation random number, second variation random number) A variation pattern for notifying the peripheral control board 4010 in advance of which variation pattern will be determined when determining a variation pattern at the time of a later-described loss (including a loss for which the reach effect is not executed). Set the command for leading judgment. In this case, the main control MPU 4100a uses the reach random numbers (first reach random number, second reach random number) to determine whether there is a reach loss described later or a loss without reach, and then the determination is made. Based on the result, a variation pattern table at the time of loss or reach loss is selected, and by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number (first variation random number, second variation random number) Alternatively, when determining the variation pattern at the time of reach loss, it may be determined which variation pattern is to be determined.

  Then, after this, the main control MPU4100a, by various random numbers provided to the preceding determination process, the updated number of jackpot lottery held (the value of the number of holding counter), together with the type of the special symbol hold Performs processing to set a command at the time of preceding determination. The variation pattern preceding determination time command, the type preceding determination time command, and the pending preceding determination time command thus set are transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 131. The Rukoto.

  That is, as described above, by transmitting these commands (variation pattern leading determination time command, type leading determination time command, hold leading determination time command) to the peripheral control unit 4140, control on the peripheral control unit 4140 side is performed. By this, it becomes possible to cause a look-ahead effect and a forward effect, which will be described later, to appear.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, with respect to the lottery (the second special symbol lottery) on the second starting opening 1153 side, it is possible to play the jackpot game with a probability of approximately 100%. It is as described above that this is made to function as processing.

  In this respect, when a small hit is obtained in the lottery (second special symbol lottery) on the side of the second starting opening 1153, its type (type of whether or not the time saving game state occurs) is definitely shown in advance. Something like that is also possible. However, in this case, when the lottery (second special symbol lottery) for generating the time-saving game state is in the hold order that is exhausted the latest, it becomes possible not to dare to generate a new hold. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to intentionally generate a double-addition game or a super-addition game when the above-mentioned special game property is provided, and there is a concern that the load on the hall side becomes excessive. is there.

  Therefore, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, although the type of small hit may be determined in advance, the same value is set to the type preceding determination for the determined type of small hit regardless of the type. By setting the hour command, it is difficult for the peripheral control unit 4140 to grasp this.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control unit 4140 is capable of grasping which is the information obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, based on the hold preceding determination time command. Therefore, it is a small hit based on the first special symbol lottery (one of the first disadvantaged small hit, the second disadvantaged small hit, and the first advantageous small hit), or based on the second special symbol lottery It is known in advance about a rough type such as whether it is a small hit (second advantageous small hit, third advantageous small hit) (see FIG. 141). As described above, the peripheral control unit 4140 according to the present embodiment is capable of grasping a certain amount of small hits, but operates on various processing programs constructed so as to be difficult to grasp definitely. Has become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if the big hit in the first special symbol lottery is indicated in advance, it will be the first big hit without using the information concerning the random number of the symbol (command at the time of preceding judgment) Can be grasped in advance (see FIG. 141), and if the big hit in the second special symbol lottery is shown in advance, it will be the second big hit without using the information concerning the random number of the symbol (command at the time of preceding judgment) Can be grasped in advance (see FIG. 141).

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the advance determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the advance determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

[Variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation start process.

  In the fluctuation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is “0”, the main control MPU 4100a first sets the values of the two reserved number counters corresponding to the special symbol storage indicators 1184 and 1187 (first start). It is determined whether or not both the memory number and the second start memory number are "0" (step S301). Here, the value in the two holding number counters corresponding to the special symbol storage display 1184, 1187, the number of games (lottery) to be held on the first special symbol side and the game (lottery) to be held on the second special symbol side It shows the numbers and respectively. Therefore, if all the values of the number-of-holds counter are "0" in this step S301 (YES), it is determined that neither of the starting conditions for the first jackpot lottery and the second jackpot lottery has been established, and the interrupt is given. The fluctuation start process within the process is once terminated. That is, in this case, each time the above-described interrupt process is performed, in the process of step S301, there is a game (lottery) on the first special symbol side or a game on the second special symbol side (lottery) that is in a suspended state. It will be judged whether or not, until the special symbol lottery process is judged to be in a suspended state, the progress of the special symbol game is substantially in the standby state. It will be.

  On the other hand, if neither the first starting memory number nor the second starting memory number is "0" (NO in step S301), to update the order of executing the big symbol lottery on the special symbol side to be processed, Shift processing is performed in the first special symbol reserved storage area and the second special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a (steps S302 to S310).

  In the first special symbol reserved storage area, a random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol (for example, the first random number for random determination, the first symbol random number, the first reach random number, the first variation random number) Are stored based on the holding order of, in the second special symbol reservation storage area, a random number group related to the lottery process of the second special symbol (for example, second random number for random determination, second symbol random number, second reach random number) , Second variable random numbers) are stored based on their reservation order.

  The main control MPU4100a, when changing the special symbol, as a shift process (step S302 to step S310) in the random number storage area (special symbol reserved storage area), the special symbol reserved storage area on the side to be processed is stored. Random numbers will be manipulated appropriately. That is, as will be described later, the random numbers thus read out are not only processing related to the jackpot lottery but also processing related to the setting of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the opening / closing of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 and the winning opening / closing member 1203. By being subjected to processing related to mode setting, processing related to game state setting, etc., a starting game can be progressed with the winning of a game ball to the first starting opening 1152 or the second starting opening 1153 as a trigger. become.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, with respect to the lottery (the second special symbol lottery) on the second starting opening 1153 side, it is possible to play the jackpot game with a probability of approximately 100%. This is supposed to function as a confirmation process.

  In this respect, in the shift process (step S302 to step S310) in the random number storage area (special symbol reserved storage area), the execution of the lottery for the first special symbol is always postponed, and a big hit game occurs with a probability of about 100%. So that all the lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) based on the winning of the second starting opening 1153 that allows the game to be played, the random number storage area (special symbol reserved storage area) I am trying to operate the stored random numbers. As a result, until the number of holdings for the second special symbol side lottery (probability process) is interrupted and becomes “0”, a big hit game can be generated each time the lottery is digested (special). Playability).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 134, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the process of step S302, the second special symbol, which is the preferentially consumed side, is dealt with. It is determined whether or not the value of the number of holding counters (second starting memory number) is "0". Then, as a result, when it is determined that the value of the number-of-holds counter corresponding to the second special symbol, which is the preferentially consumed side, is not "0" (NO in step S302), as the process of step S303, Of each storage area of the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM4100e of the main control MPU4100a, a random number group stored in the first storage area (for example, a second random number for random determination, a second symbol random number, a second reach random number) , Second fluctuating random number) from the RAM 4100e. Next, as the process of step S304, the random number group related to the lottery process of the second special symbol stored in each storage region of the second special symbol reserved storage region of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is first-in first-out (First-In First- The shift operation is performed in the (Out) mode.

  More specifically, the second special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of a start winning in order from the first (first) area. When a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  Then, after this, the main control MPU 4100a sets "1" to the special symbol variation flag so that it is shown that the game on the second special symbol side is in the progressing state (step S305). Furthermore, in order to update the number of reservations involved in the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side, the number of reservations counter corresponding to the second special symbol is decremented by "1" (step S306). Regarding the special symbol variation flag set to "1" in this way, the type of special symbol on the side to be processed by being confirmed every time the interrupt process is performed after the variation start process is completed. (Here, the second special symbol) is made recognizable, and is reset when the processing flag is updated to "0", for example.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134, in the process of step S302, it is determined that the value of the reserved number counter corresponding to the second special symbol which is the preferentially consumed side is “0”. If (YES in step S302), as the processing of step S307, among the storage areas of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, the random number group stored in the first storage area (for example, , First winning / deciding random number, first symbol random number, first reach random number, first variation random number) are read from the RAM 4100e. Next, as the process of step S308, the random number group related to the lottery process of the first special symbol stored in each storage region of the first special symbol reserved storage region of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is first-in first-out (First-In First- The shift operation is performed in the (Out) mode.

  More specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of a start winning in order from the first (first) area. When a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). become.

  Then, after this, the main control MPU 4100a sets "2" to the special symbol variation flag so that it is shown that the game on the first special symbol side is in progress (step S308). Furthermore, in order to update the number of reservations related to the first special symbol side lottery (variation), the number of reservations counter corresponding to the first special symbol is decremented by "1" (step S310). Regarding the special symbol variation flag set to "2" in this way, after the variation start process is completed, the type of the special symbol on the side to be processed is confirmed each time an interrupt process is performed. (Here, the first special symbol) is made recognizable, and is reset when the processing flag is updated to "0", for example.

  When the shift process (step S302 to step S310) in the random number storage area (special symbol reserved storage area) is completed in this way, next, as the process of step S311, the special symbol lottery on the side indicated by the special symbol variation flag (above acquired). A lottery process for a hit performed based on a random number for winning and losing judgment is performed. The various information determined in the process of step S311 is stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 or the like, and is used for subsequent game determination.

  Here, in the special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141 (a), it is a big hit based on one hit determination table regardless of the game state (normal game state, time saving game state). A determination process is performed as to whether it is a small hit, a reach loss, or a loss without reach.

  More specifically, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the random number for win determination, in the table on the first special symbol side, among 1200 kinds of values that can be acquired as the random number for first win determination. Three kinds of values match with the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit has been hit, seven kinds of values match the small hit judgment value showing that the small hit has been hit, and 1190 kinds of values are the above-mentioned gaps. The 1200 types of values that can be obtained as the first winning / deciding random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating that. According to such a configuration, regardless of the gaming state (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state), the probability that a jackpot is obtained as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol is set as 1/400, The probability that a small hit will be obtained as a result of the lottery for special symbols will be set to approximately 1/171.

  If the value obtained as the first hit determination random number is a loss, it is further determined whether it is a reach loss or a loss without reach based on the value of the first reach random number obtained above. .

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a type of big hit,
The big hit game is executed under the short opening control (big winning opening 1154) such that a large amount of prizes cannot be won in any of the round games repeated 15 times, but the big hit game is executed. After that, the first big hit, which is a type that always generates a time saving game state, and the open control (large winning opening 1154) that allows a large number of prizes to be won in all round games repeated 15 times. As the big hit game progresses, the second big hit, which is a type that always causes a time saving game state after the big hit game is executed, is prepared.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the type of small hit,
-A relatively short time is required as the time required to execute the small hitting game among the disadvantageous small hits, which is the type of opening the accessory winning hole 1155 in a manner that cannot be distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156. The first disadvantage is the type adopted,
In the prize winning timing of the game ball when opening the accessory winning hole 1155, which is one of the disadvantages that is a type of opening the accessory winning hole 1155 in a manner that cannot be assigned to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156. Using the above-described configuration in which variation is less likely to occur, the second disadvantage small hit, which is a type in which the accessory winning port 1155 is opened a plurality of times while it is determined in advance that the guide hole 1230c should be guided,
Among the advantageous small hits, which are types in which the above-mentioned accessory winning hole 1155 is opened at the timing when the game ball that has already been fired and is in the winning waiting state is guided to the V winning hole 1156. Similar to (or similar to) the above-mentioned second disadvantage small hit from the stop of the symbol to the middle stage after a predetermined time has passed, variation occurs in the winning timing of the game ball when the accessory winning hole 1155 is opened. Utilizing the above-described configuration that becomes difficult, it is a type in which the accessory winning hole 1155 is opened a plurality of times in which it is determined in advance that the guide hole 1230c is guided, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of the symbol. When it is assigned to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, the first advantage small hit that is the type that gives the same privilege as when the first big hit was won, and Of the advantageous small hits, which are types in which the above-mentioned prize winning hole 1155 is opened at the timing when the game ball that is regarded as the waiting state for winning the prize is guided to the V winning hole 1156, the rotating body 1236. 124 (a) is maintained in the operating state shown in FIG. 124 (a), the accessory opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) performs the short opening operation a plurality of times, and the short opening operation is performed. Among them, a second advantageous small hit that is a type that gives the same privilege as when the second big jackpot was won when it is distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156. It is already fired and is in a prize waiting state. Of the advantageous small hits, which is the type in which the above-mentioned accessory winning hole 1155 is opened at the timing when the game ball that is being guided is guided to the V winning hole 1156, the rotating body 1236 is While being maintained in the operation state shown in 124 (a), while performing the short opening operation by the accessory winning hole opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) a plurality of times, the short opening operation is performed. When it is distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, it is possible to win a large amount of prizes in all of the round games repeated 15 times. Under the open control (big winning opening 1154), a big hit game. After advancing, the third advantageous small hit, which is the type for generating the normal gaming state, is prepared.

  In the first special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), when a big hit is obtained as a result, regardless of the value of the obtained symbol random number, the first big hit (obtained in the big hit game) Although the number of possible prizes is smaller than that of the second big hit, only the 15R hour / hour jackpot which is always controlled to be in the short time gaming state after the big hit game is determined as the type.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), when a small hit is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, based on the value of the acquired symbol random number, the first disadvantage small hit, Either the second disadvantageous small hit or the first advantageous small hit is determined.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when a small hit is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, the probability ((7/1200) × ((7/1200) × ( 20/1000)), but there is a possibility that an advantageous small hit may be determined as the type. Therefore, even when the small hit game on the first special symbol side is performed, the possibility that a big hit game will occur will be left, and thus a character in the small hit game on the first special symbol side. Each time the winning opening 1155 is opened, it is possible to encourage the player to win the prize winning opening 1155, and to expect the player to be controlled to shift to the shorter working time state after the big hit game is played. Will be able to.

  In particular, in the small hit game when the first disadvantaged small hit is obtained, it becomes immediately recognized that the advantageous small hit is not obtained, while the second disadvantaged small hit is obtained. In the small hit game, it is possible to expect the possibility that an advantageous small hit is obtained by the opening mode, so that the execution process of the small hit game itself can be made to function as the expected effect. become.

  Further, in the first special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, only the first advantageous small hit can be determined as the advantageous small hit. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, there is a case where a big hit (first big hit) is obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery, and an advantageous small hit (first advantageous small hit) is obtained. Regardless of whether the big hit game is executed based on the time saving game state is always generated for a predetermined period after the big hit game is executed (for example, a period until the special symbol lottery is exhausted 100 times) Will be able to.

  On the other hand, in the table on the side of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 141 (a), among the 1200 types of values that can be acquired as the second random number for winning determination, three types of values have been won as a jackpot. And the value of 1197 kinds matches the small hit determination value indicating that the small hit has been won. According to such a configuration, regardless of the gaming state (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state), the probability that a jackpot is obtained as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol is set as 1/400, The probability that a small hit will be obtained as a result of the special symbol lottery will be set as 399/400.

  However, if the probability that a small hit is obtained as a result of the lottery of the second special symbol is set to about 100%, even in the lottery on the second special symbol side, there is a possibility that a loss will be obtained as a result. You may give it a little. That is, in this case, if the value obtained as the second winning / deciding random number is a loss, whether it is a reach loss based on the value of the obtained second reach random number, or a loss without a reach is further determined. It will be decided.

  In the second special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. 141 (b), when a big hit is obtained as a result, regardless of the value of the obtained symbol random number, only the second big hit is the type. I am trying to decide.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 141 (c), in the symbol determination table at the time of the small hit which is referred to when the small hit is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, the symbol random number (second symbol) Of the 1000 kinds of values that can be acquired as random numbers, 500 kinds of values are judgment values indicating that the second advantageous small hit (small hit that causes a time saving game state after a big hit game is played) is won. Match, 500 values obtained as the second symbol random number so as to match the judgment value indicating that the third advantageous small hit (small hit that does not generate the time saving game state after the big hit game is played) is won The 1000 possible values are associated with each other.

  In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a big hit game occurs according to the result of the first special symbol lottery side, although a large number of prizes cannot be won, the time saving game state is always Will occur. On the other hand, if a big hit game occurs according to the result of the second special symbol lottery (winning probability processing) side, although a large number of prizes can be won, the probability of a time saving game state (the second big hit) , Second advantageous small hit) is set with a probability value of slightly exceeding 50%.

  As described above, in the case where the above-mentioned disadvantageous small hit is determined as the type of small hit, even if the game balls are won in the prize winning hole 1155, all of those game balls are set in the V winning hole (specific area) 1156. A disadvantage small hit game is performed in which the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 is opened / closed so as not to be distributed. On the other hand, when the advantageous small hit is determined as the type of the small hit, the accessory is played at the timing when the game ball that has already been launched and is in the winning waiting state is guided to the V winning opening 1156. An advantageous small hit game in which the winning opening 1155 is opened is played.

  Therefore, if the above-mentioned disadvantageous small hit is determined as the type of small hit, the small winning game (specific area) 1156 is performed although the small prize game is given by opening the prize winning hole 1155. Since a game ball is not accepted and a big hit game is not generated, it can be said that there is something that can be classified as a type of loss in a broad sense. Therefore, including such a disadvantage small hit, lottery results that have no possibility of generating a big hit game (or a big hit game only with a probability lower than the winning probability of the jackpot set to an extremely low probability) The generic name of the lottery results (which cannot be generated) may be referred to as the “loss”.

  On the other hand, when the above-mentioned advantageous small hit is determined as the type of small hit, it is based on a mechanical lottery for allocating the game balls between the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 and the general area (miss area). Although a small hit game is played, in reality, it is executed as a game in which it is determined that the game balls are distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 to generate a big hit game. In a sense, it can be said that some can be classified as one type of big hit. Therefore, including such an advantageous small hit, if the game (for example, 100 game balls are sequentially hit to the right in one minute, etc.) is properly advanced, the big hit game will be generated. (Or, if the game is properly progressed, the generic name of the lottery result that causes the big hit game with a probability of more than 1/2 (the probability of generating the big hit game is higher) is called "winning") You may do it.

  Then, when the special symbol lottery (step S311) on the side indicated by the special symbol variation flag is performed in this way, as a process of step S312, a flag indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery. The symbol information command indicating the result (including the type when a big hit or a small hit is obtained) is set. After that, as the process of step S313, when the process flag is updated to "1" so that the process shifts to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150), this process is ended.

  The result of the special symbol lottery obtained in this variation start process (including the type of special symbol to be processed) is shown in FIG. 131 as the symbol information command set in the process of step S312. It is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17).

[Variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery (step S311) and the like will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  In the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is "1", as shown in FIG. 135, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 indicates that a big hit has been won. If is set (YES in step S401), the variation pattern table at the time of big hit according to the gaming state is selected (step S402), and if the flag showing that the small hit is won is set (step S403). YES), select a variation pattern table at the time of a small hit according to the gaming state (step S404), and if the reach flag is set (YES at step S405), select a variation pattern table at the time of reach (step S404). S406), which is neither a big hit, a small hit, or a reach loss If a flag state indicating that it is, that is, if the normal loss (loss is not executed reach demonstration) (NO in step S405), and selects the variation pattern table during loss (step S407).

  Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined by comparing the selected fluctuation pattern table and the fluctuation random number (first fluctuation random number or second fluctuation random number) on the side acquired in the fluctuation start process (step S130) (step S408), A special pattern display device (first special design display device 1185 or second special design display device) on the side to be processed by setting a variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 4010 of starting the determined fluctuation pattern The variable display of the special symbol displayed in 1186) is started (step S409). In addition, the main control MPU 4100a sets the variation time set in association with the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S410). As a result, fluctuation control is performed on the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 1185 or second special symbol display device 1186) and the effect display device 1115 only for the fluctuation time determined in this way. Then, after that, as the process of step S411, when the process flag is updated to "2" so that the process shifts to the changing process (step S170a), this process is ended.

  The fluctuation pattern set by the fluctuation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral controller 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 131 as the fluctuation pattern command set in the process of step S409. . Thereby, in the effect display device 1115, the result of the jackpot lottery is shown through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 based on the variation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the symbol information command. Display production will be performed.

  By the way, in the variation pattern setting process according to this embodiment, of the jackpot variation pattern table used in the process of step S402, the table on the first special symbol side, when in the normal gaming state In the normal big hit variation pattern table used, a plurality of variation patterns (variation time) for enlivening the display effect on the effect display device 1115 are stored in cooperation with the reach-miss variation pattern table. That is, in cooperation with the reach-miss variation pattern table, the above-mentioned “winning” expectation levels are made different for each variation pattern, and one of these variation patterns is selected in the processing of step S408a. Will be decided.

  Further, in the variation pattern setting process according to the present embodiment, of the small hit variation pattern table used in the process of step S404, when the table is on the first special symbol side and is in the normal gaming state. In the normal small hit variation pattern table used for, the first advantageous small hit is obtained regardless of the type of the small hit (first unfavorable small hit, second unfavorable small hit, first advantageous small hit). We are trying to make a specific presentation pattern that makes us expect that.

  According to such a configuration, when a small hit is obtained as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol in the normal game state, the display effect having the specific effect pattern is ended regardless of the type. After that, it becomes possible to urge the player to hit the right side so that the game ball enters the accessory winning hole 1155. However, when the small hitting game corresponding to the winning of the first disadvantaged small hit is played, it is recognized that it is “losing” immediately from the opening mode. On the other hand, when the small hit game corresponding to the winning of the second disadvantage small hit is performed, the execution process of the small hit game itself functions as an expected performance until the halfway stage when a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of the symbol. Therefore, the expectation of “winning” can be maintained for a long time.

[About changing process]
Next, the changing process (step S170) executed when the process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the changing process.

  When the process flag indicates that the changing process (step S170) should be performed, as shown in FIG. 136, first, as the process of step S501, the change pattern setting process (step S150) is performed. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation timer set in the process of step S410 has become 0, that is, whether or not the set fluctuation time has elapsed. As a result, as long as it is determined that the fluctuation timer is not 0, that is, the fluctuation time that has been set has not elapsed (NO in step S501), each time the fluctuation process (step S170) is performed, the step As the processing of S531, the fluctuation timer is decremented by 1.

  Then, as a result of performing such processing, in the processing of step S501, when it is determined that the fluctuation timer has become 0, that is, the set fluctuation time has elapsed, the processing of steps S502 and S503. As a stop symbol that has already been determined (stop symbol according to the result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) special symbol display on the side to be processed (first special symbol indicator) Display control for terminating the variable display by displaying on 1185 or the second special symbol display device 1186) and decoration according to the stop symbol of the special symbol on the side to be processed on the effect display device 1115. A confirmation stop command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control unit 4140. The definite stop command thus set is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the effect display device 1115, the effect result in the same effect is definitely displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140.

  After performing the process related to the symbol stop in this way, at the time when various processes according to the result of the special symbol lottery are executed, this process is ended.

  For example, first, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit (YES in step S504), the process flag is updated to "5" to start the big hit game (step S506), and this process ends. .

  On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a small hit, this process is ended when the processing flag is updated to "3" in order to start the small hit game (step S513).

  On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss (NO in step S504, and NO in step S511), first, it is determined whether the time saving function is operating (step S521). Then, when the time saving function is operating, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that has been consumed while the time saving function is operating has reached a predetermined upper limit value (step S522). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested while the time saving function is operating reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times), the time saving function is considered to be satisfied, and the time saving function is established. Will be stopped (step S523). Then, after the processing relating to the time saving function is performed in this way, at the time when the processing flag is updated to "0" as the processing stage in which the special symbol is variably stopped so as to indicate that it is lost (step S524). ), And ends this process. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the special symbol is performed on condition that it is held and consumed in the process of step S301.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the time saving game state, the winning process (the lottery on the second special symbol side) that enables the game so that the big hit game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. ) Is provided with a game that is put on hold relatively easily. Therefore, normally, "winning (second advantageous small hit, or third advantageous small hit)" is immediately obtained and the big hit game on the second special symbol side occurs, so that the time saving game state is ended. Therefore, it can be said that it is almost impossible that the time saving game state is ended by the number of fluctuations of the exhausted special symbol reaching a predetermined upper limit value (100 times).

[About small hit game start processing]
Next, the small hit game start processing (step S190) executed when the processing flag is "3" will be described. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start processing.

  As shown in FIG. 137, in the small hit game start process (step S190), the main control MPU 4100a first, as the process of step S601, a timer (small hit start interval timer) for measuring the interval before the start of the small hit game. ) Is already set. As a result, if the small hit start interval timer is not set yet, the small hit start interval timer is set and the small hit start interval timer is set as the processing of steps S602 and S603 in order to start the pre-start interval of the small hit game. Set the hit interval start command.

  Then, next, as the processing of step S604, when the control regarding the rotation of the rotating body 1236 provided in the internal area of the accessory winning port 1155 is performed, this processing is once ended. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if a small hit is obtained as a result of the special symbol lottery, the variation of the special symbol is terminated (the stop symbol appears) and is always constant. It is supposed that a motion (a fixed rotation mode) appears in the rotating body 1236. Therefore, in the process of step S604, a control structure is provided in which an execution opportunity is given each time the small hit game start process (step S190) is performed, and a variation of the special symbol each time the execution opportunity is given. Will be controlled to appear in the rotating body 1236 according to the elapsed time (for example, the value of the small hit start interval timer) after the end (the stop symbol appears).

  The small hit interval start command set in the process of step S603 is transmitted to the peripheral controller 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. As a result, in the effect display device 1115, the display effect during the pre-start interval of the small hitting game appears through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140.

  After the small hit start interval timer is set in this manner, it is determined that the small hit start interval timer has been set in the processing of step S601 each time the interrupt processing is performed. In the process of step S611, the small hit start interval timer is 0, that is, it is determined whether or not the time set as the pre-start interval of the small hit game has elapsed. In the process of step S611, the small hit start interval timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the time set as the interval before the start of the small hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S611). Each time the small hitting game start processing (step S190) is performed, the small hitting start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the processing of step S621.

  However, while the small hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 in the process of step S621 in this way, the execution opportunity of the process of step S604 is given each time, and thus the variation of the special symbol ends. The movement according to the elapsed time (e.g., the value of the small hit start interval timer) after (the appearance of the stop symbol) appears in the rotating body 1236 each time. As will be described later, such movement of the rotating body 1236 (drive control) is continuously executed in the small hitting game process even after the small hitting game start process is completed, so that the special After the fluctuation of the symbol is finished (the stop symbol appears), a constant movement (constant rotation mode) always appears on the rotating body 1236.

  As a result of such processing, it is determined that the small hit start interval timer has become 0 in the processing of step S611, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the small hit game has elapsed. Then, in order to execute the small hit game, the processing flag is updated to "4" (step S612), and at the time when the rotating body 1236 is controlled (step S604), this processing ends.

  Regarding the small hit start interval timer, the time length can be set according to the type of the small hit symbol (the type determined by the symbol random number).

[About small hit game processing]
Next, the small hit game process (step S210) executed when the process flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 138, in the small hit game process (step S210), the main control MPU 4100a first has, as the process of step S701, the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress. It is determined whether or not the small hit game execution flag indicating is in the ON state. As a result, if the small hit game execution flag is not in the ON state, the type of small hit (first advantageous small hit, second advantageous, as the process of step S702, in order to start the control related to the execution of the small hit game. A small hit, a third advantageous small hit, a first disadvantaged small hit, and a second disadvantaged small hit) are set, and an opening timer for measuring the time required for executing the control according to the opening pattern is set. Next, as the processing of steps S703 and S704, the small hitting game execution flag indicating that the control for executing the small hitting game is already in progress is turned on, and the small hitting start command is set. To do. Then, as the processing of step S705, when the drive control of the rotating body 1236 is performed, this processing is once ended.

  As described above, for the drive control of the rotating body 1236 (step S705), the control content (step S604) in the small hitting game start process is executed in such a manner that the special symbol is changed. Control for operating the rotating body 1236 will be performed based on the elapsed time from the end (appearance of the stop symbol). As a result, after the variation of the special symbol ends (the stop symbol appears), a constant movement (a constant rotation mode) always appears in the rotating body 1236.

  After the small hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress in the process of step S701 each time the interrupt process is performed. As a result, in the processing of step S711, it is determined whether or not the accessory closing flag indicating that the condition for closing the accessory winning opening 1155 is satisfied is turned on, and the accessory closing flag is set. If it is not in the ON state, it is determined in the processing of steps S712 and S713 whether or not the condition for closing the accessory winning hole 1155 is satisfied.

  Here, in the process of step S712, it is determined whether or not the open timer is 0, that is, whether the elapsed time from the start of the small hitting game has reached a predetermined upper limit time. In the process of step S713, it is determined whether or not the total number of game balls that have won the accessory winning port 1155 during the small hitting game has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 10). Is determined.

  Then, as a result of these processes, if it is determined that the open timer is not yet 0 and the total number of winning prizes does not reach the predetermined upper limit value (here, 10), first, as the process of step S714. The control according to the set opening pattern is executed. As a result, unless the condition for closing the prize winning opening 1155 is satisfied, each time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the opening / closing member 1221 is opened / closed through the process of step S714 (sliding operation). ) Is updated (managed), and according to the type of small hit (first advantageous small hit, second advantageous small hit, third advantageous small hit, first disadvantage small hit, second disadvantage small hit) A small hitting game in which the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 is opened / closed with the open pattern is realized. The details of the opening patterns according to the types of small hits (first advantageous small hit, second advantageous small hit, third advantageous small hit, first disadvantage small hit, second disadvantage small hit) will be described later. To do.

  After the control according to the opening pattern is executed in this way, as a process of step S715, whether or not the specific sensor 1239 which detects that the game ball is received in the V winning opening (specific region) 1156 is turned on or not. To judge. As a result, if it is determined that the game ball is received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 (the specific sensor 1239 is in the ON state), the V winning opening during the small hit game ( The V history flag indicating that the specific area 1156 has been accepted is turned on. Then, next, as the processing of step S705, when the drive control of the rotating body 1236 is performed, this processing is temporarily terminated.

  If it is determined in step S715 that the specific sensor 1239 is not in the on state, the drive control of the rotating body 1236 is performed in step S705 without operating the V history flag. This process is once ended at the time of performing.

  Such processing (steps S714 to S716, S705) is performed every time the interrupt processing is performed, so long as the condition for closing the prize winning opening 1155 (steps S712, S713) is not satisfied. It is possible to provide a game aiming at an opportunity for the specific sensor 1239 to be turned on while updating (managing) the movement of opening / closing the member 1221 and the movement of rotating the rotating body 1236 each time.

  Then, as a result of repeating these processes (steps S714 to S716, S705), in the process of step S712, the open timer is 0, that is, the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game is predetermined. It is determined that the upper limit time has been reached, or in the processing of step S713, the total number of game balls that have won the accessory winning hole 1155 during the small hit game period is a predetermined upper limit value (here, When it is determined that the number of winning prizes has reached 10), it is determined that the condition for closing the prize winning hole 1155 is satisfied, and each process (steps S721 to S723) for closing the winning prize hole 1155 is performed. Become.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first performs the control of closing the accessory winning opening 1155 by closing the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 as the process of step S721. Next, as the processing of steps S722 and S723, a post-closure interval timer that measures the time after the character prize opening 1155 is closed is set, and the condition for closing the character prize opening 1155 is satisfied. The accessory closing flag shown is operated to the ON state. As a result, a new game ball does not enter the internal area of the accessory winning hole 1155 in the small hitting game process.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when there is a game ball heading for the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 while the small hit game is being played, Until the closing condition is satisfied, the game ball is held at a position where it cannot be received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156, and the holding is released after the closing condition of the accessory winning opening 1155 is satisfied. By doing so, it has a control (steps S604, 705) and a structure (see FIG. 120) that allow the game ball to be received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156.

  Therefore, the post-closure interval timer is set with a time longer than the time required for the held game ball to be accepted in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 (step S722), and step S731. Until it is determined that the time has expired in the processing of, each time the interrupt processing is performed, the control for executing the small hit game is already in progress (YES in step S701), and While it is judged that the condition for closing the article prize hole 1155 is satisfied (YES in step S711), the process of subtracting the timer value of the post-closure interval timer (step S732) and the V prize hole ( V history flag is turned on on condition that the game ball was received in (specific area) 1156 Process that is operated (step S715, S716), and processing according to the drive control of the rotating member 1236 is be sequentially performed respectively (step S705).

  However, in this case, in the process of step S705, the control for causing the rotary body 1236 to perform a certain operation based on the elapsed time after the change of the special symbol ends (the stop symbol appears) is ended, As a control after the condition for closing the prize winning hole 1155 is satisfied, the rotating body 1236 is moved to the state shown in FIG. 120 (b) (the held game ball is moved to the V winning hole (specific area) 1156). The control for displacing the supply state) is performed.

  Then, as a result of repeating these processes (steps S732, S715, S716, S705), when the interval timer after closing times up (YES in step S731), each process for ending the small hit game (step S741). -Steps S746 and S751) are performed.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a, first, if the time saving function is operating (YES in step S741), the upper limit of the number of times the special symbol fluctuated during the operation of the time saving function is predetermined. It is determined whether the value has been reached (step S742). That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested while the time saving function is operating reaches the predetermined upper limit value, the time saving game state is ended. As soon as the conditions that should be met are met, it is decided to stop the time saving function, and if the final fluctuation is a symbol fluctuation according to the small hit, stop the time saving function at the timing when the small hit game is finished (Step S743). As a result, even after the small hit symbol is stopped, the time saving function will continue until the small hit game is completely digested, so it is preferable to hold the special symbol when the game is in the time saving game state. It will be possible to maintain it, but this will be described later.

  After that, when it is determined that the V history flag is in the ON state (YES in step S744), it is determined that the game ball is received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 during the small hitting game process. In order to start the big hit game, the processing flag is updated to "5" (step S745), and various flags operated in the small hit game processing (small hit game execution flag, accessory closed flag, V history flag, etc.) ) Is turned off (step S746), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the V history flag is not in the ON state (NO in step S744), it is determined that the game ball has not been received in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 during the small hitting game process. The processing flag is updated to "0" (step S751), and various flags operated in the small hitting game process (small hitting game execution flag, accessory closing flag, V history flag, etc.) are turned off. At this point (step S746), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the special symbol is performed on condition that it is held and consumed in the process of step S301.

  Although illustration is omitted, in this embodiment, each time the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 detects that there is a ball in the winning prize opening 1155, a command indicating that fact is set. There is. As a result, as will be described later, it becomes possible to display an effect image suitable for the incoming ball under the control of the peripheral control board 4010 side.

[About the jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start processing (step S230) executed when the processing flag is "5" will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game start processing.

  As shown in FIG. 139, in the big hit game start process (step S230), the main control MPU 4100a first sets a timer (big hit start interval timer) for measuring the pre-start interval of the big hit game as the process of step S801. It is determined whether or not it is in the completed state. As a result, if the big hit start interval timer is not set yet, the condition device is activated as the process of step S802, and if the time saving function is activated as the processes of steps S803 and S804. (YES in step S803), the operation is stopped. That is, after such preparation is completed, in order to start the pre-start interval of the big hit game, the big hit start interval timer is set as the processing of steps S805 and S806, and at the time when the big hit interval start command is set, this processing is executed. It will end once.

  The big hit interval start command set in the process of step S806 is transmitted to the peripheral controller 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the effect display device 1115, the display effect in the pre-start interval of the big hit game comes to appear through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the jackpot start interval timer is set in this manner, it is determined that the jackpot start interval timer has been set in the processing of step S801 each time the interrupt processing is performed, and the next step S811. In the processing of (1), it is determined whether or not the big hit start interval timer is 0, that is, whether or not the time set as the pre-start interval of the big hit game has elapsed. In the process of step S811, the jackpot start interval timer is not 0, that is, as long as it is determined that the time set as the pre-start interval of the jackpot game has not elapsed (NO in step S811), Each time the big hit game start process (step S230) is performed, the big hit start interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S821.

  Then, as a result of such processing, in the processing of step S811, the big hit start interval timer becomes 0, that is, when it is determined that the time set as the pre-start interval of the big hit game has passed, In order to execute the big hit game, when the processing flag is updated to "6" (step S812), this processing ends.

  Regarding the big hit start interval timer, the time length can be set according to the kind of big hit symbol (the type determined by the symbol random number).

[About big hit game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S240) executed when the process flag is "6" will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 140, in the big hit game process (step S240), the main control MPU 4100a first indicates that the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress as the process of step S901. It is determined whether or not the big hit game execution flag is on. Then, as a result, if the big hit game execution flag is not in the ON state, as a process of step S902, in order to start the control related to the execution of the big hit game using the second attacker device 2150, an opening mode according to the kind of big hit (Number of rounds, opening time of each round, maximum number of winnings in each round) is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in addition to the fact that only the 15R hour short and big hits are prepared as the kind of big hit, when the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156 in the small hit game, Also, since the round game is to generate a big hit game that is played 15 times, "15 times" is always set as the number of rounds in the processing of step S902. However, regarding the opening time of each round and the maximum number of winnings in each round, the case of the first special symbol side (big hit game according to the winning of the first big hit) and the case of the second special symbol side (second big hit By setting in a different mode with the big hit game according to the winning), the big hit game on the second special symbol side (the big hit game according to the winning of the second big hit) will be able to win a larger number of prizes. I have to.

  More specifically, if the big hit game according to the lottery result (first big hit, first advantageous small hit) on the first special symbol side, it is difficult to obtain game balls, or dozens While the opening time of each round and the maximum number of winnings in each round are determined by the manner in which an award that can obtain a degree of game balls is given, the lottery result on the second special symbol side (second big hit, first When a big-hit game is played according to (2 advantageous small hits, 3rd advantageous small hits), the opening time of each round and the time of each round are determined in the manner that an award that can obtain approximately 1000 game balls is given. The maximum number of winnings is set.

  After the execution mode of the big hit game is set in this way, as the processing of steps S903 and S904, the big hit game execution flag indicating that the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress is turned on. At the same time, when the big hit start command is set, this process is temporarily terminated.

  That is, after the big hit game execution flag is turned on in this way, it is determined that the control for executing the big hit game is already in progress in the processing of step S901 each time the interrupt processing is performed. As a result, it is determined whether or not the set number of rounds has been exhausted in the processing of the next step S911. Then, in the processing of step S911, as long as it is determined that the set number of rounds has not been exhausted yet, that is, it is in the middle of control of executing the jackpot game (NO in step S911). Each time the big hit game process (step S240) is performed, as the process of step S912, control according to the set opening pattern is executed. As a result, every time the interrupt process is performed (every 4 ms), the movement of opening and closing the special winning opening / closing member 1203 (including the interval between rounds) is updated (managed) through the process of step S912. As a result, a big hit game in which the special winning opening opening / closing member 1203 opens and closes with an opening pattern according to the type of big hit comes to be realized.

  Although illustration is omitted, in this embodiment, each time a round game is finished, a command indicating that is set while the round game is repeated 15 times. As a result, it becomes possible to display an effect image suitable for each round game under the control of the peripheral control board 4010 side.

  Then, in the process of the above step S911, when it is determined that the set number of rounds has been exhausted, that is, all the controls related to the execution of the jackpot game are completed, while such control is being performed. (YES in step S911), each processing (step S921, step S922, step S931, step S941, step S942) for generating the end interval of the big hit game is performed.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the timer (big hit end interval timer) for measuring the end interval of the big hit game has been set (step S921). As a result, if the big hit end interval timer is not set yet, the big hit end interval timer is set and the big hit interval end command is issued as the processing of steps S941 and S942 in order to start the end interval of the big hit game. At the time of setting, this process will be ended once.

  The big hit interval end command set in the process of step S942 is transmitted to the peripheral controller 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the effect display device 1115, the display effect in the end interval of the big hit game appears through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

  That is, after the big hit end interval timer is set in this manner, it is determined that the big hit end interval timer has been set in the processing of step S921 each time the interrupt processing is performed, and the next step S922. In this process, it is determined whether or not the big hit end interval timer is 0, that is, whether the time set as the end interval of the big hit game has elapsed. In the process of step S922, as long as it is determined that the big hit end interval timer is not 0, that is, the time set as the pre-start interval of the big hit game has not elapsed (NO in step S922), Each time the big hit game process (step S240) is performed, the big hit end interval timer is decremented by 1 as the process of step S931.

  Then, as a result of such processing, in the processing of step S922, when it is determined that the jackpot end interval timer has become 0, that is, the time set as the jackpot game end interval has elapsed, Each process (step S923 to step S928) for ending the big hit game will be performed.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a first, as the process of step S923, operates the big hit game execution flag indicating that the control related to the execution of the big hit game is already in progress. Then, if the result of the special symbol lottery satisfies the condition for operating the time saving function (YES in step S924), the time saving function is activated to control the transition to the time saving game state (step S925). ).

  Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S926), and when the processing flag is updated to "0" (step S927), this processing ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation of the special symbol is performed on condition that it is held and consumed in the process of step S301.

  According to such a jackpot game process, until the round game is determined to have reached the maximum number of rounds in the process of step S911, the corresponding big winning opening 1154 is opened according to the type of the jackpot ( With the step S912), the game is repeatedly opened, and eventually the prize according to the type of the big hit can be obtained by the player.

[Small game]
142, the small winning game (first disadvantage small hit, second disadvantage small hit, first advantage small hit, second advantage small hit, third advantage small hit) opening of the winning prize hole 1155 when It is a time chart which shows an example about the relationship between a state and the operating state of the rotator (sorting device) 1236 in the inside area of the prize winning opening 1155. The control shown in FIG. 142 is executed while the control processing is advanced by the main control MPU 4100a, for example, every 4 ms by the small hit game process (see FIG. 138).

  As described above, in the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 according to this embodiment, the receiving position of the receiving portion 1236a is upward (FIG. 124 (a)) and the releasing position of the receiving portion 1236a is facing right. (Fig. 124 (b)). Then, in the state where the rotating body 1236 is in the accommodation position, only the first supplied game ball of the game balls received in the winning a prize winning opening 1155 is held in the receiving portion 1236a, and other game balls are held. Is supplied to the loss hole 1230c. When the rotating body 1236 rotates to the discharging position, the held game ball is discharged from the rotating body 1236 and supplied to the V winning opening 1156. On the other hand, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 according to this embodiment receives any of the game balls received in the accessory winning port 1155 when the receiving portion 1236a is in the discharge position facing right. It also has a function of supplying the game ball to the lose hole 1230c so as not to be received in the V winning opening 1156 without being held by the portion 1236a.

  In this respect, in the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 142 (e), from the timing t1 at which the stop symbol appears at the time of the small hit regardless of the type of the small hit. It rotates so that a certain motion appears. It should be noted that such an operation is realized by performing the processing of step S604 and the processing of step S705 described above each time the interrupt processing is performed.

  Further, as described above, in the special downflow passage according to the present embodiment, as long as the player continues to hit the right side, at least two on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state. The above-mentioned (two or three) game balls are formed with a structure that allows them to exist in a state of waiting for winning in the prize winning port 1155.

[About the small win game when the second advantageous small hit, or the third advantageous small hit is obtained]
The same game control is performed in the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained and in the small hit game when the third advantageous small hit is obtained. Hereinafter, it will be described as a small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 142 (d), while the structure of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 and the special downflow passage is realized, the second advantageous small hit (the second special symbol side) In the small hit game when a lottery) is obtained, first, a plurality of game balls are waiting for winning on the upper surface of the accessory winning hole opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) which is closed by the player's right-handed striking. It is after the timing at which the time required to arrive is reached and is slightly (0.02 seconds) earlier than the timing t2 at which the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the storage position to the discharge position. At a timing, control for sliding the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state is performed.

  However, here, the timing t2 is set to arrive at a time that is much shorter than the time required for the game ball received in the accessory winning port 1155 to reach the accommodation position of the rotating body 1236. Therefore, according to this sliding operation, while the rotating body 1236 is in the accommodation position (the state in which the game ball can be held in the receiving portion 1236a), the winning prize waiting state is set to the prize winning opening 1155. Although a plurality of game balls that are present can be accepted at once in a lump, when the game balls reach the rotating body 1236, they are not in the storage position, and are not held by the receiving portion 1236a to the hole 1230c. And will be discharged.

  The reason why such high speed rotation of the rotating body 1236 can be realized is that the rotating body 1236 is rotated not by the motor but by the drive of the V winning solenoid 1232, and the winning of the winning role is achieved. This is due to the fact that the rotating body 1236 can be displaced from the housed position to the discharge position in a time shorter than the time required for the game ball received in the mouth 1155 to reach the rotating body 1236.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the number of game balls (game balls in the prize waiting state) on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state is equal to the number of the game balls. Regardless of the degree, each time the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 is opened, it is formed with a structure that allows quick and complete entry into the internal area of the accessory winning opening 1155. As I did. At this point, at the timing t2, after the arrival of the timing t1 at which the stop symbol at the time of the small hit appears, waiting for a plurality of game balls to be supplied to the upper surface of the winning a prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a). After that, a sliding operation (opening) is performed for a very short time (0.12 seconds) required for a plurality of game balls on the upper surface of the winning a prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) to collectively enter the winning a prize opening 1155. Control) is performed.

  According to the control at such a timing t2, although a plurality of game balls which are in the waiting state for winning the prize are put into the accessory winning hole 1155 in an extremely short opening time, all the game balls are lost holes. Since it is distributed to 1230c and discharged, the game ball received in the accessory winning hole 1155 is the V winning hole described above without wasting the open time (1.8 seconds at maximum) of the small hit game. The probability of being accepted by 1156 (probability of mechanical lottery) can be suitably reduced.

  Moreover, according to such control, basically, only the game balls that are already in the winning waiting state on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). The prize can be won only when the award winning hole 1155 is opened. That is, in this case, the timing at which the game ball enters the internal area of the winning a prize slot 1155 can be controlled more accurately, so the probability of being accepted by the V winning slot 1156 (probability of mechanical lottery) Also, it becomes possible to control this appropriately.

  Then, after the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is closed in this way, wait for the timing t3 when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is rotated from the discharge position to the storage position. After that, control is performed to slide the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state again for an extremely short time (0.12 seconds).

  Here, as is clear from FIGS. 142 (d) and 142 (e), by the time the timing t3 arrives, at least the upper surface of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the closed state is at least. Since two or more (2, 3) game balls are present in a prize-waiting state, these game balls are immediately grouped in the character prize opening 1155 by the sliding motion of the character prize opening / closing member 1221. And will be accepted. Moreover, at the timing t3, since the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is displaced from the discharging position to the containing position, any one of the game balls collectively received at the accessory winning port 1155 is It is always held by the receiving portion 1236a. The game ball held in this way is discharged from the rotating body 1236 at the timing t4 when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is displaced from the housed position to the discharge position. It will be accepted to 1156.

  However, in the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit (third advantageous small hit) is obtained, as shown in FIG. 142 (d), within the period of timings t1 to t4, the prize winning slot Control for maintaining the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 in a closed state (closing interval) for a time required to supply a plurality of game balls (here, three or more) to the opening / closing member 1221 Control of sliding the article prize opening / closing member 1221 from the closed state to the opened state for a very short time (0.12 seconds) is alternately performed five times.

  That is, in this case, within the period of timings t1 to t4, every time the character prize opening / closing member 1221 is slid (opened) from the closed state to the opened state for an extremely short time (0.12 seconds), a few times. The individual game balls will be accepted by the prize winning slot 1155. Then, in view of such an acceptance situation, normally, the small hit game (when the second advantageous small hit is obtained when the fourth or fifth slide operation (0.12 seconds) is performed. In the small hit game, the upper limit value (up to 10) of the game balls that can be won will be reached (FIG. 138: YES in step S713).

  In this respect, when the upper limit value of the game ball that can be won is reached at the time when the fourth or fifth sliding operation (0.12 seconds) is performed, the opening / closing control of the winning a prize opening / closing member 1221 is performed. In addition to being ended (FIG. 138: Step S721), the control for causing a certain operation to appear on the rotating body 1236 based on the elapsed time from the appearance of the stop symbol (elapsed time from timing t1) ends. Instead of this, control for displacing the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 from the accommodation position to the discharge position is performed. As a result, although illustration is omitted, various controls relating to the small hit game (small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained) are ended before the timing t4 arrives, and by extension, The big hit game according to the fact that the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156 can be executed.

  Further, when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 in the storage position holds the game ball in the receiving portion 1236a, the held game ball can be supplied to the V winning opening 1156. Although it is decided, all of the game balls received in the prize winning hole 1155 are distributed to the loss hole 1230c and discharged. According to such a configuration, for example, in the period of timing t3 to t4, while the game ball is surely supplied to the V winning opening 1156 in the future, the game entered in the accessory winning opening 1155. It is possible to preferably reduce the probability that the ball is distributed to the V winning opening 1156 (probability of mechanical lottery).

  However, even in the case of a small hit game when such a second advantageous small hit (third advantageous small hit) is obtained, if the right hit is not continued by the player, the game that can be won Timing t4 arrives without reaching the upper limit value (up to 10) of the ball, and the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game (small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained) is predetermined The determined upper limit time is reached (FIG. 138: YES in step S712).

  That is, in this case, in addition to the opening / closing control of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 being terminated when the upper limit time is reached (FIG. 138: step S721), the elapsed time from the appearance of the stop symbol (timing t1) The control for causing a constant motion to appear in the rotating body 1236 based on the (elapsed time from) has ended, and instead, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is displaced from the accommodation position to the discharge position. Control will be performed. As a result, the big hit game can be executed if there is a game ball accepted to the V winning opening 1156, whereas the big hit game is not executed if there is no game ball accepted to the V winning opening 1156. The next change of special symbols will be made.

  In this way, in the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit (third advantageous small hit) is obtained, as long as the player continues to hit the ball to the right, the short open time will be the most. By appropriately reducing the probability (probability of mechanical lottery) of being accepted by the above V winning opening 1156 by accepting the game balls, any one of many gaming balls must be supplied to the V winning opening 1156. It becomes possible to start a big hit game that is advantageous to the player (corresponds to "winning").

  Further, the accessory winning port 1155 is opened only for a short time (0.12 seconds) which is less than or equal to the interval (0.6 seconds) at which the game balls are fired by the hitting ball launching device 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500. While performing an operation (a short opening operation in which the expected value of winning is less than one in calculation), a plurality of game balls are moved to the internal area of the accessory winning port 1155 each time the short opening operation appears. I am able to enter. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically increase the number of winning game balls per unit time when the accessory winning slot 1155 is in the open state, and the excellent winning performance suppresses a decrease in amusement of the game. Can be done.

  In this way, in the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit (third advantageous small hit) is obtained, it is useful among a plurality of game balls waiting for winning during a relatively long closing interval. By performing the short opening operation by the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) a plurality of times, the total opening time of the prize winning opening 1155 (0.6 seconds) itself is short but many (10 or more). The game ball is allowed to enter the inner area. However, in order to set the machine lottery probability to a low probability value of approximately 1/10 or less, as shown in FIG. 142 (e), waiting for a game ball to win is aimed at the timing t2 guided to the lost hole 1230. The accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is operated by a short opening from the closed state to the open state so that the state is released, or the rotating body 1236 is in the operating state shown in FIG. While being maintained at the position (at timings t3 to t4), the short-opening operation by the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is performed a plurality of times.

  According to such a configuration, when a lot (10 or more) game balls are allowed to enter the internal area when the accessory winning hole 1155 is opened, the V winning hole 1156 is reached. The game ball to be guided is limited to the game ball first supplied to the rotating body 1236 while the rotating body 1236 is maintained in the operating state (accommodation position) shown in FIG. Like That is, in this case, even if the player's launch of the game ball is delayed, at least one game ball may enter the internal area of the accessory winning port 1155 at the timings t3 to t4. For example, it is possible to finally receive the V winning opening 1156. On the other hand, each of the other game balls different from the game ball initially supplied to the rotating body 1236 will be guided to the lost hole 1230, so that one small hit game (plurality) While the game ball is guided to the V winning opening 1156 while the short opening operation by the time is performed, the machine lottery probability is maintained at a low probability value of about 1/10 or less. Will be able to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a big hit game is started after the small hit game according to the result of the winning process (second special symbol lottery) (second advantageous small hit, third advantageous small hit) is started. Until the start of the game ball is suppressed from entering the second starting port 1153, by this, each time the game ball is controlled to the time saving game state, the game ball can be accepted in the second starting port 1153. As mentioned above, it is possible to realize the game playability in which a large variation is intentionally provided. Then, in order to suitably realize such a game property, after the small hit game according to the result of the winning process (second special symbol lottery) (second advantageous small hit, third advantageous small hit) is started It is important to make it difficult for the game ball itself to flow down to the second starting port 1153 until the big hit game is started.

  In this regard, in the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit (third advantageous small hit) is obtained, after the timing t1 at which the stop symbol at the time of the small hit appears, the accessory winning hole 1155 is closed. The open / close operation is performed so as to repeat the state and the open state. Among the repeated closed state and the open state, the time maintained in the closed state is at most "the interval between firing game balls (0 1.6 seconds), which is three times as long as 1.8 seconds ”or less. That is, since it is possible to allow up to three game balls to exist on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in a waiting state for winning the prize winning opening 1155, timing t1. Even if the right-handing is continued after the arrival of the game ball, the game ball passes through the upper surface of the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) and goes to the second starting opening 1153 on the downstream side. Heading will be suppressed.

  In addition, after the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit (third advantageous small hit) is completed, it passes through the upper surface of the character prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) and is further downstream than this. The game ball goes to the second starting port 1153 on the side. However, as described above, even if the second starting port 1153 is open for a long bridging time at the time when the small hit game is finished, it is closed when these gaming balls reach the second starting port 1153. As described above, since the path between the accessory winning port 1155 and the second starting port 1153 is provided, the second hit is started between the small hit game and the big hit game. It is possible to preferably prevent the game ball from entering the starting opening 1153.

[About the small hit game when the first disadvantage small hit is obtained]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 142 (a), when the first disadvantaged small hit (lottery on the first special symbol side) is obtained, the small hit game is first closed by the player's right hit. It is after the timing when the time required until a plurality of game balls is supplied to the upper surface of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) in the state comes, and the rotating body (sorting device) 1236. At a timing slightly (0.02 seconds) earlier than the timing t2 at which the character rotates from the storage position to the discharge position, control for sliding the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state is performed.

  Also, similarly, in this slide operation, the timing t2 arrives in a time that is much shorter than the time required for the game ball received in the accessory winning port 1155 to reach the accommodation position of the rotating body 1236. It is said that. Therefore, according to this sliding operation, while the rotating body 1236 is in the accommodation position (the state in which the game ball can be held in the receiving portion 1236a), the winning prize waiting state is set to the prize winning opening 1155. Although a plurality of game balls that are present can be accepted at once in a lump, when the game balls reach the rotating body 1236, they are not in the storage position, and are not held by the receiving portion 1236a to the hole 1230c. And will be discharged.

  However, in the small hit game when the first disadvantage small hit is obtained, the time during which the new game ball can be supplied during the sliding operation as the time for the sliding operation (a time slightly longer than the firing interval ( 0.62 seconds)) is adopted, and in addition to the plurality of game balls (game balls waiting for winning) on the upper surface of the character prize opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) in the closed state. The game balls newly supplied can also be won in the accessory winning port 1155.

  Moreover, in the small hit game when the first disadvantaged small hit is obtained, after such a slide operation for 0.62 seconds is completed, the small hit game (without sliding operation is performed again) The small hit game when the first disadvantaged small hit is obtained) reaches the predetermined upper limit time (the above-mentioned opening timer times out) after the start of the small hit game (FIG. 138: (YES in step S712).

  In this way, in the small hit game when the first disadvantaged small hit is obtained, it is possible to win a plurality of game balls into the accessory winning hole 1155, but all of the game balls are the above V winning holes. It will not be accepted by the 1156. Therefore, there is no possibility that the big hit game can be executed due to the small hit game (corresponding to "defeat").

[About each small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit, the first advantage small hit is obtained]
In the above-mentioned small hit game when the first disadvantaged small hit is obtained, it is immediately recognized that the advantageous small hit is not obtained, while the second disadvantaged small hit is obtained. In the small hit game, it is possible to expect the possibility that the first advantageous small hit is obtained by the opening mode, and the execution process of the small hit game itself can be made to function as the expected performance. Has become.

  That is, in each small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit (lottery on the first special symbol side) and the first advantageous small hit (lottery on the first special symbol side) are obtained, FIG. 142 (b), ( As shown in c), from timing t1 to timing t8, which will be described later, the operations for closing and opening the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 are performed in the same or similar manner.

  The first operation is the same as in the case of other small hit games. First, until a plurality of game balls are supplied to the upper surface of the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) that is closed by the player's right hit. At a timing which is after the timing when the time required for arriving arrives and which is slightly (0.02 seconds) earlier than the timing t2 when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the storage position to the discharge position. Control for sliding the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 from the closed state to the open state for an extremely short opening time (0.12 seconds) is performed.

  Also here, similarly, regarding the timing of performing this sliding operation, the above-mentioned timing is much shorter than the time required for the game ball received in the accessory winning hole 1155 by the sliding operation to reach the rotating body 1236. The timing t2 is set to arrive. Therefore, according to this sliding operation, while the rotating body 1236 is in the accommodation position (the state in which the game ball can be held in the receiving portion 1236a), the winning prize waiting state is set to the prize winning opening 1155. Although a plurality of game balls that are present can be accepted at once in a lump, when the game balls reach the rotating body 1236, they are not in the storage position, and are not held by the receiving portion 1236a to the hole 1230c. And will be discharged.

  The reason why such high speed rotation of the rotating body 1236 can be realized is that the rotating body 1236 is rotated not by the motor but by the drive of the V winning solenoid 1232, and the winning of the winning role is achieved. This is due to the fact that the rotating body 1236 can be displaced from the housed position to the discharge position in a time shorter than the time required for the game ball received in the mouth 1155 to reach the rotating body 1236.

  However, in each small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit or the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the timing t3 when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the accommodation position comes. In the period from when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is rotated so as to return from the housed position to the released position until the timing t4 arrives, the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 is changed from the closed state to the opened state. It never slides down. Therefore, the opportunity to hold the game ball in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 (and thus the opportunity to be assigned to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156) is not yet provided. The control related to the operation after the timing t4 is performed.

  That is, first, at a timing t4 when a relatively long closing interval (11.4 seconds) has elapsed, a plurality of game balls that are in the prize-waiting state are opened for an extremely short time (0.12 seconds). Although it is possible to collectively enter into 1155, by the time these game balls reach the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, since the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is already in the discharge position, All of these game balls are distributed to the loss hole 1230c and discharged.

  On the other hand, at timing t5 when 6.5 seconds have passed from timing t4, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the storage position, and at the same time 2.5 seconds from this timing 5 At the timing t6 when the time has elapsed, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is rotated again from the storage position to the discharge position.

  However, in each small hit game when the second disadvantaged small hit or the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 is changed from the closed state to the opened state even within the period of timing t5 to t6. It does not slide. Therefore, the opportunity to hold the game ball in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 (and thus the opportunity to be assigned to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156) is not yet provided. Control related to the operation after the timing t6 will be performed.

  That is, first, even at a timing t6 when a relatively long closing interval (8.88 seconds) has elapsed, a plurality of game balls that are in the prize-waiting state can be opened for an extremely short time (0.12 seconds). Although it is possible to collectively enter into 1155, by the time these game balls reach the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, since the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is already in the discharge position, All of these game balls are distributed to the loss hole 1230c and discharged.

  On the other hand, at the timing t7 when 6.5 seconds have passed from the timing t6, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the storage position, and at the same time 2.5 seconds from the timing t7. At the timing t8 when the time has elapsed, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is rotated again from the storage position to the discharge position.

  However, in each small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit or the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 is changed from the closed state to the open state even within the period of timing t7 to t8. It does not slide. Therefore, the opportunity to hold the game ball in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 (and thus the opportunity to be assigned to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156) is not yet provided. Control related to the operation after the timing t8 will be performed.

  In this way, in each small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit or the first advantageous small hit is obtained, a plurality of game balls are provided from the appearance of the stop symbol at the timing t1 to the arrival of the timing t8. Control for maintaining the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 in a closed state (closing interval) for a sufficient time for the winning prize waiting state, and for a very short time (0. The control for sliding operation (opening operation) for 12 seconds) is repeated a plurality of times.

  According to such a configuration, each time a very short sliding operation (opening operation) is performed, it is possible to insert a plurality of game balls in the prize-waiting state into the accessory winning port 1155. All of these sliding operations (opening operations) are performed with respect to the operating state of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 that performs a constant motion after the stop symbol appears at the timing t1, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236. The timing when the receiving portion 1236a is not in the accommodating position (more accurately, the receiving portion 1236a is in the accommodating position by the time the game ball that has entered the internal area of the character winning port 1155 reaches the receiving portion 1236a. It is aimed at non-timing).

  That is, in the small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit is obtained and the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, from the appearance of the stop symbol at the timing t1 to the arrival of the timing t8. In the meanwhile, all the game balls that have entered the accessory winning hole 1155 are allotted to the lost holes 1230c so that their rewards cannot be determined. (Approximation). As a result, the execution process of the small hit game itself can be made to function as an expected effect that makes it possible to recognize the possibility that an advantageous small hit has been obtained (timing t1 to t8).

  Further, in such a relatively long period of the timings t1 to t8, the expected effect that allows the effect display device 1115 to be aware of the possibility that an advantageous small hit may be obtained may be performed.

  That is, as described above, in the period of the timing t1 to t8, although the game in which a lot of game balls are won in the accessory winning port 1155 is provided, the closing interval is relatively long. Then, the time when the winning a prize winning opening 1155 is opened is relatively short (more accurately, a short period (0.12 seconds) enough to win a game ball that has already been launched). It is controlled. Therefore, if a predetermined effect (expected effect capable of recognizing the possibility that an advantageous small hit is obtained) is performed during such a period of timings t1 to t8, the accessory winning hole 1155. Since it is easy to concentrate on the effect during the closed state (closed interval) for a relatively long time, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment level of the game.

  Furthermore, in the period of timings t1 to t8, the closing interval that takes a relatively long time and the game ball that is in a state of waiting for the entry prize, which is a relatively short time, enter the internal area of the award winning port 1155. And a short opening period that allows entry are repeated, so there is less tension during the closing interval (the expectation that you can be aware of the possibility of obtaining an advantageous small hit). (Production) is basically appearing, it becomes possible to regularly generate a game production with a high sense of tension as to whether or not a game ball is accepted in the V winning opening (specific area) 1156. As a result, this also makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 142 (b) and (c), at the time when the timing t8 comes, the small hit game and the first advantageous small hit when the second disadvantage small hit is obtained are obtained. Of the small hit games at this time, only when the small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit is obtained is performed, the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 is for an extremely short time (0.12 seconds). From the sliding operation (opening operation), recognize whether the small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit is obtained or the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained It will be possible.

  In addition, the sliding operation (opening operation) at the timing t8 is also the same as in the case so far, in which a plurality of game balls that are in the prize waiting state are won in the prize winning opening 1155 with an extremely short opening time (0.12 seconds). Although it is possible to enter the balls at once, when these game balls reach the rotating body (sorting device) 1236, the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is already at the discharge position. Are all distributed to the loss hole 1230c and discharged.

  Then, in the small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit is obtained, it is possible to win the prize when the sliding operation (opening operation) is performed for an extremely short opening time (0.12 seconds) at the timing t8. When the upper limit of the game ball (maximum 10 in the small hit game) is reached, or the above-mentioned release timer times out at a predetermined timing thereafter (FIG. 138: YES in step S712), the above V winning The game ball is ended without being accepted in the mouth 1156. Therefore, there is no possibility that the big hit game can be executed due to the small hit game when the second disadvantage small hit is obtained (corresponding to "losing").

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 142 (c), in the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the game balls are played for a time sufficient to put the plurality of game balls in the winning waiting state. While the character prize opening / closing member 1221 is maintained in the closed state (closing interval), wait for the timing t9 when the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 rotates from the discharge position to the storage position. The accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 is slid (opened) for an extremely short time (0.12 seconds).

  That is, in this case, if right-handing is continued, at least two (2 or 3) game balls are waiting for winning on the upper surface of the character prize opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) that is closed. , The slide operation (0.12 seconds) is performed at the timing t9. As a result, regardless of the number of game balls waiting for winning, those game balls can be immediately accepted in a single batch into the prize winning slot 1155, and one of these game balls is It is always held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 in the storage position.

  After that, at timing t10, the elapsed time from the start of the small hit game (small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained) reaches the predetermined upper limit time (FIG. 138: step (YES in S712), control for displacing the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 from the housed position to the discharge position is performed. As a result, a big hit game can be executed in response to the game ball being received in the V winning opening 1156.

  However, in the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, as shown in FIG. 142 (c), a plurality of bonus winning opening / closing members 1221 are provided within the period of timings t1 to t9. Control for maintaining the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 in a closed state (closing interval) for the time required to supply the game balls (here, three or more), and the winning prize opening / closing member 1221. The control of sliding operation for a very short time (0.12 seconds) from the closed state to the open state is alternately performed four times.

  That is, in this case, within each of the timings t1 to t9, every time the character prize opening / closing member 1221 is slid (opened) from the closed state to the opened state for a very short time (0.12 seconds), a few times. The individual game balls will be accepted by the prize winning slot 1155. In consideration of such an acceptance situation, a prize is awarded in the small hit game (small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained) at the time when the sliding operation (0.12 seconds) is performed at the timing t9. There is a possibility that the upper limit value of the allowed game balls (10 at maximum) will be reached (FIG. 138: YES in step S713).

  At this point, when the upper limit value of the game balls that can be won is reached at the time when the sliding operation (0.12 seconds) at the timing t9 is performed, the opening / closing control of the winning a prize winning opening / closing member 1221 is ended. In addition to that (FIG. 138: Step S721), the control for causing the rotary body 1236 to perform a certain operation based on the elapsed time from the appearance of the stop symbol (the elapsed time from the timing t1) is terminated. Instead of this, control for displacing the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 from the storage position to the discharge position is performed. As a result, although illustration is omitted, various controls relating to the small hit game are ended before the timing t10 arrives, and thus a big hit corresponding to the fact that the game ball has been accepted in the V winning opening 1156. The game becomes executable.

  However, in the small hit game when an advantageous small hit is obtained, an opportunity to hold the game ball in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 (and thus to the V winning opening (specific area) 1156) Before the timing at which the chance of being distributed) is given, the upper limit value (maximum 10) of the game balls that can be won in the small hit game is reached, and the V winning opening (specific area) It is required to prevent the small hitting game from ending without being distributed to 1156.

  For example, in the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, the prize winning opening 1155 is opened for a short time three times while three game balls can be put in the prize waiting state at the maximum. At timing t9 after that, control is performed to open the accessory winning port 1155 for a short time so that the game ball is held by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236. That is, in this case, before the timing t9 arrives, only nine game balls less than the upper limit value (up to 10) can be won in the accessory winning hole 1155, so the V winning hole (specific The small hit game does not end without being allocated to the area 1156.

  In this way, in the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained, as long as the player continues to hit the right side, by accepting many game balls in a short opening time While suitably reducing the probability (probability of machine lottery) of being accepted in the V winning opening 1156, it is possible to supply one of the many game balls to the V winning opening 1156 without fail, which is advantageous to a player. Will be able to start (corresponding to "winning").

  Further, in both the small hit game when the first advantageous small hit is obtained and the small hit game when the second advantageous small hit is obtained, the hitting ball launching device 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500 is used. A short opening operation in which the character prize opening 1155 is opened only for a short time (0.12 seconds) less than the interval between game ball firings (0.6 seconds) (calculated that the expected value to win is less than 1). Each time the short opening operation appears, with respect to a plurality of game balls that have already been launched and are in a prize-waiting state, they are moved to the internal area of the accessory winning port 1155. It is possible to enter. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically increase the number of winning game balls per unit time when the accessory winning slot 1155 is in the open state, and the excellent winning performance suppresses a decrease in amusement of the game. Can be done.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, "basically, the prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) already exists in the winning waiting state on the upper surface (specific rolling area). It is possible to more accurately control the timing when the game ball enters the internal area of the prize winning hole 1155 by adopting a configuration such that only the game ball can win the prize only when the prize winning hole 1155 is opened. As described above, it is possible to do so. In this respect, in each of the above-mentioned small hit games, by utilizing such accurate control performance, the accessory winning hole 1155 is set at the timing when the game ball in the winning waiting state is guided to the V winning hole 1156. It is possible to selectively use the control for opening the state and the control for opening the accessory winning port 1155 at the timing when the game ball in the prize waiting state is guided to the losing hole 1230c. We are trying to realize the playability that the small hit game should bear.

  Further, as described above, according to each small hit game (small hit game shown in FIGS. 142 (a) to (d)) according to the present embodiment, the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). With a structure in which the maximum speed of the game ball T1 on the upper surface is controlled so as not to exceed "L / 2T", each time the character prize opening 1155 is opened, the character prize is won in advance. The mouth opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is maintained as a closed state (closed interval) for a time (at least 1.2 seconds or more) required to supply a plurality of game balls. As a result, as long as the player continues to hit to the right, at least two (2,3) game balls are waiting for winning on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) that is closed. Will be able to exist as.

  Further, in this way, since it becomes possible to play so that at least two or more game balls T are habitually present in the specific rolling area (the upper surface of the character prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a)), the character object Every time the prize opening / closing member 1221 is opened, a plurality of game balls can be won, so that excellent winning performance can be realized, thereby giving a sense of speed to the winning situation at the accessory winning hole 1155. Will be able to.

  Further, as described above, according to each small hit game (small hit game shown in FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (d)) according to this embodiment, all the game balls in the winning waiting state have the winning combination. The position at which the game ball that has entered the internal area is detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 (relative to the number of game balls that can be won), rather than the total ball entry time required to enter the internal area of the article winning hole 1155. A plurality of game balls are provided each time the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 is opened, while an internal passage is provided in which it takes a longer time to reach the upper limit value detection point). Since it is possible to win, it becomes possible to actively generate overflow winnings against the upper limit value of the game ball that can be won, and to achieve dynamic winning performance and award winning performance that exceed the set value. It becomes possible to present.

  By positively generating such an overflow prize, the number of game balls that exceeds the upper limit value (10 at maximum) of the game balls that can be won in the small hit game is increased to 1155. When it becomes possible to regularly enter the internal area of the game, and due to such excellent winning performance, it is always possible to guide the game ball to the V winning opening 1156 in the regulation for each small hit game described above. Even in this case, the machine lottery probability can be set lower than about 1/10.

  Moreover, as described above, according to each of the small hit games (small hit games shown in FIGS. 142 (a) to (d)) according to this embodiment, the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) A direction (backward direction) perpendicular to the traveling direction (leftward direction) of the game balls so that a plurality of game balls waiting for winning on the upper surface spill into the prize winning hole 1155 almost at the same time. It is supposed to slide in, and the structure for accepting all the game balls that are waiting for winning in an extremely short time is given, and the character prize opening / closing member 1221 is opened. Each time it is played, the opening time is significantly shorter (0.12 seconds, which is less than half) than the interval (0.6 seconds) at which game balls are fired by the hitting ball launching device 650 according to the operation of the handle device 500. To do There.

  According to such a configuration, in calculation, a short opening operation is performed in which the expected value of winning is less than one, but each time the short opening operation appears, a predetermined closing interval time elapses. Since at least two or more game balls T that are in the prize-waiting state can be entered into the internal area of the character prize winning opening 1155 almost at the same time, It is possible to dramatically increase the number of winnings of the game ball T, and in the small hitting game in which the upper limit time is set, the opening time (up to 1.8 seconds) is not wasted and a large amount of it is consumed. You will be able to win a game ball

  Furthermore, according to each small hit game (small hit game shown in FIGS. 142 (a) to (d)) according to this embodiment, such a short opening operation is performed by the rotating body (sorting device) 1236. The timing when the receiving portion 1236a is not in the accommodating position (more accurately, the receiving portion 1236a is in the accommodating position by the time the game ball that has entered the internal area of the character winning port 1155 reaches the receiving portion 1236a. It is supposed to appear with the aim of (no timing). Or, when the short opening operation is performed when the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is in the accommodation position, the above-mentioned opening timer is timed up or the upper limit value of the game balls that can be won. Unless either condition is reached (up to 10 in the small hit game), the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is not displaced to the discharge position. Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably reduce the probability that the game ball received in the accessory winning hole 1155 will be accepted in the V winning hole 1156 (probability of mechanical lottery).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, not the motor but the V winning solenoid 1232 is driven to realize high-speed rotation by the rotating body 1236, whereby the gaming ball received in the winning a prize hole 1155. The rotor 1236 can be displaced from the housed position to the discharge position in a time shorter than the time required to reach the rotor 1236. Therefore, a short opening operation of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is performed at a timing (for example, timing t4, t6, t8, etc.) at which the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is displaced from the storage position to the release position. In the case of performing it, it becomes possible to position the short opening operation as an operation of not winning the prize winning opening 1155. In addition, at a timing (for example, timing t3, t9, etc.) at which the rotating body (sorting device) 1236 is displaced from the discharge position to the storage position, a short opening operation of the accessory winning port opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is performed. In this case, the short opening operation can be positioned as an operation for winning the prize winning port 1155.

In addition, in order to realize the above-mentioned excellent winning performance in the case where a small hit (advantageous small hit) is obtained as a result of the second special symbol lottery, the point is:
The number of game balls that can be made to exist on the upper surface of the character prize opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state as a prize-waiting state is "N (in this embodiment, a maximum of 3)",
-When the character prize opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) is opened, the upper limit winning number setting value of the game sphere that allows the character prize opening 1155 to enter the internal area is set to "X (this implementation. In the form of 10), and the time between the firing intervals of the game balls is "Y (0.6 seconds in this embodiment)".
In this case, the time set value allowed as the operation time of the character prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) to the open state is shorter than "XY (6 seconds in this embodiment)". Is set to T (0.6 seconds in this embodiment). Then, on this, the operation to the open state by the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is "X / N (in this embodiment, it is the smallest integer larger than" 10/3 "4). It is possible to maintain the game balls that are in the above-mentioned prize-waiting state for each operation mode when the process is executed in Z times (5 times in this embodiment) more than once By setting the short open time among the above, the total of the short open times does not exceed the T time (0.6 seconds in this embodiment), but the X pieces (in this embodiment, It is possible to execute opening optimization control for opening the winning a prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) so that 10 game balls can enter the inside area of the winning a prize opening 1155. Required to do so.

  According to such a configuration, the operation to the open state by the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is performed Z times (in this embodiment, in a short opening time (0.12 seconds in this embodiment)). In each case, the game balls (up to three in this embodiment) that are in a prize-waiting state will enter the internal area each time the game is divided into five times. The total of the time does not exceed the above-mentioned T time (0.6 seconds in this embodiment), but the above “X” (10 in this embodiment) game balls are placed inside the accessory winning hole 1155. It becomes possible to enter the area, and such excellent winning performance can suppress the deterioration of the amusement of the game.

  Therefore, the number of game balls that can be habitually present on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state as the prize waiting state is not necessarily two or more (2, 3). . For example, even when a configuration in which at least one or more game balls are placed on the winning state on the upper surface of the character prize opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state, the character prize opening / closing member 1221 is used. As long as the game (continuation of the right-handed game) is maintained so that the state (game waiting state) in which the game ball exists on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the (door portion 1221a), a certain distribution A game ball enters the internal area of the accessory winning hole 1155 at an accurate timing when it is guided to the V winning opening 1156 by a rotating body (sorting device) 1236 that performs an operation (see FIG. 142 (e)). Therefore, it is possible to start the big hit game according to the acceptance into the V winning opening 1156 (big hit control). That is, in this case, the winning rate opening / closing member 1221 (door section 1221a) has a structure in which the maximum speed of the game ball on the upper surface does not exceed "L / T".

  Even if such a configuration is adopted (at least one or more game balls are placed in the winning state on the upper surface of the character prize opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state), basically, It is so short that only the game balls that are already in a prize-waiting state on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the winning a prize opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) can enter the internal area of the winning a prize opening 1155. It is possible to operate the accessory prize opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) from the closed state to the open state for a time period (a short time period that refuses to win the game ball that is not in the winning state). It is more desirable to allow more precise control of the timing when the game ball enters the internal area of the winning a prize opening 1155.

  Further, this is also preferable for the machine lottery probability in the case of adopting such a configuration (at least one or more game balls are placed in the winning waiting state on the upper surface of the character prize opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state). It is possible to set with a low probability value of "1/10" or less.

In other words, in performing the opening control of the accessory winning port 1155 by dividing it into 10 or more short opening operations with a predetermined closing interval time,
-As the predetermined closing interval time, a time longer than one firing interval and shorter than two firing intervals (for example, 0.66 seconds) is adopted, and as the short opening time, The time required for the game ball in the prize-waiting state to spill to the prize winning opening 1155 by the sliding operation of the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) (shorter than the firing interval, for example, 0. If a control such as adopting 12 seconds) is performed, a short opening operation will appear every time the game balls that are sequentially fired are placed in the winning waiting state at the above-mentioned predetermined closing interval time. That is, in this case, even if the short opening operation is shorter than the firing interval (the expected value to win the prize is less than one in the calculation), the short waiting operation is waited every time the short opening operation is repeated 10 times. One (rarely two) game balls will be won, and by allowing only one of these game balls to be accepted in the V winning opening 1156, the machine lottery probability is approximately "1/10 ( It becomes possible to set it to "less than 1/10").

  Furthermore, in the opening control of the winning a prize winning opening 1155 can be executed by dividing into 10 or more short opening operations with a predetermined closing interval time, instead of the configuration of (b), (B) If an internal passage is provided in which the time required for the game ball that has entered the internal area to reach the position detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 1224 is longer than the time of the firing interval, 10 Even if the tenth game ball enters the internal area of the winning a prize hole 1155 when the short opening operation appears, the tenth playing ball is detected by the winning a prize sensor 1224. The eleventh game ball can enter the internal area of the bonus winning port 1155 by the eleventh short opening operation before reaching the position. That is, in this case, it is possible to win a prize even when a configuration such as "at least one or more game balls are placed in a prize-waiting state on the upper surface of the character prize opening / closing member 1221 in the closed state" is adopted. It becomes possible to positively generate an overflow prize for the upper limit value of the game ball (up to 10 in the small hit game).

  In addition, various structures of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) and various controls in the small hit game according to this embodiment are applied to the structure of the large winning prize opening / closing member 1203 and the control in the big hit game, respectively. You may do it. That is, in this case, the game balls are regularly present on the upper surface of the big winning opening opening / closing member 1203 in the closed state as a prize waiting state, or the game balls per unit time when the big winning opening 1154 is in the open state. The number of prizes will be dramatically increased, the winning situation at the special winning opening 1154 will be given a sense of speed, and overflow prizes will be positively generated for the upper limit of the game balls that can be won in the jackpot game. It becomes possible to obtain excellent effects such as, etc. in the jackpot game.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the game ball is received in the first starting opening 1152, the first special symbol side lottery is performed, but in the first special symbol side lottery The probability that the "winning" can be obtained by the big hit is higher than the probability that the "winning" can be obtained by the small win. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the time saving function does not operate (normal gaming state), normally, when the big hit is won according to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 1152, the big hit game is performed, and by extension, the time saving function. Will be controlled to move to a game state (time saving game state) in which

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the gaming state in which the time saving function does not operate (normal gaming state), even if the normal hit is obtained by the normal determination, basically, the second start As described above, the mouth 1153 has a structure in which the game ball cannot be accepted. According to such a structure, the lottery on the second special symbol side that has been put on hold when the game state in which the time saving function operates (time saving game state) is extinguished when in the time saving game state. Or, it is only carried out under the condition of being carried over at the time of the transition control to the normal gaming state and being digested in the normal gaming state.

  That is, in this case, basically, unless the "winning" is obtained in the lottery on the first special symbol side in the normal game state, the time saving game state does not occur, and the lottery on the second special symbol side is Since it will not be performed, it will be possible to position this as a relatively rare event for the lottery on the side of the second special symbol, and it is possible to set the lottery content to an extremely advantageous game condition. Like

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the big hit game according to the result of the lottery on the first special symbol side, the time saving is performed over a period until the lottery of the special symbol is exhausted 100 times. While the game state can be continued, in the lottery on the second special symbol side, it is possible to obtain either big hit, second advantageous small hit, or third advantageous small hit with a probability of about 1/1. Then, it is supposed to function as a winning process that enables a game so that a big hit game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. And, in the time saving game state (especially, at the time of the first occurrence), since it is relatively easy to put the lottery on the second special symbol side (probability process) on hold, it is controlled to the time saving game state. If it is done, usually, before the lottery of the special symbol is exhausted 100 times, the second advantageous small hit, or the third advantageous small hit is obtained by the winning process (lottery on the second special symbol side). It will be.

  Then, in the small hit game in response to the second advantageous small hit or the third advantageous small hit being obtained, as long as the player continuously hits the right side, the short opening time is large. It is possible to insert the game ball of the above into the accessory winning hole 1155, and always supply any one of many game balls to the V winning hole 1156 and supply the other game balls to the losing hole 1230c. This is as described above (see FIG. 142 (c)). In other words, in this case, the probability of acceptance to the V prize hole 1156 (probability of mechanical lottery) when the game ball enters the prize hole 1155 (probability of mechanical lottery) is reduced appropriately, but to the prize hole 1155. By entering the game ball, it becomes possible to generate a jackpot game advantageous to the player.

  Also, as described above, after the big hit game is performed depending on whether the big hit or the second advantageous small hit is obtained in the lottery on the second special symbol side, the time saving function operates. It is designed to be controlled to the gaming state (time saving game state), and after the big hit game is played in response to the third advantageous small hit, the time saving function does not work (normal game state ) Is controlled by.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the small hit is obtained by the lottery, first, prior to the opening of the accessory winning hole 1155, either the V winning opening 1156 or the loss hole 1230c is opened. Whether or not the game ball is guided is determined in advance based on the type of symbol (first disadvantage small hit, second disadvantage small hit, first advantage small hit, second advantage small hit, second Three advantageous small hits).

  That is, in general, in a pachinko machine that generates a big hit game based on the fact that the game ball is guided to a specific area, the movement of the game ball has a large effect on the game. There is a concern that this may reduce the enjoyment of the game for those who are playing the game properly. Therefore, conventionally, it has been proposed to determine whether or not a fraudulent act has been performed through magnetic detection by a magnetic sensor or vibration detection by a vibration sensor. However, fraud based only on detection by such various sensors has been proposed. When determining whether or not an act has been performed, a situation may occur in which there is an erroneous detection in relation to a threshold value for detection, or in the case where a fraudulent act is not detected, it is not detected.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, it is determined in advance which of the V winning opening 1156 and the loss hole 1230c the game ball is guided to, based on the type of the symbol. . Then, on this, the game ball is guided to a specific area (V winning opening 1156), though the type of the determined symbol determines that the game ball is guided to the loss hole 1230c. In this case, external output is performed in a specific mode.

  According to the fraud management by such a symbol, the game corresponding to the type of the symbol is advanced in the predetermined game control, and when the fraudulent act is performed, it is externally output in a specific mode. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid erroneous detection or non-detection due to the relationship with the threshold value.

  By the way, such an external output is one of the processes of outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer) in the process of step S16 (output data setting process) described above. Or as a display output (for example, an image showing a game history) on the effect display device 1115 through a command output to the peripheral control board 4010.

  For example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 131, when it is determined that the V winning opening 1156 is guided in the process (special control process) of step S14 (YES in step S715, or step S744). In YES), in the process of step S16 in the timer interrupt process (same interrupt process), the type of the symbol at the time of winning the small hit (the result of the process of step S311) is confirmed.

  As a result, if the type of the symbol at the time of winning the small hit is an advantageous small hit (first advantageous small hit, second advantageous small hit), it is considered that the big hit game is properly generated, Processing for outputting a signal indicating that to the outside is performed (step S16).

  On the other hand, when the type of the symbol at the time of winning the small hit is a disadvantage small hit (first disadvantage small hit, second disadvantage small hit), to the V winning opening 1156 in the control relating to the progress of the game. Even though the guidance of the game ball is not generated, it is assumed that the guidance of the game ball to the V winning opening 1156 has occurred, and a process for externally outputting a signal to that effect is performed. (Step S16). However, even in this case, in steps S715 and S716 in the small hitting game process (FIG. 138), the specific sensor is turned on and the V history flag is turned on. Then, it is confirmed that the V history flag is ON in the process of step S744, and the process flag is updated to 5 in the process of step S745, so that the jackpot game is executed.

  In this case, a notification process for notifying an abnormality may also be performed. However, since it is difficult to completely eliminate the possibility that the game ball is guided to the V winning opening 1156 due to the combination of various rare events despite the proper playing of the game, It is desirable not to perform the notification process for notifying an abnormality. That is, if the hall side checks through the management computer whether such external output frequently occurs, it is possible to find out the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

  In addition, such fraudulent management based on the design is advantageous in that the magnetic sensor and the vibration sensor described above do not necessarily have to be provided with them. However, in order to confirm whether or not the person who played the game has malicious intent, the above-mentioned magnetic sensor or vibration sensor is further prepared, and the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior is detected by also comparing the detection results by the sensor. It is more desirable to do.

  That is, in this case, although the guidance of the game ball to the V winning opening 1156 is prevented from occurring in the control related to the progress of the game, the guidance of the game ball to the V winning opening 1156 has occurred. When this is controllably confirmed, the detection by the sensor is confirmed. As a result, it is desirable that when the sensor is also performing the detection, a notification process for notifying the abnormality that the above-mentioned misconduct has been performed is also performed. Alternatively, the detection signal from the sensor may be output to the outside, and the hall side may determine the presence or absence of fraud through the management computer.

  On the other hand, when it is realized as a display output on the effect display device 1115, it is desirable to realize it as various game histories shown below, for example.

  That is, the type of the symbol determined above determines that the game ball is guided to the lost hole 1230c, and the game ball is in a specific area (V winning opening 1156) in the game according to the winning of the winning. When is not guided, the display image having the first identification mode appears on the effect display device 1115. Then, the display image having the first identification mode is controlled so as to continuously appear as a history display until the control of the game corresponding to the winning of the winning is performed again.

  On the other hand, the type of the symbol determined above determines that the game ball is guided to a specific area (V winning opening 1156), and a specific area in the game according to the winning of the winning ( When the game ball is guided to the V winning opening 1156), a display image having the second identification mode appears on the effect display device 1115. Then, the display image having the second identification mode is controlled so as to continuously appear as a history display until the control of the game corresponding to the winning of the winning is performed again.

  On the other hand, although the type of the symbol determined above determines that the game ball is guided to the lost hole 1230c, a specific region (V winning opening 1156) in the game corresponding to the winning of the winning When the game ball is guided to (in the case where there is a concern about fraud), a display image having the third identification mode appears on the effect display device 1115. Then, the display image having the third identification mode is controlled so as to continuously appear as a history display until the control related to the game according to the winning of the winning is performed again.

  On the other hand, although the type of the symbol determined above determines that the game ball is guided to a specific region (V winning opening 1156), a specific region in the game according to the winning of the winning. When the game ball is not guided to the (V winning opening 1156), a display image having the fourth identification mode appears on the effect display device 1115. Then, the display image having the fourth identification mode is controlled so as to be continuously displayed as a history display until the control related to the game according to the winning of the winning is performed again.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to find out the above-mentioned misconduct by the history display having four types of identification modes, and also the complaint from the player side (for example, the V winning opening due to a defective launcher). It is expected that the hall side will be able to cope well with 1156 that the game ball could not be entered.

  However, in order to find out the above-mentioned fraudulent acts more confidently on the side of the hall, the process of updating the number of times each time there is a concern about the fraud occurs (the process of counting the number of times the situation has occurred). It is more desirable to do.

  That is, in this case, the peripheral control unit 4140 side performs a process (a process of updating) of counting up (or counting down) the counter value of a predetermined counter every time the situation with the concern about fraud occurs. Then, based on the counter value updated by such processing, if control is performed to cause a change in the display form according to the third identification mode, its color, etc., it can occur extremely rarely. It becomes possible to confirm how often (number of times) such a situation (the situation with fraud concerns) is occurring, which allows the hole side to more confidently find the above-mentioned misconduct. Like

  In addition, in order to be able to check the number of times that the situation with the concern about fraud occurs over a longer period of time, the display image having the third identification mode is switched to the display image having another identification mode. Even if it comes to be possible, it is desirable that the counter value of the above-mentioned predetermined counter is not reset, and this is held until a predetermined operation such as RAM clearing is performed.

  Further, the lottery on the side of the second special symbol is relatively rare in the lottery on the side of the second special symbol, in order to function as a winning process that enables a game so that a big hit game can occur with a probability of about 100%. It is important to perform processing on the design side so that it is positioned as a special event. The processing on the normal symbol side will be described below.

[Regular control processing]
FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of an example of the normal control process (step S15).

  Now, in the process of step S2001, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 1135 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 1134, as shown in FIG. As the process of step S2010, the main control MPU 4100a first executes a gate portion passing process such as acquiring an ordinary random number of a normal symbol from a random number counter and storing it in a normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e.

  Next, in the normal control process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. The normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read out, and the normal symbol normal process in which the lottery process or the like for the display mode at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S2100)
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination processing (step S2200) in which lottery processing or the like is performed for the variation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189 based on the random symbol fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation process to wait until the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1189 is stopped (step S2300)
4. Stop the variable display of the normal symbol so that the mode when the variable control of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display device 1189 Normal symbol stop processing (step S2400)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "universal pattern hit", the starting opening door member 1214 appears (in the case of the variable starting opening unit 2210 according to the modified example). Further, by sliding the proximity disconnecting member 2215 to the retracted position), a bridging passage that connects the flow path of the game ball in the game area 1100 and the second starting opening 1153 (isolated island winning opening) is formed. Ordinary electric accessory release process for executing the process (step S2500)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S2100) should be performed in the process of initializing the data stored in the various registers and the main control internal RAM 4100e.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate portion passing process (step S2010).

  Now, in the process of step S2001, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 1135 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 1134, as shown in FIG. As the processing of step S2011, the main control MPU 4100a first obtains the counter value of the normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of normally held symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

  In the processing of this step S2011, when it is determined that the number of ordinary symbols to be held is not the maximum value, the processing of the following steps S2012 to S2014 is performed to newly put the variable display control of the ordinary symbols on hold. Will be done. That is, first, as the process of step S2012, the ordinary holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S2013, the ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S2014, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

  However, in the process of step S2011, when it is determined that the number of ordinary symbols to be held is the maximum value, the variable display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly held. That is, by not performing the processing of steps S2012 to S2014, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing (step S2100).

  When the normal control flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 145, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first, as the process of step S2101, the normal reserved number counter. Based on the counter value by, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S2102, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a. Of the random numbers related to the display mode (eg, ordinary random number, universal figure fluctuation random number), the random number stored in the first storage area is read from the RAM 4100e. Then, as the processing of steps S2103 and S2104, the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a while counting down the normal hold number counter Random numbers (ordinary random numbers and universal figure fluctuation random numbers) related to (1) are shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) manner.

  Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores random numbers extracted according to passage of the game ball to the gate unit 1134 in order from the first (first) area. To do. When the game ball passes through the gate unit 1134 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is stored. The random number stored in the first storage area is read out when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, and the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4) is read out. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control of the normal symbols is held is stored in a manner that can be specified, and the variable display control is released from the earliest hold (the earliest hold).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, if the current game state is a time saving game state (YES in step S2105), selects a general drawing per hit determination table (not shown) for time saving (step S2106), If the current game state is a non-time saving game state (normal game state) (NO in step S2105), the non-time saving general figure hit determination table (not shown) is selected (step S2107), and the selected general figure hit The determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S2102 of the normal symbol normal process (step S2108).

  The universal figure hitting determination table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and is used when the gaming state is in the time saving mode, and when the gaming state is in the non-time saving mode. It is provided with a general-universal-person hit determination table for non-time saving. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the universal figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number is the ordinary figure hit determination table for time saving and the universal figure hit determination table for non-time saving. In any of the above, out of the 255 types of ordinary random numbers, 13 types match the per-universal-drawing determination value indicating that the per-universal figure has won The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with. Therefore, if there is a passage of the game ball to the gate portion 1134, a universal figure hit will be obtained with a probability of approximately 1/20, whereby the flow path of the game ball in the game area 1100 and the second starting opening. The control for sliding the starting opening door member 1214 to the appearance position is performed so that a bridging passage that connects 1153 (isolated island type winning opening) is formed.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the normal game state, it is possible to basically prevent the game ball from entering the second starting opening 1153, while in the time saving game state. Is designed to make it easier to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 1153 than the first starting opening 1152, and even in the time saving game state, the big hit game is started after the small hit game is started. It is important to make it difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting port 1153 in the period until it is started, and in the case where the configuration is feasible, this is usually done for the winning probability of the symbol. You may set up suitably.

  When the main control MPU 4100a compares the selected universal figure hit determination table with the ordinary random number and determines that it is a universal figure hit (step S2109), the variation concerned is won as a universal figure hit. After setting the universal symbol hit flag (step S2110), the regular symbol per symbol is determined as a mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the variable control of the regular symbol is stopped (step S2112). On the other hand, as a result of comparison between the selected ordinary figure per determination table and ordinary random numbers, if it is determined to be out of the ordinary pattern, the ordinary symbol fluctuation control stop mode (ordinary symbol stop symbol) It is determined (step S2111). Then, after that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S2200) (step S2113), this process ends.

[Regarding the basic operation mode of the starting opening door member 1214 in the case where a universal figure hit is obtained in the normal game state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is important to prevent the game ball from entering the second starting opening 1153 basically in the normal game state. .

  Also, as described above, the second starting opening 1153 according to the present embodiment is an isolated island type winning opening provided at a position apart from the downflow path through which the game balls can flow down in the game area 1100. It is provided. On the other hand, it is possible to appear and disappear by reciprocating in the depth direction with respect to the game area 1100, and when it is at the appearance position of the collapsed position and the appearance position, the flow-down path and the second starting opening 1153 ( It is used as a bridge passage connecting the remote island type prize opening) and the game ball on the above-mentioned flow path is located in a direction (right direction) different from the depth direction to the second starting opening 1153 (remote island type prize opening). By providing the starter door member 1214 (tongue-bolt movable member) provided so as to roll (in the case of the variable starter unit 2210 according to the modification, the starter door member 1214 and a predetermined link mechanism are further provided). By providing the proximity disconnecting member 2215 provided so as to be interlocked with each other, it is possible to strictly distinguish between an operation that allows the game ball to be bridged and an operation that does not allow the game ball to be bridged. It is realized.

  In this regard, in the main control MPU 4100a, as shown in FIGS. 122-1 and 122-2 (in the case of the variable starting opening unit 2210 according to the modification, FIGS. 123-1 and 123-2), the normal gaming state. In the case where a normal hit is obtained in, the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214 is the above-mentioned after the game ball on the flow-down path in the game area 1100 starts rolling in the first guide portion 1214a. The time (for example, 0.088 seconds) shorter than the prize winning threshold time required to reach the third guiding portion 1214c is always selected. That is, in this case, in the normal game state, every time a universal figure hit is obtained, the flow path of the game balls in the game area 1100 and the second starting port 1153 (isolated island type winning port) by the sliding operation by the starting port door member 1214. A bridging passage (upper surface of the starting port door member 1214) that connects the two will appear. However, this bridging passage (the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214) is always extinguished before the game ball from the above-mentioned flow path has crossed, and the sliding motion is performed so as to spill the game ball.

  According to such a configuration, basically, in the normal game state, the game ball is not received in the second starting opening 1153 by the operation of the starting opening door member 1214, but the starting opening door member 1214 operates. When this is done, a bridging passage that connects the downflow path of the gaming ball in the gaming area 1100 and the second starting opening 1153 (isolated island type winning opening) is formed so that the gaming ball can roll in the bridging passage. As a result, the expectation of winning the prize in the second starting opening 1153 is naturally increased, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

[Regarding the operation mode of the starting opening door member 1214 when a universal hit is obtained in the time saving game state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is important that the game ball is easily inserted into the second starting opening 1153 in the time saving game state.

  In this regard, in the main control MPU 4100a, as shown in FIGS. 122-1 and 122-2 (in the case of the variable starting opening unit 2210 according to the modified example, FIGS. 123-1 and 123-2), a time saving game state. In the case where a normal hit is obtained in, the operation time of the starting opening door member 1214 is the above-mentioned after the game ball on the flow-down path in the game area 1100 starts rolling in the first guide portion 1214a. The time longer than the prize winning threshold time required for reaching the third guide 1214c (for example, 1.5 seconds) is always selected. That is, in this case, even in the time saving game state, every time a universal figure hit is obtained, the flow path of the game ball in the game area 1100 and the second starting port 1153 (isolated island type winning port) by the sliding operation by the starting port door member 1214. A bridging passage (upper surface of the starting port door member 1214) that connects the two appears. However, in addition to this, if the right-handing is continued, at least one of the game balls from the downflow route (here, at least two game balls for a firing interval of 0.6 seconds (1 .5 seconds) is crossed over this bridging passage (the upper surface of the starting port door member 1214) and is accepted by the second starting port 1153 (isolated island type winning port), and disappears after the acceptance and the above-mentioned bridging is performed. The game ball in the passage (upper surface of the starting port door member 1214) is slid so as to spill it.

  According to such a configuration, in the time-saving game state, every time the operation of the start opening door member 1214 is performed, the flow path of the game ball in the game area 1100 and the second starting opening 1153 (isolated island type winning opening) are set. Since the game ball that has crossed the bridging passage to be connected is received by the second starting port 1153, the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 1153.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, at the stage where the backward movement of the starting opening door member 1214 is started and the winning in the second starting opening 1153 is changed to an unfavorable situation, The system is constructed by a structure in which the brake is automatically applied to the speed toward the second starting port 1153 by the frictional force corresponding to the contact with the front wall surface of the base plate 1160 (game board 4). Therefore, in addition to the control related to the operation of the starting opening door member 1214, such an automatic brake system also increases the certainty of non-winning prize when performing the operation that does not allow the bridging of the game balls. Furthermore, even when a relatively long bridging passage is realized as the starting opening door member 1214, the second starting is started from the time when the starting opening door member 1214 starts to move backward (displacement from the appearance position to the collapsed position). It becomes possible to enhance the immediacy until the ball cannot enter the mouth 1153.

  However, as described above, in the case of the variable starting opening unit 2210 according to the modified example, further, when the starting opening door member 1214 is set in the operating state in accordance with the winning per ordinary drawing, the game ball received in the second starting opening 1153. Determine the number of. Then, when the determined number becomes a predetermined number, even if there is still time to be maintained in the operating state, the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted from the appearance position, and further the proximity. Control for operating the disconnecting member 2215 from the retracted position to the emerging position is performed. According to such control, even when two game balls are supplied in series, the number of game balls to be received in the second starting port 1153 is preset in combination with the configuration of the proximity disconnecting member 2215. It becomes possible to keep the specified number (see FIG. 123-2).

  Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even in the normal game state, as the operating time of the starting opening door member 1214, the game ball on the downflow route in the game area 1100 is the above-mentioned. A bridge time (advantageous game mode) longer than the prize-winning threshold time required from reaching the third guide portion 1214c after starting rolling in the one guide portion 1214a can be selected slightly. (For example, the combined probability with the probability that a normal hit is obtained is about 1/4000). That is, in this case, by performing an effect that prompts the player to perform a right-handed stroke, there is a probability of winning at the second starting opening 1153 with a probability of approximately 100%, and the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is on hold. Therefore, when the winning process (second special symbol lottery) that has been put on hold is exhausted, a big hit game will occur with a probability of approximately 100%.

  According to such a configuration, in the normal gaming state, in the case where a specific result (big hit, advantageous small hit) is obtained by the lottery according to the winning of the first starting opening 1152, the gate member 1134 Even if a specific result (ordinary hit with a long bridging time selected) is obtained in the judgment processing (ordinary judgment) according to the passage of, a big hit game can occur with a probability of about 100%. You will be able to play. That is, in this case, the ordinary determination can have a function equivalent to the lottery according to the winning of the first starting opening 1152.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, since the gate member 1134 is arranged as a passage opening in the path along which the game balls flow down to the first starting opening 1152, one The game ball is allowed to flow down so as to satisfy both the starting conditions of both the lottery corresponding to the winning of the first starting opening 1152 and the ordinary determination having the same function as the lottery. That is, in this case, the lottery can be executed without consuming two game balls for satisfying the execution condition of the two lottery having the same function. And in this case, even if it does not depend on one lottery, it is possible to generate a jackpot game as long as a specific result is obtained in the other lottery, which is different in type but has the same function as this Therefore, from the player's side, it is difficult to feel distrust even when it is difficult to obtain a specific result by one of the lottery, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 98, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the period when the big hit game is occurring (big hit game state), a game is entered into the special winning opening 1154 by right-handing. The game is advanced by entering the ball, but in the right flow path, the gate member 1134 is also provided as a passage opening in the path along which the game ball flows down to the special winning opening 1154. It has a structure.

  In this respect, when the game ball passes through the gate member 1134, the judgment process (ordinary judgment) for the normal hit which triggers the operation of the starting opening door member 1214 is performed as described above. The determination (ordinary control process (step S15)) is influenced by the value of the process flag updated in the special control process (step S14), as is clear from the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (see FIG. 131). It has a control structure that is executed without receiving it.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of obtaining a specific result (big hit, advantageous small hit) in the lottery according to the winning of the first starting opening 1152, in the special control process (step S14). Even when the processing (steps S230, S240) related to the execution of the big hit game is performed, the big hit is the judgment processing (ordinary judgment) having the same function as the lottery according to the winning of the first starting opening 1152. It becomes possible to continue this even during the period when the game is occurring. That is, in this case, the above determination process (ordinary determination) functions as a lottery as to whether or not a new big hit game different from this can be put in a special standby state during the period when the big hit game is being played. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the big hit game is being played.

[Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 146, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady process. In the 2 ms steady process, a process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, when 16 ms has passed, 16 ms has elapsed. The flag T is set, and the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S1003), and then the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S1004).

  In this 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, lamps / LEDs, speakers 130, 222, 262, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 ms steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms, the above steps S1003 to S1004 are repeated. On the other hand, if the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0") in step S1002, loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms steady process executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of steps S1101 to S1106. In the command analysis processing of step S1101, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S1102, the control process relating to the display effect of the effect display device 1115 is executed based on the fact that the variation pattern command or the like is acquired from the main control MPU 4100a.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 first, among the various information acquired from the main control MPU 4100a, based on the variation pattern command, the effect table at the time of winning the big hit and the time when the big hit fails (small. (Including the time of winning) and the production table. In these effect tables, the contents of the display effect on the effect display device 1115 are stored in such a manner that they are associated with each other for the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol.

  Next, the peripheral control unit 4140 selects one of the two effect tables, and then, based on the variation pattern (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command, the display effect stored in the selected effect table. Any one of the contents (display effect pattern) is selected.

  Then, after the content of the display effect (display effect pattern) is selected in this way, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, of the various information acquired from the main control MPU 4100a, the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the symbol information command and its type. Based on the above, the process for determining the symbol combination of the decorative symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 1115 is performed.

  For example, when the content of the display effect (display effect pattern) is selected from the effect table at the time of winning the jackpot, the jackpot is won as the symbol combination of the above decorative symbols based on the type of the jackpot indicated by the symbol information command. A special symbol combination (a symbol combination in which all three decorative symbols of red or blue appear in the numbers that are arranged) indicating the fact that it has been done and its type is selected. However, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since only one kind of jackpot is prepared for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the type is not indicated by the color of the decorative symbol. Absent.

  On the other hand, when you select the contents of the display effect (display effect pattern) from the effect table at the time of the big hit winnings when you win the big hit but win the small hit, the small hit indicated by the symbol information command Based on the type, as the design combination of the decorative designs, a design combination at the time of a small hit that indicates that the small hit has been won (a design combination that appears with numbers in which all three decorative designs are not complete) is selected. However, when the type of small hit is a specific type that is disadvantageous to the player (advantageous small hit), a display mode such as a predetermined chance eye (a pattern combination in which all three decorative symbols appear in a number) You may make it appear the symbol combination which has.

  On the other hand, in the case of reach loss in the big hit loss, when selecting the content of the display effect (display effect pattern) from the effect table at the time of the big hit loss, as a symbol combination of the decorative pattern, a special symbol combination and Select a different symbol combination at the time of reach loss (a symbol combination that appears in the (identical) numbers of only two decorative symbols in a specific row out of three). Also, in the case of losing, when selecting the content of the display effect (display effect pattern) from the effect table at the time of a big hit, as a symbol combination of the above decorative symbols, a symbol at the time of a defect different from a special symbol combination Select a combination (a pattern combination that appears with numbers that do not have all three decorative designs).

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is based on various commands (small hit start command, big hit start command, etc.) related to control of the winning game (small hit game, large hit game) among various information acquired from the main control MPU 4100a. Then, one of the effect table for the small hit game and the effect table for the big hit game is selected. In these effect tables, the contents (display effect pattern) of the display effect on the effect display device 1115 are stored in such a manner that they are associated with each other for the small hit game and the big hit game scene (progress). Next, the peripheral control unit 4140 selects one of the above two effect tables and then, based on the progress of the winning game (small hit game, large hit game), the display effect stored in the selected effect table. Any one of the contents (display effect pattern) is selected.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment performs control related to the leading effect (prefetching effect) for the jackpot lottery that is held.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first precedes, among various kinds of information acquired from the main control MPU 4100a, a variation pattern precedence determination time command, a type precedence determination time command, a hold precedence determination time command, and the like related to control of precedence effect. When the command at the time of judgment is acquired, the storage area according to the number of holdings (value of the number of holdings counter) and the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) indicated by the command for holding precedent determination of those commands (The sub-side first special symbol hold storage area of the peripheral control unit 4140, the sub-side second special symbol hold storage area), the preceding determination time command (variable pattern leading determination time command, type leading determination time command, hold) A process for storing the information indicated by the command for preceding determination) is performed.

  More specifically, the sub-side special symbol holding storage area (sub-side first special symbol holding storage area, sub-side second special symbol holding storage area) has four storage areas 1 to 4, the main control The information indicated by the preceding judgment time command (variation pattern preceding judgment time command, type preceding judgment time command, pending preceding judgment time command) indicating each result of the preceding judgment processing on the MPU 4100a side is the first (first) The areas are stored in order. If the preceding determination command is acquired when the information indicated by the preceding determination command is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage The information indicated by the acquired command for preceding determination is stored in the area. Then, when the condition for starting the variable display based on the preceding determination time command stored in the first storage area is satisfied, the information indicated by the preceding determination time command stored in the first storage area is read and the nth The information stored in the (n = 2 to 4) storage area is moved to the (n-1) th (n = 2 to 4) storage area (shift processing). Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) occurs is stored so that it can be specified.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, based on various commands (variation pattern command, big hit start command, etc.) from the main control MPU 4100a, responds to the information indicated by the preceding determination time command stored at that time. It will be directed.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs information relating to the content of the display effect selected as described above to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 as the display command. Further, at this time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the information (command) generated in response to the selection of the content of such display effect (display effect pattern), the lamp drive board 3041, the motor drive board 3045, and the sound source IC 4140c. And output as appropriate.

  Further, in the sound control processing of step S1103, control processing relating to the speakers 130, 222, 262 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S1104, a control process relating to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S1105, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp drive board 3041 is executed. In the random number updating process of step S1106, a process of updating the random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1102) is executed.

  Note that the processing of steps S1101 to S1106 in the 16 ms steady processing ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately started from the beginning (command of step S1101 when 16 ms elapses after the 16 ms steady process is started. Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1102 that the 16 ms elapse flag has been set after the 16 ms steady process ends, the 16 ms steady process is executed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S1106) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update the various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating the various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop process and the 16 ms steady process in the sub-main process.

[Playability of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment]
FIG. 148 is a time chart showing an example of the flow of the game when the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment advances the game based on the novel game property described above. Hereinafter, various processes when a game is progressed in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be summarized.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as described above, the gate member 1134 is provided in the right flow path as well as in the path in which the game ball flows down to the first starting port 1152 in the left flow path. Is provided as a passage port (see FIG. 98). However, in the normal game state, as a result of the normal determination according to the passage of the game ball to the gate member 1134, the probability of being extremely rare (the probability of obtaining a normal hit and the combined probability of the selection probability is approximately 1). / 4000), a bridging time longer than the above prize winning threshold time is selected. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to hit the game ball (left hit) by aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500, which is the side where the first start opening 1152 is provided, instead of the second start opening 1153. To be done.

  On the other hand, in the time saving game state, when the normal hit is obtained by the normal determination according to the passage of the game ball to the gate member 1134, only the time longer than the above-mentioned prize winning threshold time is selected. sell. The gate member 1134 in the right flow path and the gate member 1134 in the left flow path are provided so that the gate member 1134 in the right flow path has a higher probability of accepting game balls. Therefore, in the time saving game state, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the game ball (right hit) aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500, which is the side on which the second starting opening 1153 is provided.

  In such a game condition, if the game is now in a state where a normal game should be played (normal game state), the player makes a left-hand hit and passes the game ball to the gate member 1134. Then, a game (normal game) that causes reception of the game ball in the first starting port 1152 is performed.

  Here, when the game ball passes through the gate member 1134, the normal determination is suspended until a predetermined upper limit value (here, four). In this way, the normal determination made to be in the suspended state is digested according to the suspended order when the starting condition of the normal symbol is satisfied (FIG. 145: YES in step S2101). However, as described above, in a situation where a normal game should be played (normal game state), basically, as a result of the normal determination, a bridging time longer than the above-mentioned prize winning threshold time is not selected. From the above, when the short bridging time is selected, the starting door member 1214 can be operated, but a winning opportunity to the second starting opening 1153 is not given, and the game related to the ordinary determination is simply repeated. Becomes

  More specifically, while the normal symbol is changed for a variation time according to the result of the ordinary determination being a loss, a stop symbol corresponding to the loss is made to appear when the variation time elapses. The control is repeated. However, as the type of such “miss”, in addition to the loss of ordinary hits, the short bridging time is selected as the ordinary hits of “199/4000 (probability of being obtained per ordinary hit and short bridging time is selected. Since it is obtained with the probability of “combination probability with probability)”, after the stop symbol corresponding to “ordinary hit for which short bridging time is selected” appears, the starting door member 1214 is short bridging time only. In some cases, the control to operate is performed.

  On the other hand, when the game ball is received in the first starting opening 1152, the first special symbol lottery is put on hold until a predetermined upper limit value (here, four). In this way, the first special symbol lottery set in the suspended state is digested according to the suspended order when the starting condition on the first special symbol side is satisfied (FIG. 134: YES in step S302). However, as shown in FIG. 141, the result of the first special symbol lottery includes "big hit" and "advantageous small hit (first advantageous small hit)" as a hit (winning) that causes a big hit game. However, the probability that a big hit will be obtained is a low probability such as "1/400", and the probability that an advantageous small hit will be obtained (multiplication value of the small hit probability and the probability that an advantageous small hit will be selected in the type determination). As a result, the probability is extremely low such as "1/8571". Therefore, while the hit (winning) to generate the big hit game cannot be obtained, the game related to such a first special symbol lottery will be repeatedly repeated.

  More specifically, while changing the first special symbol for a fluctuation time determined based on the result of "defeat", when the fluctuation time has elapsed, a stop symbol corresponding to "defeat" appears. The control at the time of losing is repeated. However, as a type of such "losing", in addition to loss, disadvantageous small hits are generally obtained with a probability of "1/175", so a stop symbol corresponding to "losing" appears. In some cases, the control for executing the small hit game at the time of a disadvantageous small hit may be further performed after the hit.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the "advantageous small hit" is obtained, the game is performed on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the character prize winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). It is possible to start the big hit game as long as the game (continue the right-handed game) is maintained so that the state where the ball exists (waiting for prize winning) is maintained, whereas the "small disadvantage disadvantage" When the game balls are won in the prize winning hole 1155, the prize winning hole opening / closing member 1221 is set so that none of the game balls can be distributed to the V winning hole (specific area) 1156. The opening / closing operation is as described above.

  Also, as mentioned above, when the second disadvantage small hit of the disadvantage small hit is obtained, within the period in which the small hit game is performed, the advantageous small hit (first advantageous small hit) ) Is obtained, or control for operating the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 is performed in the same or similar opened manner. At this time, the effect display device 1115 may be configured to perform an expected effect that allows the user to be aware of the possibility that an advantageous small hit has been obtained.

  Then, as a result of repeating such a game (a game that causes the passage of the game ball to the gate member 1134 and the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 1152, respectively) as a result of the first special symbol lottery. As a result, if the big hit (1/400) is finally obtained, the fluctuation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (FIG. 128: Step S402a), and the fluctuation time associated with the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the fluctuation timer. After that (FIG. 128: Step S410), the variation of the first special symbol will be started.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 148, when the timing t11 at which the fluctuation timer times up arrives, the fluctuation state of the first special symbol is ended by causing the stop symbol at the time of a big hit to appear. After the appearance of the stop symbol at the time of big hit, the pre-start interval period of the big hit game is generated, and the execution of the big hit game is started based on the passage of the pre-start interval period of the big hit game.

  In the first special symbol lottery according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 141, only the 15R hour short-time big hit is obtained as the type of big hit, so the above-mentioned round game is repeated 15 times. The jackpot game is considered to have ended at the time of the break. Then, after this, an end interval of the big hit game is generated, and when the end interval period of the big hit game is elapsed, the time saving function is operated to perform control of shifting to the time saving game state (timing t12).

  However, as described above, when the big hit game according to the lottery result (second big hit, second advantageous small hit, third advantageous small hit) on the second special symbol side, approximately 1,000 game balls are obtained. On the other hand, if the big hit game according to the lottery result (first big hit, first advantage small hit) on the first special symbol side is played, it is difficult to obtain a game ball or dozens Since only about a few game balls (a relatively smaller number of game balls than the second special symbol side) can be acquired, the big hit game ends in a relatively short period and the transition control to the time saving game state is possible. Will be done.

  Although this is also described above, in the first special symbol lottery, the first advantageous small hit is rarely obtained as a result of the first special symbol lottery. Similarly, when a big hit game is generated through the small hit game corresponding to the winning of the first advantageous small hit (based on the fact that the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156), the first advantageous small hit is also obtained. Regardless of the game state at the time of being played, the transition control to the time saving game state is performed by operating the time saving function when the end interval period of the big hit game has elapsed (timing t12).

  Also, as described above, in such a situation where the normal game should be played (normal game state), although it is an extremely rare event (1/4000), the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 1152. Rather than the result of the lottery according to, the specific result (long bridge time is selected) Even if a normal win is won), a big hit game is played with a probability of approximately 100% simply by advancing the game in accordance with a production instruction that right-handing should be performed.

  More specifically, when the game is advanced in accordance with a production instruction that right-handing should be performed, first, a prize is given to the second starting opening 1153, and the second special symbol lottery is put on hold. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the lottery (second special symbol lottery) on the side of the second starting opening 1153 can be played so that the big hit game can occur with a probability of about 100%. The functioning as the processing is described above. Therefore, when the winning process (second special symbol lottery) held in this way is digested, the big hit game will be played with a probability of about 100%.

  Here, in the above-mentioned winning process (second special symbol lottery), as shown in FIG. 141, as a result, any one of the second big hit, the second advantageous small hit, and the third advantageous small hit can be obtained. Becomes However, of these, since the transition control to the time saving game state is performed when the big hit game is performed depending on whether the second big hit or the second advantageous small hit is obtained (timing t12), the big hit The probability that the transition control to the time saving game state is performed when the game end interval period elapses is set to slightly exceed 50%.

  In addition, when the big hit game is performed in response to the third advantageous small hit being obtained as a result of the above-mentioned winning process (second special symbol lottery), the transition control to the time saving game state is not performed, and the above-mentioned The game is to be restarted from the situation where the normal game should be played (normal game state).

  In this way, when the normal game is being played, the gate member 1134 is used in addition to the case where a specific result (a big hit or an advantageous small hit) is obtained in the lottery according to the winning of the first starting opening 1152. Even if a specific result (ordinary hit in which a long bridging time is selected) is obtained in the judgment processing (ordinary judgment) according to passage to, a big hit game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. It becomes possible to play. That is, in this case, the ordinary determination can have a function equivalent to the lottery according to the winning of the first starting opening 1152.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, since the gate member 1134 is arranged as a passage opening in the path along which the game balls flow down to the first starting opening 1152, one The game ball is allowed to flow down so as to satisfy both the starting conditions of both the lottery corresponding to the winning of the first starting opening 1152 and the ordinary determination having the same function as the lottery. That is, in this case, the lottery can be executed without consuming two game balls for satisfying the execution condition of the two lottery having the same function. And in this case, even if it does not depend on one lottery, it is possible to generate a jackpot game as long as a specific result is obtained in the other lottery, which is different in type but has the same function as this Therefore, from the player's side, it is difficult to feel distrust even when it is difficult to obtain a specific result by one of the lottery, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during a period in which a big hit game is occurring (big hit game state), a new big hit game different from this is put in a special standby state. There will also be a lottery to decide whether or not you can do it. However, among the events that cause the big hit game to occur in the game situation where the normal game should be played, the event that is most likely to be the cause is that the big hit is obtained in the first special symbol lottery (1/400) . Then, when a big hit game occurs due to such an event (a big hit can be obtained in the first special symbol lottery), the big hit game is finished in a relatively short period of time, and the transition control to the time saving game state is performed. What is done is also described above.

  Therefore, normally, during the first big hit game after the game situation in which such a normal game should be performed is ended (timing t11 to t12), a new big hit game different from this is put in a special standby state. There is no such thing, the transition control to the first time saving game state after the game situation in which the normal game should be performed is completed, and that it is performed in the absence of the second special symbol lottery in the suspended state. (Timing t12).

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as one of its purposes, once it is possible to hold a predetermined number of random numbers for the second special symbol (probability processing), it is held For a few minutes, the big hit game can be continuously generated every time the big hit game is performed (every time the hold is digested) regardless of whether it is controlled to the normal game state or the time saving game state, It may provide a special game play. Then, in order to realize such a special game property, a lottery (second special symbol lottery) on the side of the second starting opening 1153 is made possible so that a big hit game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. It has also been described above that it functions as a process.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in a partially enlarged view in FIG. 148, the transition control to the first time saving game state after the game situation in which the normal game is to be finished is completed. When the timing t12 to be performed arrives, the second special symbol lottery in the suspended state basically does not exist through the following two initial privilege games, and than the time shortening game state that appears after that. (2) Random numbers for special symbols (probability processing) are provided so that a game can be easily held up to a predetermined number.

  That is, at the timing t12, the possibility that the second special symbol lottery exists as a suspended state is low, but the first special symbol lottery that is in the suspended state when the game situation where the normal game should be performed is It is likely that it exists. In the time saving game state, if such a hold situation (a situation where there is a hold only on the first special symbol lottery side) is realized, normally (as a result of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot game occurs with an extremely low probability. Unless otherwise), as shown in a partially enlarged view in FIG. 148, the time required for digesting the game according to the first special symbol lottery in the suspended state (variation time of the symbol etc.) and the game are digested. The winning process (second special symbol lottery) is suspended over two times, including the time required to complete the game according to the winning process (second special symbol lottery) that was newly put on hold It becomes possible to put it in a state, and by this, a relatively large number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) can be easily placed in a suspended state, and game playability can be realized (double as the first initial privilege game). Add-on game).

  On the other hand, when the time saving game state occurs while the above-mentioned special game property is provided, the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is suspended, as shown in a partially enlarged view in FIG. 148. It often already exists as a state. Therefore, even if the first special symbol lottery exists as a pending state, the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is digested earlier than this, and the small hit game corresponding to the winning of the advantageous small hit (rare In addition, a big hit game according to the winning of the big hit) will be generated. Then, as described above, since it is difficult to accept the accessory winning hole 1155 by the small hit game after the accessory winning hole 1155 is opened, basically, a relatively short time (the winning process ( New winning process (second special symbol lottery) can be put on hold only within the variation time of the symbol for one time according to the second special symbol lottery), and is held in comparison with the game situation described above. The game play which is hard to be in a state is provided.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in a partially enlarged view in FIG. 148, regarding the time required for the symbol fluctuation on the first special symbol lottery side in the time saving game state, (2) It is set so that a time longer than the time required for symbol fluctuation on the special symbol lottery side is easily selected. That is, in this case, at the time of the first transition to a state in which special game characteristics are provided (the situation in which only the first special symbol lottery side is held), such a relatively long time (first special symbol lottery side It becomes possible to provide the time required for the symbol variation), and thereby, the game performance that makes it possible to put a relatively large number of winning processes (the second special symbol lottery) on hold is realized (the second first privilege). Super addition game as a game).

  It should be noted that, in order to suitably generate such game property (super-addition game), regarding the symbol fluctuation on the first special symbol lottery side in the time saving game state, the number of the first special symbol lottery in the suspended state Regardless, it is desirable to set so that a time (expected value) longer than the time (expected value) selected when the symbol variation on the second special symbol lottery side is performed is easily selected.

  Incidentally, there may be a case where the first special symbol lottery does not exist as a suspended state at the time when the first transition to the state where the special game property is provided is made. However, in this case, the player first starts the symbol variation on the first special symbol lottery side by left-handing. Then, after that, the game is performed under the above-described two initial privilege games by playing the right winning process so that the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is put on hold.

  According to these configurations, when the first time saving game state occurs after the game situation in which the normal game is to be finished, a relatively large number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) can be put on hold. become able to. And, as long as the number of winning process (second special symbol lottery) held in this way, the big hit game is continued regardless of whether it is controlled to the normal game state or the time saving game state each time the hold is exhausted. It is possible to generate a special game play such as being generated.

That is, assuming that the second special symbol lottery for four times has been put on hold through the above-mentioned two initial privilege games, as shown in FIG. 148,
-If the second special symbol lottery in the earliest digestion order among those second special symbol lottery is digested, after the variable time of the symbols according to the second special symbol lottery elapses, normally, in the lottery The corresponding small hit game (timing t13 to t14) and the big hit game (timing t14 to t15) will be played sequentially.
-After that, when the second special symbol lottery with the quickest digestion order is digested in the second of those second special symbol lottery, after the variation time of the symbols according to the second special symbol lottery has passed (timing t15 ~ T16), normally, the small hit game (timing t16 to t17) and the big hit game (timing t17 to t18) according to the lottery are sequentially played,
・ Furthermore, if the second special symbol lottery with the quickest digestion order is digested in the third of those second special symbol lottery, after the variable time of the symbols according to the second special symbol lottery has passed (timing t18 to t19), normally, the small hit game (timing t19 to t20) and the big hit game (timing t20 to t21) corresponding to the lottery are sequentially played,
・ Furthermore, if the second special symbol lottery is the fourth in the second special symbol lottery, the second in the earliest in the digestion sequence (latest in the digestion sequence) is digested, the fluctuation of the symbol according to the second special symbol lottery. After a lapse of time (timing t21 to t22), normally, a small hit game (timing t22 to t23) and a big hit game (timing t23 to t24) corresponding to the lottery are sequentially played.

  In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the second special symbol lottery for four times is put on hold, each time the second special symbol lottery for four times is digested, they are digested. Regardless of the type of gaming state when playing (regardless of whether it is controlled to the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state), it is possible to continuously generate a big hit game (special gaming property). ).

  For example, in the first time saving game state (timing t12 to t13), if the second special symbol lottery of the earliest digestion order of the second special symbol lottery is digested, the third advantageous small hit will be obtained. At the timing t13 after the symbol variation according to the third advantageous small hit is performed, the control (steps S190, S210) concerning the small hit game according to the third advantageous small hit is started. . And in the small hit game corresponding to the third advantageous small hit, as shown in addition to FIG. 142 (d), on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a). As long as the game is continued (the right-handed game is continued) so that the state where the game balls exist (the winning waiting state) is maintained, the jackpot game occurs at a probability of approximately 100% at the timing t14.

  In this regard, at the timing t15 when the big hit game according to the third advantageous small hit is ended, control for generating the normal game state is performed. However, at the time when this timing t15 arrives, of the four second special symbol lottery held in the above-mentioned two initial privilege games, the second special symbol lottery for three times is still left in the suspended state. Therefore, regardless of the game state, the second special symbol lottery of the earliest digestion order among the second special symbol lottery for three times (the second special symbol lottery for the four times put on hold through the first bonus game) The second special symbol lottery which is the second fastest in the digestion order is only digested, and it is possible to continuously generate the second jackpot game with a probability of approximately 100%.

  Regarding the time required to change the symbols according to the second special symbol lottery in the normal gaming state, in addition to being able to generate a jackpot game with a probability of approximately 100% (the result of the game In addition to that has been decided), because there is no game / directiveness that can newly put the second special symbol lottery on hold, regardless of the number of second special symbol lottery held It is desirable to select the shortest time as compared with the time required for the symbol variation.

  More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 148, at the timing t15, the second special symbol lottery having the earliest digestion order among the second special symbol lottery for three times (4 was put on hold through the first bonus game) Even if the second special symbol lottery, which is the second fastest in the second special symbol lottery of the batch, is digested, the third advantageous small hit will be obtained, and depending on the third advantageous small jackpot. At the timing t16 after the symbol variation is performed, the control (steps S190, S210) for the small hit game according to the third advantageous small hit is started. And similarly, in the small hitting game corresponding to the third advantageous small hitting, as shown in FIG. 142 (d), the upper surface (specific rotation) of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) is also shown. As long as the game (the right-handed game is continued) is maintained so that the state where the game balls are present in the motion area (the winning waiting state) is maintained, the jackpot game occurs with a probability of approximately 100% at the timing t17. It will be.

  In this respect, also at the timing t18 when the big hit game according to the third advantageous small hit is ended, the control for generating the normal game state is performed. However, even when this timing t18 arrives, the second special symbol lottery for two times is still in the reserved state among the second special symbol lottery for four times that have been put on hold through the above-mentioned two initial privilege games. Because it is left as, regardless of the game state, the second special symbol lottery of the earliest digestion of the second special symbol lottery for two times (the second for the four times put on hold through the first award game Only in the third special symbol lottery, the second special symbol lottery in which the digestion order is quick is digested, and it is possible to continuously generate the third big hit game with a probability of approximately 100%.

  More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 148, at the timing t18, the second special symbol lottery having the earliest digestion order out of the second special symbol lottery for two times (4 was put on hold through the first bonus game) If the third special symbol lottery that has the quickest digestion order among the second special symbol lottery of the number of times is digested, the above-mentioned second advantageous small hit will be obtained, and it will correspond to the second advantageous small hit. At the timing t19 after the symbol variation is performed, the control (steps S190, S210) concerning the small hit game according to the second advantageous small hit is started. Even in the small hit game corresponding to the second advantageous small hit, as shown in FIG. 142 (d), the upper surface of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door 1221a) (specific rolling) As long as the game (continue the right-handed game) is maintained so that the game ball exists in the area) (waiting state for winning), the jackpot game will occur at a probability of approximately 100% at the timing t20. Becomes

  At this point, at the timing t21 when the big hit game according to the second advantageous small hit is ended, control for generating a time saving game state is performed. In other words, in this case, as a result of the ordinary judgment, the bridging time longer than the above-mentioned prize winning threshold time is surely selected, but in the case where such a special game property is provided, a time saving game state occurs. Can function as a chance state in which the number of consecutive big hit games can be increased (the second special symbol lottery can be newly put on hold), and the enjoyment of the game can be improved. become.

  However, as described above, in the main control MPU4100a according to this embodiment, each time the time saving game state occurs according to the result of any of the winning process (the second special symbol lottery) in the pending state, the winning process (second Special symbol lottery) will be added as a new hold state, and the control is made to have a variation in the number added.

  That is, at the timing t21, the second special symbol lottery for one time among the second special symbol lottery for four times that has been put on hold through the above-described two initial privilege games is still left as a hold state. Therefore, the time saving game state that occurs at the timing t21 is the second special symbol lottery in the holding state (the second in the slowest digestion order among the four second special symbol lottery held in the holding state through the first privilege game) It is to be continued only during the period in which the symbol changes for one time according to the special symbol lottery).

  Therefore, in such a chance state (time saving game state), the confirmation process (steps S402, S404) through the setting process (steps S402, S404) that takes a long or short time to change the symbol according to the second special symbol lottery in the time saving game state. It is possible to accept two or more game balls in the second starting port 1153 between the end of the second special symbol lottery) and the start of the big hit game (it is possible to add two big hit games). ), In spite of being in the time saving game state, one game ball cannot be accepted in the second starting port 1153 between the time when the winning process (second special symbol lottery) is exhausted and the big hit game is started. It is possible to do so.

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 148, at the timing t21, only one second special symbol lottery is left as a hold state (of the four second special symbol lottery held in the hold state through the first privilege game) If the second special symbol lottery of the slowest digestion order of) is digested, the jackpot game occurs as the variation time, despite the occurrence of a time saving game state in which special game play is provided. In the meantime, a short fluctuation time (a disadvantageous fluctuation time in which the expected value of acceptance is less than 0.5) in which one game ball is not accepted in the second starting port 1153 is selected.

  Then, at the timing t22 after the symbol variation having the short variation time is performed, the control (steps S190, S210) for the small hit game is started. Although the time saving function operates even during the period when the small hit game is performed, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, from the time when the small hit game is started until the end (the big hit game is started. As described above, it is difficult to enter the ball into the second starting opening 1153 (before it is played). Therefore, at the timing t23, the small hitting game ends and the big hitting game occurs in the absence of the winning process (second special symbol lottery) that is held.

  That is, in this case, even at the timing t24 when the big hit game thus generated is ended, basically, there is no winning process (second special symbol lottery) that is put on hold. Therefore, at this timing t24, it is extremely important for the player which of the normal gaming state and the time saving gaming state occurs.

  For example, at the timing t24, the time saving game state (the result of the second special symbol lottery having the slowest digestion order among the second special symbol lottery for the four times held during the first bonus game is a big hit, or the second advantageous small hit. ) Has occurred, as shown in the upper side of FIG. 148, there is no winning process (second special symbol lottery) that is in the hold state, and it is in the hold state. Since this is the case where the first special symbol lottery is in a game situation in which the lottery is exhausted, it becomes possible to play the game under the above-described two initial privilege games. That is, in this case, a relatively large number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) can be put on hold, and the number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) held in this way can be held. It is possible to regenerate a special game property such that a big hit game can be continuously generated regardless of whether it is controlled to a normal game state or a time saving game state each time it is digested.

  Moreover, at timing t24, since there is no winning process (second special symbol lottery) that is in the hold state, a maximum of four winning processes (second special symbol lottery) are newly placed in the hold state. It is possible. That is, in this case, as the number of winning processes (second special symbol lottery) left as a holding state decreases, such a time saving game state (a state where a holding opportunity of the winning lottery is obtained) is controlled. As the value (reversal) is increased, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game when the situation becomes disadvantageous to the player.

  That is, now, assuming that a large number of second special symbol lottery are put on hold through the above-mentioned two initial bonus games, as shown in FIG. 148, the earliest in the digestion order of those second special symbol lottery. When the two special symbol lottery is digested, after the variation time of the symbol according to the second special symbol lottery elapses, usually, the small hit game (timing t25 ~ t26) according to the lottery, and the big hit game ( Timing t26-) is sequentially performed.

  On the other hand, at the timing t24, the normal game state (the result of the second special symbol lottery that is the slowest to be digested among the four second special symbol lottery held for the first time through the special bonus game is the third advantageous small hit. When a certain) occurs, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 148, there is no winning process (second special symbol lottery) that is in the hold state, and the winning process (second This is the case where the special symbol lottery) is in a game situation in which it cannot be newly put on hold, and therefore, the situation is to be redone from the situation where the above-mentioned normal game should be performed (normal game state).

  If the second advantageous small hit or the third advantageous small hit is obtained as a result of the winning process (the second special symbol lottery) being held, the small hit game corresponding to the advantageous small hit, As also shown in FIG. 142 (d), the state where the game ball exists on the upper surface (specific rolling area) of the accessory winning opening / closing member 1221 (door portion 1221a) (the winning waiting state) is maintained. As long as the game is played (the right-handed game is continued) as described above, the jackpot game can be generated with a probability of approximately 100%. After the big hit game is played, a game state corresponding to the type of advantageous small hit occurs.

  However, in the small hit game according to the advantageous small hit, if the right-handed game is not continued and the game ball is not accepted in the V winning opening 1156, the big hit game does not occur and the above winning process (second special The next lottery will be digested while the game state at the time when the symbol lottery) is digested is maintained.

  By the way, as described above, the jackpot game according to the result of the second special symbol lottery is performed over a relatively long period such that approximately 1000 prizes can be obtained. Therefore, each jackpot game (timing t14 to t15, timing t17 to t18, timing t20 to t21, timing t23 to t24) corresponding to the second special symbol lottery for four times that have been put on hold through the above-described two initial privilege games. In, since a large number of game balls heading for the special winning opening 1154 pass through the gate member 1134 so that approximately 1000 prizes are produced, a new big hit game different from this is specially waited for. The chances of being able to enter a state are relatively high.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the second special symbol lottery is made to function as a winning process that enables a game so that a big hit game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. Therefore, if acceptance into the second starting port 1153 is permitted during the period when the big hit game is being played, another new big hit game can be put into a special standby state.

  In this regard, in the main control MPU 4100a according to this embodiment, when many game balls heading for the special winning opening 1154 pass through the gate member 1134 during the period when the big hit game is being executed, the main member MPU 4100a The determination process (ordinary determination) according to passage is performed as a lottery as to whether or not a new big hit game different from the big hit game in execution can be put in a special standby state. Then, when it is decided to put another new big hit game in a special standby state during the period when the big hit game is being performed (in the case of a normal hit in which a long bridging time is selected as a result of the normal judgment) In the case of winning), in parallel with the processing (step S14) related to the execution of the big hit game, by performing the processing (step S14) of operating the starting door member 1214 for a long bridging time, to the second starting opening 1153. To be acceptable.

  According to such a configuration, every time a game ball is shot toward the game area during the period when the big hit game is played, an opportunity can be obtained by the shot game ball (big winning opening 1154). And a chance to execute a lottery as to whether or not a new jackpot game can be put into a special standby state. Therefore, the value of the game for launching the game balls during the period when the big hit game is played can be increased, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

  In particular, regarding the lottery as to whether or not a new big hit game can be put into a special standby state, it is possible to obtain an execution opportunity even between rounds in the big hit game, so that game is conventionally used. Even during the round in the big hit game in which the decrease in the interest of the game is unavoidable, the decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed by increasing the game value required for launching the game ball.

  Here, when it is decided to put another new big hit game in the special standby state during the period when the big hit game is being played, control related to opening of the special winning opening 1154 is performed. Among them, it is possible to perform an effect that prompts the player to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 1153 that is newly opened for a long bridging time. However, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a structure in which the game ball flowing down the downward flow path to the special winning opening 1154 is received in the second starting opening 1153 operated by the starting door member 1214. Since it is present (see FIG. 98), it is possible to put another new big hit game in a special standby state by simply continuing the game (right hitting) to digest the big hit game as usual.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first starting port 1152 is provided so that only the game ball flowing down the left flow path when the left hit is performed on the game area 1100 can be accepted. I decided to provide it. However, with respect to the first starting port 1152, it is arranged at a position where a game ball flowing down the right flow path when a right hit is performed can also be received, or on the left flow path side and the right flow path side. You may arrange | position each, respectively. According to such a configuration, when the right-handed game is performed while the above-mentioned special game situation is provided, the game ball is also received in the first starting opening 1152, and thus the first starting is performed. The holding state of the lottery (first special symbol lottery) on the mouth 1152 side can be preferably maintained. That is, in this case, when the suspension of the second special symbol lottery is interrupted in the time saving game state, it is possible to smoothly shift to the game under the above-described two first privilege games.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a normal game is being played, a specific result (a big hit, an advantageous small hit) is obtained by a lottery according to a winning in the first starting opening 1152. In addition to the above case, even when a specific result (ordinary hit in which a long bridging time is selected) is obtained in the judgment process (ordinary judgment) according to passage to the gate member 1134, approximately 100% It is possible to play so that a big hit game can occur with a probability of. In view of such a configuration, the first starting opening 1152 and the game (first special symbol lottery) corresponding to the winning of the first starting opening 1152 do not necessarily have to be provided. That is, in this case, a specific result (ordinary hit when a long bridging time is selected) is determined by the judgment processing (ordinary judgment) according to passage to the gate member 1134, because the processing related to the first special symbol lottery is omitted. It is now possible to set the probability of being obtained relatively high, so that during the period when the big hit game is being played, a new big hit game other than this is put in a special standby state. Will be determined more frequently.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the winning process of the lottery (the second special symbol lottery) on the side of the second starting opening 1153 is made possible so that the big hit game can occur with a probability of approximately 100%. When the second special symbol lottery is performed, either the big hit or the advantage small hit is surely obtained (see FIG. 141 (a)). However, since it may be possible that there is a request that a loss that does not correspond to either a big hit or an advantage small hit should be included as a condition related to the game design, for example, a probability value that a big hit is obtained, or that The loss may be obtained with the following probability value. That is, even when the loss is obtained with such an extremely low probability (for example, 1/400), when the second special symbol lottery is performed, either the big hit or the advantageous small hit is about 100. %, The game playability of the pachinko machine 1 according to the above embodiment can be suitably realized.

  In addition, as a probability (approximately 100%) that either a big hit or an advantageous small hit is obtained, for example, a probability of 99% or more (more preferably, 100% when rounded to one decimal place when displayed as a percentage) It is desirable to appropriately set the game playability in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment.

  In addition, if the probability of winning a small win is set to a value of about 100%, the big win may not necessarily be a result of the lottery.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the time saving game state, when a normal hit is obtained as a result of the determination process (ordinary determination) according to the passage to the gate member 1134, from the above prize winning threshold time Although the long bridging time is always selected, the long bridging time may be selected with a predetermined probability. Also, the winning probability of the normal win may be changed appropriately, and the normal win may be always won each time the normal determination is made.

  In addition, it is desirable to set the variation time of the symbol according to the normal determination as a time shorter than the interval of firing the game balls (0.6 seconds). In particular, if you set the variation time of the symbol according to the ordinary judgment when in the normal game state as a time shorter than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, the ordinary judgment reaches the pending upper limit. Since such a situation is suppressed, it becomes possible to make a normal determination each time the game ball is passed through the gate member 1134. That is, in this case, it is possible to increase the frequency of determining that a new big hit game different from this is put into a special standby state during the period when the big hit game is being played.

  In addition, each time the game ball passes through the gate member 1134, in order to make it possible to execute the normal judgment more reliably, the total of the variation time of the symbol according to the normal judgment and the bridging time shorter than the above prize winning threshold time It is desirable to set the time as a time shorter than the interval between game ball firings (0.6 seconds). In other words, in this case, as a result of the normal determination, until the bridging time longer than the above-mentioned prize-winning threshold time is selected, the normal determination can be performed as many as the number of the game balls that have been fired, so it is a big hit. It becomes possible to maximize the frequency at which it is decided to put another new big hit game in the special standby state during the period in which the game is being played.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the big hit game is started when the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156. However, advantageous control is performed when the game ball is received in the V winning opening 1156. It may be performed as long as it is performed, and does not necessarily have to start the big hit game. For example, based on the fact that, while a jackpot game is being played, a chance to enter the prize winning slot 1155 is given, and the game ball entered in the prize winning slot 1155 is accepted in the V winning slot 1156. Alternatively, a process of changing the winning probability of the jackpot to a higher value or the like may be performed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the small hit game is performed according to the result of the second special symbol lottery, the overflow winning is positively generated so that the winning game ball can be won in the small hit game. It becomes possible to routinely enter game balls in a quantity exceeding the upper limit value (maximum of 10) into the internal area of the character prize winning opening 1155. With such excellent winning performance, each of the above-mentioned small hits Even if the game ball is always guided to the V winning opening 1156 due to restrictions on the game, the machine lottery probability can be set lower than about 1/10. According to such a configuration, even if the result of the first special symbol lottery does not necessarily include a small hit, it is desirable in that the machine lottery probability set to be lower than about 1/10 can be realized. However, if a small hit is included in the result of the first special symbol lottery, a probability value lower than 1/10 only by the machine lottery probability when the small hit game is performed according to the result of the second special symbol lottery. Does not necessarily have to be realized, and a probability value lower than 1/10 may be realized by combining with the mechanical lottery probability when the small hit game is performed according to the result of the first special symbol lottery. .. That is, in this case, the machine lottery probability when the small hit game is performed according to the result of the two special symbol lottery can be set higher than approximately 1/10.

[Re-explanation of the internal area of the prize winning slot 1155]
The game ball T received in the accessory winning hole 1155 is sent to the upper opening 1238b side which is opened in the peripheral wall portion 1238a covering the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236, and when the game ball T reaches the upper opening 1238b, the rotating body is rotated. When the receiving portion 1236a of the 1236 is located at the accommodation position facing upward, the game ball T is accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 through the upper opening 1238b, and in this state, the rotating body 1236 rotates to receive. When the part 1236a is rotated to the discharge position facing the right side, the game ball T is received from the receiving part 1236a through the right part opening 1238c to the V winning opening 1156, which is different from the bonus winning opening 1155 (big hit game). ) Is given, the player can be enjoyed by the given privilege, and the V winning opening 115 is received through the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. When the game ball T is accepted to the player, the privilege is granted, and thus the player is harassed and pounding depending on whether or not the game ball T accepted in the prize winning slot 1155 is accommodated in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. It is possible to increase the expectation for accepting the game ball T to the V winning opening 1156 and prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

  This rotation of the rotating body 1236 moves the plunger 1232a of the V winning solenoid 1232 forward and backward, and the entire drive gear member 1233 is shrunk by the engagement portion 1233d of the drive gear member 1233 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1232a. The driven gear 1234a of the driven gear member 1234, which is rotated around 1233a and meshes with the driving gear 1233c formed at the tip of the extending portion 1233b of the driving gear member 1233, rotates in the opposite direction to the driving gear member 1233. When the driven gear member 1234 rotates, the rotary body 1236 rotates between the storage position and the discharge position. As a result, the rotating speed of the rotating body 1236 becomes faster than that in the case of rotating with a motor like a conventional pachinko machine, so that the player can play the game ball T on the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Even if an attempt is made to set the timing for hitting the game ball T so that is stored, it is possible to make the timing difficult. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to store the game ball T in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, and thus it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball T to be received in the V winning opening 1156, and the bonus due to being received in the V winning opening 1156. It is possible to suppress the increase in the burden on the game hall side by reducing the number of grants.

  Further, since the pitch diameter of the driven gear 1234a is made smaller than the pitch diameter of the drive gear 1233c, the rotation angle of the driven gear 1234a (rotating body 1236) should be larger than the rotation angle of the drive gear 1233c. Therefore, compared with the case where the drive gear 1233c and the driven gear 1234a have the same pitch diameter, the rotation speed of the rotating body 1236 can be increased. Therefore, since the rotation speed of the rotating body 1236 becomes faster, even if the player tries to set the timing of driving the game ball T so that the game ball T is housed in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the timing is set. Can be difficult.

  Further, on the rear side of the upper opening 1238b, since the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is provided with the losing hole 1230c for discharging the game ball T flowing down from the accessory winning hole 1155 to the rotating body 1236 when it is not in the storage position. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from staying between the rotating body 1236 and the winning prize hole 1155. Therefore, even if the game ball T is intruded into the winning a prize hole 1155 by some illegal act, if the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is not in the storage position, the game ball T is illegally stored in the receiving portion 1236a. It is possible to prevent the privilege from being fraudulently provided and reduce the burden on the gaming hall side due to the fraudulent activity. Particularly, in the present embodiment, in a normal state in which the accessory winning hole 1155 is unacceptable, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is rotated to the V winning opening 1156 side which coincides with the right opening 1238c. Therefore, even if an illegal game ball T is intruded into the winning a prize hole 1155, it is possible to recognize by a glance that the game ball T cannot be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. It is possible to prevent the act from being hesitated and fraudulent.

  Further, as described above, since the rotating body 1236 rotates faster than before, even if the player tries to illegally receive the game ball T in the V winning opening 1156 (the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236), the rotating body 1236 rotates faster. By showing the moving rotating body 1236, it is possible to make it apparent that it is difficult to make the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 receive the illegal game ball T, and the cheating is stopped and the cheating is performed. The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against the above can be provided. In addition, since it is possible to prevent fraud, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

  Further, since the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 is covered with the peripheral wall portion 1238a, when the receiving portion 1236a opened to the outer peripheral side is rotated from the storage position to the release position, the game ball T stored in the receiving portion 1236a. Even if the centrifugal force due to the rotation is applied to the receiving portion 1236a, the outer peripheral side of the receiving portion 1236a is closed by the peripheral wall portion 1238a between the accommodation position and the discharging position. It is possible to prevent the game ball T from jumping out, and it is possible to reliably move the game ball T to the discharge position. Moreover, since the game ball T can be prevented from jumping out from the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 being rotated by the peripheral wall portion 1238a, the rotating speed of the rotating body 1236 can be further increased, and the rotation can be improved. The pachinko machine 1 that makes it difficult to set the timing of the body 1236 and reliably achieves the above-described operational effects can be provided.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the game state that changes when the game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 (the game ball T to the first starting port 1152 or the second starting port 1153). (Depending on the result of the special lottery that is drawn by the acceptance), the prize winning opening opening / closing member 1221 of the prize winning opening unit 1220A of the accessory unit 1220 is movable, and the prize winning opening 1155 can receive the game ball T. In this state, when the game balls T are accepted into the winning a prize hole 1155, benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of the playing balls T are given, and thus the gaming ball T aiming at the winning a prize hole 1155 for the player. You can entertain yourself by performing the typing operation of. When the game ball T hit in the game area 1100 aiming at the accessory winning hole 1155 is accepted by the prize winning opening 1155, a privilege is granted, and the player is further enjoyed by the privilege granted. You can The game ball T received in the accessory winning hole 1155 is guided to the upper opening 1238b formed on the peripheral wall portion 1238a that covers the outer periphery of the rotating body 1236 through the upper guiding portion 1238e of the V winning hole unit 1220B. , And contacts the rotating body 1236 through the upper opening 1238b. At this time, if the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 matches the upper opening 1238b, the game ball T passing through the upper opening 1238b will be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Then, the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a rotates together with the receiving portion 1236a while being received by the receiving portion 1236a as the rotating body 1236 rotates, and when the receiving portion 1236a matches the right opening 1238c, From the receiving portion 1236a through the right opening 1238c to the right guiding portion 1238f, the right guiding portion 1238f guides the V winning opening 1156 to receive a bonus such as a jackpot game. It is possible to entertain the player further, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. Since this rotating body 1236 is provided with only one receiving portion 1236a, compared to the case where a rotating body is provided with a plurality of receiving portions as in a conventional pachinko machine, there is a loss that is not guided to the V winning opening 1156. Since the receiving portion 1236a does not exist, the pachinko machine 1 makes it easy to aim at the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 at first glance even for a beginner or a player who is unfamiliar with the driving operation of the game ball T. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played, and the game on the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed, suppressing the player's interest. can do.

  Further, since only one receiving portion 1236a for receiving the game ball T of the rotating body 1236 is provided, the rotating body 1236 of the rotating body 1236 can be compared with the conventional case where the rotating body is provided with a plurality of receiving portions. The outer diameter can be reduced, and it becomes possible to easily secure a space for arranging the rotating body 1236 in the game area 1100, and the rotating body 1236 can be placed in an effective place by increasing the degree of freedom of arrangement of the rotating body 1236. Can be placed. At this time, since the rotator 1236 is rotated around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, the circular end surface of the rotator 1236 faces the front (player side), and the outer diameter of the rotator 1236 is changed. Even if it is smaller than the conventional one, it is possible to prevent the rotating body 1236 (the receiving portion 1236a) from being difficult to see, and it is possible to prevent the entertaining game with the rotating body 1236 from deteriorating the interest.

  Further, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is sized so that only the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 1236 is open and can receive only one game ball T, and the second discharge path 1230e is provided behind the upper opening 1238b. With the hole 1230c communicating with the hole 1230a, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is aligned with the upper opening 1238b. The game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a is in contact with another game ball T even if another game ball T is in contact with from above the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a. It is possible to suppress falling off from the receiving portion 1236a due to the impact, and the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a is surely moved to the V winning opening 1156 side by the rotation of the rotating body 1236. It can be sent.

  Further, since the rear guide hole 1230e communicating with the upper guide portion 1238e and the second discharge passage 1230e is provided on the rear side of the upper opening 1238b, the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 does not match the upper opening 1238b. Even if the game ball T flows down from the accessory winning hole 1155 side and comes into contact with the outer circumference of the rotating body 1236 via the upper opening 1238b, it can be discharged to the second discharging path 1230e through the rear side hole 1230c. . On the other hand, while the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 coincides with the upper opening 1238b and the game ball T has already been received by the receiving portion 1236a, another game ball T flows down from the role winning port 1155 side. , Even if the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a through the upper opening 1238b comes into contact with the game ball T from above, another game ball T coming from behind is discharged to the second discharge path 1230e through the rear side hole 1230c. can do. Therefore, even when a plurality of game balls T are received in the winning a prize slot 1155, only one game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 and the remaining game balls T are discharged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large number of gaming balls T from being received in the V winning opening 1156 in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Since one of the plurality of game balls T received in the prize winning opening 1155 is received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 and is received in the V winning opening 1156, a privilege is given, so that the rotating body 1236. Even if there is a game ball T which is not received by the receiving portion 1236a and is discharged from the loss hole 1230c, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel lost, and to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. You can

  In addition, since the game ball T that could not be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is discharged to the rear side of the rotating body 1236 from the loss hole 1230c, the game that cannot be received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236. Compared with the case where the ball T is discharged through at least one of the right and left sides of the rotating body 1236, the size of the V winning opening unit 1220B including the rotating body 1236 in front view can be reduced. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging the rotating body 1236 in the game area 1100 is increased, so that the rotating body 1236 can be arranged in an effective place in the game area 1100, and the rotating body 1236 can be easily seen from the player side. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game by the rotating body 1236 from being enjoyed and prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

  Further, the center of the upper opening 1238b is formed so as to be slightly rearward of the center of the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 that receives the game ball T, and the center of the game ball T that is received by the receiving portion 1236a. Since another game ball T coming from behind will come into contact with the position slightly rearward, the upper mouth through the upper guiding part 1238e while the game ball T is being received by the receiving part 1236a of the rotating body 1236. When another game ball T from 1238b abuts on the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a from above, another game ball T abutting from above is guided to the rear with the loss hole 1230c. Therefore, another game ball T which came later can be surely discharged downward from the loss hole 1230c through the second discharge path 1230e.

  In addition, since the game ball T coming from behind comes into contact with the position slightly rearward of the center of the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the game received by the receiving portion 1236a. A force that pushes the ball T toward the front side on the side opposite to the losing hole 1230c is applied, and it is difficult for the ball T to drop toward the losing hole 1230c side and the state received by the receiving portion 1236a can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged because the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 is dropped and there is no opportunity to be received by the V winning opening 1156. The game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a can be surely received in the V winning opening 1156, and it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and from having less interest.

  Further, in the rotating body 1236, on the front surface side (inside) of the rear wall of the receiving portion 1236a, an inclined portion 1236b which is inclined obliquely toward the rear as it goes upward (away from the rotation center) is provided. Along with forming the center of the upper opening 1238b so as to be slightly behind the center of the receiving portion 1236a for receiving the game ball T, the game ball T flowing down through the upper opening 1238b contacts the inclined portion 1236b. Therefore, when the game ball T flows down from the upper opening 1238b in a state where the game ball T is not received by the receiving portion 1236a, the game ball T comes into contact with the inclined portion 1236 and the game ball T is caused by the inclined portion 1236b. Can be guided forward to be easily received in the receiving portion 1236a. When the game ball T is received by the receiving portion 1236a, the game ball T first comes into contact with the inclined portion 1236b and abuts on the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a, so that the impact acting on the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a is relaxed. Since the rotating body 1236 can be made less likely to be damaged, and the flow velocity of the game ball T can be attenuated and brought into contact with the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a, the game can be performed at the bottom of the receiving portion 1236a. The ball T can be made less likely to bounce, and the game ball T can be reliably received by the receiving portion 1236a.

  Further, since the upper guiding portion 1238e is bent in a crank shape, it is possible to reduce the flow velocity of the game ball T guided by the upper guiding portion 1238e. Therefore, even if another game ball T that has flowed down the upper guide portion 1238e comes into contact with the game ball T received in the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236, the flow-down speed by flowing down the upper guide portion 1238e. Since it is dampened, the impact due to the contact with the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a of the rotating body 1236 becomes small, and the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a jumps up from the receiving portion 1236a. It is possible to make it difficult, and it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball T received by the receiving portion 1236a to fall off from the receiving portion 1236a.

  Furthermore, since the upper guiding portion 1238e is bent in a crank shape and the flowing speed of the gaming ball T can be attenuated by the upper guiding portion 1238e, the gaming ball T received in the accessory winning hole 1155 is guided upwards. Even if the portion 1238e flows down and comes into contact with (abuts on) the rotating body 1236 (including the receiving portion 1236a) from the upper opening 1238b, the impact acting on the rotating body 1236 can be reduced, and the game ball T abuts. It is possible to prevent the rotating body 1236 from being easily damaged by the impact due to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being frustrated and deteriorating the interest of the game due to the interruption of the game due to the damage of the rotating body 1236, and to suppress the decline of the interest of the player. You can

  Further, in order to receive the game ball T into the V winning opening 1156 via the rotating body 1236, it is necessary to open the accessory winning opening opening / closing member 1221 so that the accessory winning opening 1155 can be received. It is possible to limit the opportunities for allowing the ball T to be accepted into the V winning opening 1156 (the accessory winning opening 1155), and to give a premium feeling to the V winning opening 1156 and the like. Therefore, when the winning a prize hole 1155 becomes acceptable according to the game state, there is an opportunity to make the V winning hole 1156 accept the game ball T, so that the winning a prize hole 1155, the rotating body 1236, and the V winning hole 1156. It is possible to draw the player's attention to, etc., and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for accepting the game ball T into the V winning opening 1156, and at the same time, the player hits the game ball T aiming at the accessory winning opening 1155. It is possible to positively perform the operation, and it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and the interest in the game from being lowered.

[Re-explanation of the second starting port 1153 and the starting port door member 1214]
Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the variable starting opening unit 1210, the game ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 arranged on the right end side by extending to the left and right with the slider portion 1214g of the starting opening door member 1214. The heights of the possible first guide portion 1214a, second guide portion 1214b, and third guide portion 1214c are made different, and then the slider portion 1214g of the starting opening door member 1214 on the left side of the second starting opening 1153. A starting opening solenoid 1215 is attached to the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212 so that the plunger 1215a moves forward and backward on the left and right sides of the second starting opening 1153 on the upper side and the rear side of the first guiding portion 1214a and the second guiding portion 1214b. The game ball T is driven into the game area 1100 by the link member 1216 below the starting opening solenoid 1215. A plunger 1215a that is movable according to a changing game state (according to a normal determination result selected by the game ball T passing through the gate member 1134) is supported by a lower case 1211 so as to be slidable back and forth. Since the starting opening door member 1214 is transmitted to the starting opening door member 1214 and the starting opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth, the front and rear and vertical dimensions of the mechanism (variable starting opening unit 1210) for sliding the starting opening door member 1214. Can be made smaller than the conventional one. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the installation space for providing the variable starter unit 1210 having the starter door member 1214 that slides back and forth according to the game state, and thus the starter door that slides back and forth in the game area 1100. The degree of freedom in arranging the member 1214 can be increased, and by arranging the starting opening door member 1214 in a place that could not be arranged in the conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to greatly change the atmosphere in the game area 1100. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power to the player who strongly attracts the interest of the player and wants to be selected as a pachinko machine for playing can be provided.

  Further, as described above, the installation space for providing the variable starting opening unit 1210 can be reduced, and even if the variable starting opening unit 1210 having the starting opening door member 1210 is provided, the decorative body, the movable decorative body, Also, since it is possible to equip the pachinko machine 1 with other members without causing pressure on other members such as accessory parts, it is possible to sufficiently exert the decorative effect and the effect of the other members. Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and enhance the appealing power to the player.

  Further, the second starting port 1153 is disposed on the right end side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, and the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion that extend to the left and right of the starting port door member 1214. Since the game ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 by 1214c, when the starting opening door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the first guide of the starting opening door member 1214 is provided. When the game ball T flows down onto the part 1214a, the game ball T rolls rightward on the first guide part 1214a, the second guide part 1214b and the third guide part 1214c and is received by the second starting port 1153. This means that the game ball T rolls toward the second starting opening 1153 on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c. It can cause increased expectations for acceptance into the second start hole 1153 with respect to the technique's interest and to entertain the player can be suppressed. At this time, when the starting opening door member 1214 that slides back and forth slides forward, the game ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 by the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c. Since the function of the starting opening door member 1214 is opposite to that of the variable receiving port (variable winning port) of the conventional pachinko machine, a strong impact can be given to a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal can be obtained.

  In addition, the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c of the starting opening door member 1214 are slid forward and projected into the game area 1100 in accordance with the game state. When the game ball T flows down onto the portion 1214a, the game ball T can be guided to the right end portion side, and therefore rolls over the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c extending left and right. The movement of the moving game ball T can be shown to the player, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T rolling on the first guide portion 1214a, the second guide portion 1214b, and the third guide portion 1214c. It is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing.

  Furthermore, when the plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215 is moved back and forth according to the game state, the engaging portion 1216c of the link member 1216 engaged with the tip of the plunger 1215a moves left and right as the plunger 1215a moves forward and backward. As it moves, it revolves around an axis extending vertically around the body portion 1216a, and the body portion 1216a also extends vertically through the first piece 1216b connecting the engaging portion 1216c and the body portion 1216a. It will rotate around the axis. The connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d, which extends from the body portion 1216a at a right angle to the first piece 1216b, is fitted and connected to the connecting pin 1214h protruding from the slider portion 1214g of the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, when the body portion 1216a rotates, the connecting hole 1216e at the tip of the second piece 1216d revolves around an axis extending vertically, and the revolving connection hole 1216e causes the connecting pin 1214h and the slider portion 1214g to pass. As a result, the starting opening door member 1214 slides back and forth. Therefore, it is possible to transmit the forward / backward movement of the plunger 1215a of the starting opening solenoid 1215 to surely slide the starting opening door member 1214 back and forth, and to certainly embody the pachinko machine 1 capable of achieving the above-described effects. be able to.

  The second piece 1216d of the link member 1216 extends to the slider portion 1214g below the starting opening solenoid 1215 of the starting opening door member 1214. Since the length is shorter than in the conventional case, the starting opening door member is relatively small. The slide range before and after 1214 can be narrowed, and the front and rear dimensions can be made smaller than in the conventional case. Further, since the link member 1216 is rotated around the vertically extending axis, the vertical dimension is smaller than that in the conventional case where the link member 1216 is rotated around the horizontally extending axis. can do. Therefore, the mechanism for sliding the starting opening door member 1214 back and forth (variable starting opening unit 1210) can be made smaller than the conventional one, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be realized. it can.

  Further, since the game ball T received in the second starting port 1153 can be discharged downward from the lower side of the lower case 1211 via the ball guiding portion 1211a and the passage hole 1211b, the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212. Compared with the case where it is guided and released to the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, a passage member or the like for receiving the game ball T received in the second starting opening 1153 is provided on the rear side. There is no need, and it is possible to easily secure a space on the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212. Therefore, it is easy to secure a space for arranging other members such as a decorative body, a movable decorative body, and accessory on the rear side of the lower case 1211 and the upper case 1212, that is, on the rear side of the variable starting opening unit 1210. It is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game area 1100, even when the starting opening door member 1214 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 is in the unacceptable position retracted rearward, the second starting opening 1153 is set in the playing area 1100. Since the second starting opening 1153 is not always closed while being left open, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball T can be received in the second starting opening 1153. The user's interest can be strongly attracted to the second starting port 1153. Therefore, since the second starting port 1153 is always open, it is possible to direct the player to the second starting port 1153 regardless of the movement (sliding) of the starting port door member 1214. With respect to the second starting opening 1153, it is possible to make the player feel an expectation for receiving the game ball T into the second starting opening 1153, and to make it less likely to get tired. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and reduce the interest in the game because it is possible to perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at.

  Further, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth, even if the starting opening door member 1214 is located at any of the reception-possible position that projects forward and the unacceptable position that retracts rearward, When viewed from the front, it looks the same, which makes it difficult for the player to understand the position of the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, since the position of the starting opening door member 1214 is difficult to understand, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the starting opening door member 1214 is in a receivable position in which the starting opening door member 1214 projects forward, and the player aims at the starting opening door member 1214. It is possible to entertain the game ball T by driving it.

  Further, as described above, since it is possible to reduce the excessive acceptance of the gaming ball T, the special lottery result in which the advantageous gaming state is generated by the gaming ball T excessively accepted by the second starting opening 1153 is drawn. It is possible to avoid such a situation, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 by the player's operation flows down above the second starting port 1153, the second starting port 1153 flows frontward. Since it is arranged below the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j of the path forming member 1161, the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j prevents the game ball T from being directly received by the second starting opening 1153. , Will be discharged downward from the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j. At this time, the starting opening door member 1214 extending leftward and rightward according to the game state that changes when the game ball T is driven into the game area 100 (in response to the passage of the game ball T at the gate member 1134). The game ball T discharged downward from the left end portion of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j in a state of sliding forward in the game area 1100 and projecting in the starting opening door member 1214 is the second starting opening. When flowing down to the left outer side portion of the upper shelf portion 1161j, the game ball T rolls on the starting opening door member 1214 in the direction of the second starting opening 1153 and is received by the second starting opening 1153. Then, when the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153, benefits such as payout of the game ball T and lottery of the special lottery result are given, so that the player can be enjoyed by the given benefit. At the same time, the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the starting opening door member 1214 can be enjoyed so that the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153.

  The starting opening door member 1214 extending to the left and right is adapted to slide in the front-rear direction different from the receivable direction facing the left direction of the game ball T in the second starting opening 1153, and the starting opening in the game area 1100. When the game ball T flows down onto the starting opening door member 1214 when the door member 1214 is slid from the protruding state to the non-projecting state (immersed state), the gaming ball T is flat on the starting opening door member 1214. It takes some time to reach the second starting port 1153 from the left outer side of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j, so that the game ball T is guided to the second starting port 1153 by the starting port door member 1214. If the starting opening door member 1214 retracts and sinks in between, the game ball T may fall from the starting opening door member 1214 without being accepted by the second starting opening 1153. That. More specifically, while the game ball T is rolling to the right toward the second starting port 1153, the starting port door member 1214 is retracted so that the upper surface of the starting port door member 1214 on which the game ball T is placed. The game ball T gradually becomes smaller and falls off from the starting opening door member 1214 before reaching the second starting opening 1153. Therefore, it is possible to reduce that the game ball T is unnecessarily received by the second starting opening 1153, and thus the privilege is unnecessarily provided by receiving the game ball T in the extra second starting opening 1153 (particularly, It is possible to reduce the number of special lottery results in which the advantageous gaming state occurs) from being given, and to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  When the starting sphere door member 1214 slides forward so as to project into the game area 1100 and the game ball T flows down onto the starting mouth door member 1214, the starting sphere door member 1214 causes the gaming sphere T to move. There is a possibility of being guided to and accepted by the second starting port 1153. However, since the starting opening door member 1214 slides according to the game state, it is difficult to understand the timing when the starting opening door member 1214 slides into the game area 1100, and the starting opening door member 1214 slides into the playing area 1100. After confirming that the starting mouth door member 1214 has been projected, the player will perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the starting mouth door member 1214, so that the starting mouth door member 1214 slides so as to project into the game area 1100. The possibility that the game ball T will flow down onto the starting opening door member 1214 is reduced, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed.

  Further, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth, even if the game ball T flows down onto the starting opening door member 1214, the contact of the gaming ball T acts on the starting opening door member 1214. The impact only acts on the slide groove 1211d in the lower case 1211 of the variable starter unit 1210 that slidably supports the starter door member 1214, and the drive mechanism (starter solenoid 1215) that slides the starter door member 1214. And the link member 1216) hardly act, and it is possible to make it difficult to damage the starting opening door member 1214 and the like (variable starting opening unit 1210).

  Furthermore, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth, the length (distance) of sliding the starting opening door member 1214 is shorter than that in the case where the starting opening door member 1214 is slid left and right. can do. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time until the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted from the state where it is projected into the game area 1100, and the game ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 by the starting opening door member 1214. The starting opening door member 1214 can be immersed before it is performed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the second starting opening 1153 to receive the game ball T. Further, since the starting opening door member 214 is slid in the front-back direction, a space for immersing the starting opening door member 1214 and a mechanism for sliding the starting opening door member 1214 are arranged on the rear side of the game area 1100. The mechanism for sliding the starting opening door member 1214 (starting opening solenoid 1215, link member 1216, etc.) does not press the inside of the game area 1100, and makes the inside of the game area 1100 as wide as possible. You can

  Moreover, since the upper surface of the second guide portion 1214b adjacent to the second starting opening 1153 in the starting opening door member 1214 is formed to be flat without a protrusion, the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100. Even when the game ball T flows down onto the starting opening door member 1214 when it is slid back from the state where it is retracted and retracted, the projection is attracting the gaming ball T to the rear end side of the game area 1100 and the starting opening door. The game ball T does not easily fall from the member 1214, and the game ball T does not bounce toward the second starting opening 1153 due to the protrusion, and the game ball T can be smoothly dropped from the starting opening door member 1214. It is possible to surely achieve the effect described above.

  Further, the game ball T can be received from the left side with respect to the second starting port 1153, and the game ball T guided from the left side by the starting port door member 1214 extending left and right enters the second starting port 1153 as it is. Therefore, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that the game ball T is guided to the starting opening door member 1214 and is surely received in the second starting opening 1153. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes into the game area 1100 according to the game state, it is possible to make the player think that the second starting opening 1153 is surely accepted if the game ball T flows down to the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, it is possible to positively perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the starting opening door member 1214, and it is possible to prevent the player from being entertained and from having less interest.

  Further, since the plunger 1215a movable by the energization of the starting opening solenoid 1215 is moved back and forth, the starting opening door member 1214 is slid back and forth by projecting or retracting into the game area 1100. The sliding speed of the starting opening door member 1214 can be increased with a simple structure, as compared with the case where the motor is slid by a motor. Therefore, since the starting opening door member 1214 can be quickly slid, the starting opening door member 1214 is moved to the game area 1100 before the game ball T on the starting opening door member 1214 is guided to the second starting opening 1153. It is possible to retract from the inside, it is possible to reliably reduce the extra game ball T is received in the second starting port 1153, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball T passes through the gate member 1134 as a game state that changes when the game ball T is hit in the game area 110 by the operation of the player, and thus the lottery is performed. When the starting opening door member 1214 of the variable starting opening unit 1210 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the normal determination result, the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 is the first of the front flow path forming members 1161. (2) When it flows down to the starting opening upper shelf 1161j, it rolls leftward by the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, and when it is discharged from the left end side, it flows down downward by the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m. , The first starting portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 located below the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m and the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, the starting opening It flows down in the U-turn shape by being guided to the right on the side opposite to the left along the member 1214, and thus acceptable to the second start hole 1153. When the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153, the game ball T is paid out and the special lottery result is drawn as a privilege. Therefore, the privilege can entertain the player and the game ball. As T is received in the second starting port 1153, the driving operation (right hitting) of the game ball T aiming at the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j can be enjoyed. At this time, the starting opening door member 1214 was obliquely bent to the left end side away from the second starting opening 1153 below the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m. Since the first guide portion 1214a is provided, at first glance at the player, when the game ball T flows down to the first guide portion 1214a, the game ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153 side. It can be recognized, and the expectation for accepting the game ball T into the second starting opening 1153 can be increased. Further, in the starting opening door member 1214, the first guide portion 1214a far from the second starting opening 1153 and the second guiding portion 1214b near the second starting opening 1153 have different inclination angles, and the first guiding portion In 1214a, the acceleration of the game ball T is fast, and in the second guide portion 1214b, the acceleration of the game ball T is slow, so that the rolling speed of the game ball T changes depending on the part where the game ball T rolls. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, since the rolling speed of the game ball T that has not changed on the starting opening door member changes, the player can be surprised to have a strong impact, and the player is less likely to get bored. In addition, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing. Further, as described above, since the rolling speed of the game ball T changes and is different between the first guide portion 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b of the starting opening door member 1214, it rolls on the starting opening door member 1214. The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the playing game ball T so that the player can pay attention to the playing game ball T, and by paying attention to the playing ball T rolling on the starting opening door member 1214, the starting opening door member 1214 is obtained. With this, it is possible to increase the expectation for accepting the game ball T into the second starting opening 1153 to which the game ball T is guided.

  Further, the first guide portion 1214a is inclined at an angle of 40 degrees to 50 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and when the game ball T comes into contact with the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 from above, it is likened to. Even if the game ball T is reflected by the first guide portion 1214a, it moves along the first guide portion 1214a, so that the game ball T can be made to flow down along the left and right starting opening door member 1214. The game ball T can be caused to make an intended movement on the starting opening door member 1214, and the above-described effects can be surely obtained. Further, since the first guide portion 1214a is inclined at an angle of 40 degrees to 50 degrees with respect to the horizontal, the game ball T hits the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214 from above. In the case of contact, it is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that the game ball T that is in contact with the first guide portion 1214a is reflected to the right where the second starting port 1153 is located, so that the player is in the game state. Accordingly, when the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100, the player recognizes that the game ball T can be received in the second starting opening 1153 by letting the game ball T flow down to the first guide portion 1214a. Can be made. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the player is positively driven to drive the game ball T aiming at the first guide portion 1214a of the starting opening door member 1214. It is possible to suppress the entertaining and deteriorating the player's interest.

  Furthermore, since the left and right lengths of the first guide portion 1214a in plan view are formed within the range of 0.2 times to 1 times the outer diameter of the game ball T, the first guide portion 1214a allows the game ball T to be played. Can be reliably guided to the side of the second starting opening 1153, and the rolling speed of the guided game ball T can be prevented from becoming unnecessarily high to make it easier to see the rolling game ball T. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from enjoying the movement of the game medium and reduce the interest.

  Further, since the left and right lengths of the starting port door member 1214 in plan view are formed within a range of 2 to 6 times the outer diameter of the game ball T, the first guide portion 1214a of the starting port door member 1214 is formed. The game ball T rolling on the starting port door member 1214 toward the second starting port 1153 side can be appropriately displayed to the player without excess or deficiency, and the movement of the game ball T having an impact can be enjoyed. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the movement of the game ball T and deteriorating the interest of the player.

  Further, when the starting opening door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state and the game ball T is guided by the front flow passage forming member 1161 provided in the playing area 1100, the starting opening door is opened. Since the game ball T flows down to the left end side of the member 1214 away from the second starting port 1153, that is, the first guide part 1214a side, the game ball T is guided to the first guide part 1214a of the starting port door member 1214. Can be made to flow down (contact). Therefore, since the game ball T can be rolled over substantially the entire length of the left and right sides of the starting opening door member 1214, the movement of the gaming ball T by the starting opening door member 1214 provided with the first guide portion 1214a can be given to the player. It is possible to surely show the game, and it is possible to suppress the entertaining of the player and the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is arranged immediately above the starting opening door member 1214 so that the game ball T flows down in a U-turn shape, the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is moved to the starting opening door member 1214. In comparison with the case where the game ball T is arranged at a position on the left outer side of the first guide portion 1214a with respect to immediately above, and the game ball T flows down in a crank shape, the starting opening door member 1214 and the first opening door member 1214 in the game area 1100 are provided. (2) The space in the left-right direction occupied by the upper shelves 1161j of the starting opening and the like can be reduced. Therefore, since the degree of freedom in arranging the starting opening door member 1214 and the like can be increased, the starting opening door member 1214 and the like can be arranged in the game area 1100 at a position easily visible to the player, and the above-described operation and effect can be obtained. It is possible to reliably embody the pachinko machine 1 to play.

  Further, when the starting opening door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the second starting opening area standing wall portion 1161m extends vertically to the left outside of the first guide portion 1214a. By the time the game ball T discharged from the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j flows down onto the starting opening door member 1214, it is brought into contact with the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m and left of the first guide portion 1214a. It can be prevented from flowing down to the outside, and the game ball T can be reliably flowed down onto the starting opening door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a), and the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second When the game ball T flowing down between the starting opening area left standing wall portions 1161m abuts on the starting opening door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a) and bounces, the game is performed by the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m. It is possible to reliably prevent T from flowing down to the side opposite to the second starting port 1153 side, and it is possible to reliably guide the game ball T to the second starting port 1153 by the starting port door member 1214. .

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 by the player's operation flows down to the upper side of the second starting port 1153 which is open toward the front, the second Immediately above the starting opening 1153, the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is brought into contact with the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, and the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j rolls in a direction away from the position immediately above the second starting opening 1153 to the left according to the inclination of the upper surface. In the starting opening upper shelf 1161j, it is discharged from the left end side away from the second starting opening 1153 and comes into contact with the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m. At this time, the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 passes through the gate member 1134 and a "normal hit" is selected as a normal determination result, so that the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100. Then, the game ball T discharged from the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and abutting on the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m abuts on the starting opening door member 1214 and is moved by the starting opening door member 1214. It is guided to the front side of the second starting port 1153 and received by the second starting port 1153. At this time, a vertically extending second starting opening area right standing wall portion 1161k is provided on the right outer side of the second starting opening 1153 on the same side where the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j is raised. , The game ball T guided to the direction of the second starting port 1153 by the starting port door member 1214, even if it tries to pass the front side of the second starting port 1153, it comes into contact with the second starting port area right standing wall portion 1161k and passes by. The game ball T guided by the starting opening door member 1214 is received in the second starting opening 1153. When the game ball T is received in the second starting opening 1153, a benefit such as payout of the game ball T or a lottery of the special lottery result is given, and the player can be enjoyed by the given benefit. As the game ball T is received in the second starting port 1153, the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the second starting port 1153 can be enjoyed. Then, before the game ball T is received in the second starting port 1153, the game ball T abuts on the second starting port upper shelf part 1161j, the second starting port region left standing wall part 1161m, and the starting port door member 1214. This makes it possible to make a U-turn, and to entertain the player by the movement of the game ball T whose flow direction changes abruptly, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Further, when the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100 and the gaming ball T flows down onto the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, the gaming ball T makes a U-turn as described above. Therefore, when the flow direction of the game ball T is changed by 180 degrees, the flow speed of the game ball T becomes relatively slow. Therefore, since the movement of the game ball T flowing down in a U-turn shape can be easily seen, it is possible to easily entertain the movement of the game ball T to the player, and entertain the movement of the game ball T to lower the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in a state where the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100, the game ball T flows down in a U-turn shape, and in a state where the starting opening door member 1214 does not project into the game area 1100, the gaming ball T Therefore, even if the game ball T is made to flow down to the same second starting opening upper shelf 1161j according to the protrusion of the starting opening door member 1214, the movement of the gaming ball T is made different. be able to. Therefore, the movement (flow) of the game ball T changes according to the game state (passage of the gate member 1134 by the game ball T), so that the game ball T with various movements is shown to the player. It is possible to entertain, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and deteriorating the interest of the player.

  Further, between the second starting mouth upper shelf portion 1161j and the starting mouth door member 1214 arranged vertically, only one game ball T is allowed to flow down, and the second starting mouth upper shelf portion 1161j and the starting mouth. Since the vertical distance between the door member 1214 and the door member 1214 is as narrow as possible, the game ball T that flows from the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j to the second starting opening left standing wall portion 1161m and flows down onto the starting opening door member 1214. Since the movement of the player can be made to make a sudden U-turn, the player can entertain the player with the movement of the game ball T, which has not existed in conventional pachinko machines, and the player's interest in the game is increased. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  Further, since the starting opening door member 1214 extends to the left and right longer than the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, when the starting opening door member 1214 is projected into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the second starting opening. Since the starting opening door member 1214 is longer than the upper shelf portion 1161j, the starting opening door member 1214 becomes conspicuous, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the protruding starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes, by letting the player pay attention to the starting opening door member 1214, the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j near the starting opening door member 1214 and the second starting opening area left standing wall 1161m. Since it is possible to draw attention together, the game ball T rolling on the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the starting opening door member 1214 can be surely visually recognized, and moves like a U-turn. It is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball T, and to drive the game ball T aiming at the second starting mouth upper shelf portion 1161j so that the game ball T flows down on the starting door member 1214 to the player. The operation can be performed, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest.

  Furthermore, when the starting opening door member 1214 is projected, if the game ball T is made to flow down onto the starting opening door member 1214 via the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m, the second Since it is guided to the starting opening 1153 and is received by the second starting opening 1153, when the starting opening door member 1214 protrudes according to the game state, the game ball T is directed to the starting opening door member 1214 for the player. It is possible to positively perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the second starting mouth upper shelf portion 1161j for sending, and it is possible to suppress the entertaining and deteriorating entertaining of the player.

  Further, when the game ball T hit into the game area 1100 aiming at the second starting port 1153 flows down onto the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j, it will roll to the left away from the second starting port 1153. By moving the game ball T away from the second starting opening 1153, it is possible to make the player feel disappointed. Then, when the game ball T is ejected from the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, if the starting opening door member 1214 projects, the game ball T separated from the second starting opening 1153 is moved by the starting opening door member 1214. It rolls to the right toward the second starting port 1153. In other words, since the game ball T makes a U-turn and returns to the second starting port 1153 side, the player can be pleased and the expectation for accepting the game ball T into the second starting port 1153 is increased. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the second starting opening area right standing wall portion 1161k vertically extending to the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j is provided on the outer right side of the second starting opening 1153, the second starting opening upper shelf portion extending left and right. Even if an attempt is made to receive the game ball T from the right side where the upper surface of 1161j is high to the second starting port 1153 disposed below the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j, from the right outer side of the second starting port 1153. The second starting opening area right standing wall portion 1161k extending to the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j can prevent the game ball T from being received by the second starting opening 1153. Therefore, in order to receive the game ball T in the second starting port 1153, it is necessary to let the game ball T flow down from the left side where the upper surface of the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j is low, and therefore the second starting port 1153. It is possible to prompt the player to drive the game ball T into the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j so that the game ball T flows down to the side. Then, when the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100 according to the game state, the game ball T is formed by the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j, the second starting opening area left standing wall portion 1161m, and the starting opening door member 1214. Since it makes a U-turn and is guided in the direction of the second starting opening 1153, it is possible to entertain the movement of the game ball T flowing down so as to wrap around, and an expectation for accepting the game ball T into the second starting opening 1153. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more entertaining and prevent the player from being entertained and having less interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball T is hit in the game area 1100 by the operation of the player, the game state is changed by the hit game ball T, and the changed game state is obtained. Accordingly, a start opening door member 1214 that extends in the left-right direction longer than the outer diameter of the game ball T and guides the game ball T to the second start opening 1153 slides forward and projects into the game area 1100. In this game area 1100, the second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k protruding forward is arranged on the right side of the second starting opening 1153, and the second starting opening right is on the upper side of the second starting opening 1153. A second starting opening upper shelf 1161j extending shorter than the left and right lengths of the starting opening door member 1214 is arranged so that the left side is lower from the upper end of the standing wall portion 1161k, and the starting opening door member 1214 is in the game area 1100. When protruding inward, the left end portion of the starting opening door member 1214 extends outside the left end portion of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j. Then, when the game ball T flows down onto the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, it rolls toward the left end side on the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and flows down from the left end. . At this time, if the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100, the game ball T will be received on the starting opening door member 1214 with an extremely high probability. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100, the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and the starting opening door member 1214 are on the upper side and outside the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j. When the game ball T is made to flow down, the game ball T will be received on the starting opening door member 1214. Then, the game ball T received on the starting opening door member 1214 is guided to the second starting opening 1153 by the first guiding portion 1214a, the second guiding portion 1214b, and the third guiding portion 1214c, and then the second. When accepted into the starting opening 1153, the payout of the game ball T, the lottery of the special lottery result, and the like are performed as a privilege, and the player can be entertained by the privilege. At this time, since the starting opening door member 1214 extends long in the left-right direction (about 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball T) so as to receive the plurality of game balls T in the left-right direction, It is possible to make the player illusion that many game balls T are to be received in the second starting opening 1153. More specifically, when a player becomes accustomed to playing with a conventional pachinko machine having an opening / closing member extending to the left and right, the player becomes more interested in the size of the opening / closing member extending to the left and right, and corresponds to the opening / closing member. There is relatively little interest in the size of the receiving entrance (eg, the big winning opening). That is, it is assumed that the longer the opening / closing member is in the left and right, the more the game balls T can be received. Therefore, it is recognized that the starting opening door member 1214 projecting into the game area 1100 and extending to the left and right according to the game state is an opening / closing member in the conventional pachinko machine, and the starting opening door member 1214 extends long to the left and right. Therefore, it is an illusion that many game balls T can be accepted. Then, the player can positively perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the starting opening door member 1214 by the illusion, and it is possible to suppress the entertaining and deteriorating the interest of the player. it can. On the other hand, since the second starting port 1153 to which the game ball T is guided by the starting port door member 1214 is formed to have a size that only one game ball T is actually accepted, the second starting port 1153 is provided on the starting port door member 1214. Even if a plurality of gaming balls T flow down, they are not accepted at one time and can be accepted only one by one. Therefore, the number of accepted gaming balls T per hour can be reduced as compared with the conventional one, and the privilege to be granted is Since the number is relatively small, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Further, when the starting opening door member 1214 projects into the game area 1100, the game ball T can be received in the second starting opening 1153 even if the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is aimed in addition to the starting opening door member 1214. Therefore, even if the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j is arranged above the starting opening door member 1214 (second starting opening 1153), the length of the starting opening door member 1214 is substantially equal to the left and right lengths. It can be the same as receiving the game ball T over the entire length, and the player can be entertained by mounting many game balls T. At this time, a plurality of game balls T are simultaneously present on the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j because the lower left end of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j is received on the starting opening door member 1214. Even if it is done, it will be handed over one by one onto the starting opening door member 1214 and guided to the second starting opening 1153, and it is possible to avoid that many game balls T are accepted into the second starting opening 1153 at one time. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  Further, on the upper side and the right side of the second starting opening 1153, since the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j and the second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k protruding into the game area 1100 are provided, the starting opening door member 1214 plays the game. If the ball T is not guided to the second starting port 1153, it is difficult to make the second starting port 1153 accept the game ball T. Therefore, since the game ball T cannot be received in the second starting opening 1153 unless the starting opening door member 1214 projects, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the player by the projection of the starting opening door member 1214. By projecting the starting opening door member 1214, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to increase the player's expectation for the game and to prevent the interest from decreasing. You can

  Further, since the standing wall portion 1214e extending upward from the right end portion of the third guide portion 1214c of the starting opening door member 1214 is provided, the first guiding portion inclined so that the right side of the starting opening door member 1214 is lowered. The game ball T guided by the 1214a and the second guide portion 1214b toward the front side of the second starting opening 1153 passes the front side of the second starting opening 1153 by coming into contact with the standing wall portion 1214e, and further rightward. It can be prevented from moving to the side. At this time, even if the analogy game ball T crosses over the standing wall portion 1214e, the second starting opening right standing wall portion 1161k projects to the right side of the second starting opening 1153, and thus the second starting opening. The right standing wall portion 1161k can also prevent the game ball T from moving to the right. Therefore, the game ball T received by the starting opening door member 1214 can be reliably guided to and accepted by the second starting opening 1153.

  Further, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward to be projected into the game area 1100, a lot of games are compared with the case where the starting opening door member 1214 is rotated and projected. It is possible to reduce the likelihood that the starting opening door member 1214 is easily damaged by the impact caused by receiving the ball T. More specifically, when the lower side of the starting door member is rotatably supported around an axis extending to the left and right and the upper side is rotated so as to move forward, the starting door member is in a protruding state. It is difficult to make the stopper for preventing further rotation from longer than the length from the lower side to the upper side of the starting opening door member, and to sufficiently counteract the impact caused by receiving many game balls T. May not be possible. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward, and the rear side can be made longer than the portion of the starting opening door member 1214 protruding into the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently counter the impact caused by receiving many game balls T.

  Further, since the starting opening door member 1214 is slid forward and is projected into the game area 1100, the starting opening door member 1214 is slid backward when the game ball T is present on the starting opening door member 1214. Then, depending on the position of the game ball T on the starting opening door member 1214, before the game ball T is guided to the second starting opening 1153, it drops off from the starting opening door member 1214, and the second starting opening 1153. It can be prevented from being accepted, and it is possible to reduce the additional acceptance of the game ball T and suppress an increase in the load on the game hall side.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 by the operation of the player is the plurality of obstacle nails G, the windmill, and the center accessory arranged in the game area 1100. By abutting on the 1130, the winning opening unit 1150, etc., it will flow down while moving in various directions, and the game ball T can entertain the player by making various movements. In this normal state, it is difficult for the game ball T to flow down directly below the obstacle nail G or the like with which the game ball T abuts, so that the game ball T easily flows down in the game area 1100. The (first region) and the region that is difficult to flow down are formed. Therefore, the game ball T is not received in the second starting port 1153 arranged below the second starting port upper shelf portion 1161j of the front flow path forming member 1161. Then, when the game ball T driven into the game area 1100 passes through the gate member 1134, the lower side of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j arranged downstream according to the detection of the passing game ball T. The starting opening door member 1214 of the game ball T in the game area 1100 advances and appears in the area (first area) where the game ball T easily flows down, and the second starting opening upper shelf is outside the area where the game ball T easily flows down. A region (second region) where the game ball T easily flows down is formed in a region where the game ball T on the lower side of the portion 1161j hardly flows down. Therefore, the flow-down path of the game ball T changes due to the appearance of the starting opening door member 1214, and the game ball T can be made to flow down to an area where the game ball T is difficult to flow down in the normal state. It is possible to entertain the player with the movement of the game ball T flowing down the unseen region (second region), and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and deteriorating the interest of the player.

  Further, when the starting opening door member 1214 appears forward and appears, when the game ball T hit in the game area 1100 is guided by the starting opening door member 1214, it is received by the second starting opening 1153 with an extremely high probability. , When the game ball T is accepted into the second starting port 1153, the game ball T is paid out as a benefit, and a lottery of a special lottery result in which an advantageous game state occurs is performed. Therefore, when the start port door member 1214 appears, It is possible to allow the player to positively perform the driving operation of the game ball T aiming at the starting opening door member 1214, and to prevent the player from delighting the driving operation of the game ball T and deteriorating the interest. can do.

  Further, the second starting port 1153 for paying out the game balls T, the lottery of the special lottery results, etc. is arranged in a region (second region) where the game balls T are difficult to flow down in a normal state of the starting port door member 1214. Therefore, even if the player hits the game ball T aiming at the second starting opening 1153, the game ball T is not accepted. Then, in response to the passage of the game ball T in the gate member 1134, the starting opening door member 1214 advances to allow the game ball T to flow down to a region (second region) in which the game ball T is difficult to flow down. The game ball T can be accepted in 1153. Therefore, even if the second starting port 1153 is opened in the game area 1100, the game ball T cannot be received in the normal state, and the starting port door member 1214 can be received unless it appears (advance). Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of premium by advancing the starting opening door member 1214, and it seems that there is something good for the player by advancing the starting opening door member 1214. It is possible to increase the player's expectation for the game and prevent the interest from decreasing.

  Further, in order to advance (appear) the starting opening door member 1214 to form a region (second region) in which the game ball T easily flows down, it is necessary to pass the game ball T to the gate member 1134. It is possible to allow the player to perform the driving operation (right-handedness) of the game ball T aiming at the gate member 1134, and to make the player enjoy the driving operation of the game ball T and to reduce the interest. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the starting opening door member 1214 moves in the front-back direction so as to appear and disappear in the game area 1100, it is not necessary to secure a space for immersing the starting opening door member 1214 in the game area 1100. , The area in which the game ball T flows down in the game area 1100 can be made as wide as possible, and the flow of the game ball T over a wide range increases the movement of the game ball T, and the player can play the game ball T in the game ball T. It is possible to entertain the movement of and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the flat plate-shaped starting door member 1214 (first guide portion 1214a, second guide portion 1214b, third guide portion 1214c, etc.) is moved in the front-rear direction, when viewed from the player side, It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the starting opening door member 1214 is advancing forward and appears, or is retracting and being immersed. Therefore, the appearance state of the starting opening door member 1214 can be clearly recognized depending on whether or not the game ball T hit in the game area 1100 flows down the position of the starting opening door member 1214 and contacts the starting opening door member 1214. As a result, the movement of the game ball T hit in the game area 1100 for recognizing the appearance / disappearance state can be noticed, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball T and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the game ball T flows down the outside of the left end of the second starting opening upper shelf portion 1161j in a state where the starting opening door member 1214 is advanced and appears, the first guide portion 1214a of the flat-plate-shaped starting opening door member 1214 is provided. Since it comes into contact with the upper surface of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j and is guided to the lower side of the second starting opening upper shelf 1161j, it is difficult for the game ball T to flow down in the normal state where the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted. The game ball T can be surely caused to flow down to the lower side of the 1161j, and the above-described operational effects can be surely achieved.

  Further, the starting opening door member 1214 is moved in the front-rear direction so that the starting opening door member 1214 is retracted into and out of the game area 1100, and the starting opening door member is provided on the upper surface of the starting opening door member 1214 while the game ball T is flowing down (rolling). When the 1214 moves backward, or while the starting port door member 1214 is moving backward, the second starting port changes from the left end of the second starting port upper shelf part 1161j to the second starting port region left standing wall part 1161m while changing the flowing direction. When the game ball T flows down onto the door member 144, it takes time for the game ball T to reach the second start port 1153 because the starting opening door member 1214 extends to the left and right. Since the backward movement of the starting opening door member 1214 is performed in an extremely short time by driving the starting opening solenoid 1215, the game ball T reaches the right end portion (third guide portion 1214c) of the starting opening door member 1214. To, game ball T is that would fall from the upper starting opening the door member 1214. Therefore, when the starting opening door member 1214 starts to retract, it is possible to prevent the game ball T from being sufficiently guided, so that the extra game ball T is received in the second starting port 1153. It is possible to suppress, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Further, by dropping the game ball T from the middle of the starting opening door member 1214, it is possible to make the player feel unfortunate and increase the expectation for the next opportunity, and to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player. can do.

  Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements are made as shown below without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

  That is, in the above-described embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this and is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. Alternatively, in this case as well, the same operational effect as described above can be obtained.

The pachinko machine according to the above embodiment includes the following technical ideas.
[Technical idea 1]
A gaming machine that has a game area into which a game ball is driven, and in which the game can be advanced by the movement of the game ball in the game area,
A specific detection unit for detecting a game ball passing through a specific place in the game area,
When the game ball is detected by the specific detection unit, the specific point is located at the upstream side proximity position where the length of the diameter of the game ball detected at the specific point or the length of the diameter is not far from the game ball detected at the specific point. A gaming machine, comprising: a proximity disconnecting means operable to interrupt a ball path leading to.

  According to the above configuration, when the game ball is detected at a specific location, the ball path for one ball width from this game ball, or the ball path at the upstream proximity position where the ball width is not separated is blocked. Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which two game balls are consecutively supplied to the specific location that is the target of detection by the specific detection unit, the first specific location of the game ball Only passing will be allowed.

[Technical idea 2]
When a privilege is given to a player based on a specific lottery result being obtained in a lottery performed when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, it is considered that the game medium driven into the game area can be accepted. As a means of winning a prize
A detection unit for detecting acceptance of the game medium to the winning opening means,
When acceptance of the game medium is detected, even if another game medium is continuously supplied to the detected game medium and is supplied to the winning opening means, two game media are continuously supplied. An interrupting movable member provided so as to operate so as to interrupt between the game media and to be able to refuse to accept the other game media.

  In the above configuration, even if two game media are continuously supplied to the winning opening means, the interrupt movable member can be operated so as to interrupt between the game media. It becomes possible to refuse to accept the rear side game medium (another game medium) of the game medium into the winning opening means.

[Technical idea 3]
When a privilege is given to a player based on a specific lottery result being obtained in a lottery performed when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, it is considered that the game medium driven into the game area can be accepted. As a means of winning a prize
Of the game area, a remote island type winning port provided at a position away from a flow-down path through which a game medium can flow down,
It is possible to appear and disappear by reciprocating in the depth direction with respect to the game area, and connects the downflow route and the remote island type winning opening when the appearance position is one of the appearance position and the appearance position. A tonboro type movable member provided as a bridging passage and provided so as to roll the game medium on the downflow route to the remote island type winning port located in a direction different from the depth direction,
A detection unit that detects acceptance of the game medium into the remote island type winning port,
When acceptance of the game medium is detected, even if there is a situation in which another game medium is connected to the detected game medium and is supplied to the remote island type winning opening through the bridge passage, An interrupt movable member provided so as to operate so as to interrupt between the two game media supplied in series and to refuse to accept the other game media into the remote island type winning port. A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the tonboro type movable member rolls the game medium in a direction different from the depth direction at the appearance position, even though it can be retracted and retracted by reciprocating movement in the depth direction. It is designed to have a structure (bridging passage) that feeds to a remote island type winning port. For this reason, it is possible to secure a sufficient length as the rolling distance until it is accepted by the remote island type winning port, and it is like when adopting a structure that spills the game ball on the upper surface of the operated movable piece by inertia. It is also possible to suitably avoid a situation where the inertia does not work well and the player wins a prize.

  Further, in the above configuration, even if two game media are continuously supplied to the winning opening means, the interrupt movable member can be operated so as to interrupt the game media. , It becomes possible to refuse acceptance of the game medium on the rear side (another game medium) of these game media to the winning opening means.

[Technical idea 4]
When a specific result is obtained in a special lottery based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied by the game medium flowing down the game area, a first special control means capable of executing control for generating a big hit game. Besides,
Even if a specific result is obtained in the normal lottery performed based on the fact that the second starting condition is satisfied by the game medium flowing down in the game area, the jackpot game occurs with a probability of approximately 100%. It is provided with a second special control means capable of executing a control that enables the game so that the game medium used for the establishment of the second starting condition is also used for the establishment of the first starting condition. A game machine characterized by being able to flow down to.

  According to the above configuration, only one game medium flows down, and it is possible to obtain an opportunity to execute two types of lottery (special lottery and normal lottery) that can generate a big hit game. In other words, in this case, from the player's side, it is possible to generate a jackpot game as long as a specific result is obtained in the ordinary lottery, without depending on the special lottery. It becomes difficult to feel distrust, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in playing games.

[Technical idea 5]
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
An opening / closing member operable between a closed state and an open state is provided, and when the opening / closing member is in the open state, a game medium within a specific rolling area of the game area enters into an internal area. And a winning mouth means to
A receiving port capable of receiving a game medium flowing down the game area,
Lottery means for performing a lottery under the condition that the probability of getting either the specific hit or the big hit is about 100% based on the fact that the game medium is accepted at the entrance,
When a specific hit is obtained in the lottery by the lottery means, as long as the game medium is continuously ejected to the specific rolling area, the specific area provided in the internal area of the winning opening means is approximately 100. An accurate game control means capable of executing control for opening / closing the opening / closing member in an accurate manner in which a game medium is received with a probability of%,
When the game medium that has entered the internal area of the winning opening means is received in a specific area, or when a big hit is obtained by a lottery by the lottery means, a big hit game control means capable of executing control for generating a big hit game Depending on the progress of the game, each time the game medium is received at the entrance, the big hit game control means controls with a probability of about 100% so that the big hit game can be generated. Characteristic gaming machine.

  In the above configuration, depending on the progress of the game (for example, whether or not the big hit game is being executed, the number of holdings, etc.), if the game medium is accepted at the entrance, it will be about 100% each time. Since the big hit game can be generated with a probability, the reliability of the big hit lottery can be greatly enhanced, and the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

[Technical idea 6]
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A movable receiving port, which is allowed to receive a game medium when a predetermined movable member operates,
When a game medium is received in the movable reception port, a winning process executing means capable of executing a winning process that enables a game to occur with a big hit game with a probability of approximately 100%,
Advantageous game generation control means for controlling such that an advantageous game state can occur at a predetermined occurrence probability after a big hit game occurs through the award processing by the award processing execution means,
A confirmation process holding means for holding the confirmation process by the confirmation process execution means for a predetermined upper limit number of times until the execution condition is satisfied, and retaining the same.
Every time the winning process held by the winning process holding means is exhausted, there is a special game situation in which a big hit game can occur with a probability of approximately 100% regardless of the game state. If the winning process is digested when the winning game is in the advantageous game state, the winning process is made possible so that the winning process by the winning process executing means is newly added as a pending state. With the additional game control means capable of executing the control to be provided, and when the certain additional game is provided as the number of the certain confirmation processes in the holding state becomes small and the situation becomes disadvantageous to the player. The number of games that can be added as a new pending state is increased in consideration of the predetermined upper limit number of holdings. A gaming machine characterized by increasing the reversibility of unfavorable situations.

  According to the above configuration, there is a special game situation in which a big hit game can be generated with a probability of approximately 100% regardless of the game state each time the winning process in the suspended state is exhausted. Since the game will be created, the sense of trust in the game will be greatly enhanced, and the decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

  Moreover, according to the above-mentioned configuration, as the number of winning processes in the pending state decreases and the situation becomes unfavorable to the player, the winning additional game itself has the same game contents, but the same. Since the game value is increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the situation becomes disadvantageous for the player.

  Regarding the time required for digesting the game according to the winning process, the winning process does not necessarily have to be set to a long time such that the expected value of the number added as a new pending state exceeds 1. May be set as a short time so that it is difficult to add as a new hold state. In other words, when the winning process is digested in the advantageous game state, it is sufficient that the chance of adding a new winning process as a suspended state by the amount of time required for digesting the game according to the winning process occurs even though it is small.

[Technical idea 7]
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A movable receiving port, which is allowed to receive a game medium when a predetermined movable member operates,
When a game medium is received in the movable reception port, a winning process executing means capable of executing a winning process that enables a game to occur with a big hit game with a probability of approximately 100%,
Advantageous game continuation control means for controlling such that an advantageous game state can occur with a predetermined occurrence probability after a big hit game occurs through the award processing by the award processing execution means,
A confirmation process holding means for holding the confirmation process by the confirmation process execution means for a predetermined upper limit number of times until the execution condition is satisfied, and retaining the same.
Every time the winning process held by the winning process holding means is exhausted, there is a special game situation in which a big hit game can occur with a probability of approximately 100% regardless of the game state. When the winning process is digested while the game is in the advantageous game state, the winning process by the winning process execution means is newly suspended for the time required to finish the game according to the corresponding winning process. An add-on game control means capable of executing control to provide an add-on game that can be added as a state,
A normally open entrance that is always allowed to receive the game medium,
When a game medium is received in the normally open reception port, a low probability process executing means capable of executing a low probability process in which a big hit game occurs only with a relatively low probability,
Low-precision processing holding means for holding the low-precision processing by the low-precision processing executing means for a predetermined upper limit number of times until the execution condition is satisfied and holding the low-precision processing.
The additional game control means,
If the advantageous game state occurs under the game situation in which the winning process is not put on hold and the low certainty process is put on hold, a game according to the winning process is played. Having a means capable of executing a control to provide a super-addition game in which the winning process by the winning process executing means is newly added as a pending state in a time longer than the time required for digestion A gaming machine characterized by.

  According to the above configuration, there is a special game situation in which a big hit game can be generated with a probability of approximately 100% regardless of the game state each time the winning process in the suspended state is exhausted. Since the game will be created, the sense of trust in the game will be greatly enhanced, and the decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

  Moreover, according to the above-mentioned configuration, as the number of winning confirmation processes that are put on hold is reduced and the situation becomes unfavorable for the player, the winning process is newly put on hold when the above winning addition game is provided. Since the number that can be added as is increased in consideration of the above-mentioned predetermined upper limit holding number, it is possible to increase the reversibility from a disadvantageous situation even though the game content of the on-ride game itself is the same. Become.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, if the favorable gaming state occurs in the gaming situation where the winning process is not put on hold and the low certainty process is put on hold, the winning process is performed. It has been decided to provide a super-addition game in which a game can be played so that it can be easily added as a new hold state. That is, in this case, for example, at the first occurrence of the advantageous game state (during transition control from the normal game state to the advantageous game state), the first game privilege using the suspended game (low probability process) in the normal game state is given. Will be able to.

  Regarding the time required for digesting the game according to the winning process, the winning process does not necessarily have to be set to a long time such that the expected value of the number added as a new pending state exceeds 1. May be set as a short time so that it is difficult to add as a new hold state. In other words, when the winning process is digested in the advantageous game state, it is sufficient that the chance of adding a new winning process as a suspended state by the amount of time required for digesting the game according to the winning process occurs even though it is small.

[Technical idea 8]
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A movable receiving port, which is allowed to receive a game medium when a predetermined movable member operates,
When a game medium is received in the movable reception port, a winning process executing means capable of executing a winning process that enables a game to occur with a big hit game with a probability of approximately 100%,
Advantageous game continuation control means for controlling such that an advantageous game state can occur with a predetermined occurrence probability after a big hit game occurs through the award processing by the award processing execution means,
A confirmation process holding means for holding the confirmation process by the confirmation process execution means for a predetermined upper limit number of times until the execution condition is satisfied, and retaining the same.
Every time the winning process held by the winning process holding means is exhausted, there is a special game situation in which a big hit game can occur with a probability of approximately 100% regardless of the game state. When the winning process is digested while the game is in the advantageous game state, the winning process by the winning process execution means is newly suspended for the winning time required to finish the game according to the corresponding winning process. An addition game control means capable of executing a control to provide an addition game that can be played as a state of,
A normally open entrance that is always allowed to receive the game medium,
When a game medium is received in the normally open reception port, a low probability process executing means capable of executing a low probability process in which a big hit game occurs only with a relatively low probability,
Low-precision processing holding means for holding the low-precision processing by the low-precision processing executing means for a predetermined upper limit number of times until the execution condition is satisfied and holding the low-precision processing.
The additional game control means,
When the advantageous game state occurs in the game situation in which the probability process is not in the hold state and the low probability process is in the hold state, the low probability in the hold state is low. As long as a big hit game does not occur through the process, a low probability time required to digest the game according to the low accuracy process in the hold state, and a winning process newly placed in the hold state during the low accuracy time. A control is provided to provide a double-addition game that can be played so that the winning process by the winning process executing means is newly added as a suspended state over two times including the winning time required for digesting the corresponding game. A gaming machine characterized by having possible means.

  According to the above configuration, there is a special game situation in which a big hit game can be generated with a probability of approximately 100% regardless of the game state each time the winning process in the suspended state is exhausted. Since the game will be created, the sense of trust in the game will be greatly enhanced, and the decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

  Moreover, according to the above-mentioned configuration, as the number of winning confirmation processes that are put on hold is reduced and the situation becomes unfavorable for the player, the winning process is newly put on hold when the above winning addition game is provided. Since the number that can be added as is increased in consideration of the above-mentioned predetermined upper limit holding number, it is possible to increase the reversibility from a disadvantageous situation even though the game content of the on-ride game itself is the same. Become.

  Furthermore, in the above configuration, if the favorable gaming state occurs in the gaming situation in which the certainty process is not put on hold and the low certainty process is put on hold, the holding process is performed. Unless a big hit game occurs through the low-accuracy processing in the state, the low-accuracy time required for digesting the game according to the low-accuracy processing in the suspended state and a new suspended state between the low-probability times are set. In addition, we decided to provide a double-added game that spans two times, the winning time required to digest the game according to the winning process. That is, in this case, for example, at the first occurrence of the advantageous game state (during transition control from the normal game state to the advantageous game state), the hold game in the normal game state (low probability processing) and the hold game in the advantageous game state ( It becomes possible to give the first game privilege using two of the (probability processing).

  Regarding the time required for digesting the game according to the winning process, the winning process does not necessarily have to be set to a long time such that the expected value of the number added as a new pending state exceeds 1. May be set as a short time so that it is difficult to add as a new hold state. In other words, when the winning process is digested in the advantageous game state, it is sufficient that the chance of adding a new winning process as a suspended state by the amount of time required for digesting the game according to the winning process occurs even though it is small.

[Technical idea 9]
A gaming machine capable of controlling transition from a normal gaming state to a specific gaming state,
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
An opening / closing member operable between a closed state and an open state is provided, and when the opening / closing member is in the open state, a game medium within a specific rolling area of the game area enters into an internal area. And a winning mouth means to
Advantageous game control means capable of executing game control advantageous to the player when the game medium that has entered the internal area of the winning opening means is received in the specific area,
A movable receiving opening which is arranged so that the game medium that has not entered the internal area of the winning opening means is supplied and which is allowed to receive the game medium when a predetermined movable member is in an operating state,
When in the specific game state, a specific time movable control means for controlling the operation of the predetermined movable member so that the probability of accepting the game medium into the movable receiving opening is higher than that in the normal game state. And
When the specific time open time during which the predetermined movable member is operated when the predetermined movable member operates in the specific game state is "T", the winning opening means The flow-down between the winning opening means and the movable receiving port so that the time required for the game medium that has not entered the inner region of the above to be supplied to the movable receiving port becomes longer than the “T”. A game machine characterized by being provided with a route.

  That is, in the game state where it is easy to enter the movable entrance, normally, the game utilizing the ease of entering the movable entrance is realized, but a more innovative game machine. In the development of, it may be considered to make it difficult for the game ball to enter the movable receiving port even in the game state where the ball can easily enter the movable receiving port.

  In this regard, if the variation time of the special symbol is set to be short when in a game state in which the ball can easily enter the movable reception port, it is difficult to enter the ball into the movable reception port during the variation time. You can However, if certain conditions may be met in the game state where it is easy to enter the movable reception, the jackpot game starts during the period when the winning opening means is opened or after the opening is completed. Since the game ball enters the movable reception in the period until it is called (the period until the so-called time saving function is stopped), the development of more innovative game machines will be adversely affected, and There is concern about a decline.

  Therefore, in the above-described configuration, first, regarding the movable receiving opening, by arranging the movable receiving opening so as to receive the supply of the game medium that has not entered the inner area of the winning opening means, while the winning opening means is open. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the movable receiving port. Then, on this, the winning opening means and the movable receiving means are arranged such that the time required for the game medium that has not entered the inner area of the winning opening means to be supplied to the movable receiving opening is longer than the above "T". By providing a flow-down path to the entrance, the game can be played at the movable entrance during the period from the end of the opening of the winning opening means to the start of the big hit game (the period until the so-called time saving function is stopped). The fact that a ball enters the ball also makes it possible to suitably suppress this.

  That is, in this case, even when the game is controlled to the specific game state, at least from when the winning opening means is opened to when the big hit game is generated based on the fact that the game medium is received in the specific area. It is possible to prevent the game medium from being received in the movable receiving port (until the so-called time saving function is stopped), and to promote the development of a more novel game machine.

[Technical idea 10]
Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a big hit game control means capable of executing control to generate a big hit game,
A special winning opening that allows the acceptance of game media when the big hit game is occurring,
Special standby lottery means for performing a lottery on special standby conditions for a new big hit game while the game medium is flowing down the route to the big winning opening during the period when the big hit game is generated. ,
When the special standby condition is satisfied in the lottery by the special standby lottery means, a special standby control means capable of executing control so that a new jackpot game can be put in a special standby state,
After the jackpot game is over, a special standby releasing means capable of executing control related to the generation of a new jackpot game that has been put in the special standby state.

  According to the above configuration, during the period when the big hit game is generated, a lottery is carried out on a special standby condition for a new big hit game different from this. Then, when the special standby condition is satisfied in the lottery, a control for setting a new big hit game in the special standby state is executed, and after the big hit game is finished, the new big hit in the special standby state. Since the control relating to the occurrence of the game is performed, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

1 Pachinko machine 4 Gaming board 1100 Gaming area 1112 Gaming panel 1120 Table unit 1134 Gate member 1150 Victory port unit 1151 General winning port 1152 First starting port 1153 Second starting port 1154 Large winning port 1155 Role winning port (variable receiving port)
1156 V prize hole (special entrance)
1220 character unit 1220A character winning hole unit 1220B V winning hole unit 1221 character winning hole opening / closing member 1230 front unit base 1230c hole (discharging hole)
1232 V prize solenoid 1232a Plunger 1233 Drive gear member (transmission mechanism)
1233a shaft part 1233b extension piece 1233c drive gear 1233d engagement part 1234 driven gear member (transmission mechanism)
1234a driven gear 1236 rotating body 1236a receiving portion 1238 ball guiding member 1238a peripheral wall portion 1238b upper opening (accommodation opening)
1238c Right port (outlet port)
1238d Ball entrance 1238e Upper guidance part 1238f Right guidance part T Game ball

Claims (1)

Launching means for launching a game medium to the game area,
A movable receiving port, which is allowed to receive a game medium when a predetermined movable member operates,
When a game medium is received in the movable reception port, a winning process executing means capable of executing a winning process that enables a game to occur with a big hit game with a probability of approximately 100%,
Advantageous game continuation control means for controlling such that an advantageous game state can occur with a predetermined occurrence probability after a big hit game occurs through the award processing by the award processing execution means,
A confirmation process holding means for holding the confirmation process by the confirmation process execution means for a predetermined upper limit number of times until the execution condition is satisfied, and retaining the same.
Every time the winning process held by the winning process holding means is exhausted, there is a special game situation in which a big hit game can occur with a probability of approximately 100% regardless of the game state. When the winning process is digested while the game is in the advantageous game state, the winning process by the winning process execution means is newly suspended for the time required to finish the game according to the corresponding winning process. An add-on game control means capable of executing control to provide an add-on game that can be added as a state,
A normally open entrance that is always allowed to receive the game medium,
When a game medium is received in the normally open reception port, a low probability process executing means capable of executing a low probability process in which a big hit game occurs only with a relatively low probability,
Low-precision processing holding means for holding the low-precision processing by the low-precision processing executing means for a predetermined upper limit number of times until the execution condition is satisfied and holding the low-precision processing.
The additional game control means,
If the advantageous game state occurs under the game situation in which the winning process is not put on hold and the low certainty process is put on hold, a game according to the winning process is played. Having a means capable of executing a control to provide a super-addition game in which the winning process by the winning process executing means is newly added as a pending state in a time longer than the time required for digestion A gaming machine characterized by.